LA500

AC Micro Drive
Technical Manual
Type CIPR-LA50Cxxxxxxxx
Models 200 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 4.0 to 18.5 kW
400 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 4.0 to 22 kW

PDF
 This Page Intentionally Blank

2 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 Table of Contents
i. Preface and General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
i.1 Using the Product Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Explanation of Signal Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Warning Label Content and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
i.2 Legal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Exclusion of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
About Registered Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
i.3 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1. Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2 Features and Advantages of Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2. Mechanical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.3 Installation Position and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4 Moving the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5 Drive Models and Drive Watt Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Drive Watt Loss (without Built-in EMC Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Drive Watt Loss (with Built-in EMC Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.6 Removing/Reattaching Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Removing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reattaching the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.7 Remove and Reattach the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removing the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reattaching the Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.8 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3. Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3 Main Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Motor and Main Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Wire Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Wire to the Main Circuit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 3

 3.5 Control Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Control Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.6 Control I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Set Sinking Mode/Sourcing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Set the Output Signal for the MFAO Terminal AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.8 Braking Resistor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Install a Braking Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Dynamic Braking Option Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.9 Drive Wiring Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installing a Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installing a Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Residual Current Monitor/Device
(RCM/RCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.10 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Install an Electromagnetic Contactor (MC) at the Input Side of the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay on the Drive Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.11 Improve the Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connect an AC Reactor or a DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.12 Prevent Switching Surge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.13 Decrease Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connect a Noise Filter to the Input Side (Primary Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.14 Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4. Startup Procedure and Test Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.2 Keypad Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.3 Set up the Drive with User-Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Verify and Set the Changed Parameters (Verify Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
How to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.5 Start-up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.6 Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Types of Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Before Auto-Tuning the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Auto-Tuning Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Input Data for Motor Auto-Tuning: T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Up and Down Commands And Speed Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Multi-Function Terminal Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Accel/Decel Ramp and Jerk Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Inspection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Brake Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.8 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.9 Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Show the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 Check Modified Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Set and View Quick Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Save a Backup of Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Write Backed-up Parameters to the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Delete Parameters Backed Up to the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.10 Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Precautions before Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.11 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Open Loop Vector Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5. Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.2 European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
EMC Directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.3 Safe Disable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Safe Disable Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Connect Safe Disable Input Contacts to Multiple Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Enabling and Disabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Validating the Safe Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.4 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with one Motor Contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.5 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with no Motor Contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6. Network Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Configure Master/Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Communication with the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MEMOBUS/Modbus Drive Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Examples of Messages for Commands/Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Self-Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Communications Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

7. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.4 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.6 Parameter Setting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fault and Power Loss Occur at the Same Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fault Occurs Without Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fault Reset Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 5

 The Parameter Settings Will Not Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
The Motor Does Not Rotate after You Enter a Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
The Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down Command . . . . . . . . . . 198
The Motor Rotates in Only One Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
The Motor Is Too Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
The Correct Auto-Tuning Mode Is Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
The Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel/Decel Time Is Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
There Is Too Much Motor Oscillation and the Rotation Is Irregular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected When Dynamic Braking Is Enabled. . . . . . . 200
There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables when You Energize the
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) Trips During Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from Connected Machinery. . . . . . . 200
Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
The Starting Torque Is Not Sufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
The Output Frequency Is Lower Than the Frequency Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
The Motor Will Not Restart after a Loss of Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

8. Periodic Inspection and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

8.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Recommended Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Recommended Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8.4 Replace Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Replace the Cooling Fan, Drive Models 2018, 2033 - 2075, 4009, 4024 - 4045 . . . . . . . 210
Replace the Cooling Fan, Drive Models 2025, 4015, 4018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.5 Replace the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Remove the Control Circuit Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Put the Control Circuit Board in a New Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8.6 Storage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9. Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
9.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
9.2 Disposal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
9.3 WEEE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.1 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
10.2 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.3 Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
10.4 Drive Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Carrier Frequency Settings and Rated Current Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.5 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IP20/UL Open Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.6 Peripheral Devices and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11. Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
11.1 How to Read the Parameter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
11.2 Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
11.3 A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
A1: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

6 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 A2: User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
11.4 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
b1: Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
b4: Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
b6: Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
11.5 C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
C1: Accel & Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
C2: Jerk Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
C3: Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
C4: Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
C6: Duty & Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
11.6 d: Reference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
d1: Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
11.7 E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
E2: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
11.8 H: Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
H1: Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
H2: Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
H4: Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
H5: Modbus Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
11.9 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
L1: Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
L2: Power Loss Ride Through (Undervoltage Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
L3: Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
L4: Speed Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
L5: Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
L6: Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
L7: Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
L8: Drive Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
11.10 n: Special Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
n6: Online Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
o1: Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
o2: Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
o3: Copy Keypad Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
o5: Log Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
11.12 S: Elevator Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
S1: Brake Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
S4: Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
S6: Error Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
11.13 T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
11.14 U: Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
U1: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
U2: Fault Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
U3: Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
U4: Maintenance Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
U6: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
11.15 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control Method
Selection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 7

 11.16 Defaults by Drive Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Three-Phase 200 V Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Three-Phase 400 V Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

12. Parameter Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

12.1 A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
A1: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
A2: User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
12.2 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
b1: Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
b4: Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
b6: Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
12.3 C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
C1: Accel & Decel Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
C2: Jerk Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
C3: Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
C4: Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
C6: Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
12.4 d: References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
d1: Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.5 E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
E2: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
H1: Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
MFDI Setting Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
H2: Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
MFDO Setting Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
H4: Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
H5: Memobus/Modbus Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
12.7 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
L1: Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
L2: Power Loss Ride Through (Undervoltage Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
L3: Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
L4: Speed Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
L5: Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
L6: Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
L7: Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
L8: Drive Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
12.8 n: Special Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
n6: Online Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
o1: Keypad Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
o2: Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
o3: Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
o4: Maintenance Mon Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
o5: Log Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
12.10 S: Elevator Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
S1: Brake Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
S4: Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
S6: Faults for Elevator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
12.11 T: Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

8 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 9

10 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual
 i
Preface and General Precautions
This chapter gives information about important safety precautions for the use of this product.
Failure to obey these precautions can cause serious injury or death, or damage to the product or
related devices and systems. Yaskawa must not be held responsible for any injury or equipment
damage as a result of the failure to observe these precautions and instructions.

i.1 Using the Product Safely........................................................................................ 12

i.2 Legal Information ..................................................................................................... 16
i.3 Glossary...................................................................................................................... 17

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 11

i.1 Using the Product Safely

i.1 Using the Product Safely

These instructions contain the information necessary to use the product correctly. Read and understand the safety
information and precautions before you start to use the product.

◆ Explanation of Signal Words

Read and understand this manual before you install, operate, or do maintenance on the drive. Install the drive as
specified by this manual and local codes.
The symbols in this section identify safety messages in this manual. If you do not obey these safety messages, the
hazards can cause serious injury, death, or damage to the products and related equipment and systems. These
identifier words categorize and emphasize important safety precautions in these instructions.

DANGER
This signal word identifies a hazard that will cause serious injury or death if you do not prevent
it.

WARNING
This signal word identifies a hazard that can cause death or serious injuries if you do not
prevent it.

CAUTION
This signal word identifies a hazard that can cause minor or moderate injuries if you do not
prevent it.

NOTICE
This signal word identifies a property damage message that is not related to personal injury.

◆ Section Safety
• Some figures in the instructions include options and drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly
show the inside of the drive. Replace covers and shields before operation. Use options and drives only as
specified by the instructions.
• The figures in this manual are examples only. All figures do not apply to all products included in this manual.
• The manufacturer can change the products, specifications, and content of the instructions without notice to
make the product and/or the instructions better.
• If you damage or lose these instructions, contact a representative or the nearest sales office of the manufacturer.
You can find the contact information on the rear cover of the manual, and tell them the document number to
order new copies. You can also download the manual from the manufacturer’s website.

DANGER
Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual.
If you ignore the safety messages in this manual, it will cause serious injury or death. The manufacturer is not
responsible for injuries or damage to equipment.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

12 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 i.1 Using the Product Safely

WARNING
Crush Hazard
Test the system to make sure that the drive operates safely after you wire the drive and set
parameters.
If you do not test the system, it can cause damage to equipment or serious injury or death.
Sudden Movement Hazard
Before you do a test run, make sure that the setting values for virtual input and output function
parameters are correct. Virtual input and output functions can have different default settings
and operation than wired input and output functions.
Incorrect function settings can cause serious injury or death.
Remove all personnel and objects from the area around the drive, motor, and machine and
attach covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before you energize the drive.
If personnel are too close or if there are missing parts, it can cause serious injury or death.
Examine the I/O signals and internal sequence with the engineer who made the DriveWorksEZ
program before you operate the drive.
If you do not know how the drive will operate, it can cause serious injury or death. When you use DriveWorksEZ
to make custom programming, the drive I/O terminal functions change from factory settings and the drive will
not operate as written in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized.
If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive or
operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and
make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to
find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa
before you energize the drive or peripheral devices.
If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or
death.
Damage to Equipment
Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified
range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate.
Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.
Fire Hazard
Install sufficient branch circuit short circuit protection as specified by applicable codes and this
manual. The drive is suited for circuits that supply not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class), 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
Incorrect branch circuit short circuit protection can cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive.
If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 13

i.1 Using the Product Safely

NOTICE
Use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation and windings
applicable for use with an AC drive.
If the motor does not have the correct insulation, it can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation
deterioration.
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not do a withstand voltage test or use a megohmmeter or megger insulation tester on the
drive.
These tests can cause damage to the drive.
Do not operate a drive or connected equipment that has damaged or missing parts.
You can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.
Do not use steam or other disinfectants to fumigate wood for packaging the drive. Use
alternative methods, for example heat treatment, before you package the components.
Gas from wood packaging fumigated with halogen disinfectants, for example fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
or DOP gas (phthalic acid ester), can cause damage to the drive.

◆ Warning Label Content and Location

The drive warning label is in the location shown in Figure i.1. Use the drive as specified by this information.
Replace unreadable or missing labels.

A - Warning label “Hot surface” C - Warning label “Risk of electric shock”

B - Nameplate D - Warning label “Application”

Figure i.1 Warning Label Content and Location

The labels show the following content:

Figure i.2 Warning Label “Hot surface”

Figure i.3 Warning Label “Risk of electric shock”

14 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 i.1 Using the Product Safely

The following table shows the explanation of the icons used on the front cover of the drive.
Icon Explanation

Refer to the instructions manual for details on warnings and other safety related information.

Electric Shock Hazard. Disconnect the device from main power supply and wait 5 minutes before you touch the drive or parts of it.

DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to
the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays
charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage
decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the
drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

Hot surfaces. Risk of burn.

CAUTION
Burn Hazard
Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then make sure that
the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans.
If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.

Figure i.4 Warning Label “Application”

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 15

i.2 Legal Information

i.2 Legal Information

◆ Exclusion of Liability
• This product is not designed and manufactured for use in life-support machines or systems.
• Contact a Yaskawa representative or your Yaskawa sales representative if you are considering the application of
this product for special purposes, such as machines or systems used for passenger cars, medicine, airplanes and
aerospace, nuclear power, electric power, or undersea relaying.

WARNING
Injury to Personnel
When you use this product in applications where its failure could cause the loss of human life, a
serious accident, or physical injury, you must install applicable safety devices.
If you do not correctly install safety devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

◆ About Registered Trademarks

• All company names and product names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.

16 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 i.3 Glossary

i.3 Glossary
Phrase Definition

Drive YASKAWA AC Drive LA500

EDM External Device Monitor

HD Heavy Duty

MFAO Multi-Function Analog Output

MFDI Multi-Function Digital Input

MFDO Multi-Function Digital Output

OLV Open Loop Vector Control

SIL Safety Integrity Level

V/f V/f Control

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 17

i.3 Glossary

18 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 1
Receiving
This chapter gives information about the different drive models and features, and how to
examine the drive when you receive it.

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check................................................................. 20

1.2 Features and Advantages of Control Methods................................................. 23

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 19

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

◆ When Receiving the Drive
Please examine these items after you receive the drive:
• Examine the drive for damage. Immediately contact the shipping company if the drive is damaged. The
Yaskawa warranty does not cover damage from shipping.
• Examine the drive model number to make sure that you received the correct model. Examine the model number
in the “MODEL” section of the drive nameplate to make sure that you received the correct model.
• If you received the incorrect product or a product with a defect, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

◆ Nameplate

A - Weight G- Product number

B - Drive software version H- Serial number
C - The address of the head office of Yaskawa I- Output specifications
Electric Corporation J- Input specifications
D - Accreditation standards K- Drive model
E - Ambient temperature setting
F - Enclosure protection design

Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example

◆ Model Number
Use the information in Figure 1.2 and Table 1.1 to read the drive model numbers.

Figure 1.2 Drive Model

20 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

Table 1.1 Model Number Details

No. Description

1 Drive

2 Product series

3 Region code
• C: Europe

4 Input power supply voltage

• 2: Three-Phase AC 200 V Class
• 4: Three-Phase AC 400 V Class

5 Rated Output Current

6 EMC noise filter

• A: No internal EMC filter
• E: Built-in EMC Filter

7 Enclosure protection design

• B: IP20/UL Open Type
• F: IP20/UL Type 1

8 Environmental specification

9 Design revision order

10 Control circuit board

11 Option

12 A: Standard

13 A: Standard

14 Keypad

15 Special applications

◆ Rated Output Current

The following tables give the rated output current values.
Note:
• Rated output current values are applicable for drives that operate at standard specifications.

Receiving
• Derate the output current in applications that:
–Increase the carrier frequency
–Have high ambient temperature
–Install drives side-by-side 1
Table 1.2 Three-Phase AC 200 V Class
Heavy Duty Rating (HD)
[C6-01 = 0]
Model (Default)

Maximum Applicable Motor Output Rated Output Current

kW (HP) A

2018 4.0 (5) 17.6

2025 5.5 (7.5) 25.0

2033 7.5 (10) 33.0

2047 11.0 (15) 47.0

2060 15.0 (20) 60.0

2075 18.5 (25) 75.0

Table 1.3 Three-Phase AC 400 V Class

Heavy Duty Rating (HD)
[C6-01 = 0]
Model (Default)

Maximum Applicable Motor Output Rated Output Current

kW (HP) A

4009 4.0 (5) 9.2

4015 5.5 (10) 14.8

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 21

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

Heavy Duty Rating (HD)

[C6-01 = 0]
Model (Default)

Maximum Applicable Motor Output Rated Output Current

kW (HP) A

4018 7.5 (10) 18.0

4024 11.0 (15) 24.0

4031 15.0 (20) 31.0

4039 18.5 (25) 39.0

4045 22.0 (30) 45.0

22 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 1.2 Features and Advantages of Control Methods

1.2 Features and Advantages of Control Methods

This drive has 2 available control methods from which you can select for different applications.

◆ V/f Control Method

Table 1.4 Features and Advantages of V/f Control
Open Loop V/f Control
Control Method Selection Notes
(V/f)

Controlled Motor Induction Motor -

Parameter Settings A1-02 = 0 -

Basic Control V/f -

Maximum Output Frequency 120 Hz -

This is the range of variable control.

Speed Control Range 1:40 When you connect and operate motors in this mode, think about the
increase in motor temperature.

This is the motor torque that the drive can supply at low speed during
start-up and the related output frequency (rotation speed).
Starting Torque 150% / 3 Hz
You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is
necessary at low speed.

Rotational and Line-to-Line Resistance (usually not

Auto-Tuning *1 Automatically tunes electrical motor parameters.
necessary)

Controls maximum motor torque to prevent damage to machines and

Torque Limits No
loads.

Automatic Energy-saving Control *1 Yes Automatically adjusts the voltage that the drive applies to the motor to
maximize motor efficiency for small and large loads.

*1 When you can decouple the motor and machine for a test run, use Rotational Auto-Tuning. You must make adjustments to the control
in the range where there is no vibration in the machine after Rotational Auto-Tuning.
•

◆ Open Loop Vector Control Method

Table 1.5 Features and Advantages of OLV Control

Receiving
Open Loop Vector
Control Method Selection Notes
(OLV)

Controlled Motor Induction Motor -

A1-02 = 2
1
Parameter Settings -
(Default)

Basic Control Open Loop Current Vector Control -

Maximum Output Frequency 120 Hz -

This is the range of variable control.

Speed Control Range 1:100 When you connect and operate motors in this mode, think about the
increase in motor temperature.

This is the motor torque that the drive can supply at low speed during
start-up and the related output frequency (rotation speed).
Starting Torque 150% / 1 Hz *1
You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is
necessary at low speed.

Auto-Tuning *2 Rotational, Stationary, and Line-to-Line Resistance Automatically tunes electrical motor parameters.

Controls maximum motor torque to prevent damage to machines and

Torque Limits *2 Yes
loads.

Automatic Energy-saving Control *2 Yes Automatically adjusts the voltage that the drive applies to the motor to
maximize motor efficiency for small and large loads.

*1 Select the drive capacity accordingly.

*2 When you can decouple the motor and machine for a test run, use Rotational Auto-Tuning. You must make adjustments to the control
in the range where there is no vibration in the machine after Rotational Auto-Tuning.
•

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 23

1.2 Features and Advantages of Control Methods

24 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2
Mechanical Installation
This chapter gives information about the correct environment and clearances to install the drive.

2.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 26

2.2 Installation Environment ........................................................................................ 27
2.3 Installation Position and Clearances .................................................................. 28
2.4 Moving the Drive....................................................................................................... 31
2.5 Drive Models and Drive Watt Loss ....................................................................... 32
2.6 Removing/Reattaching Covers............................................................................. 34
2.7 Remove and Reattach the Keypad....................................................................... 36
2.8 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device............................... 37

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 25

2.1 Section Safety

2.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Fire Hazard
Do not put flammable or combustible materials on top of the drive and do not install the drive
near flammable or combustible materials. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible
material.
Flammable and combustible materials can start a fire and cause serious injury or death.
When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or cooler to decrease the
temperature around the drive. Make sure that the intake air temperature to the drive is 50 °C (122
°F) or less for IP20/UL Open Type drives, and 40 °C (104 °F) or less for IP20/UL Type 1 drives.
If the air temperature is too hot, the drive can become too hot and cause a fire and serious injury or death.

CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive.
If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

NOTICE
Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive
during drive installation. Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the
temporary cover before start-up.
Unwanted objects inside of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Install vibration-proof rubber on the base of the motor or use the frequency jump function in the
drive to prevent specific frequencies that vibrate the motor.
Motor or system resonant vibration can occur in fixed speed machines that are converted to variable speed. Too
much vibration can cause damage to equipment.
You can use the drive with an explosion-proof motor, but the drive is not explosion-proof. Install
the drive only in the environment shown on the nameplate.
If you install the drive in a dangerous environment, it can cause damage to the drive.
Do not lift the drive with the covers removed.
If the drive does not have covers, you can easily cause damage to the internal parts of the drive.

26 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2.2 Installation Environment

2.2 Installation Environment

The installation environment is important for the lifespan of the product and to make sure that the drive
performance is correct. Make sure that the installation environment agrees with these specifications.
Environment Conditions

Area of Use Indoors

Power Supply Overvoltage Category III (IEC60664)

IP20/UL Open Type: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)

Ambient Temperature IP20/UL Type 1: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
Setting • When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range.
• Do not let the drive freeze.

95%RH or less
Humidity
Do not let condensation form on the drive.

Storage Temperature -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) (short-term temperature during transportation)

Pollution degree 2 or less (IEC 60664-1)

Install the drive in an area without:
• Oil mist, corrosive or flammable gas, or dust
• Metal powder, oil, water, or other unwanted materials
Surrounding Area • Radioactive or flammable materials.
• Harmful gas or fluids
• Salt
• Direct sunlight
Keep wood and other flammable materials away from the drive.

1000 m (3281 ft) Maximum

Note:
Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 4000 m (3281 ft to 13123 ft).
Altitude It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:
• Installing the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
• Installing the drive between 2000 m to 4000 m (6562 ft to 13123 ft) and grounding the neutral point on the power supply.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative when not grounding the neutral point.

• 10 Hz to 20 Hz: 1 G (9.8 m/s2, 32.15 ft/s2)

Vibration
• 20 Hz to 55 Hz: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2)

Mechanical Installation
Install the drive vertically or horizontally for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.
Installation Orientation
Refer to the drive Technical Manual for more information.

NOTICE: Do not put drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive. Shield the drive from electrical
interference if components must be near the drive. Components near the drive can cause incorrect drive operation from
electrical interference.
NOTICE: Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive during drive installation.
Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before start-up. Unwanted objects inside
of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
2

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 27

2.3 Installation Position and Clearances

2.3 Installation Position and Clearances

Install the drive as shown in Figure 2.1 for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.

A - Vertical installation C - Rotated installation

B - Horizontal installation

Figure 2.1 Installation Orientation

◆ Install Single Drive

Use the clearances specified in Figure 2.2 to install the drive. Make sure that there is sufficient space for wiring
and airflow.

A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum C - 100 mm (3.94 in) minimum above and below

B - 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum on each side D - Airflow direction

Figure 2.2 Installation Clearances for One Drive

◆ Install the Drive Horizontally

When you install drives horizontally, set L8-12 = 40 [Ambient Temperature Setting = 40 °C] and L8-35 = 1
[Installation Method Selection = Side-by-Side Mounting]. Use the clearances specified in Figure 2.4 and Figure
2.5 to install the drive. Make sure that there is sufficient space for wiring and airflow. To install the drive model
4009 horizontally, install an external cooling fan. Refer to Table 2.1 for more information about the external
cooling fan.

28 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2.3 Installation Position and Clearances

A - Airflow direction

Figure 2.3 Airflow Direction of Horizontal installation

A- 50 mm (2 in) minimum E - External cooling fan

B- 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum on each side F - 30 mm (1.18 in) between the drive and the
C- 100 mm (3.94 in) minimum below external cooling fan
D- Airflow direction G - 120 mm (4.72 in) minimum between the external

Mechanical Installation
cooling fan and the enclosure panel
H - Heatsink height

Figure 2.4 Installation Clearances for Horizontal Installation: 2018, and 4009

A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum C - 100 mm (3.94 in) minimum above and below

B - 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum on each side D - Airflow direction

Figure 2.5 Installation Clearances for Horizontal Installation: 2025 - 2075, and 4015 - 4045
Table 2.1 Specifications of External Cooling Fan for Horizontal (Floor) Installation
Airflow Static Pressure
Model
(m3/min) (Pa)

2018
1.11 minimum 244 minimum
4009

2025 - 2075
External cooling fan is not necessary
4015 - 4045

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 29

2.3 Installation Position and Clearances

◆ Install Drives Side-by-Side

When you install drives side-by-side, set to L8-35 = 1 [Installation Method Selection = Side-by-Side Mounting].
Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 228 and set derating depending on ambient
temperature.

A - 50 mm (1.97 in) minimum C - 100 mm (3.94 in) minimum above and below
B - 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum on each side

Figure 2.6 Installation Clearances for More than One Drive (Side-by-Side)
Note:
Align the tops of drives that have different dimensions to help when you replace cooling fans.

30 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2.4 Moving the Drive

2.4 Moving the Drive

When you move and install this product, make sure that you obey local laws and regulations.
CAUTION! Crush Hazard. Do not hold the drive by the keypad or front cover. Tighten the screws correctly when you move the
drive. If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

Mechanical Installation
2

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 31

2.5 Drive Models and Drive Watt Loss

2.5 Drive Models and Drive Watt Loss

◆ Drive Watt Loss (without Built-in EMC Filter)
■ Three-Phase 200 V Class
Table 2.2 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 2 kHz)
Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

2018 17.6 2 36 83 119

2025 25.0 2 45 163 208

2033 33.0 2 55 200 255

2047 47.0 2 77 269 346

2060 60.0 2 108 411 519

2075 75.0 2 132 439 571

Table 2.3 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 8 kHz [Default Setting])

Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

2018 17.6 8 40 108 148

2025 25.0 8 49 187 236

2033 33.0 8 60 232 292

2047 47.0 8 85 318 403

2060 60.0 8 119 473 592

2075 75.0 8 148 525 673

■ Three-Phase 400 V Class

Table 2.4 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 2 kHz)
Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

4009A 9.2 2 27 60 87

4015A 14.8 2 48 126 174

4018A 18 2 53 152 205

4024A 24 2 68 191 259

4031A 31 2 81 256 337

4039A 39 2 109 338 447

4045A 45 2 114 328 442

Table 2.5 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 8 kHz [Default Setting])

Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

4009A 9.2 8 32 85 117

4015A 14.8 8 55 166 221

4018A 18 8 61 200 261

4024A 24 8 79 255 334

4031A 31 8 95 338 433

4039A 39 8 127 442 569

4045A 45 8 135 446 581

32 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2.5 Drive Models and Drive Watt Loss

◆ Drive Watt Loss (with Built-in EMC Filter)

■ Three-Phase 200 V Class
Table 2.6 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 2 kHz)
Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

2018E 17.6 2 37 83 120

2025E 25.0 2 46 163 209

2033E 33.0 2 56 200 256

2047E 47.0 2 78 269 347

2060E 60.0 2 109 411 520

2075E 75.0 2 133 439 572

Table 2.7 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 8 kHz [Default Setting])

Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

2018E 21 8 41 108 149

2025E 30 8 50 187 237

2033E 42 8 61 232 293

2047E 56 8 86 318 404

2060E 70 8 120 473 593

2075E 82 8 149 525 674

■ Three-Phase 400 V Class

Table 2.8 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 2 kHz)
Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model

Mechanical Installation
A kHz W W W

4009E 9.2 2 29 60 89

4015E 14.8 2 52 126 178

4018E 18 2 57 152 209

4024E 24 2 73 191 264

4031E 31 2 89 256 345

4039E 39 2 119 338 457 2

4045E 45 2 128 328 456

Table 2.9 Drive Watt Loss (HD, Fc = 8 kHz [Default Setting])

Rated Output Current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
A kHz W W W

4009E 9.2 8 34 85 119

4015E 14.8 8 59 166 225

4018E 18 8 65 200 265

4024E 24 8 84 255 339

4031E 31 8 103 338 441

4039E 39 8 137 442 579

4045E 45 8 149 446 595

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 33

2.6 Removing/Reattaching Covers

2.6 Removing/Reattaching Covers

DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

◆ Removing the Front Cover

1. Unlock the front cover of the drive.
Use a slotted screwdriver with a tip width of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) or less and a thickness of 0.4 mm (0.02 in) or
less.

A - Front cover lock

Figure 2.7 Unlocking
2. Pull down, then pull away from the drive to remove the front cover.

Figure 2.8 Remove the Front Cover

◆ Reattaching the Front Cover

1. Reverse the steps to reattach the cover.
Note:
Make sure that you do not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.

Figure 2.9 Reattach the Front Cover

34 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2.6 Removing/Reattaching Covers

2. Lock the front cover of the drive.

Use a slotted screwdriver with a tip width of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) or less and a thickness of 0.4 mm (0.02 in) or
less.

A - Front cover lock

Figure 2.10 Locking the Front Cover

Mechanical Installation
2

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 35

2.7 Remove and Reattach the Keypad

2.7 Remove and Reattach the Keypad

◆ Removing the Keypad
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Push on the tab on the right side of the keypad, then pull the keypad forward to remove it from the drive.

Figure 2.11 Remove the Keypad

◆ Reattaching the Keypad

1. Push in the keypad from the front until the hooks click into place.

Figure 2.12 Reattach the Keypad

2. Attach the front cover.

36 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 2.8 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device

2.8 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device

◆ Operate the Keypad from a Remote Location
You can remove the keypad from the drive and connect it to a remote control extension cable 3 m (9.8 ft) long to
make operation easier when you cannot access the drive. It is not necessary to open or close the panel door to
operate a drive that is in a control panel. To order optional accessories, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Name Option Model Intended Use

WV001: 1 m (3.3 ft) To connect the keypad and drive.

Keypad Remote Cable
WV003: 3 m (9.8 ft) This option is an RJ-45, 8-pin straight-through UTP CAT5e cable.

Installation Support Set A 900-192-933-001 To attach the keypad to the control panel. This option uses screws.

To attach the keypad to the control panel. This option uses nut clamps.
Installation Support Set B 900-192-933-002
Use this option when weld studs are located in the control panel.

Mechanical Installation
2

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 37

2.8 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device

38 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3
Electrical Installation
This chapter gives how to wire the control circuit terminals, motor, and power supply of the
drive.

3.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 40

3.2 Standard Connection Diagram ............................................................................. 42
3.3 Main Circuit Wiring .................................................................................................. 45
3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure ................................................ 52
3.5 Control Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................. 56
3.6 Control I/O Connections ......................................................................................... 62
3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC ...................................................................................... 64
3.8 Braking Resistor Installation................................................................................. 65
3.9 Drive Wiring Protection .......................................................................................... 67
3.10 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection ...................................................... 68
3.11 Improve the Power Factor ...................................................................................... 70
3.12 Prevent Switching Surge........................................................................................ 71
3.13 Decrease Noise ......................................................................................................... 72
3.14 Wiring Checklist ....................................................................................................... 73

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 39

3.1 Section Safety

3.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate the drive when covers are missing. Replace covers and shields before you
operate the drive. Use the drive only as specified by the instructions.
Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the
drive. If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Ground the neutral point on the power supply of drive models BxxxE, 2xxxE, and 4xxxE to
comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter or if there is high resistance
grounding.
If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local safety
regulations. The EN 61800-5-1:2007 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to
automatically de-energize when the protective ground wire disconnects. If you turn on the
internal EMC filter, the leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA. Use the closed-
loop crimp terminal to connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional
area of 10 mm2 (copper wire).
If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death.
When there is a DC component in the protective earthing conductor, the drive can cause a
residual current. When a residual current operated protective or monitoring device prevents
direct or indirect contact, always use a type B Residual Current Monitor/Residual Current
Device (RCM/RCD) as specified by IEC/EN 60755.
If you do not use the correct RCM/RCD, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing
and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings.
Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized.
If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect
connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.
Tighten screws at an angle in the specified range shown in this manual.
If you tighten the screws at an angle not in the specified range, you can have loose connections that can cause
damage to the terminal block or start a fire and cause serious injury or death.

40 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Damage to Equipment
Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified
range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate.
Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.
Fire Hazard
When you install a dynamic braking option, wire the components as specified by the wiring
diagrams.
Incorrect wiring can cause damage to braking components or serious injury or death.

NOTICE
Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive
during drive installation. Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the
temporary cover before start-up.
Unwanted objects inside of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Select a motor that is compatible with the load torque and speed range. When 100% continuous
torque is necessary at low speed, use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor. When you
use a standard fan-cooled motor, decrease the motor torque in the low-speed range.
If you operate a standard fan-cooled motor at low speed and high torque, it will decrease the cooling effects and
can cause heat damage.
Obey the speed range specification of the motor as specified by the manufacturer. When you
must operate the motor outside of its specifications, contact the motor manufacturer.
If you continuously operate oil-lubricated motors outside of the manufacturer specifications, it can cause damage
to the motor bearings.
When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is longer than 100 m (328 ft),

Electrical Installation
make sure that the motor insulation voltage is sufficient or use an inverter-duty motor or vector-
duty motor with reinforced insulation.
Motor winding and insulation failure can occur.
Before you connect a dynamic braking option to the drive, make sure that qualified personnel
read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual
(TOBPC72060001).
3
If you do not read and obey the manual or if personnel are not qualified, it can cause damage to the drive and
braking circuit.
Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral
devices.
Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive.
Note:
• Torque characteristics are different than when you operate the motor directly from line power. Make sure that you understand the load
torque characteristics for the application.
• The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than the rated input current of standard motors. Carefully select the correct
drive capacity. When the distance between the motor and drive is long, use a wire that can connect the motor to the drive without a
reduction in motor torque.
• Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the
drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 41

3.2 Standard Connection Diagram

3.2 Standard Connection Diagram

◆ Safety
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. De-energize the drive and wait 5 minutes minimum until the Charge LED turns off.
Remove the front cover and terminal cover to do work on wiring, circuit boards, and other parts. Use terminals for their correct
function only. Incorrect wiring, incorrect ground connections, and incorrect repair of protective covers can cause death or
serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Correctly ground the drive before you turn on the EMC filter switch. If you touch electrical
equipment that is not grounded, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use the terminals for the drive only for their intended purpose. Refer to the technical
manual for more information about the I/O terminals. Wiring and grounding incorrectly or modifying the cover may damage the
equipment or cause injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Set the MFDI parameters before you close control circuit switches. Incorrect Run/Stop
circuit sequence settings can cause serious injury or death from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire the start/stop and safety circuits before you energize the drive. If you
momentarily close a digital input terminal, it can start a drive that is programmed for 3-Wire control and cause serious injury or
death from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use a 3-Wire sequence, set A1-03 = 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 3-Wire
Initialization] and make sure that b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard Existing RUN Command] (default). If you
do not correctly set the drive parameters for 3-Wire operation before you energize the drive, the motor can suddenly rotate
when you energize the drive.
WARNING! Do not connect the AC control circuit ground to the drive enclosure. Failure to obey can cause incorrect control
circuit operation.
NOTICE: Fire Hazard. Install sufficient branch circuit short circuit protection as specified by applicable codes and this manual.
The drive is suitable for circuits that supply not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class),
480 Vac maximum (400 V Class). Incorrect branch circuit short circuit protection can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is longer than 100 m (328 ft), make sure that the
motor insulation voltage is sufficient or use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation. Motor winding
and insulation failure can occur.

◆ Drive Connection Diagram

Wire the drive as specified by Figure 3.1.

42 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.2 Standard Connection Diagram

Electrical Installation
3

Figure 3.1 Standard Drive Connection Diagram

*1 Set the wiring sequence to de-energize the drive with the MFDO. If the drive outputs a fault during fault restart when you use the
fault restart function, set L5-02 = 1 [Fault Contact at Restart Select = Always Active] to de-energize the drive. Be careful when you
use a cut-off sequence. The default setting for L5-02 is 0 [Active Only when Not Restarting].
*2 When you install a DC reactor, you must remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2.
*3 When you use a regenerative converter, regenerative unit, braking resistor, or braking resistor unit, set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention
during Decel = Disabled]. If L3-04 = 1 [General Purpose], the drive could possibly not stop in the specified deceleration time.
*4 Cooling fan wiring is not necessary for self-cooling motors.
*5 Connect peripheral options to terminals -, +1, +2, B1, and B2.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Only connect factory-recommended devices or circuits to drive terminals B1, B2, -, +1, and +2.
Do not connect an AC power supply lines to these terminals. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious
injury or death from fire.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 43

3.2 Standard Connection Diagram

*6 Connect a 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF.
*7 To set the MFDI power supply (Sinking/Sourcing Mode or internal/external power supply), install or remove a jumper between
terminals SC-SP or SC-SN depending on the application.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• Sinking Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SP.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• Sourcing Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SN.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• External power supply: Remove the jumper from the MFDI terminals. It is not necessary to close the circuit between terminals SC-
SP and terminals SC-SN.
*8 The maximum output current capacity for terminal +V on the control circuit is 20 mA.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not install a jumper between terminals +V and AC. A closed circuit between these
terminals will cause damage to the drive.
*9 DIP switch S1 sets terminal A2 for voltage or current input. The default setting for S1 is current input (“I” side).
*10 Do not ground the control circuit terminals AC or connect them to the drive chassis.
NOTICE: Do not ground the AC control circuit terminals and only connect the AC terminals according to the product
instructions. If you connect the AC terminals incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
*11 Connect the positive lead from an external 24 Vdc power supply to terminal PS and the negative lead to terminal AC.
NOTICE: Connect terminals PS and AC correctly for the 24 V power supply. If you connect the wires to the incorrect
terminals, it will cause damage to the drive.
*12 Use only Sourcing Mode for Safe Disable input.
*13 Use multi-function analog monitor outputs with analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. Do not use monitor
outputs with feedback-type signal devices.
*14 Disconnect the wire jumpers between H1 and HC and H2 and HC to use the Safe Disable input.

44 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

This section gives information about the functions, specifications, and procedures necessary to safely and
correctly wire the main circuit in the drive.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes. If
you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.
Note:
Soldered wire connections can become loose over time and cause unsatisfactory drive performance.

◆ Motor and Main Circuit Connections

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, L/L1, N/L2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2, B1, or
B2 to the ground terminal. If you connect these terminals to earth ground, it can cause damage to the drive or serious injury or
death.

Electrical Installation
Note: 3
The locations of terminals are different for different drive models.

A - DC bus terminal D - Three-Phase Motor

B - Connect to the drive ground terminal. E - Use terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 for three-
C - Ground the motor case. phase power supply input. Use terminals L/L1
and N/L2 for single-phase power supply input.
F - Input Protection (Fuses or Circuit Breakers)

Figure 3.2 Wiring the Main Circuit and Motor

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 45

3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

◆ Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block

■ Drive Model 4009

Figure 3.3 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, Without a Built-in EMC Filter)

Figure 3.4 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, With a Built-in EMC Filter)

■ Drive Models 4015, 4018

Figure 3.5 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, Without a Built-in EMC Filter)

46 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

Figure 3.6 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, With a Built-in EMC Filter)

■ Drive Models 4024, 4031

Electrical Installation
3
Figure 3.7 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, Without a Built-in EMC Filter)

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 47

3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

Figure 3.8 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, With a Built-in EMC Filter)

■ Drive Models 4039, 4045

Figure 3.9 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, Without a Built-in EMC Filter)

48 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

Figure 3.10 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (Three-Phase, With a Built-in EMC Filter)

◆ Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Name
Function
Model 4009 - 4045

R/L1

S/L2 Main circuit power supply input

T/L3 To connect a commercial power supply.

Electrical Installation
L/L1
-
N/L2

U/T1

V/T2 Drive output To connect a motor.

W/T3

+1 3
DC reactor connection Remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2 to connect a DC reactor.
+2

B1
Braking resistor connection To connect a braking resistor or braking resistor unit.
B2

To ground the drive.

Ground Wiring
• 400 V: C class grounding (ground to 10 Ω or less)

◆ Wire Selection
Select the correct wires for main circuit wiring.
Refer to Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 114 for wire gauges and tightening torques as
specified by European standards.

◆ Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and
motor terminals.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 49

3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect main power supply wiring to drive motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Connect
main power supply wiring to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death
from fire.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that you align the phase order for the drive and motor when you connect the
motor to drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If the phase order is incorrect, it can cause the motor to run in reverse. If
the motor accidentally runs in reverse, it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters, or leakage breakers (RCM/RCD) to the motor
circuit. If you connect these devices to the output circuits, it can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.

■ Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

When the wiring between the drive and the motor is too long, voltage drop along the motor cable can decrease
motor torque, usually at low frequency output. If you connect motors in parallel with long motor cable, this is also
a problem. Drive output current increases when the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in
leakage current can cause overcurrent and decrease the precision of the current detection.
Use the values in Table 3.2 to adjust the drive carrier frequency. For systems that have 100 m (328 ft) or longer
motor wiring, if you use metal conduits or isolated cables for each phase, it will increase stray capacitance.
Table 3.2 Carrier Frequency against Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Wiring Distance Between the Drive 50 m (164 ft) Maximum 100 m (328 ft) Maximum More than 100 m (328 ft)
and Motor

Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less

Note:
• To set the carrier frequency in a drive that is operating more than one motor, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to
all connected motors.
• If the length of the wire between the drive and an induction motor is longer than 100 m (328 ft), set A1-02 = 0 [V/f].
• The maximum cable length between the drive and a PM motor is 100 m (328 ft).

■ Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local
safety regulations. The EN 61800-5-1:2007 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to automatically de-energize
when the protective ground wire disconnects. If you turn on the internal EMC filter, the leakage current of the drive will be more
than 3.5 mA. Use the closed-loop crimp terminal to connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional area of
10 mm2 (copper wire). If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of drive models 4xxxE to comply with the
EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter or if there is high resistance grounding. If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do
not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and use
the minimum length of ground wire. Incorrect equipment grounding can cause serious injury or death from dangerous electrical
potentials on the equipment chassis.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard.
Correctly ground the ground terminals. Obey federal and local electrical wiring codes for correct grounding methods. The
maximum grounding resistance is
• 400 V class: ground to 10 Ω or less
If you touch electrical equipment that is not grounded, it can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• Only use the drive grounding wire to ground the drive. Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or
large-current electrical equipment. Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical
interference.
• To connect more than one drive to the same grounding circuit, follow the instructions in the instruction manual. Incorrect equipment
grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical interference.

■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Before you wire the main circuit terminals, make sure that MCCB and MC are OFF. If you
touch electrical equipment when MCCB and MC are ON, it can cause serious injury or death.

■ Main Circuit Configuration

The figures in this section show the different schematics of the drive main circuit. The connections change when
the drive capacity changes. The DC power supply for the main circuit also supplies power to the control circuit.
Note:
Drive models 2018A to 2075A, and 4009A to 4045A do not have a built-in EMC filter.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals +1 or -. Use terminals B1 and B2 for the braking resistor
connections. If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit and
serious injury or death.

50 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential.
Incorrect wiring connections can cause damage to the drive.

Figure 3.11 Drive Main Circuit Configuration for Models 2018 - 2075, 4009 - 4045

Electrical Installation
3

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 51

3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

◆ Wire to the Main Circuit Terminal Block

Wire the unit to the main circuit terminal block correctly as specified by the instructions in the manual.
Read the following notes and instructions before wiring the terminal block.

■ Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block

• Use UL-Listed, vinyl-coated insulated copper wires for operation with a continuous maximum permitted
temperature of 75 °C at 600 V.
• Remove all unwanted objects that are near the terminal block connections.
• Remove the insulation from the connection wires to the wire stripping lengths shown in the manual.
• Do not use bent or crushed wires. Remove the damaged end of the wire before you use it. Incorrect connections
can cause death or serious injury from fire.
• Do not solder stranded wire. Soldered wire connections can become loose over time and cause unsatisfactory
drive performance.
• If you use stranded wire, make sure that all of the wire strands are in the connection. Also, do not twist the
stranded wire too much. Incorrect connections can cause death or serious injury from fire.
• Put the wire all the way into the terminal block. Remove the insulation from the wire to the recommended wire
stripping length to fit the wire with insulation in the plastic housing.
• Use a torque driver, torque ratchet, or torque wrench for the screws. A slotted driver or a hex tool will be
necessary to wire the screw clamp terminal. Use applicable tools as specified by the recommended conditions in
the product manual.
• If you use power tools to tighten the terminal screws, use a low speed setting (300 to 400 r/min). Failure to obey
can cause damage to the terminal screws.
• Wire gauges on existing drive models to be replaced may not match wire gauge ranges on new drives. Refer to
the drive manuals for correct wire sizes.
• Do not tighten the terminal screws at an angle of 5 degrees or more. Failure to obey can cause damage to the
terminal screws.
If you damage a terminal screw, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.

Figure 3.12 Permitted Angle

• Put the bit all the way into the hex socket to tighten the hex socket cap screw.
• When you tighten slotted screws, hold the straight-edge screwdriver perpendicularly to the screw. Make sure
that you align the end of the straight-edge screwdriver with the screw groove.

Figure 3.13 Tightening Slotted Screws

• After you connect the wires to the terminal block, lightly pull on the wires to make sure that they do not come
out of the terminals.

52 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

• Do not let strain on the wiring cause damage. Use a strain relief near the wiring to release the tension. Refer to
Figure 3.14 for an example.

A - Cable clamp
Figure 3.14 Strain Relief Example
Table 3.3 Recommended Wiring Tools
Bit Torque Driver Model Torque Wrench
Screw Size Screw Shape Wire Gauge Adapter
Manufacturer, Model (Tightening Torque) (Tightening Torque)

TSD-M 1,2NM
PHOENIX CONTACT
M3 - Bit (0.3 - 1.2 N∙m -
SF-BIT-SL 0,5X3,0-70
(2.7 - 10.6 in∙lb))

TSD-M 3NM
PHOENIX CONTACT
M4 - Bit (1.2 - 3.0 N∙m -
SF-BIT-SL 1,0X4,0-70
(10.6 - 26.6 in∙lb))

≤ 25 mm2 TSD-M 3NM

(1.2 - 3.0 N∙m -
(AWG 10) PHOENIX CONTACT (10.6 - 26.6 in∙lb))
M5 *1 Bit
SF-BIT-SL 1,2X6,5-70
≥ 30 mm2 4.1 - 4.5 N∙m
-
(AWG 8) (36.3 - 39.8 in∙lb) *2

PHOENIX CONTACT 5 - 9 N∙m

M6 - Bit -
(WAF: 5 mm) SF-BIT-HEX 5-50 (44.3 - 79.7 in∙lb) *2

*1 Sselect the correct tools for the wire gauge.

*2 Use 6.35 mm (0.25 in) bit socket holder.

■ Removing the IP20 Terminal Protective Cover

Electrical Installation
These drives have IP20 terminal protective covers. Remove the covers for the application.
Model Terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Terminal -

2033
- x
4024, 4031

2047, 2060, 2075

x x
4039, 4045
3
1. Put a slotted screwdriver blade into the slit to push the hook of the IP20 terminal protective cover.

A - Slotted screwdriver C - IP20 terminal protective cover

B - Slit
Figure 3.15 Put the Screwdriver Blade into the Slit

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 53

3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

2. Push up the screwdriver to release the IP20 terminal protective cover.

A - IP20 terminal protective cover

Figure 3.16 Release IP20 terminal protective cover
3. Remove IP20 terminal protective cover.

Figure 3.17 Remove IP20 Terminal Protective Cover

■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block

When terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, and terminal - have IP20 terminal protective covers, remove the cover on the
terminal where you will wire.
1. Put wires with prepared ends into the main circuit terminal block.
Look through the opening in the drive case to make sure that you correctly installed the wires into the
terminal block.

Figure 3.18 Install the Electrical Wire

Note:
There is a jumper between terminals +1 and +2. Remove the jumper, then wire to terminals +1 and +2.

54 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

2. Tighten the screws to the specified torque.

Figure 3.19 Tighten Terminal Block Screws

Electrical Installation
3

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 55

3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

This section gives information about how to correctly wire the control circuit.

◆ Control Circuit Connection Diagram

Wire the drive control circuit as shown in Figure 3.20.

Figure 3.20 Control Circuit Connection Diagram

*1 Connect a 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF.

56 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

*2 To set the MFDI power supply (Sinking/Sourcing Mode or internal/external power supply), install or remove a jumper between
terminals SC-SP or SC-SN depending on the application.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• Sinking Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SP.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• Sourcing Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SN.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• External power supply: Remove the jumper from the MFDI terminals. It is not necessary to close the circuit between terminals SC-
SP and terminals SC-SN.
*3 The maximum output current capacity for terminal +V on the control circuit is 20 mA.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not install a jumper between terminals +V and AC. A closed circuit between these
terminals will cause damage to the drive.
*4 Do not ground the control circuit terminals AC or connect them to the drive chassis.
NOTICE: Do not ground the AC control circuit terminals and only connect the AC terminals according to the product
instructions. If you connect the AC terminals incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
*5 Do not connect terminals PS and AC inversely. Failure to obey will cause damage to the drive.
*6 To use the internal power supply with the Safe Disable input, use sourcing mode.
*7 Use multi-function analog monitor outputs with analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. Do not use monitor
outputs with feedback-type signal devices.
*8 Disconnect the wire jumpers between H1 and HC and H2 and HC to use the Safe Disable input.

◆ Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions

Hx-xx parameters set functions for the multi-function input and output terminals.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire and test all control circuits to make sure that the control circuits operate
correctly. If you use a drive that has incorrect control circuit wiring or operation, it can cause death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes. If
you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.

■ Input Terminals
Refer to Table 3.4 for a list of input terminals and functions.

Electrical Installation
Table 3.4 Multi-function Input Terminals
Type Terminal Name (Default) Function (Signal Level)

Up Command
S1
(Closed: Up, Open: Stop)

Down Command
S2
(Closed: Down, Open: Stop)

S3
Multi-function input 1 3
(Nominal Speed)
• Photocoupler
Multi-function input 2
Digital S4 • 24 V, 6 mA
Inputs (Inspection Operation)

Multi-function input 3
S5
(Releveling Speed)

Multi-function input 4
S6
(Leveling Speed)

S7 (Not used)

SC MFDI selection common MFDI power supply, 24 V (maximum 150 mA)

H1 Safe Disable input 1 • 24 V, 6 mA

• ON: Normal operation
Safe Disable input 2
• OFF: Coasting motor
Safe Disable
Input H2 • Internal impedance 4.7 kΩ
• OFF Minimum OFF time of 3 ms.

HC Safe Disable function common Safe Disable function common

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 57

3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

Type Terminal Name (Default) Function (Signal Level)

• Response frequency: 0 to 32 kHz

• H level duty: 30% to 70%
Master frequency reference pulse train input
Master RP • H level voltage: 3.5 V to 13.2 V
Frequency (Master frequency reference)
• L level voltage: 0.0 V to 0.8 V
Reference
• Input impedance: 3 kΩ

AC Frequency reference common 0V

■ Output Terminals
Refer to Table 3.5 and Table 3.6 for a list of Output terminals and functions.
Table 3.5 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type Terminal Name (Default) Function (Signal Level)

N.O. output
MA
(Fault) • Relay output
• 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
Digital Outputs N.C. output
MB • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
(Fault)
• Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
MC Digital output common

P1 • P1-PC
Multi-function photocoupler
P2 output 1
Multi-function Photocoupler (Drive Ready) • Photocoupler output
Outputs • P2-PC • 48 V, 2 mA to 50 mA
Multi-function photocoupler
PC output 2
(Brake Control)

Table 3.6 Control Circuit Monitor Output Terminals

Type Terminal Name (Default) Function (Signal Level)

Analog monitor output

AM 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100%
Monitor Output (Output speed)

AC Monitor common 0V

■ External Power Supply Input Terminals

Refer to Table 3.7 for a list of the functions of the external power supply input terminals.
Table 3.7 External Power Supply Input Terminals
Type Terminal Name (Default) Function

Supplies backup power to the drive control circuit, keypad, and option board.
PS External 24 V power supply input
External Power Supply Input 21.6 VDC to 26.4 VDC, 700 mA
Terminals
AC External 24 V power supply ground 0V

When you use an external 24 V power supply, the drive detects an alarm as shown in Table 3.8 if you set o2-23
[External 24V Powerloss Detection] and o2-26 [Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Power] for the main circuit power
supply. Set the alarm display as necessary.

Table 3.8 Power Supply and Alarm Display

o2-23 o2-26
Main Circuit Power Supply External 24 V Power Supply [External 24V Powerloss [Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Alarm Display
Detection] Power]

ON ON - - -

ON OFF 0 [Disabled] - -

1 [Enabled] - L24v [Loss of External Power 24

Supply]

58 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

o2-23 o2-26
Main Circuit Power Supply External 24 V Power Supply [External 24V Powerloss [Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Alarm Display
Detection] Power]

OFF ON - 0 [Disabled] “Ready” LED light flashes

quickly

- 1 [Enabled] EP24v [External Power 24V

Supply]

◆ Control Circuit Terminals

■ Terminal Configuration
The control circuit terminals are in the positions shown in Figure 3.21.

A - Terminal block (TB2) C - Terminal block (TB1-2)

B - Terminal block (TB1-1) D - Terminal block (TB1-3)

Figure 3.21 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement

■ Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

Use the tables in this section to select the correct wires. Use shielded wire to wire the control circuit terminal

Electrical Installation
block. Use crimp ferrules on the wire ends to make the wiring procedure easier and more reliable.
Table 3.9 Control Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques
Bare Wire Crimp Ferrule
Terminal Block Terminal Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge
mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG)

TB1-1 PS, S1 - S7, SN, SC, SP

• Stranded wire
3
TB1-2 AM, AC, A1, A2, +V, H1, H2, HC 0.25 - 1.0
0.75 (24 - 17) 0.5 0.25 - 0.5
MP, RP, AC, D+, D-, P1, C1, P2, (18) • Solid wire (20) (24 - 20)
TB1-3 C2 0.25 - 1.5
(24 - 16)
TB2 MA, MB, MC

■ Crimp Ferrules
Attach an insulated sleeve when you use crimp ferrules. Refer to Table 3.10 for the recommended external
dimensions and model numbers of crimp ferrules.
Use the PHOENIX CONTACT CRIMPFOX 6.

Figure 3.22 External Dimensions of Crimp Ferrules

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 59

3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

Table 3.10 Crimp Ferrule Models and Sizes

Wire Gauge
Model L (mm) L1 (mm) φd1 (mm) φd2 (mm)
mm2 (AWG)

0.25 (24) AI 0.25-6 YE 10.5 6.0 0.8 2.0

AI 0.25-6 BU

0.34 (22) AI 0.34-6 TQ 10.5 6.0 0.8 2.0

AI 0.5-6 WH
0.5 (20) 12.0 6.0 1.1 2.5
AI 0.5-6 OG

AI 0.75-6 GY
0.75 (18) 12.0 6.0 1.3 2.8
AI 0.75-6 WH

AI 1-6 RD
1.0 (17) 12.0 6.0 1.5 3.0
AI 1-6 YE

◆ Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the
internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not let wire shields touch other signal lines or equipment. Insulate the wire shields with electrical tape or shrink
tubing. If you do not insulate the wire shields, it can cause a short circuit and damage the drive.
Note:
• Use a Class 2 power supply to connect external power to the control terminals. If the power supply for peripheral devices is incorrect, it
can cause a decrease in drive performance.
• Connect the shield of shielded cable to the applicable ground terminal. Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment
malfunction from electrical interference.
• Isolate wiring for contact output terminals MA, MB, MC, P1, C1, P2, and C2 from other control circuit wiring. Incorrect wiring
procedures can cause the drive and connected equipment to malfunction and cause the drive to trip.
• Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, L/L1, N/L2, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2)
and other high-power wiring. If control circuit wiring is adjacent to main circuit wiring, it can cause incorrect operation of the drive
and equipment from electrical interference.
Wire the grounding terminal and main circuit terminals, then wire the control circuit terminals.
1. Remove the front cover from the drive.
You must remove the keypad to move Jumper S5.

Figure 3.23 Remove the Front Cover

2. Refer to the figure and wire the control circuit.
Use a slotted screwdriver with a blade width of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) or less and thickness of 0.4 mm (0.01 in) or
less.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque. Connections that are too loose or
too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect connections can also cause death or
serious injury from fire.
Note:
• Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Incorrect equipment grounding
can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical interference.
• Do not use control circuit wiring that is longer than 50 m (164 ft) to supply the analog frequency reference from a remote
source. If the control circuit wiring is too long, it can cause unsatisfactory system performance.

60 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

A - Wire with a crimp ferrule attached, or C - When you do not use crimp ferrules, remove
unsoldered wire with the core wires lightly approximately 5.5 mm (0.21 in) of the covering
twisted at the end of the wire.
B - Pull back the shielding and lightly twist the end
with your fingers to keep the ends from fraying.
Figure 3.24 Wiring Procedure for the Control Circuit
Note:
• It is easier to wire TB1-1 first, then TB1-2, then TB1-3.
• Do not solder the core wire. Soldered wiring connections can become loose and cause the drive to malfunction.
• Refer to Figure 3.25 for information to prepare terminal ends of the shielded wire.
• Prepare the wire ends of shielded twisted-pair wires as shown in Figure 3.25 to use an analog reference from an external
frequency setting potentiometer to set the frequency. Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.

A - Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the C - Insulate with electrical tape or shrink tubing.
drive.
B - Sheath

Figure 3.25 Prepare the Ends of Shielded Wire

3. Install the front cover.

Electrical Installation
If you moved Jumper S5, attach the keypad before you attach the front cover.
If you did not move Jumper S5, attach the front cover.
Make sure that you do not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you
reattach the cover.

Figure 3.26 Install the Front Cover

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 61

3.6 Control I/O Connections

3.6 Control I/O Connections

This section gives information about the settings for the listed control circuit I/O signals.
• MFDI (terminals S1 to S7)
• MFAO (terminal AM)

◆ Set Sinking Mode/Sourcing Mode

Close the circuit between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the sinking mode/sourcing mode and the internal/
external power supply for the MFDI terminals. The default setting for the drive is internal power supply sinking
mode.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals
SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

Mode Internal Power Supply (Terminal SN-SP) External 24 V power supply

Sinking Mode
(NPN)

Sourcing Mode
(PNP)

◆ Set the Output Signal for the MFAO Terminal AM

Set the signal type for terminal AM to voltage or current output. Use jumper S5 and H4-07 [Terminal AM Signal
Level Select] to set the signal type.

Figure 3.27 Location of Jumper Switch S5

62 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.6 Control I/O Connections

Parameter
Terminal Types of Output Signals Jumper S5
No. Signal Level

Voltage output
0: 0 V to 10 V
(Default)
AM H4-07
Current output 2: 4 mA to 20 mA

Electrical Installation
3

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 63

3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC

3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC

The drive has a mini-B type USB port.
You can use a USB cable (USB 2.0, type: A - mini-B) to connect the drive to a type-A USB port on a PC. After
you connect the drive to the PC, you can use Yaskawa DriveWizard software to monitor drive performance and
manage parameter settings.

A - PC C - USB 2.0, type A - mini-B cable

B - Type-A connector D - Mini-B type connector

Figure 3.28 Connect to a PC (USB)

Yaskawa recommends that you use a USB cable with connectors connected with shielded wires.

Figure 3.29 Recommended USB Cable

64 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.8 Braking Resistor Installation

3.8 Braking Resistor Installation

A braking resistor or braking resistor unit (dynamic braking option) helps stop the motor quickly and smoothly
when there is high load inertia. If you try to decelerate a motor in less time than usual for a coast to stop, the
motor will rotate faster than the synchronous speed that aligns with the set frequency. This will cause the motor to
become an induction generator. The inertia energy of the motor and regenerate to the drive and charge the drive
DC bus capacitor and increase the voltage. If the voltage is more than the overvoltage level, an ov [Overvoltage]
will occur. To prevent these overvoltage faults, a dynamic braking option is necessary.
WARNING!
Set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Disabled] when you operate the drive with:
• a regenerative converter
• regenerative unit
• braking resistor
• braking resistor unit.
If you set the parameter incorrectly, the drive can decelerate for too long and cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Before you connect a dynamic braking option to the drive, make sure that qualified personnel
read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual (TOBPC72060001). If you do not read and obey
the manual or if personnel are not qualified, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit.
Note:
Select the correct braking circuit size to dissipate the power that is necessary to decelerate the load in the correct time. Before you run
the drive, make sure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals +1 or -. Use terminals B1 and B2 for the braking resistor
connections. If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit and
serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Connect braking resistors to the drive as shown in the connection diagram examples. If you wire the braking circuits
incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive or equipment.

◆ Install a Braking Resistor

Connect the braking resistor to a drive as shown in Figure 3.30.

Electrical Installation
Figure 3.30 Install a Braking Resistor

◆ Dynamic Braking Option Overload Protection 3

To prevent overheating the dynamic braking option, set a sequence to de-energize the drive at the trip contacts of
the thermal overload relay.

Figure 3.31 Power Supply Interrupt for Overheat Protection Example

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 65

3.8 Braking Resistor Installation

WARNING! Fire Hazard. When you use a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact
output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor. Incorrect braking circuit protection
can cause the resistors to become too hot and cause serious injury or death.

66 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.9 Drive Wiring Protection

3.9 Drive Wiring Protection

◆ Installing a Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD)
When the drive output switches at high speeds, it causes high frequency leakage current. To prevent electrical
shock and fires caused by ground fault protection that is not sufficient, install an RCM/RCD.
Use a high frequency RCM/RCD at the power input side of the drive and make sure that each drive has a
minimum cumulative sensitivity amperage of 30 mA. The specialized breaker detects only the leakage current
from frequency bands that are dangerous to humans.
If a device does not have protection against high frequencies, high frequency leakage currents can cause the
device to malfunction. If you have a malfunction on a device that is not protected, decrease the carrier frequency
of the drive, switch to a better breaker, or use an RCM/RCD with a minimum cumulative sensitivity amperage of
200 mA for each drive.
These conditions can have an effect on leakage current:
• Drive capacity
• Carrier frequency
• Wiring distance and types of motor cables
• EMI/RFI filter
To prevent damage and injury to personnel and drives, use a high-frequency RCM/RCD that is rated for AC and
DC power supplies.
Note:
Yaskawa recommends these RCMs/RCDs, which are designed to operate with high frequencies:
• Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, NV series
• Schneider Electric, NS series
You can use a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) as a replacement for an RCM/RCD that is upstream in the
power supply system.

◆ Installing a Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Residual Current Monitor/

Device (RCM/RCD)
Install a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a residual current monitor/device (RCM/RCD) for line

Electrical Installation
protection between the power supply and main circuit power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. The
MCCB or RCM/RCD gives overload protection and also prevent damage to the main circuit and the devices that
are wired to the main circuit.
Use the information in this section to select the correct MCCB or RCM/RCD and to safely connect the device.
• The capacity of the MCCB or RCM/RCD must be 1.5 to 2 times the rated output current of the drive. Use an
MCCB or RCM/RCD as an alternative to overheat protection (150% for one minute at the rated output current)
to prevent drive faults. 3
• When you connect more than one drive or the drive and other device to an MCCB or RCM/RCD, refer to Figure
3.32, use a magnetic contactor (MC), and set a sequence that de-energizes the drive when it outputs errors.

A - Power supply B - Drive

Figure 3.32 Connect an MCCB

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use an MCCB, RCM/RCD, or Magnetic Contactor (MC) to de-energize the drive before
you wire the main circuit terminal. If the main circuit terminal is energized during wiring, it will cause serious injury or death.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 67

3.10 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection

3.10 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection

◆ Install an Electromagnetic Contactor (MC) at the Input Side of the Drive
You can use an MC as an alternative to a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) when:
• The protective functions of the drive have been triggered
• An emergency stop occurred, and the sequence de-energizes the drive.
If an MC on the input side of the drive (primary side) stops the drive, regenerative braking will not operate, and
the drive will coast to stop.
NOTICE: When you connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits, make sure that you
sequence them correctly. If the output motor circuit sequence is incorrect, it can cause damage to the drive.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes. If
you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.
Note:
• When machinery must not restart after recovery from a momentary power loss that occurred during run, install an MC at the input side
of the drive and set a sequence that does not automatically set the Run command to ON after recovery of power.
• When it is necessary to stop momentary power loss, for example to maintain a circuit that has momentary power loss, use a delayed-
release MC.
• Use an MC (magnetic contactor) to make sure that you can fully remove power to the drive when necessary. Wire the MC to open
when a fault output terminal is triggered.

■ Protect the Braking Resistor/Braking Resistor Unit

Use an MC on the input side (primary side) to prevent damage to the braking resistor/braking resistor unit.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. When you use a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact
output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor. Incorrect braking circuit protection
can cause the resistors to become too hot and cause serious injury or death.

◆ Installing a Thermal Overload Relay on the Drive Output

A thermal overload relay disconnects the power line to the motor during a motor overload condition to prevent
damage to the motor.
Install a thermal overload relay between the drive and motor in these conditions:
• When you operate more than one motor with one drive
• When you operate the motor directly from the power line with a power line bypass
When you operate one motor with one drive, it is not necessary to install a thermal overload relay. The drive has
electronic motor overload protection in the drive software.
Note:
• When you install a thermal overload relay, set parameter L1-01 = 0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled].
• Set up a sequence that will trip an external fault (coast to stop) for the contacts of the thermal overload relay.

■ General Precautions When Using Thermal Overload Relays

When you use a motor thermal overload relay on the drive output to prevent nuisance trips and overheating of the
motor at low speeds, be sure to think about these application precautions:
• Operation of a low speed motor
• When you operate more than one motor with one drive
• Length of the motor cables
• Nuisance tripping because of high drive carrier frequency

■ Operation of a Low Speed Motor

Usually, you use thermal overload relays on general-purpose motors (standard motors). When a drive drives a
general-purpose motor, the motor current is approximately 5% to 10% more than with a commercial power
supply. When a motor with a shaft-driven fan operates at low speeds, the cooling capacity decreases. This can
cause the motor to overheat when the load current is in the motor rated value. Enable the electronic thermal
protection in the drive when possible to prevent this problem.
The electronic thermal overload function uses the relation between the speed and heat characteristics in the
variable speed control range to simulate the cooling ability of general-purpose motors and forced-vented motors to
prevent damage to the motor.

68 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.10 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection

■ Length of the Motor Cables

If you use long motor cables with a high carrier frequency, the increased leakage current can cause nuisance
tripping of the thermal relay. To prevent this, decrease the carrier frequency or increase the tripping level of the
thermal overload relay.

■ Nuisance Tripping Because of High Drive Carrier Frequency

High carrier frequency PWM drives make current waveforms that can increase the temperature in overload relays.
It may be necessary to increase the trip level setting when encountering nuisance triggering of the relay.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Before you increase the detection level of the thermal relay, make sure that a secondary problem is
not the cause of the overload. Make sure that you know the local codes for electrical wiring, then adjust the electrothermal
settings. Incorrect thermal relay adjustment and incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.

Electrical Installation
3

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 69

3.11 Improve the Power Factor

3.11 Improve the Power Factor

◆ Connect an AC Reactor or a DC Reactor
■ Overview
AC reactors and DC reactors decrease surges in current and improve the power factor on the input side of the
drive.
Connect an AC reactor or a DC reactor to the input side (primary side) in the these conditions:
• To decrease harmonic current or improve the power factor of the power supply
• When there is switching of phase advancing capacitor
• With a large capacity power supply transformer (600 kVA or more).
Note:
• You can use an AC reactor and DC reactor together.
• When you connect a thyristor converter (for example, a DC drive) to the same power supply system, use an AC reactor.
• The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the AC and DC reactors come in different shapes. Correctly
prepare the ends of the wiring.
• Ground the AC and DC reactors (option) on the back of the mounting base. Remove all paint from the mounting surface of the control
panel.

■ Connect an AC Reactor

A - Power Supply C - AC reactor

B - MCCB D - Drive

Figure 3.33 AC Reactor Connection Example

■ Connect a DC Reactor
When you install a DC reactor, remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2. If you will not use a DC reactor,
do not remove the jumper. Refer to Figure 3.34 for an example of how to wire the DC reactor.

A - Power Supply C - Drive

B - MCCB D - DC reactor

Figure 3.34 DC Reactor Connection Example

Note:
You cannot connect a DC reactor to drive models B001 to B018.
For single-phase drives, an AC reactor has the same effect as a DC reactor. To improve the power factor on single-phase drives, install
an AC reactor on the drive input side.

70 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.12 Prevent Switching Surge

3.12 Prevent Switching Surge

◆ Connect a Surge Protective Device
A surge protective device decreases the surge voltage generated when you switch an inductive load near the drive.
Inductive loads include:
• Magnetic contactors
• Electromagnetic relays
• Magnetic valves
• Solenoids
• Magnetic brakes.
Always use a surge protective device or diode with inductive loads.
Note:
Do not connect a surge protective device to the drive output side.

Electrical Installation
3

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 71

3.13 Decrease Noise

3.13 Decrease Noise

Note:
The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the AC and DC reactors come in different shapes. Correctly
prepare the ends of the wiring.

◆ Connect a Noise Filter to the Input Side (Primary Side)

High-speed switching makes noise in the drive output. This noise flows from the drive to the power supply, and
can have an effect on other equipment.
Drive models LA50CxxxxExx have built-in input noise filters. When you use these drives, make sure that the
filter specifications align with the application and applicable regulations. Refer to European Standards on page
112 for more information.
When you use a drive without built-in noise filter, install a noise filter to the input side of the drive to decrease the
quantity of noise that flows to the power supply. A noise filter will also stop noise from entering the drive from
the power supply. Contact Yaskawa for more information.
• Use a noise filter specially designed for drives.
• Install the noise filter as close as possible to the drive.

A - Power supply C - Drive

B - Input side (primary side) noise filter D - Other controller

Figure 3.35 Example of Connecting the Noise Filter on the Input Side (Primary Side)

72 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 3.14 Wiring Checklist

3.14 Wiring Checklist

Wire the drive, examine these items, then do a test run.

◆ Power Supply Voltage

Checked No. Item to Check

1 The power supply voltage must be in the input voltage specification range of the drive.

◆ Main Circuit Wiring

Checked No. Item to Check

1 • Put the power supply through a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) before it gets to the drive input.
• Connect an applicable MCCB.

2 Correctly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3, or L/L1 and N/L2.

3 Correctly wire the drive and motor together.

The motor lines and drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 must align to make the correct phase order.
Note:
If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.

4 Use 600 V heat resistant indoor PVC wire for the power supply and motor lines.
Note:
Wire gauge recommendations assume use of 600 V class 2 heat-resistant indoor PVC wire.

5 Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit.

Note:
• When the wiring distance between the drive and the motor is long, use this formula for the voltage drop in the wire:
Motor rated voltage (V) × 0.02 ≥ √3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wiring distance (m) × motor rated current (A) × 10-3
• When the cable between the drive and motor is longer than 50 m (164 ft), use parameter C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] to
decrease the carrier frequency.

6 Correctly ground the drive.

7 Tighten the main circuit and grounding terminal screws of the drive to a correct tightening torque.

8 When you use a braking resistor or a braking resistor unit, install an electromagnetic contactor (MC).
Correctly install the resistor and make sure that overload protection uses the MC to shut off the power supply.

9 Make sure you did not install phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, or ELCBs, GFCIs, RCM/RCDs on the output side of the drive.

Electrical Installation
◆ Control Circuit Wiring
Checked No. Item to Check

1 Use twisted-pair cables for all drive control circuit wiring.

2 Ground the shields of shielded wiring to terminal E (G).

3 Wire Up/Down inputs S1 and S2.

3
4 Correctly install any options.

5 Examine the drive for other wiring errors.

Only use a multimeter to check wiring.

6 Tighten the control circuit terminal screws of the drive to a correct tightening torque.

7 Pick up all wire clippings.

8 Make sure that none of the wires on the terminal block touch other terminals or connections.

9 Make sure that you isolate the control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring in the control panel or in a duct.

10 Make sure that control circuit wiring is not longer than 50 m (164 ft).

11 Make sure that Safe Disable input wiring is not longer than 30 m (98 ft).

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 73

3.14 Wiring Checklist

74 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4
Startup Procedure and Test Run
4.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 76
4.2 Keypad Overview ..................................................................................................... 77
4.3 Set up the Drive with User-Parameter Menu ..................................................... 80
4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode................................................................... 82
4.5 Start-up Procedures ................................................................................................ 86
4.6 Auto-Tuning ............................................................................................................... 89
4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications....................................................... 92
4.8 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive...................................................100
4.9 Keypad Operation ..................................................................................................101
4.10 Auto-Tuning .............................................................................................................105
4.11 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function).....................107

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 75

4.1 Section Safety

4.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate the drive when covers are missing. Replace covers and shields before you
operate the drive. Use the drive only as specified by the instructions.
Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the
drive. If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized.
If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Sudden Movement Hazard
When you use a mechanical holding brake with the drive, you must close the brake if an input
terminal triggers the Baseblock command to stop drive output.
If you enter the baseblock command, the motor will suddenly coast and the load will slip, which can cause
serious injury or death.
You must install external safety circuitry. The drive does not have protection against accidental
load drops. Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms that are isolated from
the drive circuitry.
If you do not use external safety circuitry, the drive could drop the load and cause serious injury or death.

76 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.2 Keypad Overview

4.2 Keypad Overview

◆ Keypad Components and Functions

Figure 4.1 Keypad

Table 4.1 Keypad Components and Functions
Symbol Name Function

A USB Terminal Pass-through Pass-through point to connect a USB cable to the drive.

Starts the drive in LOCAL Mode.

Starts the operation in Auto-Tuning Mode.
RUN Key
B Note:
Before you use the keypad to operate the motor, set o2-01 = 1 [LO/RE Key Function Selection = Enabled], then push on
the keypad to set the drive to LOCAL Mode.

Stops drive operation.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

STOP Key Note:
C
Uses a stop-priority circuit. Set o2-02 = 1 [STOP Key Function Selection = Enabled], then push to stop the motor. This
will also apply when a Run command (REMOTE Mode) is active at an external Run command source. To disable
priority, set o2-02 = 0 [STOP Key Function Selection = Disabled].

Illuminated: The keypad controls the Run command (LOCAL Mode).

OFF: The control circuit terminal or serial transmission device controls the Run command (REMOTE Mode).
Note:
LO/RE LED • LOCAL: Use the keypad to operate the drive. Use the keypad to enter Run/Stop commands and the frequency reference
D
command.
• REMOTE: Use the control circuit terminal or serial transmission to operate the drive. Use the Run command source
selected in b1-02.
• Set o2-01 = 1 and o2-02 = 1 to use and .

Illuminated: The drive detects a fault. 4

OFF: There are no drive faults or alarms.
Flashing:
ALM/ERR LED
• An alarm
E
• Operation Errors
• An Auto-Tuning error
Note:
The LED will illuminate to identify a fault if the drive detects a fault and an alarm at the same time.

Illuminated: The drive is operating or is ready for operation.

OFF:
READY LED • The drive detects a fault.
F • There is no fault and the drive received a Run command, but the drive cannot run. For example, in Programming Mode.
Flashing: The drive is in STo [Safe Torque OFF] condition.
Flashing quickly: The voltage of the main circuit power supply is not in drive nameplate specifications, and the external 24 V
power supply provides the only power to the drive.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 77

4.2 Keypad Overview

Symbol Name Function

Illuminated: The drive is in normal operation.

OFF: The drive is stopped.
Flashing:
• The drive is decelerating to stop.
• The drive received a Run command, but the frequency reference is 0 Hz.
RUN LED
Flashing quickly:
G
• When the drive is in LOCAL Mode, the drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals and is switched to
REMOTE Mode.
• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals when the drive is not in Drive Mode.
• The drive received a Fast Stop command.
• The safety function shut off the drive output.
• The user pushed on the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode.

Left Arrow Key Moves the cursor to the left.

Up Arrow Key/Down Arrow • Moves to a different screen.

Key • Selects parameter numbers and increments or decrements setting values.
/
H
Right Arrow Key (RESET) • Moves the cursor to the right.
• Resets the drive to clear a fault.

ENTER Key • Enters parameter values and settings.

• Selects each mode, parameter, and set value.

ESC Key • Goes back to the previous screen.

I
• Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen (the initial screen).

J LED Display Shows parameters, errors, and other data.

Switches drive control for the Run command and frequency reference between the keypad (LOCAL) and an external source
(REMOTE).
LO/RE Selection Key Note:
K • The LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Key continuously stays enabled after the drive stops in Drive Mode. If the application
must not switch from REMOTE to LOCAL because it will have a negative effect on system performance, set o2-01 = 0
[LO/RE Key Function Selection = Disabled] to disable . Set o2-01 = 1 [Enabled] to enable again.
• The drive will not switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when it is receiving a Run command from an external source.

REV LED Illuminated: The drive received a Reverse run command.

L

Connects to the drive. Use an RJ-45 8-pin straight through UTP CAT5e extension cable to install the keypad in a different
N RJ-45 Connector
location than the drive.

◆ Indicator flashing statuses

Refer to Figure 4.2 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”.

Figure 4.2 About indicator flashing statuses

Figure 4.3 Relation between RUN indicator and Drive Operation

78 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.2 Keypad Overview

◆ Keypad Mode and Menu Displays

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Figure 4.4 Keypad Functions and Display Levels 4

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 79

4.3 Set up the Drive with User-Parameter Menu

4.3 Set up the Drive with User-Parameter Menu

Drive parameters are in letter groups from A to U. Setup Mode contains only the most frequently used
parameters to help you set up the drive more easily.

Figure 4.5 Parameters in General-Purpose Setup Mode

Table 4.2 shows the parameters available in Setup Mode. To access parameters not shown in the Setup Mode, use
the menu.
Table 4.2 Parameters in General-Purpose Setup Mode
User Parameter Parameter Name

A2-01 A1-00 Language Selection

A2-02 A1-02 Control Method Selection

A2-03 d1-18 Speed Reference Selection Mode

A2-04 d1-19 Nominal Speed

A2-05 d1-23 Releveling Speed

A2-06 d1-24 Inspection Operation

A2-07 d1-25 Rescue Operation Speed

A2-08 d1-26 Leveling Speed

A2-09 d1-01 Speed Reference 1

A2-10 d1-02 Speed Reference 2

A2-11 d1-03 Speed Reference 3

A2-12 d1-04 Speed Reference 4

A2-13 d1-05 Speed Reference 5

A2-14 d1-06 Speed Reference 6

A2-15 d1-07 Speed Reference 7

A2-16 d1-08 Speed Reference 8

A2-17 d1-28 Nominal/Leveling Spd Detection

A2-18 d1-29 Inspection Speed Detection

A2-19 C1-01 Acceleration Time 1

A2-20 C1-02 Deceleration Time 1

A2-21 C2-01 S-Curve @ Start of Acceleration

A2-22 C2-02 S-Curve @ End of Acceleration

A2-23 C2-03 S-Curve @ Start of Deceleration

A2-24 C2-04 S-Curve @ End of Deceleration

A2-25 C2-05 Jerk @ Levelig

A2-26 E2-03 Motor No-Load Current

A2-27 S1-02 DC-Injection @ Start

A2-28 S1-03 DC-Injection @ Stop

A2-29 S1-06 Brake Open Delay

A2-30 S1-07 Brake Close Delay

80 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.3 Set up the Drive with User-Parameter Menu

User Parameter Parameter Name

A2-31

A2-32 User Parameter Selection

A2-33

Startup Procedure and Test Run

4

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 81

4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode

4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode

The keypad display of this drive has two modes: Drive Mode and Programming Mode.
• Drive Mode
Use this mode to operate the drive. These operations are available:
– Monitor operation statuses (for example, output frequency, output current, and output voltage)
– Set the parameters that you can change while the drive is operating (for example, d1-01 to d1-17). Refer to
Parameter Details on page 279 for more information.
• Programming Mode
Use this mode to set parameters. These operations are available:
– Examine and set the parameters that are not at default settings (Verify Mode)
– See and set the basic parameters necessary for the drive operation (Setup Mode)
– See and set all parameters (Parameter Setting Mode)
– Automatically set motor parameters (Auto-Tuning Mode)
Table 4.3 gives information about the functions you can access when you push / .
Note:
Set b1-08 [Run Command Select in PRG Mode] to accept or reject the Run command from an external source when in Programming
Mode. Refer to b1-08: Up/Down Command Select in PRG Mode on page 284 for more information.
Table 4.3 Overview of the Modes
Mode LED Display Description Description Ref.

Frequency You can set and monitor frequency references.

reference -
display

Monitor display The keypad shows Ux-xx [Monitor]. -

Output voltage You can monitor the output voltage reference.

display 348
Set o1-01 [User Monitor Selection] to change the item shown on this screen.

Output current You can monitor the output current.

display -
Drive Mode
(Operation of Output You can monitor the frequency output from the drive.
the motor and frequency -
monitoring of display
operation
status) Forward/reverse
selection : Motor rotates in forward direction

: Motor rotates in reverse direction

Note:
For applications where the motor must not rotate in reverse direction (for example, for fans and -
pumps), you can use b1-04 [Reverse Operation Selection] to prevent reverse rotation.

How to set reverse operation

Auto-Tuning The drive automatically calculates and sets the motor parameters.
Mode 105

Parameter You can see and set all parameters.

Programming 84
Setting Mode
Mode
(Parameter Setup Mode You can see and set the basic parameters necessary for drive operation.
Settings) 83

Verify Menu You can examine and set the parameters that are not at default settings.
84

◆ Drive Mode
These operations are available in Drive Mode:
• Operate and stop the drive
• Show the drive status monitors (for example, frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output
voltage)
• Show the alarm content

82 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode

• Show the alarm history

Note:
To operate the drive, select Drive Mode. You can switch to other modes when the drive stops, but the drive must be in Drive Mode to
start operation.
These steps show how to set the frequency reference source to LOCAL (keypad) and change the frequency
reference from 0 Hz to 6 Hz.

Figure 4.6 Frequency Reference Setting in Drive Mode

Note:
To prevent an incorrect setting, after you enter the frequency reference, you must push the ENTER key to change the frequency
reference. Set o2-05 = 1 [Home Mode Freq Ref Entry Mode = Immediate / MOP-style] to change the frequency reference value without
pushing the ENTER key.

◆ Programming Mode
In Programming Mode, you can set parameters or do Auto-Tuning. This mode has 4 sub-modes for different
programming requirements:
• Verify Menu: Use this mode to examine and set the parameters that are not at default settings.
• Setup Mode: Use this mode to see and set the minimum parameters necessary for drive operation. Refer to
Verify and Set the Changed Parameters (Verify Menu) on page 84 for more information.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

• Parameter Setting Mode: Use this mode to see and set all parameters.
• Auto-Tuning Mode: Use this mode to automatically set the motor parameters necessary for each control
method.

■ Setup Mode
In Setup Mode, you can see and set the minimum parameters necessary for drive operation. Refer to Figure 4.7 for
an example.
Note:
1. Refer to Set up the Drive with User-Parameter Menu on page 80 for more information about Setup mode parameters.
4
2. Push and to continue to the application selection screen. When you change the setting, it will optimize the parameter
for the application. The default setting is 0 [General-purpose].
3. To go back to the initial screen, push . To change another parameter in Setup Mode, push or .
Change b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] from 1 [Analog Input] to 0 [Keypad].

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 83

4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode

Figure 4.7 Key Operation Examples in Setup Mode

◆ Change Parameter Settings

Show the frequency reference screen in advance.
Note:

Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen from any screen.
Use these steps to change C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] from 1.0 s (default) to 2.0 s.

Figure 4.8 Key Operation Examples for Parameter Settings

◆ Verify and Set the Changed Parameters (Verify Menu)

Show the frequency reference screen.
Note:

Push and hold to return to frequency reference screen from any screen.
Use Verify mode to view all parameters that are not at default settings. This is very useful when you replace a
drive. When there are no changes to parameter settings, the display shows . This lets you quickly access
and re-edit changed parameters. Figure 4.9 shows the procedure.

Figure 4.9 Verify and Set the Changed Parameters

84 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.4 Drive Mode and Programming Mode

◆ How to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE

LOCAL mode lets you use the keypad to input Run commands. REMOTE mode lets you use other sources than
the keypad to input Run commands.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. If you change the control source when b1-07 = 1 [LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection =
Accept Existing RUN Command], the drive can start suddenly. Before you change the control source, remove all personnel from
the area around the drive, motor, and load. Sudden starts can cause serious injury or death.

You can use or MFDI functions (LOCAL/REMOTE Selection) to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE.
Note:
• illuminates while the drive is in LOCAL Mode.
• While you are entering a Run command, you cannot switch between LOCAL and REMOTE.

■ Use the LO/RE Selection Key on the Keypad to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE
Each time you push , the mode switches between LOCAL and REMOTE. The LED illuminates in LOCAL
Mode.

Figure 4.10 Use the LO/RE Selection Key to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE

■ Use MFDI Terminals (S3 to S7) to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE
When you set H1-xx = 1 [MFDI Function Selection = LOCAL/REMOTE Selection], you can activate/deactivate
the terminal to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE. Set H1-xx = 1 to disable the LO/RE key on the keypad.
For information about the MFDI functions, refer to the list in H1: Digital Inputs on page 304.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

4

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 85

4.5 Start-up Procedures

4.5 Start-up Procedures

This section gives the basic steps necessary to start up the drive using only the most basic settings.
Use the flowcharts in this section to find the most applicable start-up method for your application.

◆ Flowchart A: Connect and Run the Motor with Minimal Setting Changes
Flowchart A shows a basic start-up sequence to connect and run a motor with a minimum of setting changes.
Settings can change when the application changes.
Use the drive default parameter settings for basic applications where high precision is not necessary.

Figure 4.11 Basic Steps before Startup

◆ Power On
Take the following precautions before applying main power to the drive:
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before
applying power. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury from fire.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Avoid loose electrical connections.
Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury from fire.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Connect AC power supply lines to main circuit terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 (or R/L1 and S/L2 for
single-phase power). Do not connect the AC power supply line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply can
result in death or serious injury from fire.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop, I/O and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state
before energizing or running the drive. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.

86 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.5 Start-up Procedures

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Clear personnel, secure equipment and check sequence and safety circuitry before
starting the drive. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired
properly and in the correct state. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation of any emergency circuits after they are wired. Emergency
circuits are required to provide safe and quick shutdown of the drive. Do not operate the drive with untested emergency circuits.
Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward. Connect motor input terminals U/T1,
V/T2, and W/T3 to drive output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/T3. The phase order for the drive and motor should match.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Check all the wiring including the PG encoder wiring, to ensure that all connections are correct
after installing the drive and connecting any other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
After applying power, the drive mode display should appear and no fault or alarm should be displayed. In the
event of a drive fault or error code, refer to Troubleshooting on page 165.

◆ Control Method Selection

Select one of the motor control methods after applying power to the drive according to the table below.
Machine Type Control Method A1-02 Setting

V/f Control 0
Induction Motor
Open Loop Vector (OLV) Control 2

◆ Motor Rotation Direction Setup

Check the direction of motor rotation to verify the Up command causes the elevator to move in the upward
direction. Perform the following check to confirm proper motor and load direction:
• The drive outputs motor voltage in U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 phase sequence when an Up command is issued. Check
the motor rotation with this phase sequence (for most motors clockwise is seen from the shaft side). If motor
rotation is incorrect, rewire the drive output to the motor.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

◆ Flowchart B: Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Flowchart B shows Auto-Tuning for induction motors operating with V/f Control or Open Loop Vector Control.
Settings can change when the application changes.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 87

4.5 Start-up Procedures

Figure 4.12 Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

88 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.6 Auto-Tuning

4.6 Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear before proceeding with
Auto-Tuning. Remove main power from the drive before servicing the drive or motor. Do not touch the motor during Auto-Tuning
The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in death or serious injury. .
Insufficient torque can cause the elevator car to move in the direction of the load, or cause the motor to behave
erratically (reverse operation, stand still, sudden accelerations, etc.).
For more information, refer to the instruction manual included with the motor.

◆ Types of Auto-Tuning
The type of Auto-Tuning used differs based on the control mode and other operating conditions. Refer to the
tables below to select the type of Auto-Tuning that bests suits the application. For directions for performing Auto-
Tuning, refer to Start-up Procedures on page 86 with Figure 4.11.
The drive will only show Auto-Tuning parameters that are valid for the control method that has been set in A1-02.
Table 4.4 Status of Input/Output Terminals during Auto-Tuning
Control Method
Auto-Tuning Type Parameter Requirements and Benefits V/f OLV
A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 2

• Rotational Auto-Tuning gives the most accurate results, and is recommended if

Rotational Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 0 possible. No Yes
• Motor must run freely or with light load (<30%), i.e. ropes have to be removed.

• A motor test report listing motor data is not available.

Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 T1-01 = 1 • Automatically calculates motor parameters needed for vector control. No Yes
• Use if ropes cannot be removed. Note that the accuracy is lower than with Rotational
Auto-Tuning.

• Used when the motor cable exceeds 50 m.

Line-to-Line Resistance T1-01 = 2 • Used in V/f control if drive and motor capacities differ. Yes Yes
• Perform when the ropes cannot be removed from the installation for rotational auto-
tuning.

The following table lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure this data is available before
starting Auto-Tuning. The necessary information is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test
report provided by the motor manufacturer.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Table 4.5 Status of Input/Output Terminals during Auto-Tuning
Tuning Type

Input Value Input Parameter Unit Rotational Stationary for Line-

to-Line Resistance
T1-01 = 0
T1-01 = 2

Motor Rated Power T1-02 kW Yes Yes

Motor Rated Voltage T1-03 Vac Yes No

Motor Rated Current T1-04 A Yes Yes

Motor Rated Frequency T1-05 Hz Yes No 4

Number of Motor Poles T1-06 - Yes No

Motor Rated Speed T1-07 r/min Yes No

The number of motor poles (T1-06) is usually not found on the motor nameplate, but it can be calculated by: p =
(120 × f) / ns. Where f is the motor rated frequency and ns is the motor synchronous speed.

◆ Before Auto-Tuning the Drive

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When performing Rotational Auto-Tuning for motor data or PG encoder offset, always
uncouple the motor from the mechanical system (remove ropes from traction sheave). Failure to comply can cause death or
serious injury to personnel, and damage to the equipment.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not touch the motor during Auto-Tuning. Lethal voltages may be present on the motor
case. Failure to comply can cause death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is completed. When doing Stationary Auto-
Tuning, the motor does not rotate, however, power is applied. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The holding brake must remain engaged for the entire Stationary Auto-Tuning
sequence. Ensure a brake release digital output signal cannot be issued by the drive. Failure to comply can result in death or
serious injury.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 89

4.6 Auto-Tuning

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not release the mechanical brake during Stationary Auto-Tuning. Ensure that the
mechanical brake release circuit is not controlled by the drive multi-function digital outputs exclusively. Failure to comply can
result in death or serious injury.
• Rotational Auto-Tuning is the preferred tuning method because it gives more accurate results than Stationary
Auto-Tuning. Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning when the motor can be uncoupled from the elevator mechanical
system (remove ropes from traction sheave). Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning when the motor and mechanical
system cannot be uncoupled.
• Make sure that the mechanical brake remains applied for all Stationary Auto-Tuning methods. Make sure to
release the brake for all Rotational Auto-Tuning methods.
• When using a motor contactor, make sure it is closed throughout the Auto-Tuning process.
• The H1 signal must be ON when performing Auto-Tuning.
• A digital input programmed for Baseblock (H1-xx = 8 or 9) must be set so that the drive is not in a baseblock
condition.
• Confirm that the motor is mechanically fixed.
• To cancel Auto-Tuning, press the STOP key on the digital operator.
• Auto-Tuning requires the user to input data from the motor nameplate or motor test report. Make sure this data
is available before Auto-Tuning the drive.
• For best performance, the drive input supply voltage must be greater than the motor rated voltage.
Improved performance is possible when using a motor with a base voltage that is 40 V lower than the input supply
voltage. This is particularly important when operating the motor above 90% of base speed, where high torque
precision is required.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Stay clear of the motor during rotational auto-tuning. During automatic starting of
equipment, the machine may start moving suddenly. Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before
applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before applying power to the drive. Failure to comply
can result in death or serious injury.
The following table describes digital input and output terminal operation while Auto-Tuning is executed.
Table 4.6 Status of Input/Output Terminals during Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Type Digital Input Digital Output

Rotational Auto-Tuning Digital input functions are disabled. Functions the same as during normal operation.

Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 Digital input functions are disabled. Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning.

Line-to-Line Resistance Digital input functions are disabled. Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning.

◆ Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or the STOP key is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning will be interrupted and
a fault code will appear on the LED operator.

◆ Auto-Tuning Operation Example

The following example demonstrates Rotational Auto-Tuning when using OLV [A1-02 = 2].
1. Turn on the power to the drive.
The initial display appears.
2. Press or until the Auto-Tuning display appears.
3. Press to start setting parameters.
4. Press to display the value for T1-01.
5. Press to select the digit to be modified.
6. Press to select Rotational Auto-Tuning.
7. Press to save the setting.
The display returns to the display shown in step 3.

90 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.6 Auto-Tuning

8. Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.

9. Press to view the default setting.
10. Press to select the correct digit and / to change the digit value, enter the motor power
nameplate data in kW.
11. Press to save the settings.
The display returns to the display in step 1.
12. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to set the remaining motor parameters.
• T1-03 [Motor Rated Voltage]
• T1-04 [Motor Rated Current]
• T1-05 [Motor Base Frequency]
• T1-06 [Number of Motor Poles]
• T1-07 [Motor Base Speed]
13. Press to confirm the motor data.
14. Press to start Auto-Tuning..
The drive begins by injecting current into the motor for about 1 min, and then starts to rotate the motor.
Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes if no errors occur.

◆ Input Data for Motor Auto-Tuning: T1

The T1-xx parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data.
Note:
• Cycling drive power after setting the T1 parameters will reset these parameters to default values.
• For motors operating in the field weakening range, first perform the Auto-Tuning with the base data. After Auto-Tuning is complete,
change E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] to the desired value.
For more information refer to T: Auto-Tuning on page 367.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

4

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 91

4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

◆ Up and Down Commands And Speed Reference Selection
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Remove the Up/Down Command before resetting alarms and faults. Failure to comply
can cause death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Verify the maximum drive output frequency before starting the drive. The drive is
capable of running the motor at high speed. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION! Sudden Movement Hazard. Verify drive parameter b1-03 = 0 [Stopping Method = Ramp to Stop] before starting the
drive. Failure to comply can cause the elevator to free-fall when the Up/Down command is removed.

■ Speed Reference Selection

Parameter b1-01 determines the source of the speed reference. On the drive the speed reference can only be
modified through the digital operator or using digital inputs to switch between reference values. Therefore, this
parameter cannot be modified from its default value of 0.
Setting of b1-01 Reference Source Speed Reference Input

0 (default) Digital operator keypad Set the speed references in the d1-xx parameters and use digital inputs to switch between different
reference values.

■ Up/Down Command Source Selection

The input source for the Up and Down command can be selected using parameter b1-02.
Setting of b1-02 Up/Down Source Up/Down Command Input

0 Digital operator keypad RUN and STOP keys on the operator

Terminal S1: Run in Up direction

1 (default) Digital inputs
Terminal S2: Run in Down direction

■ Travel Start
To start the elevator in up or down direction, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• A speed reference greater than zero must be provided.
• The Safe Disable signal at terminals H1 and H2 must be closed (drive output enabled).
• If a multi-function digital input is programmed for Baseblock (H1-xx = 8 or 9), this input must be set so the
drive is not in a baseblock condition.
• An Up or Down signal must be set at the source specified in b1-02.
• If a multifunction input is programmed for output contactor feedback (H1-xx = 56), then the output contactor
must be closed.

■ Travel Stop
The drive stops under the following conditions:
• The Up or Down command is removed.
• d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 and the Up/Down or Leveling Speed signal (H1-xx = 53) is removed.
• d1-18 is set to 3 and all speed inputs are removed.
• A fault occurs. The stopping method depends on the specific fault that occurred, in combination with certain
parameter settings.
• The Safe Disable input is opened or a Base Block signal is input. In this case, the brake is applied immediately
and the drive output shuts off.

◆ Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs

Set parameter b1-01 = 0 to enable the speed selection using the drive digital inputs. Use parameter d1-18 to
determine different travel speeds selected by the digital inputs.
Setting of d1-18 Speed Selection

0 (default) Multi-speed inputs 1, Speed references are set in d1-01 to d1-08.

1 Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Higher speed has priority.

92 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

■ Multi-Speed Inputs 1
When d1-18 = 0, multi-function digital inputs are preset as shown below.
Setting of d1-18 Speed Selection Set Value

S5 H1-05 3 Multi-Speed Reference 1

S6 H1-06 4 Multi-Speed Reference 2

S7 H1-07 5 Multi-Speed Reference 3

Different speed reference settings can be selected by combining the three digital inputs as shown in the table
below.
Parameters d1-19 through d1-26 are displayed only if d1-18 is set to 1 or 2.
Digital Inputs Selected Speed

Multi-Speed Reference 1 Multi-Speed Reference 2 Multi-Speed Reference 3 d1-18 = 0

0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) Speed Reference 1 (d1-01)

1 (On) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) Speed Reference 2 (d1-02)

0 (Off) 1 (On) 0 (Off) Speed Reference 3 (d1-03)

1 (On) 1 (On) 0 (Off) Speed Reference 4 (d1-04)

0 (Off) 0 (Off) 1 (On) Speed Reference 5 (d1-05)

1 (On) 0 (Off) 1 (On) Speed Reference 6 (d1-06)

0 (Off) 1 (On) 1 (On) Speed Reference 7 (d1-07)

1 (On) 1 (On) 1 (On) Speed Reference 8 (d1-08)

Setting d1-18 = 0 :
Up to eight speed references can be set using parameters d1-01 to d1-08. The drive starts with an Up or Down
command, and stops when the Up or Down command is removed. When d1-18 = 0, parameters d1-19 through d1-
23 will not be displayed.

■ Separate Speed Inputs (d1-18 = 1)

Six different speed settings (defined in the parameters d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26) can be set and selected using

Startup Procedure and Test Run

four digital inputs. When d1-18 = 1, multi-function digital inputs are preset as shown below:
Setting of d1-18 Speed Selection Set Value Details

S3 H1-03 50 Nominal speed (d1-19)

S4 H1-04 54 Inspection speed (d1-24)

S5 H1-05 51 Intermediate speed (d1-20)

S6 H1-06 53 Leveling speed (d1-26)

Different speed settings can be selected depending on the assignment of the speed selection digital inputs (H1-xx)
as shown in the table below. Parameters d1-19 through d1-26 are displayed only if d1-18 is set to 1 or 2. 4
Leveling and Nominal Speed assigned Leveling Speed not assigned Nominal Speed not assigned
(H1-xx = 50 and H1-xx = 53) (H1-xx ≠ 53) (H1-xx ≠ 50) Selected Speed
50 51 52 53 50 51 52 51 52 53

1 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal Speed (d1-19)

0 1 0 A 0 1 0 1 0 0 Intermediate Speed 1 (d1-20)

1 1 1 A 1 1 1 N/A N/A N/A Intermediate Speed 2 (d1-21)

0 1 1 A 0 1 1 1 1 0 Intermediate Speed 3 (d1-22)

0 0 1 A 0 0 1 0 1 0 Releveling Speed (d1-23)

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 A A A Leveling Speed (d1-26)

0 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Zero Speed

0 = Off, 1 = On, A = no influence, N/A = Not available

Higher Speed has Priority and the Leveling Speed Input is Assigned (d1-18 = 1 and H1-xx = 53)
(default) :

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 93

4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed. The leveling signal is disregarded as long as any other
speed selection input is active. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the selected speed
reference signal is removed.

Higher Speed Priority is Selected and the Leveling Speed Input is Not Assigned (d1-18 = 1 and
H1-xx ≠ 53) :
The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the selected speed reference signal is removed.
If no speed reference is selected at start, the drive will trigger an “FrL” fault. Set parameter S6-15 to 0 to disable
Speed Reference Missing (FrL) detection. With this setting the drive starts using leveling speed if no other speed
reference is selected.

◆ Multi-Function Terminal Setup

■ Multi-Function Digital Inputs (Terminals S3 to S7)
The H1 parameters assign functions to digital input terminals S3 to S7. Refer to H1: Digital Inputs on page 304.

■ Multi-Function Digital Outputs

The H2 parameters assign functions to digital output terminals. Refer to H2: Digital Outputs on page 310.

■ Multi-Function Analog Output

The H4 parameters assign a function to analog output terminal AM. Select the function for this terminals by
entering the last three digits of the desired U monitor. Refer to U: Monitors on page 270.

◆ Accel/Decel Ramp and Jerk Settings

Acceleration and deceleration ramps are set using the C1-xx parameters. Use the C2-xx parameters to adjust the
jerk at the start of acceleration or deceleration.
The figure below explains how accel/decel ride and jerk settings can be used to adjust the ride profile.

Figure 4.13 Accel/Decel Ramp and Jerk Function

Units used to set the acceleration and deceleration ramp as well as the Jerk function change with the setting of
parameter.

94 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

◆ Inspection Operation
■ Start Condition in Inspection Operation
Inspection operation is performed when an Up or Down signal is input while one of the following conditions is
true:
• Parameter d1-18 is set to 0 and the selected speed is higher than d1-28 but lower than d1-29.
• Parameter d1-18 is set to 1 and a digital input programmed for Inspection Operation Speed [H1-xx = 54] is
enabled.
Inspection Operation uses the same acceleration characteristics and brake sequence at start as normal operation.
The carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz during Inspection Operation, but can be changed using parameter C6-21.

■ Stop Condition in Inspection Operation

To stop the drive during Inspection Operation, either remove the Up or Down command or reset the input terminal
for Inspection Operation.
A deceleration ramp can be set for Inspection Operation using parameter C1-15.
• If C1-15 = 0.00, the drive immediately applies the brake, shuts off the drive output, and opens the motor
contactor, i.e., the multi-function output terminals set for “Brake Control” [H2-xx = 50] and “Output Contactor
Control” [H2-xx = 51] are cleared.
• If C1-15 > 0.00, the drive decelerates to stop at the rate set to C1-15, then applies the brake, shuts the output off,
and opens the motor contactor.

■ Inspection Operation Timing Chart

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Figure 4.14 Inspection Operation Sequence

◆ Brake Sequence
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Be sure to set an acceptable deceleration time in parameter C1-09 [EmergencyStop
Ramp] when using the fast-stop feature. Rapid deceleration may cause the drive to fault on an overvoltage condition and lead to
4
an uncontrolled motor state. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 95

4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

Figure 4.15 Brake Sequence Timing Diagram

Table 4.7 Timing Zones for Brake Sequence Timing Diagram
Timing Zone Description

Up or Down command is issued.

Safe Disable terminals H1-H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1-xx = 8 or 9).

Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals.

t1
Output contactor control signal is set [H2-xx = 51] by the drive.

Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal [H1-xx = 56] to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not received within t1, or if the
feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered.
If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then proceeds to the
next step.

After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor.
t2 DC Injection Braking or Position Lock begins.

After the brake release delay time set in S1-06 has passed, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output [H2-xx = 50] in order to release the brake.

DC Injection Braking or Position Lock will continue until:

t3 • The time S1-04 has elapsed,
• Or the time S1-06 has elapsed if S1-06 > S1-04 (this setting should be avoided since the motor could be driven against the applied brake).

t4 The drive accelerates up to the selected speed. The speed is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected.

t5 Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is removed.

t6 The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed.

The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01).

t7 DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05.

After the delay time to apply the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output [H2-xx = 50]. The brake applies.

t8 The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is shut off.

After the delay for the magnetic contactor set in S1-11 has passed, the drive resets the output terminal set for “Output Contactor Control” [H2-xx =
t9 51].
The Safe Disable Inputs can be cleared and Baseblock can be enabled.

◆ Rescue Operation
■ Overview
In the event of a power outage, Rescue Operation allows the elevator to travel to the nearest floor by switching to
a backup battery or UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) for power.
An input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1-xx = 55) can be used to initiate Rescue Operation. During Rescue
Operation, the drive uses the speed reference set in d1-25 to travel to the nearest floor.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Do not use the Rescue Operation feature for extended periods. Failure to comply can result in
drive heat sink overtemperature alarms (oH).
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. When changing parameters while the drive is supplied from the rescue operation power supply,
wait at least 5 s after entering parameters before switching off the power supply. Instantly switching off the power can cause
parameter settings corruption that can only be resolved by initializing the drive. Failure to comply can cause erroneous drive
performance.

96 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

■ Drive Power Supply for Rescue Operation

There are various methods of supplying power to the drive for rescue operation. Independent of the chosen
method, the voltage in the DC bus of the drive and the voltage supplied to the drive control circuit must meet the
specifications provided in the following table.
The DC bus voltage can either be supplied by a battery connected to the DC bus terminals of the drive or by a
UPS connected to drive terminals L1 and L2. The control circuit voltage is supplied directly from the drive’s DC
bus.
When using a single-phase AC power supply for rescue operation such as a single-phase UPS, the ripple in the
DC bus voltage will be higher than with a three-phase or battery supply. Make sure that the DC bus voltage never
falls below the minimum value listed in the following table.
Table 4.8 Power Supply Ratings for Rescue Operation
Timing Zone Description Control Circuit Voltage

200 V class drives: 115 to 300 Vdc

Induction Motor Same as DC Bus Voltage.
400 V class drives: 230 to 600 Vdc

■ Parameter Setup
Adjust drive parameters as described below when using Rescue Operation.
• Select the type of Rescue Operation power supply for the drives main circuit in parameter S4-06.
• When using a UPS, set the UPS power value to parameter S4-07. Use parameter S4-08 to decide if the Rescue
Operation speed shall be limited automatically depending on the UPS power.
• If deterioration of the battery or UPS should be detected, also set up parameters S4-12 and S4-13. Measure the
DC bus voltage during operation with the rescue power supply and set the measured value to parameter S4-12.
Set the deterioration detection level to parameter S4-13.
• Set parameters S4-01 to S4-04 to select if light load direction search should be automatically performed when
Rescue Operation is started and to configure the light load search function.

■ Wiring Examples
Switching the main power supply to a battery or UPS requires magnetic contactors that must be controlled by an
external controller. Wiring methods and the sequence used for the magnetic contactors depend on the application.
This instruction manual describes the following configurations:

Startup Procedure and Test Run

• • A single-phase, 230 V UPS is used as backup power supply for a 200 V or 400 V class drive.
• • Two separate batteries for the main power and control power supplies. Main power battery voltage is below
250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives.
• • Two separate batteries. One is used for the main power supply, a second battery supplies the controller via an
optional 24 V Backup Power Supply Unit.
• • A single battery with minimum 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives is used for
the main and control power supply.
Select the configuration that matches your application. Follow the corresponding instructions for wiring and drive
settings. For configurations not covered in the list above, contact your Yaskawa representative or our sales office
directly for consultation. 4
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that the drive and all devices connected to the drive have been shut off prior to
performing and type of maintenance or wiring. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the
drive before touching any components or perform wiring. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is
turned off. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Never remove or install option cards or attempt to replace
the cooling fan while the drive is switched on. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury
NOTICE: Be sure to thoroughly read the instructions for wiring and magnetic contactor sequence described in this section
before setting up the drive for Rescue Operation. Failure to follow these instructions can damage the drive.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Do not use the Rescue Operation feature for extended periods. Failure to comply can result in
drive heat sink overtemperature alarms (oH).

■ Using a Single-Phase 230 Vac UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply)

Follow the instructions when using a single-phase 230 V UPS for Rescue Operation. A 230 V UPS can be used
for both 200 V and 400 V class drives.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 97

4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

Figure 4.16 Wiring Diagram when Using a UPS

Figure 4.17 Magnetic Contactor Sequence

Starting Rescue Operation :
1. Open contactor B.
2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation [H1-xx = 55].
3. Close contactor A.
4. Set the Up/Down command.
Ending Rescue Operation :
1. After the car has stopped, open contactor A.
2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation [H1-xx = 55].
3. Close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.
The drive may fault on a control power supply fault (Uv2) if the UPS can’t provide enough voltage, or if the Light
Load Direction Search is not set properly.

■ Using a Single Battery with Minimum 230 Vdc

Follow the instructions when using one battery to supply both, main circuit and controller. The battery voltage
must be at least 230 Vdc for 400 V class drives, battery voltage of 250 Vdc is recommended.

98 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.7 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications

Figure 4.18 Wiring Diagram when Using a UPS

Figure 4.19 Magnetic Contactor Sequence

Starting Rescue Operation :
1. Open contactor B.
2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation [H1-xx = 55].
3. Close contactor A.
4. Set the Up/Down command.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Ending Rescue Operation :
1. After the car has stopped, open contactor A.
2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation [H1-xx = 55].
3. Close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 99

4.8 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive

4.8 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive

◆ Check before You Energize the Drive
Check the items in Table 4.9 before you energize the drive.
Table 4.9 Items to Check before You Energize the Drive
Items to Check Description

The voltage of the input power supply must be:

Three-phase 400 V class: three-phase 380 Vac to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz, 513 Vdc to 679 Vdc
Input Power Supply Voltage
Correctly wire power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3, or L and N.

Correctly ground the drive and motor.

Connection between Drive Output Make sure that you connected drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in the correct sequence to align with motor terminals U,
Terminals and Motor Terminals V, and W and tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque.

Control Circuit Terminal Wiring Make sure that you connected the drive control circuit terminals in the correct sequence to align with devices and switches and tighten
the screws to a correct tightening torque.

Control Circuit Terminal Status Turn OFF the inputs from all devices and switches connected to the drive control circuit terminals.

Connection between Machinery and Disengage all couplings and belts that connect the motor and machinery.
Motor

◆ Check after You Energize the Drive

Check the items in Table 4.10 after you energize the drive. The keypad display is different depending on drive
status.
Table 4.10 Display Status after You Energize the Drive
Status Display Description

During Usual Operation The LED display shows the frequency reference.

The display is different for different faults. Refer to “Troubleshooting” to remove the cause of the fault.
When the Drive Detects a Fault
The ALM/ERR LED will illuminate.

100 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.9 Keypad Operation

4.9 Keypad Operation

◆ Show the Monitor
Show the frequency reference screen.
Note:

Push and hold to return to frequency reference screen from any screen.

Use these steps to access menu and check drive operation status.

Figure 4.20 How to Monitor the Parameter Setting Values

◆ Check Modified Parameters

Show the frequency reference screen.
Note:

Push and hold to return to frequency reference screen from any screen.
Use Verify mode to view all parameters that are not at default settings. This is very useful when you replace a
drive. This lets you quickly access and re-edit changed parameters.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Figure 4.21 How to Examine the Changed Parameters 4

◆ Set and View Quick Setup Parameters

Show the frequency reference screen.
Note:
Push and hold to return to frequency reference screen from any screen.
The setup mode shows the parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to User Parameter 32]. This lets
you quickly access and change these parameters.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 101

4.9 Keypad Operation

Figure 4.22 Set and View Quick Setup Parameters

Continue to change the parameters or press and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen.

◆ Change Parameter Settings

Show the frequency reference screen in advance.
Note:
Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen from any screen.
This example shows how to change C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1]. Set the parameter to the necessary value.

Figure 4.23 How to Change the Parameter Setting

Continue to change parameters or push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen.

◆ Save a Backup of Parameters

Show the frequency reference screen in advance.
Note:
Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen from any screen.
Use these steps to save a backup of the drive parameters to the keypad.
Making backups of the parameter settings can save time when setting parameters after replacing a drive. If you set
up more than one drive, you can copy the parameter settings from a drive that completed a test run to the other
drives.
Note:
• Make sure that you stop the motor before you back up parameters.
• The drive does not accept Run commands while it is making a backup.
• Set o3-02 = 0 [Copy Allowed Selection = Disabled] to protect the parameters saved in the keypad.

102 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.9 Keypad Operation

Figure 4.24 How to Save Backed-up Parameters

Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen.

◆ Write Backed-up Parameters to the Drive

Show the frequency reference screen in advance.
Note:
Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen from any screen.
Use these steps to write the parameters backed up in the keypad into a different drive.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Note:
• Make sure that you stop the drive before you restore the backed-up parameters.
• The drive does not accept Run commands while it is restoring parameters.

Figure 4.25 Writing backed up parameters

Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen.

◆ Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters

Show the frequency reference screen in advance.
Note:
Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen from any screen.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 103

4.9 Keypad Operation

This procedure verifies that the parameter setting values that were backed up in the keypad agree with the
parameter setting values in the drive.
Note:
• Make sure that you stop the drive before you examine parameters.
• The drive does not accept Run commands while it is restoring parameters.

Figure 4.26 Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters

Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen.

◆ Delete Parameters Backed Up to the Keypad

Show the frequency reference screen in advance.
Note:
Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen from any screen.
Use these steps to erase the parameters backed up in the keypad.

Figure 4.27 How to Erase the Backed-up Parameters

Push and hold to go back to the frequency reference screen.

104 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.10 Auto-Tuning

4.10 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning uses motor characteristics to automatically set drive parameters for vector control. Think about the
type of motor, drive control method, and the motor installation environment and select the best Auto-Tuning
method.
WARNING! Injury to Personnel. Rotational Auto-Tuning rotates the motor at 50% or more of the motor rated frequency. Make
sure that there are no issues related to safety in the area around the drive and motor. Increased motor frequency can cause
serious injury or death.

◆ Precautions before Auto-Tuning

Examine the topics in this section before you start Auto-Tuning.

■ Prepare for Basic Auto-Tuning

• You must input data from the motor nameplate or motor test report to do Auto-Tuning. Make sure that this data
is available before you do Auto-Tuning.
• For best performance, make sure that the drive input supply voltage is equal to or more than the motor rated
voltage.
Note:
Better performance is possible when you use a motor with a rated voltage that is less than the input supply voltage (by 20 V for 200 V
class models or by 40 V for 400 V class models). This is very important when you operate the motor at more than 90% of base speed,
where high torque precision is necessary. If the input power supply is equal to the motor rated voltage, the drive output voltage will not
be sufficient and performance will decrease.

• Push on the keypad to cancel Auto-Tuning.

• If a Safe Disable input signal is input to the drive during Auto-Tuning, Auto-Tuning measurements will not
complete successfully. If this occurs, cancel the Auto-Tuning, then do it again.
• Table 4.11 shows the status of multi-function input/output terminals during Auto-Tuning.
Table 4.11 Status of Input/Output Terminals during Auto-Tuning
Multi-Function
Auto-Tuning Type Mode Parameter Input Multi-Function Output *1

Rotational Rotational Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 0 Disabled Functions the same as during usual operation.
Induction Motor Auto- Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 T1-01 = 1 Disabled

Startup Procedure and Test Run

Tuning
Stationary
Line-to-Line Resistance T1-01 = 2 Disabled Keeps the status at the start of Auto-Tuning.

*1 When you set a terminal to H2-xx = E [MFDO Function Selection = Fault], it will function the same as during usual operation.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. Wire a sequence that will not let a multi-function output terminal open the holding brake during
Stationary Auto-Tuning. If the holding brake is open during Stationary Auto-Tuning, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do Rotational Auto-Tuning, disconnect the load from the motor. The load
can move suddenly and cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Injury to Personnel. Rotational Auto-Tuning rotates the motor at 50% or more of the motor rated frequency. Make
sure that there are no issues related to safety in the area around the drive and motor. Increased motor frequency can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. During Auto-Tuning, the motor will receive high voltage when the motor is stopped. Do not 4
touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is complete. If you touch a motor that is energized, it can cause serious injury or death.

■ Precautions before Rotational Auto-Tuning

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. During Auto-Tuning, the motor will receive high voltage when the motor is stopped. Do not
touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is complete. If you touch a motor that is energized, it can cause serious injury or death.
• Before you do Rotational Auto-Tuning to prevent drive malfunction, uncouple the motor from the load.
• Make sure that the motor magnetic brake is released.
• Make sure that external force from the machine will not cause the motor to rotate.

■ Precautions before Stationary Auto-Tuning

• Make sure that the motor magnetic brake is not open.
• Make sure that external force from the machine will not cause the motor to rotate.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. During Auto-Tuning, the motor will receive high voltage when the motor is stopped. Do not
touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is complete. If you touch a motor that is energized, it can cause serious injury or death.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 105

4.10 Auto-Tuning

■ Automatically Set E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] and E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]
After Stationary Auto-Tuning is complete, use this procedure to do the operation in test mode:
1. Check the E2-02 and E2-03 values on the “Modified Parameters/Fault Log” screen or the “Parameters” screen.
2. Operate the motor in Drive Mode with these conditions:
• Uncouple the motor from the load
• Make sure that you connect all wiring between the drive and motor
• Make sure that a mechanical brake on the motor shaft is not locked
• Keep a constant speed of 30% of E1-06 [Base Frequency] (default value = maximum frequency) or more
for 1 second or longer.
3. After the motor stops, examine the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in the Verify Menu or Parameter Setting
Mode.
4. Make sure that the input data is correct.
When the settings in E2-02 and E2-03 are different than in step 1, the drive set the values automatically.

106 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 4.11 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function)

4.11 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control

Function)
This section gives information about the adjustment procedures to stop hunting or oscillation errors caused by the
control function during a test run. Adjust the applicable parameters as specified by your control method and drive
status.
Note:
This section only lists frequently adjusted parameters. If you must adjust parameters that have a higher degree of precision, contact
Yaskawa.

◆ V/f Control
Table 4.12 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (A1-02 = 0 [V/f])
Issue Possible Solutions Parameter Default Recommended
Setting

• If torque is not sufficient with heavy loads,

decrease the setting value.
• If hunting or oscillation occur with light loads,
increase the setting value. n1-02 [Hunting
Hunting or oscillation at mid-range speeds (10 Prevention Gain 1.00 0.10 - 2.00
Hz to 40 Hz) • If hunting occurs with a low-inductance
motor, for example a motor with a larger Setting]
frame size or a high-frequency motor, lower
the setting value. Set n1-01 = 1 [Hunting
Prevention Selection = Enabled].

• The volume of the motor excitation sound is

too high. • If the volume of the motor excitation sound is
too high, increase the carrier frequency. C6-02 [Carrier
• Hunting or oscillation at low speeds (10 Hz or • If hunting or oscillation occur at low or mid- Frequency Selection] 3 (8 kHz) *1 1 to upper limit value
lower), or at mid-range speeds (10 Hz to 40
range speeds, decrease the carrier frequency.
Hz)

• If torque or speed response are slow, decrease

• Unsatisfactory motor torque and speed C4-02 [Torque
the setting value.
response Compensation Delay 200 ms *2 100 ms to 1000 ms
• If hunting or oscillation occur, increase the Time]
• Hunting or oscillation
setting value.

• Torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) is not • If torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) is not
sufficient, increase the setting value. C4-01 [Torque
sufficient. 1.00 0.50 - 1.50
• If hunting or oscillation occur with light loads, Compensation Gain]
• Hunting or oscillation
decrease the setting value.

Startup Procedure and Test Run

• If you use the drive with an IE3 high Decrease the setting value in these conditions:
efficiency motor, the current that is more than C4-01 [Torque
• Drive trips at overload. 1.00 0.00 - 1.00
the motor rated current will flow and trip at Compensation Gain]
overload. Hunting or oscillation. • Hunting or oscillation.

• If torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) is not • E1-08 [Mid Point A

• Torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) is not sufficient, increase the setting value. Voltage] • E1-08: 17.2 V *3
sufficient. Default setting +/- 5 V
• If there is large initial vibration at start up, • E1-10 [Minimum • E1-10: 7.4 V *3 *4
• Large initial vibration at start up.
decrease the setting value Output Voltage]

Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current], E2-02 [Motor

Speed precision is unsatisfactory. Rated Slip], and E2-03 [Motor No-Load C3-01 [Slip 0.0 (no slip 0.5 - 1.5
Compensation Gain] compensation)
Current], then adjust C3-01.

*1 The default setting changes when the settings for o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] change.
*2 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and o2-04 change.
*3 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 and E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] change. 4
*4 Recommended settings are for 200 V class drives. Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives.

◆ Open Loop Vector Control Method

In Open Loop Vector Control, keep C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] at its default setting (1.00).
If you cannot get speed precision during regeneration in Open Loop Vector Control, set C3-04 = 1 [Slip
Compensation at Regen = Enabled Above 6 Hz].

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 107

4.11 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function)

Table 4.13 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (A1-02 = 2 [OLV])
Issue Possible Solutions Parameter Default Recommended
Setting

• To increase the speed of torque or speed

response, decrease the setting value in 0.05-
unit increments. n2-01 [Automatic Freq
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
Regulator Gain]
• If hunting or oscillation occur, decrease the
setting value in 0.05-unit increments.

• To increase the speed of torque or speed

response, decrease the setting value in 10 ms
• Unsatisfactory motor torque and speed increments and examine the response.
response • If hunting or oscillation occur or if the load
• Hunting or oscillation at mid-range speeds inertia is too much, increase the setting value
(10 Hz to 40 Hz) in 50 ms increments and examine the
response. n2-02 [Automatic Freq
Note: Regulator Time 1] 50 ms 50 ms to 2000 ms
Make sure that this parameter setting is: n2-
02 ≤ n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time
2].
When you adjust n2-02, you must also
increase the C4-02 [Torque Compensation
Delay Time] value by the same ratio.

• If speed response is slow, decrease the setting

• Speed response is slow. value in 10 ms increments. C3-02 [Slip
Compensation Delay 200 ms *1 100 ms to 500 ms
• Speed is not stable. • If speed is not stable, increase the value in 10 Time]
ms increments.

• If speed is too slow, increase the setting value

in 0.1 unit increments. C3-01 [Slip
Speed precision is unsatisfactory. Compensation Gain] 1.0 *2 0.5 to 1.5
• If speed is too fast, decrease the setting value
in 0.1 unit increments.

• The volume of the motor excitation sound is • If the volume of the motor excitation sound is
too high. too high, increase the carrier frequency. C6-02 [Carrier
3 (8 kHz) 1 to upper limit value
• Hunting or oscillation at low speeds (10 Hz or • If hunting or oscillation occur at low speeds, Frequency Selection]
lower) decrease the carrier frequency.

• If torque or speed response are slow, increase E1-08 [Mid Point A

25.0 V
the setting value. Voltage]
• Torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) is not • If there is large initial vibration at start up,
sufficient. speed response is slow. decrease the setting value Default setting +/- 2 V
• Speed response is slow. Note: *3
E1-10 [Minimum
• Large initial vibration at start up. 5V
If you set the value too high, the drive can Output Voltage]
output a large torque reference although the
load is light.

*1 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
change.
*2 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] change.
*3 Recommended settings are for 200 V class drives. Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives.

108 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5
Standards Compliance
This chapter gives information about how to make the machines and devices that use this
product comply with European standards and UL standards.

5.1 Section Safety ......................................................................................................... 110

5.2 European Standards.............................................................................................. 112
5.3 Safe Disable Input ..................................................................................................125
5.4 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with one Motor Contactor..................................132
5.5 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with no Motor Contactor....................................133

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 109

5.1 Section Safety

5.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate the drive when covers are missing. Replace covers and shields before you
operate the drive. Use the drive only as specified by the instructions.
Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the
drive. If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
If you do not ground the equipment correctly, it can cause serious injury or death if you touch the motor case.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized.
If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing
and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings.
Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect
connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.
Tighten screws at an angle in the specified range shown in this manual.
If you tighten the screws at an angle not in the specified range, you can have loose connections that can cause
damage to the terminal block or start a fire and cause serious injury or death.
Damage to Equipment
Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified
range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate.
Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.
Fire Hazard
Do not put flammable or combustible materials on top of the drive and do not install the drive
near flammable or combustible materials. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible
material.
Flammable and combustible materials can start a fire and cause serious injury or death.

110 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Crush Hazard
Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive.
If you do not use correct safety equipment, it can cause serious injury or death.
Electrical Shock Hazard
After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive or
operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and
make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to
find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa
before you energize the drive or peripheral devices.
If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or
death.

NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not break the electrical connection between the drive and the motor when the drive is
outputting voltage.
Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive.
Before you connect a dynamic braking option to the drive, make sure that qualified personnel
read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual
(TOBPC72060001).
If you do not read and obey the manual or if personnel are not qualified, it can cause damage to the drive and
braking circuit.
Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral
devices.
Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive.
Note:
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the
drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

Standards Compliance

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 111

5.2 European Standards

5.2 European Standards

Figure 5.1 CE Mark

The CE Mark identifies that the product meets environmental and safety standards in the European Union.
Products manufactured, sold, or imported in the European Union must display the CE Mark.
European Union standards include standards for electrical appliances (Low Voltage Directive), standards for
electrical noise (EMC Directive), and standards for machinery (Machinery Directive).
This product displays the CE Mark in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive, the EMC Directive, and the
Machinery Directive.
Table 5.1 Harmonized Standards
European Directive Harmonized Standard

CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

EN 61800-5-1
2014/35/EU

EMC Directive
EN 61800-3
2014/30/EU

• EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (PL e (Cat.III))

Machinery Directive
• EN 62061 (SILCL3)
2006/42/EC
• EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3)

Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances (RoHS)

EN IEC 63000
2011/65/EU

The customer must display the CE Mark on the final device containing this product. Customers must verify that
the final device complies with EU standards.
Table 5.2 Other Applicable Standards
European Directive Applicable Standards

YASKAWA CR700 series meets the requirements for IE2 efficiency according to the European regulation 2019/
EU ErP Directive
1781.
2009/125/EC
The losses and the efficiency class were determined in accordance with EN 61800-9-2

◆ CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

It has been confirmed that this product complies with the CE Low Voltage Directive by conducting a test
according to EN 61800-5-1.
The following conditions must be satisfied for machines and devices incorporating this product to comply with
the CE Low Voltage Directive.

■ Area of Use
Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in IEC/
CE 60664.

■ Guarding Against Debris

When you install IP20/UL Open type drives, use an enclosure that does not let unwanted material enter the drive
from above or below.

■ Wiring Diagram
Refer to Figure 5.2 for an example of a drive that is wired to comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive.

112 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.2 European Standards

Standards Compliance

Figure 5.2 Wiring Diagram for CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

*1 Use terminals B1, B2, -, +1, and +2 to connect options to the drive.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Only connect factory-recommended devices or circuits to drive terminals B1, B2, -, +1, and +2.
Do not connect an AC power supply lines to these terminals. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious
injury or death from fire.
*2 For circuit protection, the main circuit is separated from the surface case that can touch the main circuit.
*3 The control circuit is a Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit. Separate this circuit from other circuits with reinforced insulation. Make
sure that the Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit is connected as specified.
*4 Reinforced insulation separates the output terminals from other circuits. Users can also connect circuits that are not Safety Extra-Low
Voltage circuits if the drive output is 250 Vac 1 A maximum or 30 Vdc 1 A maximum.
*5 Set L8-05 = 1 [Output Phase Loss Protect Select = Enabled] or set the wiring sequence to prevent input phase loss.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 113

5.2 European Standards

■ Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local
safety regulations. The EN 61800-5-1: 2007 standard specifies that users must wire the power supply to automatically turn off
when the protective ground wire disconnects. If you turn on the internal EMC filter, the leakage current of the drive will be more
than 3.5 mA. You can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm 2 (copper wire).
If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Only connect factory-recommended devices or circuits to drive terminals B1, B2, -, +1,
and +2. Do not connect AC power to these terminals. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious injury or death
from fire.
Note:
• The recommended wire gauges are based on drive continuous current ratings with 75 °C (167 °F) 600 V class 2 heat-resistant indoor
PVC wire. Assume these conditions:
–Ambient temperature: 40 °C (104 °F) maximum
–Wiring distance: 100 m (3281 ft) maximum
–Normal Duty rated current value
• Refer to the instruction manual for each device for recommended wire gauges to connect peripheral devices or options to terminals +1,
+2, -, B1, and B2. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if the recommended wire gauges for the peripheral devices or
options are out of the range of the applicable gauges for the drive.
Wire Selection Precautions
Think about line voltage drop before selecting wire gauges. Select wire gauges that drop the voltage by 2% or less
of the rated voltage. Increase the wire gauge and the cable length when the risk of voltage drops increases.
Calculate line voltage drop with this formula:
Line voltage drop (V) = × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wiring distance (m) × motor rated current (A) × 10-3.
Precautions during Wiring
• Refer to “Yaskawa AC Drive Option Braking Unit, Braking Resistor Unit Instruction Manual
(TOBPC72060001)” for information about wire gauges and tightening torques to connect braking resistor units.
• Use terminals +1 and - to connect a regenerative converter or regenerative unit.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals +1 or -. Use terminals B1 and B2 for the braking resistor
connections. If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit and
serious injury or death.
Screw Shape
These tables use icons in Table 5.3 to show the shapes of the screw heads.
Table 5.3 Icons to Identify Screw Shapes
Icon Screw Shape

+/-

Slotted (-)

Hex socket cap (WAF: 5 mm)

114 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.2 European Standards

Three-Phase 200 V Class - Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques for CE Compliance

Wire Terminal Screw

Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge Stripping Tightening Torque
Model Terminal Length *1
mm2 mm2 Size Shape N∙m (in∙lb)
mm

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 2.5 - 6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
2018 -, +1, +2 6 4 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.2 - 1.5
6 *2 2.5 - 6 *2 - M4
(10.6 - 13.3)

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 4 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 4 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
2025 -, +1, +2 10 2.5 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.0 - 2.5
6 6 - 16 - M5
(17.7 - 22.1)

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 2.5 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 2.5 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.3 - 2.5
2033 -, +1, +2 16 4 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 4 2.5 - 6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.0 - 2.5
10 6 - 16 - M5
(17.7 - 22.1)

2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 4 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

Standards Compliance
2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 4 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

• ≤ 25 mm2
2.3 - 2.5
(19.8 - 22)
2047 -, +1, +2 25 6 - 35 18 M5
• 35 mm2 ≤
4.1 - 4.5
(36 - 40)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 10 4 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15) 5
5.4 - 6.0
10 10 - 25 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 6 - 35 20 M6
(45 - 49)

5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 6 - 25 20 M6
(45 - 49)

5 - 5.5
2060 -, +1, +2 35 10 - 50 20 M6
(45 - 49)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 10 4 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

5.4 - 6.0
16 10 - 25 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 115

5.2 European Standards

Wire Terminal Screw

Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge Stripping Tightening Torque
Model Terminal Length *1
mm2 mm2 Size Shape N∙m (in∙lb)
mm

5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 10 - 50 20 M6
(45 - 49)

5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 10 - 35 20 M6
(45 - 49)

5 - 5.5
2075 -, +1, +2 50 16 - 70 20 M6
(45 - 49)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 16 4 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

5.4 - 6.0
16 10 - 25 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

*1 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown.
*2 If you turn on the internal EMC filter, the leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA. Use the closed-loop crimp terminals
to connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 (copper wire).
Three-Phase 400 V Class - Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques for CE Compliance

Wire Terminal Screw

Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge Stripping Tightening Torque
Model Terminal Length *1
mm2 mm2 Size Shape N∙m (in∙lb)
mm

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
4009 -, +1, +2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.2 - 1.5
4 *2 2.5 - 6 *2 - M4
(10.6 - 13.3)

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
4015 -, +1, +2 4 2.5 - 6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.0 - 2.5
4 *2 2.5 - 16 - M5
(17.7 - 22.1)

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 2.5 - 6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 2.5 - 6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
4018 -, +1, +2 4 4-6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.0 - 2.5
4 *2 4 - 16 - M5
(17.7 - 22.1)

116 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.2 European Standards

Wire Terminal Screw

Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge Stripping Tightening Torque
Model Terminal Length *1
mm2 mm2 Size Shape N∙m (in∙lb)
mm

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 4 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 4 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.3 - 2.5
4024 -, +1, +2 10 2.5 - 16 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 2.5 - 4 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

5.4 - 6.0
6 *2 6 - 16 *2 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 4 - 16 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 2.5 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

2.3 - 2.5
4031 -, +1, +2 16 4 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 4 2.5 - 6 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

5.4 - 6.0
10 6 - 16 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 4 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 4 - 16 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

2.3 - 2.5
4039 -, +1, +2 16 6 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 6 4 - 10 10 M4
(13.5 - 15)

5.4 - 6.0
10 6 - 16 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

• ≤ 25 mm2
2.3 - 2.5
(19.8 - 22)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 6 - 35 18 M5
• 35 mm2 ≤
4.1 - 4.5
(36 - 40)

Standards Compliance
2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 4 - 25 18 M5
(19.8 - 22)

• ≤ 25 mm2
4045 2.3 - 2.5
(19.8 - 22)
-, +1, +2 25 6 - 35 18 M5
• 35 mm2 ≤
4.1 - 4.5
(36 - 40)

B1, B2 10 2.5 - 16 10 M4
1.5 - 1.7
(13.5 - 15)
5
5.4 - 6.0
10 6 - 16 - M6
(47.8 - 53.1)

*1 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown.
*2 If you turn on the internal EMC filter, the leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA. Use the closed-loop crimp terminals
to connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 (copper wire).

■ Connect a Fuse to the Input Side (Primary Side)

The drive circuit protection must comply with EN 61800-5-1 for protection against a short circuit in the internal
circuitry. Connect semiconductor fuses on the input side for branch circuit protection.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive
or operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and make sure that all indicators
are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of
the problem, contact Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices. If you do not fix the problem before you
operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 117

5.2 European Standards

Three-Phase 200 V Class - Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Semiconductor Protection Fuse Semiconductor Protection Fuse

Drive Model Rated Current Drive Model Rated Current
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann

2018 FWH-90B 2047 FWH-200B

2025 FWH-100B 2060 FWH-200B

2033 FWH-150B 2075 FWH-225A

Three-Phase 400 V Class - Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Semiconductor Protection Fuse Semiconductor Protection Fuse

Drive Model Rated Current Drive Model Rated Current
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann

4009 FWH-90B 4031 FWH-175B

4015 FWH-80B 4039 FWH-200B

4018 FWH-100B 4045 FWH-200B

4024 FWH-125B

■ CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input

To comply with CE Standards, install a fuse for the DC power supply input.
Figure 5.3 shows a wiring example for a DC power supply that has two drives connected in parallel.

Figure 5.3 Wiring Example for DC Power Supply Input

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not ground the main circuit bus. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• Install a fuse for each drive when operating more than one drive. If one fuse blows, replace all fuses.
• Install the external filter (system) to comply with the EMC Directive.
Three-Phase 200 V Class - Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Semiconductor Protection Fuse Semiconductor Protection Fuse

Drive Model Rated Current Drive Model Rated Current
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann

2018 FWH-90B 2047 FWH-200B

2025 FWH-100B 2060 FWH-200B

2033 FWH-150B 2075 FWH-225A

Three-Phase 400 V Class - Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Semiconductor Protection Fuse Semiconductor Protection Fuse

Drive Model Rated Current Drive Model Rated Current
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann

4009 FWH-90B 4031 FWH-175B

4015 FWH-80B 4039 FWH-200B

4018 FWH-100B 4045 FWH-200B

4024 FWH-125B

118 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.2 European Standards

◆ EMC Directive
Use drives with built-in EMC filters or install external EMC filters to the drive input side to comply with the
EMC Directive.
Drives with built-in EMC filters (models 2xxxE, 4xxxE) were tested in accordance with European standard EN
61800-3, and comply with the EMC Directive.

■ Install a Drive to Conform to the EMC Directive

Install drive models 2xxxE, and 4xxxE with this procedure to comply with the EMC Directive when the drive is a
single unit or installed in a larger device.
1. Install the drive on a grounded metal plate.
2. Wire the drive and motor.
3. Ground the wire shielding on the drive side and motor side.

A - Drive D - Metal conduit

B - Wiring length *1 E - Grounding wire
C - Motor
Figure 5.4 Wiring the Drive and Motor
*1 The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is:
• 2xxxE, 4xxxE: 20 m (65.6 ft)
Note:
• Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit.
• Keep the cable between the drive and motor and the grounding wire as short as possible.
4. Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate.
Note:
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications or local safety standards.

Standards Compliance

5
A - Braided shield cable C - Cable clamp (conductive)
B - Metal plate

Figure 5.5 Ground the Shield

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 119

5.2 European Standards

A - Grounding surface (Remove any paint or F- Motor

sealant.) G- Motor cable
B - Enclosure panel H- Cable clamp
C - Metal plate I- Grounding wire
D - Drive
E - Shielded wire
Figure 5.6 Install a Drive with a Built-in EMC Filter
Ground Wiring
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the
internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of drive models BxxxE, 2xxxE, and 4xxxE to
comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter or if there is high resistance grounding. If you turn ON the EMC
filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.
Enable the Internal EMC Filter
On drive models 2xxxE, and 4xxxE, move the screw or screws to turn ON and OFF (enable and disable) the EMC
filter.
Make sure that the symmetric grounding network is applied, and install the screw or screws in the ON position to
enable the built-in EMC filter in compliance with the EMC Directive. The EMC filter switch screw or screws are
installed in the OFF position by default.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect all power to the drive, wait for the time specified on the warning label, and
check the drive for dangerous voltages before you remove covers or touch EMC filter screws. If you touch the screws when
there are dangerous voltages, it will cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the
internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of drive models BxxxE, 2xxxE, and 4xxxE to
comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter or if there is high resistance grounding. If you turn ON the EMC
filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Connect the ground cable correctly. If you touch electrical equipment that is not grounded,
it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: To disable the internal EMC filter, move the screws from ON to OFF and then tighten to the specified torque. If you
fully remove the screws or tighten the screws to an incorrect torque, it can cause drive failure.
NOTICE: Move the EMC switch screw or screws to the OFF position for networks that are not symmetrically grounded. If the
screws are not in the correct position, it can cause damage to the drive.

120 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.2 European Standards

Figure 5.7 Symmetric Grounding

NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you use the drive with a non-grounding, high-resistance grounding, or asymmetric-
grounding network, put the EMC Filter screw or screws in the OFF position to disable the built-in EMC filter. If you do not disable
the built-in EMC filter, it will cause damage to the drive.
Table 5.4 shows asymmetric grounding networks.
Table 5.4 Asymmetric Grounding
Type of Grounding Diagram

Grounded at the corner of the delta connection

Grounded at the middle of the side

Single-phase, grounded at the end point

Three-phase variable transformer without solidly grounded neutral

Standards Compliance

A - SW (ON) B - SW (OFF)

Screw Size

M3 × 20

Figure 5.8 EMC Filter Switch Location for Models 2018E, 4009E

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 121

5.2 European Standards

A - SW (ON) B - SW (OFF)

Screw Size

M4 × 20

Figure 5.9 EMC Filter Switch Location for Models 2025E - 2075E, 4015E - 4045E
If you lose an EMC filter switch screw, use the correct replacement screw and install the new screw with the
correct tightening torque.
NOTICE: Only use the screws specified in this manual. If you use screws that are not approved, it can cause damage to the
drive.

■ Installing the External EMC Noise Filter

Drive models 2xxxA, and 4xxxA must align with the conditions in this section to comply with EN 61800-3.
Connect an EMC noise filter that complies with European standards as specified by Yaskawa to the input side
(primary side). Refer to External EMC Noise Filter Selection on page 124 to select the correct EMC noise filter.
Use this procedure to install an EMC noise filter to make equipment and devices added to the drive comply with
the EMC Directive.
1. Install the drive and EMC noise filter on the same grounded metal plate.
2. Wire the drive and motor.
3. Ground the wire shielding on the drive side and motor side.

A - Drive D - Metal conduit

B - 10 m (32.8 ft) maximum E - Grounding wire
C - Motor
Figure 5.10 Wiring the Drive and Motor
Note:
• Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit.
• Keep the wire as short as possible. The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is:
–2xxxA, 4xxxA: 10 m (32.8 ft)
• Keep the grounding wire as short as possible.
4. Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate.
Note:
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications or local safety standards.

122 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.2 European Standards

A - Braided shield cable C - Cable clamp (conductive)

B - Metal plate
Figure 5.11 Ground the Shield

Standards Compliance
A - Grounding surface (Remove any paint or F - Motor
sealant.) G - Motor cable (Braided shield cable: 10 m (32.8 ft)
B - Enclosure panel maximum) 5
C - Metal plate H - Cable clamp
D - Drive I - Grounding wire
E - Ground the shield. J - EMC noise filter

Figure 5.12 EMC Noise Filter and Drive Installation Procedure

5. Connect the DC reactor to decrease harmonic distortion.
Ground Wiring
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the
internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 123

5.2 European Standards

External EMC Noise Filter Selection

Table 5.5 External EMC Noise Filter (2xxxA)
Drive model EMC Noise Filter Model Quantity Manufacturer

2018 FS23637-24-07 1 Schaffner

2025 FS23637-52-07 *1 1 Schaffner

2033 FS23637-52-07 *1 1 Schaffner

2047 FS23637-68-07 *1 1 Schaffner

2060 FS23637-80-07 *1 1 Schaffner

2075 FB-40105A 1 Block

*1 When you install an external EMC noise filter, change the terminals or use the junction terminal.
Table 5.6 External EMC Noise Filter (4xxxA)
Drive model EMC Noise Filter Model Quantity Manufacturer

4009 FS23639-15-07 1 Schaffner

4015 FS23639-30-07 *1 1 Schaffner

4018 FS23639-30-07 *1 1 Schaffner

4024 FS23639-50-07 *1 1 Schaffner

4031 FS23639-50-07 *1 1 Schaffner

4039 FB-40060A 1 Block

4045 FB-40060A 1 Block

*1 When you install an external EMC noise filter, change the terminals or use the junction terminal.

124 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.3 Safe Disable Input

5.3 Safe Disable Input

◆ Overview
This section gives precautions to support the Safe Disable input. Contact Yaskawa for more information.
The safety function complies with the standards shown in Table 5.7.
Table 5.7 Applied Unified Standards
Function Unified Standards

EN 62061 (SILCL3)
Functional Safety
EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3)

Machine Safety ISO/EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (Cat.3, PL e)

EMC EN 61800-3

LVD EN 61800-5-1

Note:
SIL = Safety Integrity Level.
Table 5.8 Applied Standards
Function Applied Standards

RoHS EN/IEC 63000

EU ErP Directive 2009/125/EC

This product meets the requirements for IE2 efficiency according to the European regulation 2019/1781.
The losses and the efficiency class were determined in accordance with EN 61800-9-2.

◆ Safe Disable Specifications

The Safe Disable input provides the stop function that complies with “Safe Torque Off” as specified by IEC/EN
61800-5-2. The Safe Disable input meets the requirements of ISO/EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (Cat.3, PL e) and IEC/
EN 61508. It also has a safety status monitor to detect safety circuit errors.
When you install the drive as a component in a system, you must make sure that the system complies with the
applicable safety standards.
Refer to Table 5.9 for safety function specifications.
Table 5.9 Safe Disable Specifications

Standards Compliance
Item Description

• Input: 2
Safe Disable input (H1, H2)
Signal ON level: 18 Vdc to 28 Vdc
Input/Output Signal OFF level: -4 Vdc to +4 Vdc
• Output: 1
MFDO safety monitor output for external device monitor (EDM)

Response time from when the input opens to when the drive output stops 3 ms or less

Response time from when the H1 and H2 terminal inputs open to when the EDM
signal operates
30 ms or less 5
Less frequent operation request mode PFD = 1.38E-5
Failure probability
Frequent operation request mode or
PFH = 3.35E-9
continuous mode

The Safe Disable input complies with the performance level requirements of EN ISO 13849-
Performance level
1.

HFT (hardware fault tolerance) N=1

Type of subsystem Type B

MTTFD High

DCavg Medium

Mission time 10 years

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 125

5.3 Safe Disable Input

Note:
EDM = External Device Monitoring
PFD = Probability of Failure on Demand
PFH = Probability of Dangerous Failure per Hour

◆ Precautions and Notes

DANGER! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use the Safe Disable function in the safety system of a machine, do a full risk
assessment for the system to make sure that all parts of the system comply with applicable safety standards. Incorrect
application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death.
DANGER! Sudden Movement Hazard. If the output circuit of the drive is damaged and the Safe Disable function turns OFF the
drive output to a permanent magnet (PM) motor, the motor can rotate 180 electrical degrees. Prevent damage to equipment and
injury to personnel during this condition. Sudden motor movement can cause serious injury or death. It is possible for current to
flow through the motor winding in these conditions.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. You cannot depend on the Safe Disable function to prevent electrical shock. Disconnect all
power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before you remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous
voltages before servicing or repair work. If you do work on the drive when it is energized and there is no cover over the
electronic circuits, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Although the Safe Disable function is in operation, gravity or other external forces in the
vertical axis can move the motor. Incorrect application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not use the drive output signals to control external holding brakes or dynamic
brakes for functional safety. Use a system that conforms to the functional safety requirements. Incorrect application of the Safe
Disable function can cause serious injury or death. Systems that use drive output signals (including EDM) for safety are not safe
because drive output signals are not safety components.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Connect the Safe Disable inputs to the devices as specified by the safety requirements.
If you connect the Safe Disable inputs incorrectly, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. To use the Safe Disable inputs, remove the jumpers between terminals H1-HC and H2-
HC. If the Safe Disable circuit does not work correctly, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you clear the Safe Disable input, make sure that the Safe Disable Monitor output
operates correctly as the specification for Safe Disable function. If the Safe Disable circuit does not operate correctly, it can
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Regularly examine the Safe Disable input and all other safety features. A system that
does not operate correctly can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Only let approved personnel who know about the drive, instruction manual, and safety
standards wire, examine, and maintain the Safe Disable input. If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Only use the Safe Disable Monitor (multi-function output terminal set to the EDM
function) to monitor the Safe Disable status or to find a malfunction in the Safe Disable inputs. The monitor output is not a safety
output. If you use the Safe Disable Monitor incorrectly, it can cause death or serious injury.
Note:
• When you use a drive with a built in safety function, you must replace it 10 years after first use.
• A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the “Safe Torque Off” status. Set the
OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 3 ms. The drive may not be able to switch to the “Safe Torque Off” status if
terminals H1 and H2 are only open for less than 3 ms.

◆ Safe Disable Circuit

The Safe Disable circuit has two isolated channels (terminals H1 and H2) that stop the output transistors. The
input can use the internal power supply of the drive.
Set the EDM function to one of the MFDO terminals [H2-xx = 21 or 121] to monitor the status of the Safe
Disable function. This is the “Safe Disable monitor output function”.

126 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.3 Safe Disable Input

Figure 5.13 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example

◆ Connect Safe Disable Input Contacts to Multiple Drives

■ To Use the Drive Internal Power Supply
Figure 5.14 shows an example of how to connect Safe Disable contacts.
From the terminals HC-SN of drive 1, supply the power for the Safe Disable function for the applicable drives.
These conditions limit the number of units to connect:
• Internal power supply capacity
• Number of MFDIs used

Standards Compliance
• Supply current to the external sensors

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 127

5.3 Safe Disable Input

Safety switch
Drive 1
S2
HC
Safe Disable input
SN
S1
H1
H2

E(G)
Open Safety
controller

Reset/
feedback
input Drive 2
HC
SN

H1
H2
Connect MFDO terminals set to
Safe Torque OFF [H2 - xx = 21] in series. E(G)
Safety Electronic
Device Monitor output

Drive 3
HC
SN

H1
H2

E(G)

Figure 5.14 Connection Example to Use the Internal Power Supply

■ To Use 24 V External Power Supply

Figure 5.15 shows an example of how to connect Safe Disable contacts. These conditions limit the number of
units to connect:
• External power supply capacity
• Number of MFDIs used
• Supply current to the external sensors

128 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.3 Safe Disable Input

Figure 5.15 Connection Example to Use 24 V External Power Supply

■ Number of Possible Drives to Connect

Power Supply Digital Inputs 24 V Output Number of Drives

Yes Yes *1 1
(7-channel input) No 13
Internal power supply
(Drive 1) Yes *1 4
No

Standards Compliance
No 17

External power supply - Different for different external power

supply capacities *2

*1 This is when you use a maximum of 150 mA.

*2 24 V, 12 mA is necessary for each drive.
Use this formula to calculate the number of units to connect:

5
• n: Number of units to connect
• Iomax: Maximum current that the power supply can supply (234 mA for the internal power supply)
• IMFDI: Current consumed per MFDI (6 mA)
• nMFDI: Maximum number of MFDIs that can be activated at the same time (maximum of 7-channel)
• Isensor: Current externally supplied for sensor power supply (maximum of 150 mA)
• Isafety: Current consumed by Safe Disable terminals H1 and H2 (12 mA)
Note:
Round the values to the first decimal place.

◆ Enabling and Disabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”)

Refer to Figure 5.16 for an example of drive operation when the drive changes from “Safe Torque Off” status to
usual operation.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 129

5.3 Safe Disable Input

Figure 5.16 Safe Disable Operation

■ Switching from Usual Operation to “Safe Torque Off”

Turn OFF (open) safety input terminal H1 or H2 to enable the Safe Disable function. When the Safe Disable
function is enabled while the motor is operating, the drive output and motor torque turn off and the motor always
coasts to stop. The b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection] setting does not have an effect on the stopping method.
The “Safe Torque Off” status is only possible with the Safe Disable function. Clear the Run command to stop the
drive. Turning off drive output (a baseblock condition) ≠ “Safe Torque Off”.
Note:
• When it is necessary to ramp to stop the motor, do not turn off terminals H1 and H2 until the motor fully stops. This will prevent the
motor from coasting to stop during usual operation.
• A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the “Safe Torque Off” status. Set the
OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 3 ms. The drive may not be able to switch to the “Safe Torque Off” status if
terminals H1 and H2 are only open for less than 3 ms.

■ Going from “Safe Torque Off” to Usual Operation

The safety input will only release when there is no Run command.
• During Stop
When the Safe Disable function is triggered during stop, close the circuit between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC
to disable “Safe Torque Off”. Enter the Run command after the drive stops correctly.
• During Run
If you trigger the Safe Disable function during run, clear the Run command, then close the circuit between
terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to disable “Safe Torque Off”. Enter the Stop command, then enter the Run
command when terminals H1 and H2 are activated.

◆ Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Keypad Display

Refer to Table 5.10 for information about the relation between the input channel status, Safety monitor output
status, and drive output status.
Table 5.10 Safe Disable Input and External Device Monitor (EDM) Terminal Status
Input Channel Status Safety Monitor Output Status

Input 1 Input 2 MFDO Terminal MFDO Terminal Drive Output Status Keypad Display READY LED
(H1-HC) (H2-HC) (H2-xx = 21) (H2-xx = 121)

ON ON Baseblock
OFF ON Normally displayed READY: Illuminated
(Close the circuit) (Close the circuit) (Drive ready)

OFF ON Safety status SToF

OFF ON ALM/ERR: Flashing
(Open) (Close the circuit) (STo) (Flashing)

ON OFF Safety status SToF

OFF ON ALM/ERR: Flashing
(Close the circuit) (Open) (STo) (Flashing)

OFF OFF Safety status STo

ON OFF READY: Flashing
(Open) (Open) (STo) (Flashing)

■ Safety Function Status Monitor

The drive Safety monitor output sends a feedback signal about the status of the Safety function. The Safety
monitor output is one of the possible settings available for the MFDO terminals. If there is damage to the Safe
Disable circuit, a controller (PLC or safety relay) must read this signal as an input signal to hold the “Safe Torque
Off” status. This will help verify the condition of the safety circuit. Refer to the manual for the safety device for
more information about the Safety function.

130 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.3 Safe Disable Input

It is possible to switch polarity of the Safety monitor output signal with the MFDO function settings. Refer to
Table 5.10 for setting instructions.

■ Keypad Display
If the two input channels are OFF (Open), the keypad will flash STo [Safe Torque OFF].
If there is damage to the Safe disable circuit or the drive, the keypad will flash SToF [Safe Torque OFF
Hardware] when one input channel is OFF (Open), and the other is ON (Short circuit). When you use the Safe
disable circuit correctly, the keypad will not show SToF.
If there is damage to the drive, the keypad will show SCF [Safety Circuit Fault] when the drive detects a fault in
the Safe disable circuit. Refer to the chapter on Troubleshooting for more information.

◆ Validating the Safe Disable Function

After you replace parts or do maintenance on the drive, complete all necessary wiring to start the drive, then
follow these steps to test the Safe Disable input. Keep a record of the test results.
1. When the two input channels are OFF (Open), make sure that the keypad flashes STo [Safe Torque OFF], and
make sure that the motor is not running.
2. Monitor the ON/OFF status of the input channels and make sure that MFDO set to the EDM function operates
as shown in Table 5.10.
If one or more of the these items are true, the ON/OFF status of the MFDO may not display correctly on the
keypad.
• Incorrect parameter settings.
• A problem with an external device.
• The external wiring has a short circuit or is disconnected.
• There is damage to the device.
Find the cause and repair the problem to correctly display the status.
3. Make sure that the EDM signal operates during usual operation as shown in Table 5.10.

Standards Compliance

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 131

5.4 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with one Motor Contactor

5.4 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with one Motor Contactor

You can use the safe disable circuit to install the drives in an elevator system using only one motor contactor
instead of two. In such a system, follow these guidelines to comply with EN81-20:
• Design the circuit so that the inputs H1 and H2 are opened and the drive output shuts off when the safety chain
is interrupted.
• Program a drive digital output as Safe Disable feedback [H2-xx = 58]. Implement this feedback signal in the
contactor supervision circuit of the controller that prevents a restart in case of a fault in the Safe Disable circuit
or the motor contactor.
• Select and install all contactors and wiring in compliance with EN81-20.
• Use the safe disable inputs H1 and H2 to enable/disable the drive. Set the input logic to Source Mode.

Figure 5.17 Wiring Example

Note:
• The drive output will immediately shut off when either of the inputs H1 or H2 is opened. In this case the brake should apply
immediately in order to prevent uncontrolled movement of the elevator.
• Terminals H1 or H2 must be closed prior to setting the Up/Down command.

132 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 5.5 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with no Motor Contactor

5.5 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with no Motor Contactor

You can use the safe disable circuit to install the drives in an elevator system using no motor contactor. In such a
system, follow these guidelines to comply with EN81-20:
• Design the circuit so that the inputs H1 and H2 are opened and the drive output shuts off when the safety chain
is interrupted.
• Use the safe disable inputs H1 and H2 to enable/disable the drive. Set the input logic to Source Mode.

Figure 5.18 Wiring Example

Note:
• The drive output will immediately shut off when either of the inputs H1 or H2 is opened. In this case the brake should apply

Standards Compliance
immediately in order to prevent uncontrolled movement of the elevator.
• Terminals H1 or H2 must be closed prior to setting the Up/Down command.
• A drive digital output must be programmed as Safe Disable feedback [H2-xx = 58]. This feedback signal can be implemented in the
contactor supervision circuit of the controller that monitors a fault in the Safe Disable circuit.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 133

5.5 EN81-20 Compliant Circuit with no Motor Contactor

134 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6
Network Communications
6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications ..............................................................136

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 135

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

This section gives detailed information about the parameters, error codes and communication procedures for
MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

◆ Configure Master/Slave
You can use the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol for serial communication with programmable controllers (PLC).
The MEMOBUS/Modbus communication uses one master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slave drives. Serial
communications usually starts with a signal from the master to the slave drives.
A slave drive that receives a command from the master does the specified function and then sends a response back
to the master. You must set the address number for each slave drive before you start signal communications to
make sure that the master uses the correct address numbers.

A - Master (PLC) B - Slave (drive)

Figure 6.1 PLC and Drive Connection Example

◆ Communication Specifications
Table 6.1 lists the specifications for the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Table 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Specifications
Item Specification

Interface RS-485

Synchronization method Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)

Communications speed:1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 76.8, 115.2 kbps

Data length: 8 bit (fixed)

Communication parameter
Parity: even, odd, none

Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)

Communication protocol MEMOBUS/Modbus standard (RTU mode only)

Number of possible units to connect Maximum: 31 units

◆ Communication with the PLC

This section gives information about the settings for the termination resistor and how to connect to MEMOBUS/
Modbus communications. MEMOBUS/Modbus communications uses an RS-485 interface (2-wire sequence).

■ Connect Communications Cable

Use this procedure to start communication between the PLC and drive.

136 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

1. De-energize the drive then connect the communications cable to the PLC and the drive. The drive uses
terminal TB4 for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

A - Terminal AC: Common ground C - Terminal D-: Communication input/output (-)

B - Terminal D+: Communication input/output (+)

Figure 6.2 Communications Cable Connection Terminal (TB4)

Note:
Isolate the communications wiring from the main circuit wiring and other high-power wiring Use shielded wires for the
communications wiring and connect cable sheaths to the ground terminal of the drive. Incorrect wiring procedures could
cause drive malfunction because of electrical interference.
2. Install the termination resistor on the network termination slave drive. Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position
to enable the termination resistor on the drive.
3. Energize the drive.
4. Use the drive keypad to set the necessary communications parameters H5-01 to H5-12.
• H5-01 [Drive Node Address]
• H5-02 [Communication Speed Selection]
• H5-03 [Communication Parity Selection]
• H5-04 [Communication Error Stop Method]
• H5-05 [Comm Fault Detection Selection]
• H5-06 [Drive Transmit Wait Time]
• H5-09 [CE Detection Time]
• H5-10 [Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel]
• H5-11 [Comm ENTER Command Mode]
• H5-12 [Run Command Method Selection]
5. De-energize the drive and wait for the keypad display to turn off.
6. Energize the drive.
The drive is prepared to start communication with the PLC.

■ Set the Termination Resistor

You must enable the termination resistor on the slave terminal of the drive to use MEMOBUS/Modbus

Network Communications
communications. Use DIP switch S2 on the terminal block to enable and disable the built-in termination resistor.
Refer to Figure 6.3 for an example of how to set DIP switch S2. Use the tip of a tweezers or a jig with a tip width
of 0.8 mm (0.03 in) to set the DIP switch. When you install the drive at the end of the communication line, set
DIP switch S2 to ON. Set DIP switch S2 to OFF on all other drives.

Figure 6.3 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Terminal and DIP Switch S2

■ Wiring Diagram for More than One Drive

Figure 6.4 shows the correct wiring when you use more than one drive with MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 137

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Figure 6.4 Wiring Diagram for More than One Drive

Note:
1. Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position on the last drive of the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication network to enable the termination
resistor.
2. For long cable runs or multi-floor installations, connect the shield to ground at only one device on the network (at the PLC, if
possible) to prevent ground loops. When you remove the shield from the ground terminal, it can increase the communication quality
in some drive installation locations.

◆ MEMOBUS/Modbus Drive Operations

Drive parameters will apply to the settings when the drive is running during MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. This section gives information about the available functions and their related parameters.

■ Executable Functions
A PLC can do these operations with MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Parameter settings (except H5-xx) do
not have an effect on the availability of these operations.
• Monitor the drive status and operate the drive
• Set and view parameters
• Fault Reset
• Multi-function input settings
The input command from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications and MFDI terminals (S1 to S7) are linked by a
logical OR operation.

■ Drive Control
Select the external command that sets the frequency references and motor run/stop with MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. Use the information in Table 6.2 to set the parameters as specified by the application.
Table 6.2 Necessary Parameter Settings for Drive Control from MEMOBUS/Modbus
LOCAL Control Selected No. Name Setting Value

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]

External reference 1
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]

b1-15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]

External reference 2
b1-16 Run Command Selection 2 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]

For more information about operation mode selection, refer to b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] and b1-02
[Run Command Selection 1]. Refer to H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Select = External Reference 1/2 Selection] for
more information about external commands.

◆ Communications Timing
To prevent overrun of the slave side, the master cannot send a message to the same drive for a selected length of
time.
To prevent overrun of the master side, the slave cannot send a response message to the master for a selected length
of time.

138 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

This section gives information about message timing.

■ Command Message from Master to Slave

To prevent data loss and overrun, after the master receives a message from the slave, the master cannot send the
same type of command message to the same slave for a selected length of time. The minimum wait time is
different for each type of message. Refer to Table 6.3 to find the minimum wait times.
Table 6.3 Minimum Wait Time to Send a Message
Command Type Example Minimum Wait Time

• Operation commands (Run command, stop command)

1 • I/O settings 5 ms *1
• Reading the motor and parameter setting values

2 Writing a parameter 50 ms *1

3 Writing of modified data with the Enter command 3 to 5 s *1

*1 When the drive receives a message in the minimum wait time, it does command type 1 and sends a response message. If the drive
receives command type 2 or command type 3 messages in the minimum wait time, it will trigger a communications error or the drive
will ignore the command.

Figure 6.5 Minimum Wait Time to Send a Message

You must set the timer in the master to measure the length of time for the slave to respond to the master. If you set
the timer, but the slave does not send a response message in a specified length of time, the master will send the
message again.

■ Response Message from Slave

The slave receives the command message from the master then processes the data it received. The slave then waits
for the time set in H5-06 [Drive Transmit Wait Time] then sends a response message to the master. If overrun
occurs on the master, increase the wait time set in H5-06.

Network Communications
Figure 6.6 Response Wait Time

◆ Message Format
■ Communication Message Description
In MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, the master sends commands to the slave, then the slave responds. The 6
master and slave send their messages in the configuration in Figure 6.7. The length of the data changes when the
description of the command (function) changes.

Figure 6.7 Message Format

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 139

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

■ Slave Address
Set the slave address of the drive to 00 to FF (Hex.). When the slave address is 00 (Hex), the master sends the
command and all slaves receive the command.
The slave will not send a response message to the master.

■ Function Code
There are five function codes that set commands. Table 6.4 shows the different codes.
Table 6.4 Function Codes
Command Message Response Message
Function Code Subfunction Code
Function Minimum Data Maximum Data Minimum Data Maximum Data
(Hex.) (Hex.) Length Length Length Length
(byte) (byte) (byte) (byte)

Read Multiple Holding

03 - Registers 8 8 7 37

08 - Loopback Test 8 8 8 8

Writing to Multiple
10 - 11 41 8 8
Holding Registers

Writing to Multiple
Holding Registers /
5A - 11 41 17 17
Reading the Register
Indicated

Reading the Contents

010D of Non-Consecutive 10 248 10 248
Holding Registers
67
Writing to Non-
010E Consecutive Holding 14 250 8 8
Registers

■ Communications Data
Communications data is a series of data that uses the combination of the communications register number and the
data for these registers. The data length changes when the description of the command changes. For a loopback
test, it switches to test code.
The communications register for the drive has a 2-byte length. Data that is written to the register for the drive is
usually 2 bytes. Register data that is read from the drive is also 2 bytes.

■ Error Check
Error check uses the CRC-16 method to detect transmission errors. Use the procedure in this section to calculate
CRC-16.
Command Data
When the drive receives data, it will make sure that there are no errors in the data. The drive uses the procedure
below to calculate CRC-16, then the drive compares that data with the CRC-16 value in the message. If the CRC-
16 values do not agree, the drive will not execute a command message.
When you calculate CRC-16 in MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, make sure that you set the start value as
FFFF (Hex.). All 16 bits must be 1.
Use this procedure to calculate CRC-16:
1. Make sure that the start value is FFFF (Hex.).
2. Calculate the FFFF (Hex.) start value and the XOR of the slave address (exclusive OR).
3. Move the step 2 results one column to the right. Do this shift until the carry bit is 1.
4. When the carry bit is 1, calculate XOR via the result from the above step 3 and A001 (Hex.).
5. Do steps 3 and 4 until the 8th shift to the right.
6. Use the result of step 5 to calculate the XOR and the data of the following messages (function code, register
address, data). Do steps 3 to 5 until the last data, then calculate.
7. The result of the last right shift or the value of the last XOR calculation is the result for CRC-16.
Table 6.5 lists examples of the CRC-16 calculation of slave address 02 (Hex.) and function code 03 (Hex.). The
calculated results of CRC-16 for this section is D140 (Hex.).
Note:
The calculation example only gives information about some error checks with CRC-16. The drive will do the same error checks for the
next data.

140 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Table 6.5 CRC-16 Calculation Example

Description Calculation Overflow Description Calculation Overflow

Initial value (FFFF (Hex.)) 1111 1111 1111 1111 - Function code 03 (Hex.) 0000 0011 -

Address 02 (Hex.) 0000 0010 - XOR w result 1000 0001 0011 1101 -

XOR w initial value 1111 1111 1111 1101 Shift 1 0100 0000 1001 1110 1

Shift 1 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -

XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - XOR result 1110 0000 1001 1111 -

XOR result 1101 1111 1111 1111 - Shift 2 0111 0000 0100 1111 1

Shift 2 0110 1111 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -

XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - XOR result 1101 0000 0100 1110 -

XOR result 1100 1111 1111 1110 - Shift 3 0110 1000 0010 0111 0

Shift 3 0110 0111 1111 1111 0 Shift 4 0011 0100 0001 0011 1

Shift 4 0011 0011 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -

XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - XOR result 1001 0100 0001 0010 -

XOR result 1001 0011 1111 1110 - Shift 5 0100 1010 0000 1001 0

Shift 5 0100 1001 1111 1111 0 Shift 6 0010 0101 0000 0100 1

Shift 6 0010 0100 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -

XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - XOR result 1000 0101 0000 0101 -

XOR result 1000 0100 1111 1110 - Shift 7 0100 0010 1000 0010 1

Shift 7 0100 0010 0111 1111 0 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -

Shift 8 0010 0001 0011 1111 1 XOR result 1110 0010 1000 0011 -

XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - Shift 8 0111 0001 0100 0001 1

XOR result 1000 0001 0011 1110 - XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -

XOR result 1101 0001 0100 0000 -

1101 0001 0100 0000 -

Perform operations with next data (function code) CRC-16 D140
-
(Lower) (Upper)

Continue from here with next data.

Response Data
The drive does the CRC-16 calculation for the response message and makes sure that the data does not have
errors. Make sure that the calculated value is the same value as the CRC-16 in the response message.

Network Communications
◆ Examples of Messages for Commands/Responses
The items in this section are examples of messages for commands/responses.

■ Read Multiple Holding Registers

Uses function code 03 (Hex.) to read the contents of a maximum of 16 holding registers.
Table 6.6 shows example messages when the drive reads status signal from the drive of slave 2, the error contents,
fault contents, and frequency references. 6
Table 6.6 Message Example When Reading the Contents of Holding Register
Setting Data Setting Data Setting Data
Byte Command Message Response Message (Normal) Response Message (Fault)
(Hex.) (Hex.) (Hex.)

0 Slave address 02 Slave address 02 Slave address 02

1 Function code 03 Function code 03 Function code 83

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 141

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Setting Data Setting Data Setting Data

Byte Command Message Response Message (Normal) Response Message (Fault)
(Hex.) (Hex.) (Hex.)

2 Upper 00 Data Qty 08 Error code 03

Starting No.
3 Lower 20 Upper 00 Upper F1
First storage
register CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Lower 65 Lower 31
Data Qty
5 Lower 04 Upper 00 -
Next storage
register
6 Upper 45 Lower 00 -
CRC-16
7 Lower F0 Upper 00 -
Next storage
register
8 - Lower 00 -

9 - Upper 01 -
Next storage
register
10 - Lower F4 -

11 - Upper AF -
CRC-16
12 - Lower 82 -

■ Loopback Test
The loopback test uses function code 08 (Hex.) and returns the command message as a response message. This
test checks communication between the master and slave. The test code and data can use desired values.
Table 6.7 shows examples of messages given out when the loopback test is done with the drive of slave 1.
Table 6.7 Message Examples from the Loopback Test
Byte Command Message Setting Data (Hex.) Response Message (Normal) Setting Data (Hex.)

0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01

1 Function code 08 Function code 08

2 Upper 00 Upper 00
Test code Test code
3 Lower 00 Lower 00

4 Upper A5 Upper A5
Data Data
5 Lower 37 Lower 37

6 Upper DA Upper DA
CRC-16 CRC-16
7 Lower 8D Lower 8D

■ Writing to Multiple Holding Registers

You can write the data that you set to the number of holding registers set in function code 10 (hex). You must
configure the number of the holding registers and each 8 higher bits and 8 lower bits in order in the command
message for the write data. You can write to a maximum of 16 holding registers.
Table 6.8 shows example messages when you use the PLC to set Forward run in the drive of slave 1 with a 60.00
Hz frequency reference.
Table 6.8 Message Example When Writing to Multiple Holding Registers
Command Message Response Message (When Normal) Response Message (When There is a Fault)
Byte
Setting Data (Hex.) Setting Data (Hex.) Setting Data (Hex.)

0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01 Slave address 01

1 Function code 10 Function code 10 Function code 90

2 Upper 00 Upper 00 Error code 02

Starting No. Starting No.
3 Lower 01 Lower 01 Upper CD
CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Upper 00 Lower C1
Data Quantity Data Quantity
5 Lower 02 Lower 02 -

6 Byte No. 04 Upper 10 -

CRC-16
7 Upper 00 Lower 08 -
First data
8 Lower 01 - -

9 Upper 17 - -
Next data
10 Lower 70 - -

142 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Command Message Response Message (When Normal) Response Message (When There is a Fault)
Byte
Setting Data (Hex.) Setting Data (Hex.) Setting Data (Hex.)

11 Upper 6D - -
CRC-16
12 Lower B7 - -

Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message. The response message uses
the same formula.

■ Writing to More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register

The drive uses function code 5A (Hex.) to write to more than one register, then it reads the contents of four
holding registers at the same time.
The function for writing to more than one register is the same as the function for function code 10 (Hex.). You can
write to a maximum of 16 holding registers.
The four holding registers to be read from are specified in H5-25 to H5-28 [Function 5A Register x Selection].
Table 6.9 shows example messages when you write to more than one holding register or when you read more than
one command register. Table 6.9 uses this register data for the examples:
• The drive for slave 1 is set for Forward run with a frequency reference of 60.00 Hz.
• The setting in H5-25 to H5-28 and the data in the specified holding registers are as follows.
– H5-25 = 0044H: U1-05 [Motor Speed] = 60.00 Hz (6000 = 1770H)
– H5-26 = 0045H: U1-06 [Output Voltage Ref] = 200.0 V (2000 = 07D0H)
– H5-27 = 0042H: U1-03 [Output Current] = 50% of drive rated current (100% = 8192, 50% = 4096 = 1000H)
– H5-28 = 0049H: U1-10 [Input Terminal Status] = 00H
When you rewrite the parameter value with the write command through the H5-11 [Comm ENTER Command
Mode] setting, you must use the Enter command to save and enable the contents of the changes. Refer to H5-11:
Comm ENTER Command Mode on page 324 and Enter Command on page 145 for more information.
Table 6.9 Message Example When Writing to More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register
Command Message Response Message (When Normal) Response Message (When There is a Fault)
Byte Setting Data Setting Data Setting Data
(Hex.) (Hex.) (Hex.)
0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01 Slave address 01

1 Function code 5A Function code 5A Function code DA

2 Upper 00 Register status 0F Register status 0F

Starting No.
Data in holding Data in holding

Network Communications
3 Lower 01 Upper 17 Upper 17
register 1 register 1
selected with selected with
4 Upper 00 H5-25 Lower 70 H5-25 Lower 70
Data Quantity
5 Lower 02 Data in holding Upper 07 Data in holding Upper 07
register 2 register 2
selected with selected with
6 Byte No. 04 H5-26 Lower D0 H5-26 Lower D0

7 Upper 00 Data in holding Upper 10 Data in holding Upper 10

First data register 3 register 3
selected with selected with
8 Lower 01 H5-27 Lower 00 H5-27 Lower 00

9 Upper 17 Data in holding Upper 00 Data in holding Upper 00

Next data
register 4
selected with
register 4
selected with
6
10 Lower 70 H5-28 Lower 00 H5-28 Lower 00

11 Upper 4F Upper 00 Error code 02

CRC-16 Starting No.
12 Lower 43 Lower 01 Upper E9
CRC-16
13 - Upper 00 Lower 6C
Data Quantity
14 - Lower 02 -

15 - Upper AC -
CRC-16
16 - Lower D0 -

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 143

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message.

Register status

bit 0 Data in register 1 selected with H5-25

1: Successfully read the register
0: Register read error

bit 1 Data in register 2 selected with H5-26

1: Successfully read the register
0: Register read error

bit 2 Data in register 3 selected with H5-27

1: Successfully read the register
0: Register read error

bit 3 Data in register 4 selected with H5-28

1: Successfully read the register
0: Register read error

bit 4 Not used

bit 5 Not used

bit 6 Not used

bit 7 Not used

■ Reading the Contents of Non-Consecutive Holding Registers

The drive uses function code 67 (Hex.) and subfunction code 010D (Hex.) to read data with a maximum of 120
holding registers.
You must give the holding register number from which to read separately.
Table 6.10 shows example messages when you read the frequency reference and torque limit from the drive for
slave 1. Table 6.10 uses this register data for the examples.
• 0024H: U1-01 [Frequency Reference] = 60.00 Hz (6000 = 1770H)
• 0028H: U1-09 [Torque Reference] = 100.0% (1000 = 03E8H)
Table 6.10 Message Example When Reading the Contents of Non-Consecutive Holding Registers
Command Message Response Message (When Normal) Response Message (When There is a Fault)
Byte Setting Data Setting Data Setting Data
(Hex.) (Hex.) (Hex.)
0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01 Slave address 01

1 Function code 67 Function code 67 Function code E7

2 Upper 01 Upper 01 Error code 02

Subfunction Subfunction
Code Code
3 Lower 0D Lower 0D Upper EA
CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Upper 00 Lower 31
Data Quantity Byte No.
5 Lower 02 Lower 04 -

6 Upper 00 Upper 17 -
Holding register Holding register
1 No. 1 data
7 Lower 24 Lower 70 -

8 Upper 00 Upper 03 -
Holding register Holding register
2 No. 2 data
9 Lower 28 Lower E8 -

10 Upper 8B Upper 47 -
CRC-16 CRC-16
11 Lower 29 Lower ED -

Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message.

■ Writing to Non-Consecutive Holding Registers

The drive uses function code 67 (Hex.) and subfunction code 010E (Hex.) to write data with a maximum of 60
holding registers.
You must give the holding register number from which to write separately.
Table 6.11 shows example messages when you write the frequency reference and torque limit from the drive for
slave 1. Table 6.11 uses these specified holding registers data for the examples.

144 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

• 0002H: Frequency Reference = 60.00 Hz (6000 = 1770H)

• 0004H: Torque Limit = 150.0% (1500 = 05DCH)
Table 6.11 Message Example When Writing to Non-Consecutive Holding Registers
Command Message Response Message (When Normal) Response Message (When There is a Fault)
Byte Setting Data Setting Data Setting Data
(Hex.) (Hex.) (Hex.)
0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01 Slave address 01

1 Function code 67 Function code 67 Function code E7

2 Upper 01 Upper 01 Error code 02

Subfunction Subfunction
Code Code
3 Lower 0E Lower 0E Upper EA
CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Upper 00 Lower 31
Data Quantity Data Quantity
5 Lower 02 Lower 02 -

6 Upper 00 Upper D5 -
Byte No. CRC-16
7 Lower 04 Lower FC -

8 Upper 00 - -
Holding register
1 No.
9 Lower 02 - -

10 Upper 17 - -
Holding register
1 data
11 Lower 70 - -

12 Upper 00 - -
Holding register
2 No.
13 Lower 04 - -

14 Upper 05 - -
Holding register
2 data
15 Lower DC - -

16 Upper 55 - -
CRC-16
17 Lower 59 - -

Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message.

◆ Enter Command
When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to write parameters from the PLC to the drive, H5-11
[Comm ENTER Command Mode] lets you use the Enter command to enable these parameters. This section gives
information about the Enter command.

■ Types of Enter Commands

Network Communications
The drive supports the two Enter commands shown in Table 6.12.
Write 0 to register number 0900 or 0910 (Hex.) to enable the Enter command. You can only write to these
registers. If you read to these registers, it will cause an error.
Table 6.12 Types of Enter Commands
Register No.
Description
(Hex.)

0900
When you write parameter data to the EEPROM, you will enable the data on the RAM at the same time. 6
This process saves the parameter changes even if you de-energize the drive.

This updates the data on the RAM, but does not write data to the EEPROM.
0910
If you de-energize the drive, you will lose the parameter changes.

Note:
• You can write the EEPROM to the drive a maximum of 100,000 times. Do not frequently execute the Enter command (0900 (Hex.))
that is written to EEPROM.
• The Enter command register is write-only. If this register is read, it will cause a Register Number Error (02 (Hex.)).
• When the command data or broadcast message is transmitted to the drive, the Enter command is not necessary.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 145

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

■ Functions of the Enter Command when Replacing a Previous Generation Drive

When you replace a previous generation Yaskawa drive with this product, you must set the Enter command
function for this product the same as the previous product. The Enter command function is different for Yaskawa
G7, F7-series, and V7-series drives.
Use H5-11 to set the Enter command function:
• When replacing G7 and F7 series drives, set H5-11 = 0 [ENTER Command Required].
• When replacing V7 series drives, set H5-11 = 1 [ENTER Command Not Required].
• When replacing 1000-series drives, set H5-11 to the same value as the drive you replaced.
Table 6.13 Enter Command Function Differences
H5-11 Settings H5-11 = 0 H5-11 = 1

The drive you replaced G7, F7 V7

Time when the parameter settings are enabled When the drive receives the Enter command from the When you change the parameter settings
master

Checks the upper and lower limits and considers the Checks the upper and lower limit of the changed
Upper and lower limit check related parameter settings. parameter only.

Will not change related parameter settings. You must Automatically changes the default settings for the related
Default setting of related parameters change the parameters manually. parameters.

Accepts and responds as usual to correct setting data if the

If there is a setting error in a parameter, the drive
Fault detection when you set more than one parameter data contains parameter setting errors. The drive discards responds with a fault. The drive discards the data that was
the disabled setting data, but will not return an error
sent.
message.

◆ Self-Diagnostics
The drive can use Self-Diagnositcs to find the operation of the serial communications interface circuit. Self-
Diagnostics connects the transmission terminal to the reception terminal on the control circuit. It then transmits
the data sent by the drive and makes sure that the drive can communicate correctly.
Use this procedure to do Self-Diagnostics:
1. Energize the drive.
2. Set H1-06 = 67 [Terminal S6 Function Select = Communications test mode].
3. De-energize the drive.
4. Connect a jumper between control circuit terminals S6 and SN.

Figure 6.8 Self-Diagnostics Jumper Terminals

5. Energize the drive.
6. When normal, the keypad will show PASS [MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Test Mode Normal].
When there is an error, the keypad will show CE [MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Error].
7. De-energize the drive.
8. Disconnect the wire jumper between terminals S6 and SN. Set terminal S6 to its initial function.
Self-Diagnostics is complete and the drive returns to its usual function.

146 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

◆ Communications Data Table

The communication data types are command data, monitor data, and broadcast message. Command Data on page
147, Monitor Data on page 149, and Broadcast Messages on page 160 show the communications data.
Refer to the Parameter List for parameter communications registers.

■ Command Data
You can read and write command data.
Note:
Set the reserved bit to 0. Do not write the data in the reserved register or the monitor register.
Table 6.14 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Command Data
Register No. Description
(Hex.)

0000 Reserved

Run command, multi-function input command

When H5-12 = 0, Forward run/stop

1: Forward run, 0: Stop
bit 0
When H5-12 = 1, run/stop
1: Run, 0: Stop

When H5-12 = 0, Reverse run/stop

1: Reverse run, 0: Stop
bit 1
When H5-12 = 1, Forward/Reverse run
1: Reverse, 0: Forward run

External fault
bit 2
1: EF0 [Option Card External Fault]

Fault Reset
bit 3
1: Reset command

Multi-function input 1
When the multi-function input command is H1-01 = 40 [Forward Run Command (2-Wire Seq)], bit 4 is “ComRef.”
0001 bit 4 Note:
When you switch the bit ON as ComRef, the frequency reference source changes to MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. When you connect a communication option to the drive, the frequency reference source gives priority to
the communications option.

Multi-function input 2
When the multi-function input command is H1-02 = 41 [Reverse Run Command (2-Wire Seq)], bit 5 is “ComCtrl.”
bit 5 Note:
When you switch the bit ON as ComCtrl, the Run Command source changes to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
When you connect a communication option to the drive, the Run Command source gives priority to the communications
option.
bit 6 Multi-function input 3

Network Communications
bit 7 Multi-function input 4

bit 8 Multi-function input 5

bit 9 Multi-function input 6

bit A Multi-function input 7

bit B - F Reserved

0002 Frequency Reference o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection] (unsigned) sets the units.

Units: 0.1% 6
0003 Output voltage gain
Setting range: 20 (2.0%) to 2000 (200.0%), the default value at energize: 1000 (100.0%)

0004 Torque limit (0.1% signed)

0005 Torque compensation (0.1% signed)

0006 PID setpoint (0.01% signed)

0007 Setting for the multi-function analog monitor output terminal AM (10 V/4000 (Hex.))

0008 Reserved

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 147

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

MFDO setting

MFDO (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 0
1: ON, 0: OFF

Multi-function photocoupler output 1 (terminal P1-C1)

0009 bit 1
1: ON, 0: OFF

Multi-function photocoupler output 2 (terminal P2-C2)

bit 2
1: ON, 0: OFF

bit 3 - F Reserved

000A Pulse train output (Units: 1/1 Hz, setting range: 0 to 32000)

000B - 000E Reserved

Command selection setting

bit 0 Reserved

Input for the PID setpoint

bit 1
1: Enables target values from MEMOBUS/Modbus

Torque Limit Input

bit 2
1: Enables setting values from MEMOBUS/Modbus

Torque Compensation Input

bit 3
1: Enables setting values from MEMOBUS/Modbus

bit 4 Reserved
000F PID feedback from the MEMOBUS/Modbus
bit 5
1: Enables PID feedback (15FF (Hex.)) from MEMOBUS/Modbus

bit 6 - B Reserved

Terminal S5 input of broadcast message

bit C
1: Enabled, 0: Disabled

Terminal S6 input of broadcast message

bit D
1: Enabled, 0: Disabled

Terminal S7 input of broadcast message

bit E
1: Enabled, 0: Disabled

bit F Reserved

0010 - 001F Reserved

bit 0 Extended multi-function input command 1

bit 1 Extended multi-function input command 2

15C0
bit 2 Extended multi-function input command 3

bit 3 - F Reserved

Time Setting
Setting range: 0000 to 2359 (decimal), the default value at energize: 0000
3004 Set the hour and the minute in HHMM format.
• HH: 00 to 23 (decimal)
• MM: 00 to 59 (decimal)

Year and Day Setting

Setting range: 1600 to 9906 (decimal), the default value at energize: 1600
Set the year and the day of the week in YYDW format.
• YY: the last two digits of the year from 16 to 99 (decimal)
• DW: the day of the week
– Sunday: 00
3005 – Monday: 01
– Tuesday: 02
– Wednesday: 03
– Thursday: 04
– Friday: 05
– Saturday: 06

148 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Date Setting
Setting range: 101 to 1231 (decimal), the default value at energize: 101
3006 Set the month and the date in MMDD format.
• MM: 01 to 12 (decimal)
• DD: 01 to 31 (decimal)

Set the Date Information

Setting range: 0 to 8 (decimal), the default value at energize: 8
3007 Set the values specified in 3004H to 3006H as the date and time.
• Command Data: 1
• Response Data: 0 (normal), 8 (fault)

■ Monitor Data
You can only read monitor data.

Network Communications

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 149

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Table 6.15 Monitor Data for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication

Register No. Description
(Hex.)

Drive Status 1

During Run
bit 0
1: During run, 0: During stop

During Reverse
bit 1
1: During reverse, 0: Forward run

Drive ready
bit 2
1: Ready, 0: Not ready

Fault
bit 3
1: Fault

Data Setting Error

bit 4
1: oPExx error

MFDO (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 5
1: ON, 0: OFF
0020
Multi-function photocoupler output 1 (terminal P1-C1)
bit 6
1: ON, 0: OFF

Multi-function photocoupler output 2 (terminal P2-C2)

bit 7
1: ON, 0: OFF

bit 8 - B Reserved

SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware]

bit C 1: One of Safe Disable input 1 (terminal H1-HC) and Safe Disable input 2 (terminal H2-HC) is OFF (open) and the other is
ON (closed)

STo [Safe Torque OFF]

bit D
1: Both Safe Disable input 1 (terminal H1-HC) and Safe Disable input 2 (terminal H2-HC) are OFF (open)

ComRef status
bit E
1: Enabled

ComCtrl status
bit F
1: Enabled

Fault Description 1

bit 0 oC [Overcurrent], GF [Ground Fault]

bit 1 ov [Overvoltage]

bit 2 oL2 [Drive Overload]

bit 3 oH1 [Heatsink Overheat], oH2 [External Overheat (H1-XX=B)]

bit 4 rH [Braking Resistor Overheat], rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault]

bit 5 Reserved

bit 6 FbL [PID Feedback Loss], FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]

bit 7 EF0 [Option Card External Fault], EF1 to EF7 [External Fault]
0021
CPFxx [Hardware Fault]
bit 8 Note:
Includes oFx.
bit 9 oL1 [Motor Overload], oL3, oL4 [Overtorque Detection 1/2], UL3, UL4 [Undertorque Detection 1/2]

bit A PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss], oS [Overspeed], dEv [Speed Deviation]

bit B During Uv [Undervoltage] detection

bit C Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage], Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage], Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault]

bit D LF [Output Phase Loss], PF [Input Phase Loss]

bit E CE [Modbus Communication Error], bUS [Option Communication Error]

bit F Reserved

150 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Fault Contents

bit 0 1: During data writing, during motor switching

bit 1
Reserved
bit 2

bit 3 1: Upper/Lower Limit Fault

0022 bit 4 1: Data Integrity Fault

bit 5 1: During EEPROM writing

0: EEPROM writing
1: Change data only on the RAM
bit 6
Note:
Enabled when H5-17 = 1 [ENTER Command Response @CPU BUSY = Write to RAM Only].
bit 7 - F Reserved

U1-01 [Frequency Reference]

0023 Note:
o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection] sets the units.

U1-02 [Output Frequency]

0024 Note:
o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection] sets the units.

U1-06 [Output Voltage Ref] (units: 0.1 V)

0025 Note:
Use H5-10 [Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel] to change the setting unit.
0026 U1-03 [Output Current] (units: 0.1 A)

0027 U1-08 [Output Power]

0028 U1-09 [Torque Reference]

Fault Description 2

bit 0 Reserved

bit 1 GF [Ground Fault]

bit 2 PF [Input Phase Loss]

0029 bit 3 LF [Output Phase Loss]

bit 4 rH [Braking Resistor Overheat]

bit 5 Reserved

bit 6 oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)]

Network Communications
bit 7 - F Reserved

Minor Fault Description 1

bit 0 - 1 Reserved

bit 2 EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error]

bit 3 bb [Baseblock]

bit 4 oL3 [Overtorque 1]

bit 5 oH [Heatsink Overheat]

6
bit 6 ov [Overvoltage]

bit 7 Uv [Undervoltage]
002A
bit 8 Reserved

bit 9 CE [Modbus Communication Error]

bit A bUS [Option Communication Error]

bit B UL3/UL4 [Undertorque Detection 1/2]

bit C oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]

bit D FbL [PID Feedback Loss], FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]

bit E Reserved

bit F CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 151

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

U1-10 [Input Terminal Status]

bit 0 1: Control circuit terminal S1 ON

bit 1 1: Control circuit terminal S2 ON

bit 2 1: Control circuit terminal S3 ON

002B bit 3 1: Control circuit terminal S4 ON

bit 4 1: Control circuit terminal S5 ON

bit 5 1: Control circuit terminal S6 ON

bit 6 1: Control circuit terminal S7 ON

bit 7 - F Reserved

Drive Status 2

During Run
bit 0
1: During Run

During zero speed

bit 1
1: During zero speed

Speed agreement
bit 2
1: During agreement

User-defined speed agreement

bit 3
1: During agreement

Frequency Detection 1
bit 4
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01

Frequency Detection 2
bit 5
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01

Drive ready
bit 6
1: Run ready

During low voltage detection

002C bit 7
1: During detection

During Baseblock
bit 8
1: Drive output during baseblock

Frequency reference mode

bit 9
1: No communication option, 0: Communication option

Run command mode

bit A
1: No communication option, 0: Communication option

bit B During overtorque/undertorque 1, 2 detection

Frequency reference loss

bit C
1: Loss

Executing Auto-Restart
bit D
1: Restart Enabled

Fault
bit E
1: Fault generated

MEMOBUS/Modbus communications timeout

bit F
1: At Timeout

U1-11 [Output Terminal Status]

MFDO (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 0
1: ON, 0: OFF

Multi-function photocoupler output 1 (terminal P1-C1)

002D bit 1
1: ON, 0: OFF

Multi-function photocoupler output 2 (terminal P2-C2)

bit 2
1: ON, 0: OFF

bit 3 - F Reserved

002E Reserved

002F Frequency reference bias (Up 2/Down 2 function) (Units: 0.1%)

0030 Reserved

0031 U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage] (unit: 1 V)

152 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

0032 U1-09 [Torque Reference] (unit: 1%)

0033 Reserved

0034 Product Code 1 (2-character ASCII code), GA500 = “0A”

0035 Product Code 2 (2-character ASCII code), GA500 = “50”

0036 - 0037 Reserved

0038 PID Feedback: Unsigned, input is equivalent to 100%/maximum output frequency (Units: 0.1%)

0039 PID Input: Signed, ±100%/±maximum output frequency (Units: 0.1%)

003A PID Output: Signed, ±100%/±maximum output frequency (Units: 0.1%)

003B - 003C Reserved

Communications error description

Note:
The drive saves the description of the communications error until you reset the fault.
bit 0 CRC Error

bit 1 Data Length Error

bit 2 Reserved
003D
bit 3 Parity Error

bit 4 Overrun Error

bit 5 Framing Error

bit 6 Timeout

bit 7 - F Reserved

Units: min-1 or r/min

003E Note:
Output frequency Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
003F 0.01% units

0040 - 004A Used with U1-xx [Operation Status Monitors]. Refer to U Monitor for more information.

U1-12 [Drive Status]

bit 0 1: During Run

bit 1 1: During zero speed

bit 2 1: During reverse

bit 3 1: During reset signal input

bit 4 1: During speed agreement

Network Communications
bit 5 1: Drive operation ready

004B bit 6 1: Minor Fault

bit 7 1: Fault

bit 8 1: oPExx [Operation Error] generation

bit 9 1: Recovery from momentary power loss, 0: Power recovery

bit A 1: Motor 2 Selection

bit B Reserved
6
bit E ComRef status/ NetRef status

bit F ComCtrl status/ NetCtrl status

004C - 007E Use with U1-xx, U4-xx, U5-xx, U6-xx [Monitors]. Refer to U Monitor for more information.

007F Minor fault code (Refer to “Minor fault description” for more information about the minor fault codes.)

Use with U2-xx, U3-xx [Monitors]. Refer to “U Monitor” for more information, and refer to “Fault Trace/Fault History Descriptions” for more information
0080 - 0097
about register values.

U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time]

0098 - 0099
Example: When U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time = 12345], 0098 (Hex.) = 1234 and 0099 (Hex.) = 5.

U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time]

009A - 009B
Example: When U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time = 12345], 009A (Hex.) = 1234 and 009B (Hex.) = 5.

009C - 00AA Reserved

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 153

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Drive rated current

Note:
00AB The unit of display is different for different models.
B001 - B018, 2001 - 2042, and 4001 - 4023: 0.01 A
2056 - 2082, 4031 - 4060: 0.1 A

Units: min-1 or r/min

00AC Note:
U1-05 [Motor Speed] Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
00AD Units: 0.01%

00AE, 00AF Reserved

The drive stores option codes in the register.

SI-C3 = 5343 (Hex.)
SI-EM3 = 1005 (Hex.)
SI-EN3 = 1006 (Hex.)
SI-EP3 = 1007 (Hex.)
00B0 Option codes connected to SI-ES3 = 1001 (Hex.)
CN5
SI-ET3 = 1004 (Hex.)
SI-N3 = 534E (Hex.)
SI-P3 = 5350 (Hex.)
SI-S3 = 5353 (Hex.)
SI-T3 = 5354 (Hex.)

00B1 - 00B4 Reserved

Units: min-1 or r/min

00B5 Note:
U1-16 [SFS Output
Frequency] Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
00B6 Units: 0.01%

Units: min-1 or r/min

00B7 Note:
Frequency reference
monitor Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
00B8 Units: 0.01%

00B9 - 00BE Reserved

Operation error number

00BF
xx of oPExx is displayed.

Fault Description 3

bit 0 Reserved

bit 1 Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage]

bit 2 Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage]

bit 3 Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault]

bit 4 SC [Short Circuit/IGBT Failure]

bit 5 GF [Ground Fault]

bit 6 oC [Overcurrent]

00C0 bit 7 ov [Overvoltage]

bit 8 oH [Heatsink Overheat]

bit 9 oH1 [Heatsink Overheat]

bit A oL1 [Motor Overload]

bit B oL2 [Drive Overload]

bit C oL3 [Overtorque Detection 1]

bit D oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2]

bit E rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault]

bit F rH [Braking Resistor Overheat]

154 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Fault Description 4

bit 0 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)]

bit 1 EF4 [External Fault (Terminal S4)]

bit 2 EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)]

bit 3 EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)]

bit 4 EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)]

bit 5 - 6 Reserved

bit 7 oS [Overspeed]
00C1
bit 8 dEv [Speed Deviation]

bit 9 PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss]

bit A PF [Input Phase Loss]

bit B LF [Output Phase Loss]

bit C oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]

bit D Reserved

bit E Err [EEPROM Write Error]

bit F oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)]

Fault Description 5

bit 0 CE [Modbus Communication Error]

bit 1 bUS [Option Communication Error]

bit 2 - 3 Reserved

bit 4 CF [Control Fault]

bit 5 Reserved

00C2 bit 6 EF0 [Option Card External Fault]

bit 7 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]

bit 8 UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1]

bit 9 UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2]

bit A oL7 [High Slip Braking Overload]

bit B - E Reserved

bit F Hardware Fault (includes oFx fault)

Network Communications
Fault Description 6

bit 0 - 4 Reserved

bit 5 LF2 [Output Current Imbalance]

bit 6 STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected]

00C3 bit 7 Reserved

bit 8 E5 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err]

bit 9 Reserved 6
bit A SEr [Speed Search Retries Exceeded]

bit B - F Reserved

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 155

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Fault Description 7

bit 0 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]

bit 1 EF1 [External Fault (Terminal S1)]

bit 2 EF2 [External Fault (Terminal S2)]

bit 3 oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1]

bit 4 UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2]

bit 5 CoF [Current Offset Fault]

bit 6 - 7 Reserved
00C4
bit 8 dWFL [DriveWorksEZ Fault]

bit 9 dWF1 [EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data Error]

bit A dWF2 [DriveWorksEZ Fault 2]

bit B dWF3 [DriveWorksEZ Fault 3]

bit C Reserved

bit D rF [Braking Resistor Fault]

bit E boL [BrakingTransistor Overload Fault]

bit F Reserved

Fault Description 8

bit 0 LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out]

bit 1 nSE [Node Setup Error]

00C5
bit 2 - 9 Reserved

bit A dv7 [Polarity Judge Timeout]

bit B - F Reserved

00C6 - 00C7 Reserved

Minor Fault Description 2

bit 0 Uv [Undervoltage]

bit 1 ov [Overvoltage]

bit 2 oH [Heatsink Overheat]

bit 3 oH2 [Overheat Alarm]

bit 4 oL3 [Overtorque 1]

bit 5 oL4 [Overtorque 2]

bit 6 EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error]

00C8
bit 7 bb [Baseblock]

bit 8 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)]

bit 9 EF4 [External Fault (Terminal S4)]

bit A EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)]

bit B EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)]

bit C EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)]

bit D - E Reserved

bit F oS [Overspeed]

156 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Minor Fault Description 3

bit 0 dEv [Speed Deviation]

bit 1 PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss]

bit 2 Reserved

bit 3 CE [Modbus Communication Error]

bit 4 bUS [Option Communication Error]

bit 5 CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]

bit 6 oL1 [Motor Overload]

00C9 bit 7 oL2 [Drive Overload]

bit 8 Reserved

bit 9 EF0 [Option Card External Fault]

bit A rUn [Motor Switch during Run]

bit B Reserved

bit C CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]

bit D UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1]

bit E UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2]

bit F SE [Modbus Test Mode Error]

Minor Fault Description 4

bit 0 Reserved

bit 1 oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]

bit 2 - 5 Reserved

00CA bit 6 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]

bit 7 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]

bit 8 Reserved

bit 9 dnE [Drive Disabled]

bit A - F Reserved

Minor Fault Description 5

bit 0 Reserved

bit 1 AEr [Station Address Setting Error]

Network Communications
bit 2 CyC [MECHATROLINK CommCycleSettingErr]

bit 3 HCA [High Current Alarm]

bit 4 LT-1 [Cooling Fan Maintenance Time]

bit 5 LT-2 [Capacitor Maintenance Time]

00CB bit 6 - 7 Reserved

bit 8 EF1 [External Fault (Terminal S1)]

bit 9 EF2 [External Fault (Terminal S2)] 6

bit A SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware]

bit B Reserved

bit C oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1]

bit D UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2]

bit E - F Reserved

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 157

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Minor Fault Description 6

bit 0 Reserved

bit 1 TrPC [IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)]

bit 2 LT-3 [SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime]

bit 3 LT-4 [IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)]

00CC bit 4 boL [Braking Transistor Overload]

bit 5 - 7 Reserved

bit 8 dWAL [DriveWorksEZ Alarm]

bit 9 dWA2 [DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2]

bit A dWA3 [DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3]

bit B - F Reserved

00CD - 00CF Reserved

CPF Contents 1

bit 0 - 1 Reserved

bit 2 CPF02 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 3 CPF03 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 4 - 5 Reserved

bit 6 CPF06 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 7 Reserved
00D0
bit 8 CPF08 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 9 - A Reserved

bit B CPF11 [Control Circuit Error]

bit C CPF12 [Control Circuit Error]

bit D CPF13 [Control Circuit Error]

bit E CPF14 [Control Circuit Error]

bit F Reserved

CPF Contents 2

bit 0 CPF16 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 1 CPF17 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 2 CPF18 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 3 CPF19 [Control Circuit Error]

00D1 bit 4 CPF20 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 5 CPF21 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 6 CPF22 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 7 CPF23 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 8 CPF24 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 9 - F Reserved

CPF Contents 3

bit 0- 5 Reserved
00D2
bit 6 CPF38 [Control Circuit Error]

bit 7 - F Reserved

00D3 - 00D7 Reserved

158 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

oFA0x Description (CN5-A)

bit 0 oFA00 [Option Not Compatible with Port]

bit 1 oFA01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]

00D8 bit 2 - 4 Reserved

bit 5 oFA05 [Option A/D Error]

bit 6 oFA06 [Option Communication Error]

bit 7 - F Reserved

oFA1x Description (CN5-A)

bit 0 oFA10 [Option RAM Error]

bit 1 oFA11 [Option Ope Mode Error]

bit 2 oFA12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]

bit 3 oFA13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]

00D9
bit 4 oFA14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]

bit 5 oFA15 [Option Receive CRC Error]

bit 6 oFA16 [Option Receive Frame Error]

bit 7 oFA17 [Option Receive Abort Error]

bit 8 - F Reserved

00DA Reserved

oFA3x Description (CN5-A)

bit 0 oFA30 [COM ID Error]

bit 1 oFA31 [Type Code Error]

bit 2 oFA32 [SUM Check Error]

bit 3 oFA33 [Option Receive Time Over]

bit 4 oFA34 [Memobus Time Over]

bit 5 oFA35 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]

bit 6 oFA36 [CI Check Error]

00DB
bit 7 oFA37 [Drive Receive Time Over 2]

bit 8 oFA38 [Control Reference Error]

bit 9 oFA39 [Drive Receive Time Over 3]

Network Communications
bit A oFA40 [CtrlResSel 1Err]

bit B oFA41 [Drive Receive Time Over 4]

bit C oFA42 [CtrlResSel 2Err]

bit D oFA43 [Drive Receive Time Over 5]

bit E - F Reserved

00DC - 00E4 Reserved

Minor Fault Description 9 6

bit 0 EP24v [External Power 24V Supply]

bit 1 - 3 Reserved

bit 4 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]

bit 5 Reserved
00E5
bit 6 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Fault]

bit 7 CP2 [Comparator 2 Limit Fault]

bit 8 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]

bit 9 bCE [Bluetooth Communication Error]

bit A - F Reserved

00E6 - 00E9 Reserved

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 159

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Register No. Description

(Hex.)

Fault Description 11

bit 0 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]

bit 1 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]

00EA
bit 2- D Reserved

bit E SCF [Safety Circuit Fault]

bit F Reserved

00EB - 00ED Reserved

Fault Description 12

bit 0 - 2 Reserved

bit 3 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Fault]

00EE
bit 4 CP2 [Comparator 2 Limit Fault]

bit 5 bCE [Bluetooth Communication Fault]

bit 6 - F Reserved

00EF - 00FA Reserved

Output current
Note:
00FB The unit of display is different for different models.
B001 - B018, 2001 - 2042, and 4001 - 4023: 0.01 A
2056 - 2082, 4031 - 4060: 0.1 A

■ Broadcast Messages
Broadcast messages are available as read-only.
The undefined bit signal in the broadcast operation signal uses the local data signal.
Table 6.16 Broadcast Messages for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication
Register No.
(Hex.) Description

Operation signal

Run command
bit 0
1: Run, 0: Stop

Reverse run command

bit 1
1: Reverse, 0: Forward run

bit 2 - 3 Reserved

External fault
bit 4
1: EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
0001
Fault Reset
bit 5
1: Reset command

bit 6 - B Reserved

bit C MFDI terminal S5 input

bit D MFDI terminal S6 input

bit E MFDI terminal S7 input

bit F Reserved

0002 Frequency reference 30000/100%

■ Fault Trace/Fault History Contents

Table 6.17 shows the fault codes that the commands from monitors [U2-xx, U3-xx] read.
Table 6.17 Fault Trace/Fault History Contents
Fault Code Fault Code
(Hex.) Name (Hex.) Name

0002 Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] 0004 Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault]

0003 Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage] 0005 SC [Short Circuit/IGBT Failure]

160 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Fault Code Name Fault Code Name

(Hex.) (Hex.)

0006 GF [Ground Fault] 004E rF [Braking Resistor Fault]

0007 oC [Overcurrent] 004F boL [BrakingTransistor Overload Fault]

0008 ov [Overvoltage] 0051 LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out]

0009 oH [Heatsink Overheat] 0052 nSE [Node Setup Error]

000A oH1 [Heatsink Overheat] 005B dv7 [Polarity Judge Timeout]

000B oL1 [Motor Overload] 0083 CPF02 [Control Circuit Error]

000C oL2 [Drive Overload] 0084 CPF03 [Control Circuit Error]

000D oL3 [Overtorque Detection 1] 0087 CPF06 [Control Circuit Error]

000E oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2] 0089 CPF08 [Control Circuit Error]

000F rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault] 008C CPF11 [Control Circuit Error]

0010 rH [Braking Resistor Overheat] 008D CPF12 [Control Circuit Error]

0011 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)] 008E CPF13 [Control Circuit Error]

0012 EF4 [External Fault (Terminal S4)] 008F CPF14 [Control Circuit Error]

0013 EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)] 0091 CPF16 [Control Circuit Error]

0014 EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)] 0092 CPF17 [Control Circuit Error]

0015 EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)] 0093 CPF18 [Control Circuit Error]

0018 oS [Overspeed] 0094 CPF19 [Control Circuit Error]

0019 dEv [Speed Deviation] 0095 CPF20 [Control Circuit Error]

001A PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss] 0096 CPF21 [Control Circuit Error]

001B PF [Input Phase Loss] 0097 CPF22 [Control Circuit Error]

001C LF [Output Phase Loss] 0098 CPF23 [Control Circuit Error]

001D oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)] 0099 CPF24 [Control Circuit Error]

001F Err [EEPROM Write Error] 00A7 CPF38 [Control Circuit Error]

0020 oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)] 0101 oFA00 [Option Not Compatible with Port]

0021 CE [Modbus Communication Error] 0102 oFA01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]

0022 bUS [Option Communication Error] 0106 oFA05 [Option A/D Error]

0025 CF [Control Fault] 0107 oFA06 [Option Communication Error]

0027 EF0 [Option Card External Fault] 0111 oFA10 [Option RAM Error]

0028 FbL [PID Feedback Loss] 0112 oFA11 [Option Ope Mode Error]

Network Communications
0029 UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1] 0113 oFA12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]

002A UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2] 0114 oFA13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]

002B oL7 [High Slip Braking Overload] 0115 oFA14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]

0030 Includes oFx Fault [Hardware Fault] 0116 oFA15 [Option Receive CRC Error]

0036 LF2 [Output Current Imbalance] 0117 oFA16 [Option Receive Frame Error]

0037 STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] 0118 oFA17 [Option Receive Abort Error]

003B SEr [Speed Search Retries Exceeded] 0131 oFA30 [COM ID Error] 6
0041 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback] 0132 oFA31 [Type Code Error]

0042 EF1 [External Fault (Terminal S1)] 0133 oFA32 [SUM Check Error]

0043 EF2 [External Fault (Terminal S2)] 0134 oFA33 [Option Receive Time Over]

0044 oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1] 0135 oFA34 [Memobus Time Over]

0045 UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2] 0136 oFA35 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]

0046 CoF [Current Offset Fault] 0137 oFA36 [CI Check Error]

0049 dWFL [DriveWorksEZ Fault] 0138 oFA37 [Drive Receive Time Over 2]

004A dWF1 [EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data Error] 0139 oFA38 [Control Reference Error]

004B dWF2 [DriveWorksEZ Fault 2] 013A oFA39 [Drive Receive Time Over 3]

004C dWF3 [DriveWorksEZ Fault 3] 013B oFA40 [CtrlResSel 1Err]

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 161

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Fault Code Name Fault Code Name

(Hex.) (Hex.)

013C oFA41 [Drive Receive Time Over 4] 0414 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Fault]

013D oFA42 [CtrlResSel 2Err] 0415 CP2 [Comparator 2 Limit Fault]

013E oFA43 [Drive Receive Time Over 5] 0416 bCE [Bluetooth Communication Fault]

0401 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set] 041A dCE1 [Communication Error1]

0402 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage] 041B dCE2 [Communication Error2]

040F SCF [Safety Circuit Fault] 045F oC2 [Overcurrent2]

■ Minor Fault/Alarm Contents

Table 6.18 shows the minor fault/alarm codes that communications register (007F (Hex.)) reads.
Table 6.18 Minor Fault/Alarm Contents (007 (Hex.))
Minor Fault/ Minor Fault/
Alarm Code Name Alarm Code Name
(Hex.) (Hex.)

0001 Uv [Undervoltage] 0022 oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]

0002 ov [Overvoltage] 0027 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]

0003 oH [Heatsink Overheat] 0028 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]

0004 Overheat Alarm (oH2) 002A dnE [Drive Disabled]

0005 oL3 [Overtorque 1] 0032 AEr [Station Address Setting Error]

0006 oL4 [Overtorque 2] 0033 CyC [MECHATROLINK CommCycleSettingErr]

0007 EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error] 0034 HCA [High Current Alarm]

0008 bb [Baseblock] 0035 LT-1 [Cooling Fan Maintenance Time]

0009 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)] 0036 LT-2 [Capacitor Maintenance Time]

000A EF4 [External Fault (Terminal S4)] 0039 EF1 [External Fault (Terminal S1)]

000B EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)] 003A EF2 [External Fault (Terminal S2)]

000C EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)] 003B SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware]

000D EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)] 003D oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1]

0010 oS [Overspeed] 003E UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2]

0011 dEv [Speed Deviation] 0042 TrPC [IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)]

0012 PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss] 0043 LT-3 [SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime]

0014 CE [Modbus Communication Error] 0044 LT-4 [IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)]

0015 bUS [Option Communication Error] 0045 boL [Braking Transistor Overload]

0016 CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error] 0049 dWAL [DriveWorksEZ Alarm]

0017 oL1 [Motor Overloaded] 004A dWA2 [DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2]

0018 oL2 [Drive Overloaded] 004B dWA3 [DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3]

001A EF0 [Option Card External Fault] 0081 EP24v [External Power 24V Supply]

001B rUn [Motor Switch during Run] 0085 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]

001D CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error] 0087 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Error]

001E UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1] 0088 CP2 [Comparator 2 Limit Error]

001F UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2] 0089 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]

0020 SE [Modbus Test Mode Error] 008A bCE [Bluetooth Communication Error]

0021 L24v [Loss of External Power 24 Supply]

◆ Error Codes
■ MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Error Code List
Table 6.19 lists the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications error codes.
When an error occurs, remove the cause of the error and restart communications.

162 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Table 6.19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Error Codes

Error Code Name Cause
(Hex.)

01 Function Code Error The PLC set a function code that was not 03, 08, or 10 (Hex.)

• The register number that is trying to access is not registered.

02 Register Number Error
• A starting number that was not 0001 or 0002 (Hex.) was set when broadcasting.

• Read and write data quantities are more than the 1 to 16 range. (Command message data quantity is disabled.)
• The data that was read from non-consecutive holding registers contained more than 120 bytes.
03 Bit Count Error
• The data to be written to non-consecutive holding registers contained more than 60 bytes.
• In the write mode, the number of bytes in the message is not the number of data × 2.

• Writing control data or parameters made the settings go out of the permitted setting range.
21 Data Setting Error
• A parameter setting error occurred when writing a parameter.

• Tried to write a disabled parameter during run.

• When there was a CPF06 [Control Circuit Error], the master tried to write a parameter other than one of these:
– A1-00 [Language Selection]
– A1-01 [Access Level Selection]
– A1-02 [Control Method Selection]

22 Write Mode Error – A1-03 [Initialize Parameters]

– A1-04 [Password]
– A1-05 [Password Setting]
– E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection]
– o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
• Writes the read-only data.

DC Bus Undervoltage
23 During Uv [DC Bus Undervoltage], a Uv write disabled parameter was written.
Write Error

Error Writing Data During

24 Tried to write a parameter from the master during parameter processing on the drive side.
Parameter Processing

25 Writing into EEPROM Writing into EEPROM write is disabled, but EEPROM write was executed from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. When
Disabled this error occurs, the keypad shows a message and the drive continues operation.

■ No Response from Slave

The slave ignores the command message from the master and will not send a response message in these
conditions:
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address for the drive side do not agree (Use H5-
01 [Drive Node Address] to set the slave address of the drive)
• When the time interval between the data of which the message is composed is longer than 24 bits
• When the data length for the command message is not accurate

Network Communications
Note:
• If the keypad shows CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error], refer to “Troubleshooting” to remove the cause of the error, and try to
do communications again. If the keypad does not show CALL, check U1-19 [MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code] for the error and error
type.
• If you execute the write function code when the slave address in the command message is 00 (Hex.), all of the slaves will execute the
write command, but they will not send response messages to the master.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 163

6.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

164 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7
Troubleshooting
7.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................166
7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors ........................................168
7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes ........................................169
7.4 Fault ...........................................................................................................................172
7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms ..............................................................................................184
7.6 Parameter Setting Errors......................................................................................190
7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors ................................................................................................192
7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors.................................195
7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults.......................................................................196
7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display............................................................197

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 165

7.1 Section Safety

7.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate the drive when covers are missing. Replace covers and shields before you
operate the drive. Use the drive only as specified by the instructions.
Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the
drive. If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
If you do not ground the equipment correctly, it can cause serious injury or death if you touch the motor case.
After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive or
operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and
make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to
find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa
before you energize the drive or peripheral devices.
If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or
death.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing
and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings.
Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized.
If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect
connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.
Tighten screws at an angle in the specified range shown in this manual.
If you tighten the screws at an angle not in the specified range, you can have loose connections that can cause
damage to the terminal block or start a fire and cause serious injury or death.
Damage to Equipment
Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified
range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate.
Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.

166 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Fire Hazard
Do not put flammable or combustible materials on top of the drive and do not install the drive
near flammable or combustible materials. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible
material.
Flammable and combustible materials can start a fire and cause serious injury or death.
Crush Hazard
Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive.
If you do not use correct safety equipment, it can cause serious injury or death.
Use a crane or hoist to move large drives when necessary.
If you try to move a large drive without a crane or hoist, it can cause serious injury or death.

NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not break the electrical connection between the drive and the motor when the drive is
outputting voltage.
Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive.
Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral
devices.
Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive.
Note:
Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

Troubleshooting

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 167

7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors

7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors

If the drive or motor do not operate correctly, check the drive keypad for a code or message.
If problems occur that are not identified in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa representative with this
information:
• Drive model
• Drive software version
• Date of purchase
• Description of the problem (for example failure conditions and modified parameters)
Table 7.1 contains descriptions of the different types of faults, minor faults, alarms, and errors that can occur
during drive operation.
Contact Yaskawa if there is damage to the drive. Contact information is on the back cover of the manual.
Table 7.1 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors
Type Drive Response

When the drive detects a fault, it will cause these conditions:

• The keypad shows the fault code, and ALM/ERR stays illuminated.
Fault • The drive shuts off output, and the motor coasts to a stop. Some faults let the user select a motor stopping method.
• The terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = E [MFDO Function Selection = Fault] will activate.
The drive will not operate until you clear the fault with a Fault Reset and the drive goes back to usual status.

When the drive detects a minor fault or an alarm, it will cause these conditions:
• The keypad shows the alarm code, and ALM/ERR flashes.
• The drive will continue to operate the motor. Some alarms let you select a motor stopping method.
Minor Faults/Alarms • If the drive detects a minor fault, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [Alarm] will activate If you do not set
parameters H2-01 to H2-03, the drive will not trigger MFDO terminals if it detects a minor fault.
• The drive will not output a minor fault signal if it detects an alarm.
It is not necessary to do Fault Reset.

An error occurs when parameter settings do not agree or a parameter combination is incorrect. The drive will not operate
until you set the parameters correctly.
When the drive detects an operation error, these conditions will result:
Operation Errors
• The keypad shows the error code.
• Multi-function outputs do not output an alarm signal.
Find the parameters that caused the error and correct the settings.

An error occurs during Auto-Tuning.

When the drive detects an operation error, it will cause these conditions:
• The keypad shows the error code.
Auto-Tuning Error
• Multi-function outputs do not output an alarm signal.
• The motor coasts to stop.
Remove the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again.

An error occurs when you use the keypad for a backup, restore, or verify operation.
When the drive detects a copy function error, it will cause these conditions:
Copy Function Error • The keypad shows the error code.
• Multi-function outputs do not output an alarm signal.
Push a key on the keypad to clear the error. Remove the cause of the error and try the backup, restore, or verify operation
again.

168 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes

7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes

Table 7.2 shows the possible fault, minor fault, alarm, and error codes.
The display codes are in alphabetical order. Search the table for the code shown on the keypad, and identify its
causes and possible solutions.
Table 7.2 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes
Display (Hex.) Name ALM LED Type Ref.

bAT (0085) Keypad Battery Low Voltage Flashing Alarm 184

bAT (0402) Keypad Battery Low Voltage Illuminated Fault 172

bb (0008) Baseblock Flashing Alarm 184

bCE (008A) Bluetooth Communication Error Flashing Alarm 184

bCE (0416) Bluetooth Communication Fault Illuminated Fault 172

boL (0045) Braking Transistor Overload Flashing Alarm 184

boL (004F) BrakingTransistor Overload Fault Illuminated Fault 172

bUS (0022) Option Communication Error Illuminated Fault 172

CE (0021) Modbus Communication Error Illuminated Fault 172

CF (0025) Control Fault Illuminated Fault 173

CoF (0046) Current Offset Fault Illuminated Fault 173

CPEr Control Mode Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

CPF00 Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 173

CPF01 Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 173

CPF02, CPF03 (0083, 0084) Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 173, 174

CPF06 (0087) EEPROM Memory Data Error Illuminated Fault 174

CPF08 (0089) Terminal Board Connection Error Illuminated Fault 174

CPF11 - CPF14 (008C - 008F) Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 174 - 174

CPF16 - CPF24 (0091 - 0099) Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 174 - 174

CPF38 (00A7) EEPROM Memory Data Error Illuminated Fault 175

CPyE Error Writing Data - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

CrST Remove RUN Command to Reset Flashing Not an alarm. 184

CSEr Control Mode Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

dFPS Drive Model Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

dv7 (005B) Polarity Judge Timeout Illuminated Fault 175

EF (0007) FWD/REV Run Command Input Error Flashing Alarm 184

EF1 (0042) External Fault (Terminal S1) Illuminated Fault 175

EF1 (0039) External Fault (Terminal S1) Flashing Alarm 184

Troubleshooting

EF2 (003A) External Fault (Terminal S2) Flashing Alarm 184

EF2 (0043) External Fault (Terminal S2) Illuminated Fault 175

EF3 (0009) External Fault (Terminal S3) Flashing Alarm 185

EF3 (0011) External Fault (Terminal S3) Illuminated Fault 176

7
EF4 (000A) External Fault (Terminal S4) Flashing Alarm 185

EF4 (0012) External Fault (Terminal S4) Illuminated Fault 176

EF5 (000B) External Fault (Terminal S5) Flashing Alarm 185

EF5 (0013) External Fault (Terminal S5) Illuminated Fault 176

EF6 (000C) External Fault (Terminal S6) Flashing Alarm 185

EF6 (0014) External Fault (Terminal S6) Illuminated Fault 176

EF7 (000D) External Fault (Terminal S7) Flashing Alarm 185

EF7 (0015) External Fault (Terminal S7) Illuminated Fault 176

End1 Excessive Rated Voltage Setting Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 169

7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes

Display (Hex.) Name ALM LED Type Ref.

End2 Iron Core Saturation Coefficient Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

End5 Resistance Tuning Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

End7 No-Load Current Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

EP24v (0081) External Power 24V Supply Flashing Alarm 185

Er-01 Motor Data Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 192

Er-02 Drive in an Alarm State Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 193

Er-03 STOP Button was Pressed Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 193

Er-04 Resistance Tuning Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 193

Er-05 No-Load Current Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 193

Er-08 Rated Slip Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 193

Er-09 Acceleration Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 194

Er-11 Motor Speed Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 194

Er-12 Current Detection Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 194

Er-13 Leakage Inductance Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 194

Er-15 Torque Saturation Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 194

Err (001F) EEPROM Write Error Illuminated Fault 176

GF (0006) Ground Fault Illuminated Fault 176

HCA (0034) High Current Alarm Flashing Alarm 185

iFEr Communication Err - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

L24v (0021) Loss of External Power 24 Supply Flashing Alarm 186

LF (001C) Output Phase Loss Illuminated Fault 177

LF2 (0036) Output Current Imbalance Illuminated Fault 177

LoG Log Com Error Flashing Alarm 186

LT-1 (0035) Cooling Fan Maintenance Time Flashing Alarm 186

LT-2 (0036) Capacitor Maintenance Time Flashing Alarm 186

LT-3 (0043) SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime Flashing Alarm 186

LT-4 (0044) IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) Flashing Alarm 186

ndAT Model,VolClass,Capacity Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

oC (0007) Overcurrent Illuminated Fault 177

oH (0003) Heatsink Overheat Flashing Alarm 186

oH (0009) Heatsink Overheat Illuminated Fault 178

oH1 (000A) Heatsink Overheat Illuminated Fault 178

oH2 (0004) External Overheat (H1-XX=B) Flashing Alarm 187

oL1 (000B) Motor Overload Illuminated Fault 178

oL2 (000C) Drive Overload Illuminated Fault 179

oL3 (0005) Overtorque 1 Flashing Alarm 187

oL3 (000D) Overtorque Detection 1 Illuminated Fault 179

oL4 (0006) Overtorque 2 Flashing Alarm 187

oL4 (000E) Overtorque Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 180

oPE01 Drive Capacity Setting Fault Flashing Parameter Setting Error 190

oPE02 Parameter Range Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 190

oPE03 Multi-Function Input Setting Err Flashing Parameter Setting Error 190

oPE08 Parameter Selection Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 190

170 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes

Display (Hex.) Name ALM LED Type Ref.

oPE10 V/f Data Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 191

oPr (001E) Keypad Connection Fault Illuminated Fault 180

ov (0002) Overvoltage Flashing Alarm 187

ov (0008) Overvoltage Illuminated Fault 180

ovEr Too Many Parameters Changed - Not an alarm. 187

PF (0047) Input Phase Loss Flashing Alarm 187

PF (001B) Input Phase Loss Illuminated Fault 180

rdEr Error Reading Data - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

rF (004E) Braking Resistor Fault Illuminated Fault 181

rH (0010) Braking Resistor Overheat Illuminated Fault 181

rr (000F) Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault Illuminated Fault 181

SC (0005) Short Circuit/IGBT Failure Illuminated Fault 181

SCF (040F) Safety Circuit Fault Illuminated Fault 181

SToF (003B) Safe Torque OFF Flashing Alarm 188

TiM (0089) Keypad Time Not Set Flashing Alarm 188

TiM (0401) Keypad Time Not Set Illuminated Fault 182

TrPC (0042) IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) Flashing Alarm 188

UL3 (001E) Undertorque Detection 1 Flashing Alarm 188

UL3 (0029) Undertorque Detection 1 Illuminated Fault 182

UL4 (001F) Undertorque Detection 2 Flashing Alarm 188

UL4 (002A) Undertorque Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 182

Uv (0001) DC Bus Undervoltage Flashing Alarm 188

Uv1 (0002) DC Bus Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 182

Uv2 (0003) Control Power Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 182

Uv3 (0004) Soft Charge Answerback Fault Illuminated Fault 183

vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

vFyE Parameters do not Match - Backup Function Runtime Error 195

Troubleshooting

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 171

7.4 Fault

7.4 Fault
This section gives information about some of the causes and possible solutions of faults. You must use the Fault
Reset operation to remove the fault before you can operate the drive. Use the information in this table to remove
the cause of the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage The keypad battery voltage is low. Replace the keypad battery.
Note:
Use o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] to enable/disable bAT detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

bCE Bluetooth Communication Fault The smartphone or tablet with DriveWizard Mobile Use the smartphone or tablet 10 m (32.8 ft) or nearer to the
or DriveWizard installed is too far from the keypad. keypad.
Note:
bCE can occur when the smartphone or tablet is 10 m (32.8 ft)
or nearer to the keypad depending on the specifications of the
smartphone or tablet.

Radio waves from a different device are causing Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio
interference with communications between the bandwidth (2400 MHz to 2480 MHz), and prevent radio
smartphone or tablet and keypad. interference.
Note:
• The drive detects this error when you use the Bluetooth LCD keypad to operate the drive from a smartphone or tablet.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Set the stopping method for this fault in o2-27 [bCE Detection Selection].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

boL BrakingTransistor Overload Fault The duty cycle of the braking transistor is high (the • Install a regenerative converter.
regeneration power or repetition frequency is high). • Increase the deceleration time.

You enabled the protective function for the braking Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection Selection =
transistor when you have a regenerative converter. Disable].

The braking transistor in the drive is broken. Replace the drive.

Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

bUS Option Communication Error The drive did not receive a signal from the Correct wiring errors.
controller.

The communications cable wiring is incorrect.

There is a short-circuit in the communications cable • Repair short circuits and connect cables.
or the communications cable is not connected. • Replace the defective communications cable.

Electrical interference caused a communication data • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
error. ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
• Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the
electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if
necessary.
• Use only the recommended cables or other shielded line.
Ground the shield on the controller side or the drive input
power side.
• Separate the communication wiring from drive power lines,
and install a noise filter to the input side of the power supply
for communication.
• Decrease the effects of electrical interference from the
controller.

The option is incorrectly installed to the drive. Correctly install the option to the drive.

The option is damaged. If the fault continues and the wiring is correct, replace the option.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the Run command or frequency reference is assigned to the option card.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this error, the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F6-01 [Communication Error Selection].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CE Modbus Communication Error The communications cable wiring is incorrect. Correct wiring errors.

There is a short circuit in the communications cable • Repair short circuits and connect cables.
or the communications cable is not connected. • Replace the defective communications cable.

172 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Electrical interference caused a communication data • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
error. ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
• Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the
electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if
necessary.
• Use only the recommended cables or other shielded line.
Ground the shield on the controller side or the drive input
power side.
• Separate the communication wiring from drive power lines,
and install a noise filter to the input side of the power supply
for communication.
• Decrease the effects of electrical interference from the
controller.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not correctly receive control data for the CE detection time set to H5-09 [CE Detection Time].
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this error, the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in H5-04 [Communication Error Stop Method].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CF Control Fault Motor parameters are set incorrectly Correctly set the motor parameters and do Auto-Tuning again.

The torque limit setting is too low. Adjust L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit].

The load inertia is too large. • Adjust C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08 [Deceleration Times].
• Set the frequency reference to the minimum output frequency,
and stop the Run command when the drive stops deceleration.

The drive is trying to ramp to stop a machine that Correctly set b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection].
cannot do ramp to stop or on a machine for which
deceleration is not necessary.

The motor and drive are connected incorrectly. Correct wiring errors.

Line-to-line Resistance Tuning is not done. Do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance.

The drive received a Run command while the motor • Examine the sequence and input the Run command after the
was coasting. motor fully stops.
• Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the torque reference is more than the torque limit for 3 seconds or longer while the drive ramps to stop.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CoF Current Offset Fault The drive starts operation while the induced voltage • Make a sequence that does not restart operation when induced
stays in the motor (during coasting to a stop or after voltage stays in the motor.
fast deceleration). • Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled].
• Use Speed Search from Fmax or Fref [H1-xx = 61, 62] to do a
speed search through one of the external terminals.
Note:
When controlling the PM motor, External Speed Search
commands 1 and 2 operate the same.

A drive hardware problem occurred. • Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault or de-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the drive.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF00 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact Troubleshooting
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF01 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
7
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF02 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 173

7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF03 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF02, CPF03, Control Circuit Error There was a drive hardware problem. • Re-energize the drive.
CPF08, CPF11 • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
- CPF14, information about replacing the control board, contact
CPF16 - Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
CPF24, CPF38
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF06 Control Circuit Error (EEPROM The drive power supply was de-energized while a Set A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 2-Wire
memory Data Error) communication option entered a parameter Write Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] and initialize the drive.
command.

An EEPROM peripheral circuit error occurred. • Re-energize the drive.

• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about how to replace the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if there is an error in the data written to the drive EEPROM.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF08 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF11 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF14 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF16 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF24 Control Circuit Error (Drive Unit A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
Signal Fault) • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.

174 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF38 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF06 Control Circuit Error (EEPROM The drive power supply was de-energized while a Set A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 2-Wire
memory Data Error) communication option entered a parameter Write Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] and initialize the drive.
command.

An EEPROM peripheral circuit error occurred. • Re-energize the drive.

• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about how to replace the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if there is an error in the data written to the drive EEPROM.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPF25 Terminal Board not Connected The terminal board is not correctly connected to the 1. De-energize the drive.
drive. 2. Correctly connect the terminal board to the drive.
3. Re-energize the drive.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

dCE1 Communication Error1 A drive hardware problem occurred temporarily due • Remove the cause of the noise.
to noise. • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

dCE2 Communication Error2 A drive hardware problem occurred temporarily due • Remove the cause of the noise.
to noise. • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

dv7 Polarity Judge Timeout There is a disconnection in the motor coil winding. Measure the motor line-to-line resistance and replace the motor if
a coil is disconnected.

The screws on the drive output terminals are loose. Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it cannot detect polarity in a pre-set length of time.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF1 External Fault (Terminal S1) MFDI terminal S1 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI. Troubleshooting

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S1.

External Fault [H1-01 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S1, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions 7
EF2 External Fault (Terminal S2) MFDI terminal S2 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S2.

External Fault [H1-02 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S2, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 175

7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF3 External Fault (Terminal S3) MFDI terminal S3 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S3.

External Fault [H1-03 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S3, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF4 External Fault (Terminal S4) MFDI terminal S4 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S4.

External Fault [H1-04 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S4, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF5 External Fault (Terminal S5) MFDI terminal S5 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S5.

External Fault [H1-05 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S5, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF6 External Fault (Terminal S6) MFDI terminal S6 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S6.

External Fault [H1-06 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S6, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF7 External Fault (Terminal S7) MFDI terminal S7 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S7.

External Fault [H1-07 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S7, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Err EEPROM Write Error There was a problem with the EEPROM hardware. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
replace the board.

Electrical interference corrupted the data while it • Push ENTER Key.

was writing to the EEPROM of the drive. • Set the parameters again.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

FRL Speed Reference Missing No speed reference is selected at start. Select speed reference before start.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

GF Ground Fault Overheating caused damage to the motor or the Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if
motor insulation is not satisfactory. there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.

The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground • Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage, and repair
to make a short circuit. short circuits.
• Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable
and the ground terminal. If there is electrical conduction,
replace the cable.

176 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

An increase in the stray capacitance of the cable and • If the wiring length of the cable is more than 100 m, decrease
the ground terminal caused an increase in the the carrier frequency.
leakage current. • Decrease the stray capacitance.

There was a problem with the drive hardware. Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if a current short to ground was more than 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• L5-08 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2] disables the Auto Restart function.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LF Output Phase Loss The motor main circuit cable is disconnected. Connect motor main circuit cable wiring. Correct wiring errors in
the main circuit drive input power.

There is a disconnection in the motor coil winding. If a coil is disconnected, measure the motor Line-to-Line
Resistance and replace the motor.

The screws on the drive output terminals are loose. Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.

The rated output current of the motor is less than Examine the drive capacity or the motor output to be applied.
5% of the drive rated current.

You are trying to use a single-phase motor. The drive cannot operate a single-phase motor.

The output transistor in the drive is damaged. • Re-energize the drive.

• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if phase loss occurs on the output side of the drive.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Set L8-07 [Output Phase Loss Protection Sel] to enable and disable LF detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LF2 Output Current Imbalance Phase loss occurred in the wiring on the output side Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires on the output
of the drive. side of the drive, and repair problems.

The output terminal screws of the drive are loose. Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.

There is not balance between the three phases of the • Measure the Line-to-Line Resistance for each motor phase and
PM motor impedance. make sure that resistance is equal in the three phases, and that
all wires are connected correctly.
• Replace the motor.

The drive output circuit is broken. • Re-energize the drive.

• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if there is not balance between the three phases of the output current from the PM motor.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oC Overcurrent The load is too heavy. • Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model if the current
value is more than the drive rated current.
• Decrease the load or replace with a larger drive to prevent
sudden changes in the current level.

Overheating caused damage to the motor or the Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if
Troubleshooting
motor insulation is not satisfactory. there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.

The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground • Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage, and repair
to make a short circuit. short circuits.
• Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable
and the ground terminal. If there is electrical conduction,
replace the cable.

A short circuit or ground fault on the drive output

side caused damage to the output transistor of the
• Make sure that there is not a short circuit in terminal B1 and
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Make sure that there is not a
7
drive. short circuit in terminals - and terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/
T3.
• If there is a short circuit, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

The acceleration time is too short. • Calculate the torque necessary during acceleration related to
the load inertia and the specified acceleration time.
• Increase the values set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07
[Acceleration Times] to get the necessary torque.
• Increase the values set in C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve
Characteristics] to get the necessary torque.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 177

7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

The drive is trying to operate a specialized motor or • Examine the motor nameplate, the motor, and the drive to
a motor that is larger than the maximum applicable make sure that the drive rated current is larger than the motor
motor output of the drive. rated current.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.

A magnetic contactor was switched at the output. Set the operation sequence to not turn ON or OFF the magnetic
contactor while the drive is outputting voltage.

The V/f pattern settings are incorrect. • Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and
voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the
frequency.
• Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. For motor 2,
adjust E3-04 to E3-10.

The torque compensation gain is too large. Decrease the value set in C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] to
make sure that the motor does not stall.

Electrical interference caused a problem. Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground
wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical interference.

The control method is set incorrectly for the motor. Set A1-02 [Control Method Selection] correctly.

The motor main circuit cable is too long. • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
• Decrease C6-02 [Carrier Frequency]. Or set C6-02 = B.
Note:
• This fault occurs if the drive sensors detect a drive output current more than the specified overcurrent detection level.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oH Heatsink Overheat The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink • Measure the ambient temperature.
temperature of the drive is more than the value set • Increase the airflow in the control panel.
in L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].
• Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to
lower the ambient temperature.
• Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much
heat.

The load is too heavy. • Measure the output current.

• Decrease the load.
• Decrease the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
Selection].

The internal cooling fan of the drive stopped. 1. Use the procedures in this manual to replace the cooling fan.
2. Set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than the value set in L8-02.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L8-03 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oH1 Heatsink Overheat The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink • Measure the ambient temperature.
temperature of the drive is more than the oH1 • Increase the airflow in the control panel.
detection level.
• Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to
lower the ambient temperature.
• Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much
heat.

The load is too heavy. • Measure the output current.

• Decrease the load.
• Decrease the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
Selection].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than the oH1 detection level. o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] determines the oH1 detection
level.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• L5-08 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2] disables the Auto Restart function.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oL1 Motor Overload The load is too large. Decrease the load.
Note:
Reset oL1 when U4-16 [Motor oL1 Level] < 100.

The acceleration/deceleration times or cycle times • Examine the acceleration/deceleration times and the motor
are too short. start/stop frequencies (cycle times).
• Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/
Deceleration Times].

Overload occurred while running at low speed. • Decrease the load when running at low speed.
• Increase the motor speed.
• If the motor is run frequently at low speeds, replace the motor
with a larger motor or use a drive-dedicated motor.
Note:
For general-purpose motors, overload can occur while
running at low speed when operating at below the rated
current.

178 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection] is set Set L1-01 in as specified by the motor qualities for a drive-
incorrectly. dedicated motor.

The V/f pattern does not fit the motor qualities. • Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and
voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the
frequency.
• Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. For motor 2,
adjust E3-04 to E3-10. Decrease the values set in E1-08 [Mid
Point A Voltage] and E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage].
Note:
If the values set in E1-08 and E1-10 are too low, the overload
tolerance will decrease at low speeds.

E1-06 [Base Frequency] is set incorrectly. Set E1-06 to the rated frequency shown on the motor nameplate.

One drive is operating more than one motor. Set L1-01 = 0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled],
connect thermal overload relay to each motor to prevent damage
to the motor.

The electronic thermal protector qualities and the • Examine the motor qualities and set L1-01 [Motor Overload
motor overload properties do not match. (oL1) Protection] correctly.
• Connect a thermal overload relay to the motor.

The electronic thermal protector is operating at an Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] correctly to the value
incorrect level. specified by the motor nameplate.

Phase loss in the input power supply is causing the Make sure that there is no phase loss, and repair problems.
output current to change.

The motor main circuit cable is too long. • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
• Decrease C6-02 [Carrier Frequency]. Or set C6-02 = B.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the electronic thermal protector of the drive started the motor overload protection.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• L5-07 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp1] disables the Auto Restart function.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oL2 Drive Overload The load is too large. Decrease the load.

The acceleration/deceleration times or cycle times • Examine the acceleration/deceleration times and the motor
are too short. start/stop frequencies (cycle times).
• Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/
Deceleration Times].

The V/f pattern does not fit the motor qualities. • Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and
voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the
frequency.
• Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. Decrease the
values set in E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] and E1-10
[Minimum Output Voltage]. For motor 2, adjust E3-04 to E3-
10.
Note:
If the values set in E1-08 and E1-10 are too low, the overload
tolerance will decrease at low speeds.

The drive capacity is too small. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.

Overload occurred while running at low speed. • Decrease the load when running at low speed.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
• Decrease the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
Selection].

The torque compensation gain is too large. Decrease the value set in C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] to
make sure that the motor does not stall. Troubleshooting

Phase loss in the input power supply is causing the • Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input
output current to change. power.
• Make sure that there is no phase loss, and repair problems.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the electronic thermal protector of the drive started the drive overload protection.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• L5-07 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp1] disables the Auto Restart function. 7
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Example: The machine is locked.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] and L6-03 [Torque
Detection Time 1] settings.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the drive output current is more than the level set in L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
• L5-07 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp1] disables the Auto Restart function.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 179

7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Example: The machine is locked.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2] and L6-06 [Torque
Detection Time 2] settings.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the drive output current is more than the level set in L6-05 for longer than L6-06.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2].
• L5-07 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp1] disables the Auto Restart function.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oPr Keypad Connection Fault The keypad is not securely connected to the Examine the connection between the keypad and the drive.
connector on the drive.

The connection cable between the drive and the • Remove the keypad and then reconnect it.
keypad is disconnected. • Replace the cable if damaged.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if these conditions are correct:
–o2-06 = 1 [Keypad Disconnect Detection = Enabled].
–b1-02 = 0 [Run Command Selection 1 = Keypad], or the drive is operating in LOCAL Mode with the keypad.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

ov Overvoltage The deceleration time is too short and too much • Increase the values set in C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08
regenerative energy is flowing back into the drive. [Deceleration Times].
• Connect a dynamic braking option to the drive.
• Perform Deceleration Rate Tuning.

The acceleration time is too short. • Make sure that sudden drive acceleration does not cause the
fault.
• Increase the values set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07
[Acceleration Times].
• Increase the value set in C2-02 [S-Curve Time @ End of
Accel].

The braking load is too large. Connect a dynamic braking option to the drive.

There are surge voltages in the input power supply Connect a DC reactor to the drive.
Note:
If you turn the phase advancing capacitors ON and OFF and
use thyristor converters in the same power supply system,
there can be surge voltages that irregularly increase the input
voltage.

The drive output cable or motor is shorted to ground 1. Examine the motor main circuit cable, terminals, and motor
(the current short to ground is charging the main terminal box, and then remove ground faults.
circuit capacitor of the drive through the power 2. Re-energize the drive.
supply).

The power supply voltage is too high. Decrease the power supply voltage to match the drive rated
voltage.

The braking resistor or braking resistor unit wiring Correct wiring errors in the connection to the braking resistor or
is incorrect. braking resistor unit.

Electrical interference caused a drive malfunction. • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
• Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the
electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if
necessary.

The Short Circuit Braking function used in OLV/ Connect a braking resistor to the drive.
PM control method.

There is motor hunting. • Set n1-01 = 1 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled] and
adjust n1-02 [Hunting Prevention Gain Setting].
• Adjust n2-02 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time 1] and n2-03
[Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage is more than the ov detection level while the drive is running.
• The ov detection level is approximately 410 V with 200 V class drives. The detection level is approximately 820 V for 400 V class drives.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• L5-08 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2] disables the Auto Restart function.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

PF Input Phase Loss There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.

There is loose wiring in the drive input power Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
terminals.

The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the input power for problems.
much. • Make the drive input power stable.
• If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic
contactor on the main circuit side for problems.

180 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

There is unsatisfactory balance between voltage • Examine the input power for problems.
phases. • Make the drive input power stable.
• Set L8-05 = 0 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel = Disabled].

The main circuit capacitors have become • Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
unserviceable. [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace
the control board or the drive. For information about replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
• If drive input power is correct and the fault stays, replace the
control board or the drive. For information about replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage changes irregularly without regeneration.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Use L8-05 to enable and disable PF detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

rF Braking Resistor Fault The resistance of the dynamic braking option Use a dynamic braking option that fits the model and duty rating
connected to the drive is too low. of the drive.

A regenerative converter or regenerative unit is Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection = Disable].

connected to the drive.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

rH Braking Resistor Overheat The deceleration time is too short and excessive • Check the load level, deceleration time, and speed.
regenerative energy is flowing back into the drive. • Decrease the load.
• Increase the values set in C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08
[Deceleration Times].
• Use a dynamic braking option that lets you use more power.

The duty cycle is too high. Examine the duty cycle.

The braking load is too heavy. • Calculate the braking load and braking power again, and
decrease the braking load.
• Use a braking resistor that improves braking power.

The braking resistor is not sufficient. Use the braking resistor specifications to select a sufficient
braking resistor.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the braking resistor overheat protective function is active.
• The magnitude of the braking load causes the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. If the duty cycle is higher than the braking resistor rating, the
drive will show the alarm.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Parameter L8-01 enables and disables rH detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault The drive control circuit is damaged. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
There is a malfunction in the internal braking information about replacing the control board, contact
transistor of the drive. Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

SC Short Circuit/IGBT Failure Overheating caused damage to the motor or the Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if
Troubleshooting
motor insulation is not satisfactory. there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.

The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground • Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage, and repair
to make a short circuit. short circuits.
• Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable
and the ground terminal. If there is electrical conduction,
replace the cable.

A short circuit or ground fault on the drive output

side caused damage to the output transistor of the
• Make sure that there is not a short circuit in terminal B1 and
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Make sure that there is not a 7
drive. short circuit in terminals - and terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/
T3.
• If there is a short circuit, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if there is a short circuit or ground fault on the drive output side, or an IGBT failure.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

SCF Safety Circuit Fault The safety circuit is broken. Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 181

7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

TiM Keypad Time Not Set There is a battery in the keypad, but the date and Use the keypad to set the date and time.
time are not set.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Parameter o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] enables and disables TiM detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Example: There is a broken pulley belt.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] and L6-03 [Torque
Detection Time 1] settings.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is less than the level set in L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Example: There is a broken pulley belt.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2] and L6-06 [Torque
Detection Time 2] settings.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is less than the level set in L6-05 for longer than L6-06.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Uv1 DC Bus Undervoltage There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.

There is loose wiring in the drive input power Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
terminals.

The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the input power for problems.
much. • Make the drive input power stable.
• If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic
contactor on the main circuit side for problems.

There was a loss of power. Use a better power supply.

The main circuit capacitors have become Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
unserviceable. [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the
control board or the drive. For information about replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] shows the performance life of
relay is damaged. the soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is more than 90%, replace
the board or the drive. For information about replacing the board,
contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage decreases below the level set in L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] while the drive is running.
• The Uv1 detection level is approximately 190 V for a 200 V class drives. The detection level is approximately 380 V for 400 V class drives. The detection level is
approximately 350 V when E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] < 400.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for this fault.
• L5-08 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2] disables the Auto Restart function.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Uv2 Control Power Undervoltage The value set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Connect the momentary power loss recovery unit to the drive.
Time] increased and the momentary power loss
recovery unit is not connected to the drive.

There was a problem with the drive hardware. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the control power supply voltage decreases.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for this fault.

182 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.4 Fault

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Uv3 Soft Charge Answerback Fault There is damage to the relay or contactor on the • Re-energize the drive.
soft-charge bypass relay. • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
• Monitor U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] shows the
performance life of the soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is
more than 90%, replace the board or the drive. For information
about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your
nearest sales representative.

Air inside the drive is too hot. Decrease the ambient temperature of the drive.
Note:
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.

Troubleshooting

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 183

7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

This section gives information about the causes and possible solutions when a minor fault or alarm occurs. Use
the information in this table to remove the cause of the minor fault or alarm.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage The keypad battery voltage is low. Replace the keypad battery.
Note:
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• Parameter o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] enables and disables bAT detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

bb Baseblock An external baseblock command was entered Examine the external sequence and timing of the baseblock
through MFDI terminal S1 to S7, and the drive command input.
output stopped as shown by an external baseblock
command.
Note:
The drive will not output a minor fault signal for this alarm.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

bCE Bluetooth Communication Error The smartphone or tablet with DriveWizard Mobile Use the smartphone or tablet 10 m (32.8 ft) or nearer to the
installed is too far from the keypad. keypad.
Note:
bCE can occur when the smartphone or tablet is 10 m or
nearer to the keypad depending on the specifications of the
smartphone or tablet.

Radio waves from a different device are causing Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio
interference with the communication between the bandwidth (2400 MHz to 2480 MHz), and prevent radio
smartphone or tablet and keypad. interference.
Note:
• The drive detects this error when you operate the drive with a smartphone or tablet with a Bluetooth LCD Keypad.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
• Parameter o2-27 [bCE Detection selection] enables and disables bCE detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

boL Braking Transistor Overload The duty cycle of the braking transistor is high (the • Install a regenerative converter.
regeneration power or repetition frequency is high). • Increase the deceleration time.

You enabled the protective function for the braking Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection Selection =
transistor when you have a regenerative converter. Disable].

The braking transistor in the drive is broken. Replace the drive.

Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CrST Cannot Reset The drive received a fault reset command when a Turn off the Run command then de-energize and re-energize the
Run command was active. drive.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF FWD/REV Run Command Input A forward command and a reverse command were Examine the forward and reverse command sequence and correct
Error input at the same time for longer than 0.5 s. the problem.
Note:
• If the drive detects EF, the motor will ramp to stop.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF1 External Fault (Terminal S1) MFDI terminal S1 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S1.

External Fault [H1-01 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S1, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF2 External Fault (Terminal S2) MFDI terminal S2 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S2.

External Fault [H1-02 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S2, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.

184 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF3 External Fault (Terminal S3) MFDI terminal S3 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S3.

External Fault [H1-03 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S3, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF4 External Fault (Terminal S4) MFDI terminal S4 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S4.

External Fault [H1-04 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S4, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF5 External Fault (Terminal S5) MFDI terminal S5 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S5.

External Fault [H1-05 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S5, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF6 External Fault (Terminal S6) MFDI terminal S6 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S6.

External Fault [H1-06 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S6, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EF7 External Fault (Terminal S7) MFDI terminal S7 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.

The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S7.

External Fault [H1-07 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S7, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
Troubleshooting
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

EP24v External Power 24V Supply The voltage of the main circuit power supply • Examine the main circuit power supply.
decreased, and the 24 V power supply is supplying • Turn ON the main circuit power supply to run the drive.
power to the drive.
Note:
• Set o2-26 [Ext. Power 24V Supply Display] to enable or disable EP24v detection.
• The drive will not output an alarm signal for this alarm.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions 7
HCA High Current Alarm The load is too heavy. • Decrease the load for applications with repetitive starts and
stops.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.

The acceleration time is too short. • Calculate the torque necessary during acceleration related to
the load inertia and the specified acceleration time.
• Increase the values set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07
[Acceleration Times] until you get the necessary torque.
• Increase the values set in C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve
Characteristics] until you get the necessary torque.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 185

7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

The drive is trying to operate a specialized motor or • Examine the motor nameplate, the motor, and the drive to
a motor that is larger than the maximum applicable make sure that the drive rated current is larger than the motor
motor output of the drive. rated current.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.

The current level temporarily increased because of If speed search or Auto Restart cause an increase in current, the
speed search after a momentary power loss or while drive can temporarily show this alarm. The time that the drive
trying to Auto Restart. shows the alarm is short. No more steps are necessary to clear the
alarm.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is more than the overcurrent alarm level (150% of the rated current).
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

L24v Loss of External Power 24 Supply The voltage of the backup 24 V power supply has • Examine the external 24 V power supply for disconnected
decreased. The main circuit power supply is wires and wiring errors and repair the problems.
operating correctly. • Examine the external 24 V power supply for problems.
Note:
• Set o2-23 [External 24V Powerloss Detection] to enable or disable L24v detection.
• The drive will not output an alarm signal for this alarm.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LoG Log Com Error There is not a micro SD in the keypad. Put a micro SD card in the keypad.

• The drive is connected to USB. Set o5-01 = 0 [Log Start/Stop Selection = OFF].
• The number of log communication files is more
than 1000.
• The micro SD card does not have available
memory space.
• The line number data in a log communication
file was changed.
• A communication error between the keypad and
drive occurred during a log communication.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 6A [MFDO Function Select = Data Logger Error] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LT-1 Cooling Fan Maintenance Time The cooling fan is at 90% of its expected 1. Use the procedures in this manual to replace the cooling fan.
performance life. 2. Set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h] to reset
the cooling fan operation time.
Note:
When the estimated performance life is expired, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 2F [MFDO Function Select = Maintenance Notification] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LT-2 Capacitor Maintenance Time The capacitors for the main circuit and control Replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing
circuit are at 90% of expected performance life. the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
When the estimated performance life is expired, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 2F [MFDO Function Select = Maintenance Notification] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LT-3 SoftChargeBypassRelay The soft charge bypass relay is at 90% of its Replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing
MainteTime expected performance life. the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
When the estimated performance life is expired, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 2F [MFDO Function Select = Maintenance Notification] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

LT-4 IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) The IGBT is at 50% of its expected performance Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency.
life.
Note:
When the estimated performance life is expired, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 2F [MFDO Function Select = Maintenance Notification] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oH Heatsink Overheat The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink • Measure the ambient temperature.
temperature is more than the L8-02 [Overheat • Increase the airflow around the drive.
Alarm Level].
• Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to
lower the ambient temperature.
• Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much
heat.

There is not sufficient airflow around the drive. • Give the drive the correct installation space as shown in the
manual.
• Make sure that there is sufficient circulation around the control
panel.
• Examine the drive for dust or other unwanted materials that
could clog the cooling fan.
• Remove unwanted materials that prevent air circulation.

186 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

The internal cooling fan or fans have stopped. 1. Use the procedures in this manual to replace the cooling fan.
2. Set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than L8-02.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in L8-03 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oH2 External Overheat (H1-XX=B) An external device sent an oH2. 1. Find the external device that output the overheat alarm.
2. Remove the cause of the problem.
3. Clear the Overheat Alarm (oH2) [H1-xx = B] set to MFDI
terminals S1 to S7.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oL3 Overtorque 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault
Example: The machine is locked.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] and L6-03 [Torque
Detection Time 1].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the drive output current is more than the level set in L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• Set the conditions that trigger the minor fault using L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oL4 Overtorque 2 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault
Example: The machine is locked.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2] and L6-06 [Torque
Detection Time 2].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is more than the level set in L6-05 for longer than L6-06.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• Set the conditions that trigger the minor fault using L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

ov Overvoltage There are surge voltages in the input power supply. Connect a DC reactor to the drive.
Note:
If you turn the phase advancing capacitors ON and OFF and
use thyristor converters in the same power supply system,
there can be surge voltages that irregularly increase the input
voltage.

The drive output cable or motor is shorted to ground 1. Examine the motor main circuit cable, terminals, and motor
(the current short to ground is charging the main terminal box, and then remove ground faults.
circuit capacitor of the drive through the power 2. Re-energize the drive.
supply).

The power supply voltage is too high. Decrease the power supply voltage to match the drive rated
voltage.

Electrical interference caused a drive malfunction. • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
• Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the
electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if
necessary. Troubleshooting
• Set L5-01 ≠ 0 [Number of Auto-Restart Attempts ≠ 0 times].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage is more than the ov detection level when the Run command has not been input (while the drive is stopped).
• The ov detection level is approximately 410 V with 200 V class drives. The detection level is approximately 820 V for 400 V class drives.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

ovEr Too Many Parameters Changed You tried to change more than 150 parameters. Make sure that parameters that do not have an effect on drive
7
operation are at their default settings.
Note:
• You can change 150 parameters maximum.
• If you change parameters that have dependencies, the drive
can detect ovEr when the number of changed parameters is
fewer than 150.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

PF Input Phase Loss There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct all wiring errors with the main circuit power supply.

Loose wiring in the input power terminals. Tighten the screws to the correct tightening torque.

The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the supply voltage for problems.
much. • Make the drive input power stable.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 187

7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Unsatisfactory balance between voltage phases. • Examine the supply voltage for problems.
• Make the drive input power stable.
• If the supply voltage is good, examine the magnetic contactor
on the main circuit side for problems.

The main circuit capacitors have become • Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
unserviceable. [CapacitorMaintenance].
• If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the capacitor. Contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more
information.

• Examine the supply voltage for problems.

• Re-energize the drive.
• If the alarm stays, replace the circuit board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage changes irregularly without regeneration.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
• Use L8-05 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel] to enable and disable PF detection.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

SToF Safe Torque OFF Failure One of the two terminals H1-HC and H2-HC • Make sure that the Safe Disable signal is input from an
received the Safe Disable input signal. external source to terminals H1-HC or H2-HC.
• When the Safe Disable function is not in use, connect
The Safe Disable input signal is wired incorrectly. terminals H1-HC and H2-HC.

There is internal damage to one Safe Disable Replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing
channel. the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

TiM Keypad Time Not Set There is a battery in the keypad, but the date and Set the date and time with the keypad.
time are not set.
Note:
• Parameter o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] enables and disables TiM detection.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

TrPC IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) The IGBT is at 90% of its expected performance Replace the IGBT or the drive. For information about replacing
life. the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault
Example: There is a broken pulley belt.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] and L6-03 [Torque
Detection Time 1].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is less than the level set in L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• Set the conditions that trigger the minor fault using L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault
Example: There is a broken pulley belt.

The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2] and L6-06 [Torque
Detection Time 2].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is less than the level set in L6-05 for longer than L6-06.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• Set the conditions that trigger the minor fault using L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2].
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Uv DC Bus Undervoltage The drive input power voltage is changing too • Use a better power supply voltage to align with the drive rated
much. voltage.
• Make the drive input power stable.
• If there is not a fault with the input power supply, examine the
magnetic contactor on the main circuit side for faults.

A phase loss occurred in the drive input power. Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.

There is loose wiring in the drive input power Examine for loose screws and tighten them as specified by the
terminals. tightening torque values in the manual.

There was a loss of power. Use a better power supply.

188 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

The main circuit capacitors have deteriorated. Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
[CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the
control board or the drive. For information about replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

The drive input power transformer is too small and • Check for an alarm when a molded-case circuit breaker,
voltage drops when the power is switched on. Leakage Breaker (ELCB, GFCI, or RCM/RCD) (with
overcurrent protective function), or magnetic contactor is ON.
• Check the capacity of the drive power supply transformer.

Air inside the drive is too hot. Measure the ambient temperature of the drive.

The Charge LED is broken. Replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if one of these conditions is correct when the Run command has not been input (while the drive is stopped).
–The DC bus voltage < L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)].
–The Contactor that prevents inrush current in the drive was opened.
–There is low voltage in the control drive input power.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.

Troubleshooting

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 189

7.6 Parameter Setting Errors

7.6 Parameter Setting Errors

Parameter setting errors occur when multiple parameter settings do not agree, or when parameter setting values
are not correct. Refer to the table in this section, examine the parameter setting that caused the error, and remove
the cause of the error. You must first correct the parameter setting errors before you can operate the drive. The
drive will not send notification signals for the faults and alarms when these parameter setting errors occur.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oPE01 Drive Capacity Setting Error The value set in o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Set o2-04 to the correct value.
Selection] does not agree with the drive model.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oPE02 Parameter Range Setting Error Parameter settings are not in the applicable setting
range. 1. Push to show U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter], and find
parameters that are not in the applicable setting range.
2. Correct the parameter settings.
Note:
• If more than one error occurs at the same time, other oPExx
errors have priority over oPE02.

Set E2-01 ≤ E2-03 [Motor Rated Current (FLA) ≤ Make sure that E2-01 > E2-03.
Motor No-Load Current]. Note:
If it is necessary to set E2-01 < E2-03, first lower the value
set in E2-03, and then set E2-01.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oPE03 Multi-Function Input Setting Err The settings for these parameters do not agree: Correct the parameter settings.
• H1-01 to H1-07 [Terminals S1 to S7 Function
Selection]

The settings for MFDIs overlap. Set the parameters correctly to prevent MFDI function overlap.
Note:
This does not include H1-xx = 20 to 2F [MFDI
Function Select = External Fault] and
[Reserved].

You did not set these pairs of MFDI functions to Set the MFDI pairs.
Digital Inputs (H1-xx) at the same time.

You set a minimum of two of these MFDI Remove the function settings that are not in use.
combinations to Digital Inputs (H1-xx) at the same
time.

Settings for N.C. and N.O. input [H1-xx] for these Remove one of the function settings.
functions were selected at the same time:
• Setting value 15 [Fast Stop (N.O.)]
• Setting value 17 [Fast Stop (N.C.)]

These parameters are set at the same time: Correct the parameter settings.
• H1-xx ≠ 6A [Drive Enable]
• H2-xx = 38 [Drive Enabled]

• Multistep frequency reference [D1-18 = 0] and Check if contradictory settings have been assigned to the multi-
H1-xx = 50/150, 51/151, 52/152 or 53/153 are function terminals at the same time. Correct setting errors.
selected.
• Speed reference by digital input [D1-18 = 1] and
multi-step speed references 3/103, 4/104 or 5/
105 are selected.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oPE08 Parameter Selection Error A function was set that is not compatible with the 1. Push ENTER Key to show U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter],
control method selected in A1-02 [Control Method and find parameters that are not in the applicable setting
Selection]. range.
2. Correct the parameter settings.
Note:
If more than one error occurs at the same time, other oPExx
errors have priority over oPE02.

When A1-02 = 2 [OLV], you used these parameter • Set n2-02 < n2-03.
settings: • Set C4-02 < C4-06.
• n2-02 > n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time
1 > Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2]
• C4-02 > C4-06 [Torque Compensation Delay
Time > Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time]

190 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.6 Parameter Setting Errors

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

oPE10 V/f Data Setting Error The parameters that set the V/f pattern do not Set the parameters correctly to satisfy the conditions.
satisfy these conditions:
• For motor 1: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤
E1-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point
A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B
Frequency ≤ Maximum Output Frequency]
• For motor 2: E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-11 ≤
E3-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point
A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B
Frequency ≤ Maximum Output Frequency]

Troubleshooting

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 191

7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors

7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors

This table gives information about errors detected during Auto-Tuning. If the drive detects an Auto-Tuning error,
the keypad will show the error and the motor will coast to stop. The drive will not send notification signals for
faults and alarms when Auto-Tuning errors occur.
Two types of Auto-Tuning errors are: Endx and Erx. Endx identifies that Auto-Tuning has successfully completed
with calculation errors. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again, or set the motor
parameters manually. You can use the drive in the application if you cannot find the cause of the Endx error.
Erx identifies that Auto-Tuning was not successful. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning
again.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End1 Excessive Rated Voltage Setting The torque reference was more than 20% during • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Auto-Tuning or the no-load current that was • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
measured after Auto-Tuning is more than 80%. data.
• If you can uncouple the motor and load, remove the motor
from the machine and do Rotational Auto-Tuning again.
• If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, use the results
from Auto-Tuning.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End2 Iron Core Saturation Coefficient The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Tuning is incorrect. • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.

Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.
parameter setting range, and E2-07 or E2-08 [Motor • If you can uncouple the motor and load, remove the motor
Saturation Coefficient 2] have temporary values. from the machine and do Rotational Auto-Tuning again.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm The rated current value is incorrect. Do Auto-Tuning again and set the correct rated current shown on
the motor nameplate.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Make sure the input motor nameplate data is correct.
parameter setting range. • Do Rotational Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor
nameplate data.
The motor rated slip that was measured after
Stationary Auto-Tuning was 0.2 Hz or lower. • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, do Stationary
Auto-Tuning 2.
The motor rated slip that was measured after
compensation with E2-08 [Motor Saturation
Coefficient 2] is not in the applicable range.

The secondary resistor measurement results were

not in the applicable range.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End5 Resistance Tuning Error The Auto-Tuning results of the Line-to-Line • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Resistance were not in the applicable range. • Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and do
parameter setting range. Auto-Tuning again.

A1-02 [Control Method Selection] setting is not • Examine the value set in A1-02.
applicable. • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and
do Auto-Tuning again.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

End7 No-Load Current Alarm The Auto-Tuning results of the motor no-load Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.
current value were not in the applicable range.

Auto-Tuning results were less than 5% of the motor Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and do
rated current. Auto-Tuning again.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-01 Motor Data Error The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the motor nameplate data is correct.
Tuning is incorrect. • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.

The combination of the motor rated power and • Examine the combination of drive capacity and motor output.
motor rated current do not match. • Do Auto-Tuning again, and correctly set the motor rated power
and motor rated current.

192 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

The combination of the motor rated current that was • Examine the motor rated current and the no-load current.
entered during Auto-Tuning and E2-03 [Motor No- • Set E2-03 correctly.
Load Current] do not match.
• Do Auto-Tuning again, and correctly set the motor rated
current.

The combination of the setting values of Motor Do Auto-Tuning again, and correctly set the Motor Base
Base Frequency and Motor Base Speed do not Frequency and Motor Base Speed.
match.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-02 Drive in an Alarm State The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the motor nameplate data entered in Auto-
Tuning is incorrect. Tuning is correct.
• Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.

You did Auto-Tuning while the drive had a minor Clear the minor fault or alarm and do Auto-Tuning again.
fault or alarm.

There is a defective motor cable or cable Examine and repair motor wiring.
connection.

The load is too large. • Decrease the load.

• Examine the machine area to see if, for example, the motor
shaft is locked.

The drive detected a minor fault during Auto- 1. Stop Auto-Tuning.

Tuning. 2. Examine the minor fault code and remove the cause of the
problem.
3. Do Auto-Tuning again.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-03 STOP Button was Pressed Auto-Tuning did not complete correctly. Do Auto-Tuning again.
During Auto-Tuning, was pushed.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Examine and repair motor wiring.
parameter setting range. • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.
Auto-Tuning did not complete in a pre-set length of
time.

There is a defective motor cable or cable

connection.

The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Tuning is incorrect. • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-05 No-Load Current Error The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Examine and repair motor wiring.
parameter setting range. • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.
Auto-Tuning did not complete in a pre-set length of
time.

The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Tuning is incorrect. • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.

Rotational Auto-Tuning was done with a load that • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
was more than 30% of the rating connected to the Auto-Tuning again.
motor. • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, make sure that the
load is less than 30% of the motor rating. If a mechanical Troubleshooting
brake is installed in the motor, release the brake during
Rotational Auto-Tuning.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-08 Rated Slip Error The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Tuning is incorrect. • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.

Auto-Tuning did not complete in a pre-set length of • Examine and repair the motor wiring.
7
time. • If the motor and machine are connected during Rotational
Auto-Tuning, decouple the motor from the machinery.
The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable
parameter setting range.

Rotational Auto-Tuning was done with a load that • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
was more than 30% of the rating connected to the Auto-Tuning again.
motor. • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, make sure that the
load is less than 30% of the motor rating. If a mechanical
brake is installed in the motor, release the brake during
Rotational Auto-Tuning.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 193

7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-09 Acceleration Error The motor did not accelerate for the specified 1. Increase the value set in C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1].
acceleration time. 2. Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.

The value of L7-01 or L7-02 [Forward/Reverse Increase the value set in L7-01 or L7-02.
Torque Limit] is small.

Rotational Auto-Tuning was done with a load that • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
was more than 30% of the rating connected to the Auto-Tuning again.
motor. • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, make sure that the
load is less than 30% of the motor rating. If a mechanical
brake is installed in the motor, release the brake during
Rotational Auto-Tuning.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-11 Motor Speed Error The torque reference during acceleration is too high • Increase the value set in C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1].
(100%). • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-12 Current Detection Error There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Examine and repair motor wiring.
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

The current exceeded the current rating of the drive. • Check the motor wiring for any short circuits between the
wires.
The output current is too low. • Check and turn ON any magnetic contactors used between
motors.
• Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest
sales representative.

You tried Auto-Tuning without a motor connected Connect the motor and do Auto-Tuning.
to the drive.

There was a current detection signal error. Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-13 Leakage Inductance Alarm The motor rated current value is incorrect. Correctly set the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate
and perform Auto-Tuning again.

The drive could not complete tuning for leakage Examine and repair motor wiring.
inductance in fewer than 300 seconds.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

Er-15 Torque Saturation Error During Inertia Tuning, the output torque was more • Increase the value set in L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] as
than the value set in L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit]. much as possible.
• Decrease the values set for the frequency and amplitude of the
test signals used when doing inertia tuning. First, decrease the
test signal amplitude, and then do Inertia Tuning. If the error
continues, decrease the test signal frequency and do Inertia
Tuning again.

194 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors

7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors

◆ Operating Mode Display
When you use the LCD keypad to do the backup function, the keypad shows the running operation on the LCD
display. These indicators do not show that an error has occurred.
Keypad Display Name Display Status

Drive and Keypad mismatch. Detection of inconsistency between the Normally displayed The drive detected the connection of a
Should the parameters be drive and keypad keypad from a different drive. Select [Yes]
to copy parameters backed up in the
restored? keypad to the connected drive.

Restore Restore from keypad Restoring parameters Flashing The parameters stored in the keypad have
been restored to the drive.

End Backup/restore/verify operation ended Normally displayed The parameter backup, restore, or verify
normally operation ended normally.

Backup Backup from Drive Backing up parameters Flashing The parameters stored in the drive are
being backed up to the keypad.

Verify Keypad & Drive Verifying parameters Flashing The parameter settings stored in the
keypad and the parameter settings in the
drive match or are being compared.

◆ Backup Function Runtime Errors

When an error occurs, the keypad shows a code to identify the error.
The table in this section show the error codes. If there are errors, refer to these tables:
Note:
Push any key on the keypad to clear an error.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPEr Control Mode Mismatch The keypad setting and drive setting for A1-02 1. Set A1-02 on the drive to the same value that is on the
[Control Method Selection] do not agree. keypad.
2. Restore the parameters.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CPyE Error Writing Data Parameter restore did not end correctly. Restore the parameters.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

CSEr Control Mode Mismatch The keypad is broken. Replace the keypad.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

dFPS Drive Model Mismatch You tried to restore parameters to a different drive 1. Examine the drive model that you used to back up the
model than the one that you backed up. parameters.
2. Restore the parameters.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

iFEr Keypad Communication Error There was a communications error between the Examine the connector or cable connection.
keypad and the drive.
Troubleshooting
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

ndAT Error Received Data The parameter settings for model and specifications 1. Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2-04 [Drive
(power supply voltage and capacity) are different Model (KVA) Selection] agree.
between the keypad and the drive. 2. Restore the parameters.

The parameters are not stored in the keypad. 1. Connect a keypad that has the correct parameters.
2. Restore the parameters.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

7
rdEr Error Reading Data You tried to back up the data when o3-02 = 0 [Copy Set o3-02 = 1 [Enabled] and back up again.
Allowed Selection = Disabled].

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch The power supply specifications or drive capacity 1. Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2-04 [Drive
parameter settings are different between the keypad Model (KVA) Selection] agree.
and the drive. 2. Restore the parameters.

Code Name Causes Possible Solutions

vFyE Parameters do not Match The parameters that are backed up in the keypad 1. Restore or backup the parameter again.
and the parameters in the drive are not the same. 2. Verify the parameters.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 195

7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

When a fault occurs and the drive stops, do the procedures in this section to remove the cause of the fault, then re-
energize the drive.

◆ Fault and Power Loss Occur at the Same Time

WARNING! Crush Hazard. Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive. If you do not use correct safety equipment, it
can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive
or operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and make sure that all indicators
are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of
the problem, contact Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices. If you do not fix the problem before you
operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

1. Supply power to the control circuit from the external 24 V input.

2. Use monitor parameters U2-xx [Fault Trace] to show the fault code and data about the operating status of
the drive immediately before the fault occurred.
3. Use the information in the Troubleshooting tables to remove the fault.
Note:
1. To find the faults that were triggered, check the fault history in U2-02 [Previous Fault]. To find information about drive status (such
as frequency, current, and voltage) when the faults were triggered, check U2-03 to U2-20.
2. If the fault display stays after you re-energize the drive, remove the cause of the fault and reset.

◆ Fault Occurs Without Power Loss

1. Examine the fault code shown on the keypad.
2. Use the information in the Troubleshooting tables to remove the fault.
3. Do a fault reset.

◆ Fault Reset Procedure

If a fault occurs, you must remove the cause of the fault and re-energize the drive. Table 7.3 lists the different
methods to reset the drive after a fault.
Table 7.3 Fault Reset Methods
Methods Description

Method 1 While the keypad is showing the fault or alarm code, push on the keypad.

Switch ON the MFDI terminal set to H1-xx = 14 [MFDI Function Select = Fault Reset].
Note:
The default setting for H1-04 [Terminal S4 Function Selection] is 14 [Fault Reset].

Method 2

1. De-energize the drive main circuit power supply.

2. Energize the drive again after the keypad display goes out.

Method 3

Note:
If the drive receives a Run command from a communication option or control circuit terminal, the drive will not reset the fault. Turn the
Run command OFF to reset the fault. If you do a fault reset when the drive has a Run command, the keypad will show minor fault CrST
[Remove RUN Command to Reset].

196 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

If the drive or motor operate incorrectly, but the keypad does not show a fault or error code, refer to the items this
section.
• Motor hunting and oscillation
• Unsatisfactory motor torque
• Unsatisfactory speed precision
• Unsatisfactory motor torque and speed response
• Motor noise

◆ The Parameter Settings Will Not Change

Causes Possible Solutions

The drive is operating the motor (the drive is in Drive Mode). Stop the drive and change to Programming Mode.

Parameter A1-01 = 0 [Access Level Selection = Operation Only]. Set A1-01 = 2 [Access Level Selection = Advanced Level] or A1-01 = 3 [Expert Level].

Parameter H1-xx = 1B [MFDI Function Select = Programming Lockout]. Activate the terminals to which H1-xx = 1B is set, and then change the parameters.

You entered an incorrect password in A1-04 [Password]. • Enter the correct password to A1-04 again.
• If you forgot the password, set the password again with A1-04 and A1-05 [Password Setting].
Note:
If you set the password, you cannot change these parameters until the password aligns:
• A1-01 [Access Level Selection]
• A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
• A1-03 [Initialize Parameters]
• A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to User Parameter 32]

The drive detected Uv [Undervoltage]. • View U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage] to see the power supply voltage.
• Examine the main circuit wiring.

◆ The Motor Does Not Rotate after You Enter a Run Command
Causes Possible Solutions

The drive is not in Drive Mode. 1. Make sure that the READY LED on the keypad is ON.
2. If the READY LED is OFF, push and hold the ESC Key to go back to the frequency
reference screen (the initial screen).

Do one of these two:

The drive stopped and you pushed to transfer the Run command
source to the keypad. • Push .
• Re-energize the drive.
Note:

When must not change the Run command source, set o2-01 = 0 [LO/RE Key
Function Selection = Disabled].

Auto-Tuning completed. Push and hold the ESC Key to go back to the frequency reference screen (the initial screen).
Note:
When Auto-Tuning completes, the drive changes to Programming Mode. The drive will not
accept a Run command unless the drive is in Drive Mode.
Troubleshooting
The drive received a Fast Stop command. Turn off the fast stop input signal.

The settings for the source that supplies the Run command are incorrect. Set b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1] correctly.

The frequency reference source is not set correctly. Set b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] correctly.

There is defective wiring in the control circuit terminals. • Correctly wire the drive control circuit terminals.
• View U1-10 [Input Terminal Status] for input terminal status.

The selection for the sinking/sourcing mode and the internal/external power • For sinking mode, close the circuit between terminals SC-SP with a wire jumper.
7
supply is incorrect. • For sourcing mode, close the circuit between terminals SC-SN with a wire jumper.
• For external power supply, remove the wire jumper.

The frequency reference is too low. • View U1-01 [Freq Reference].

• Increase the frequency reference to a value higher than E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency].

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 197

7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

Causes Possible Solutions

Turn the Run command OFF then ON from an external input.

You pushed . Note:

When you push during operation, the drive will ramp to stop. Set o2-02 = 0 [STOP

Key Function Selection = Disabled] to disable the function.

The 2-wire sequence and 3-wire sequence are not set correctly. • Set one of the parameters H1-03 to H1-07 [Terminals S3 to S7 Function Select] to 0 [3-Wire
Sequence] to enable the 3-wire sequence.
• If a 2-wire sequence is necessary, make sure that H1-03 to H1-07 ≠ 0.

◆ The Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down Command
Causes Possible Solutions

The phase wiring between the drive and motor is incorrect. • Examine the wiring between the drive and motor.
• Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in the correct sequence to agree with
motor terminals U, V, and W.
• Switch two motor cables U, V, and W to reverse motor direction.

Drive control circuit terminals for the Up and Down commands are • Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in the correct sequence to agree with
switched. motor terminals U, V, and W.
• Switch two motor cables U, V, and W to reverse motor direction.

Figure 7.1 Forward Rotating Motor

Note:
• For Yaskawa motors, the forward direction is counterclockwise when looking from the
motor shaft side.
• Refer to the motor specifications, and make sure that the forward rotation direction is
correct for the application. The forward rotation direction of motors can be different for
different motor manufacturers and types.

The signal connections for forward run and reverse run on the drive control Correctly wire the control circuit.
circuit terminals and control panel side are incorrect.

◆ The Motor Rotates in Only One Direction

Causes Possible Solutions

The drive will not let the motor rotate in reverse. Set b1-04 = 0 [Reverse Operation Selection = Reverse Enabled].

The drive did not receive a Reverse run signal and 3-Wire sequence is Activate the terminals to which H1-xx = 0 [3-Wire Sequence] is set, and then enable reverse
selected. operation.

◆ The Motor Is Too Hot

Causes Possible Solutions

The load is too heavy. • Decrease the load.

• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
• Examine the values set in L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection], L1-02 [Motor Overload
Protection Time], and E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)].
• Use a larger motor.
Note:
The motor also has a short-term overload rating. Examine this rating carefully before setting
drive parameters.

The motor is running continuously at a very low speed. • Change the run speed.
• Use a drive-dedicated motor.

The drive is operating in a vector control mode, but Auto-Tuning has not • Do Auto-Tuning.
been done. • Calculate motor parameter and set motor parameters.
• Set A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control].

The voltage insulation between motor phases is not sufficient. • Use a motor with a voltage tolerance that is higher than the maximum voltage surge.
• Use a drive-dedicated motor that is rated for use with AC drives for applications that use a
motor on drives rated higher than 400 V class.
• Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive and set C6-02 = 1 [Carrier Frequency
Selection = 2.0 kHz].
Note:
When the motor is connected to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, surges
occur between the drive switching and the motor coils. These surges can be three times the
drive input power supply voltage (600 V for a 200 V class drive, 1200 V for a 400 V class
drive).

198 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

Causes Possible Solutions

The air around the motor is too hot. • Measure the ambient temperature.
• Decrease the temperature in the area until it is in the specified temperature range.

The motor fan stopped or is clogged. • Clean the motor fan.

• Make the drive environment better.

◆ The Correct Auto-Tuning Mode Is Not Available

Causes Possible Solutions

The desired Auto-Tuning mode is not available for the selected control Change the motor control method with parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection].
mode.

◆ The Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel/Decel Time Is Too Long

Causes Possible Solutions

The drive and motor system are at the torque limit or current suppression • Decrease the load.
will not let the drive accelerate. • Use a larger motor.
Note:
Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque Compensation Limit
function, if you try to accelerate too fast or try to drive a load that is too large, it can be too
much for the limits of the motor.

Torque limit is set incorrectly. Set the torque limit correctly.

The acceleration time setting is too short. Examine the values set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07 [Acceleration Time] and set them to
applicable values.

The load is too large. • Increase the acceleration time.

• Examine the mechanical brake and make sure that it is fully releasing.
• Decrease the load to make sure that the output current stays less than the motor rated current.
• Use a larger motor.
Note:
• In extruder and mixer applications, the load can increase as the temperature decreases.
• Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque Compensation Limit
function, if you try to accelerate too fast or try to drive a load that is too large, it can be too
much for the limits of the motor.

The motor characteristics and drive parameter settings are not compatible. • Set the correct V/f pattern to agree with the characteristics of the motor.
• Examine the V/f pattern set in E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection].
• Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.

The drive is operating in vector control mode, but you did not complete • Do Auto-Tuning.
Auto-Tuning. • Calculate motor data and reset motor parameters.
• Set A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control].

The Stall Prevention level during acceleration setting is too low. Increase the value set in L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel].
Note:
If the L3-02 value is too low, the acceleration time can be unsatisfactorily long.

The Stall Prevention level during run setting is too low. Increase the value set in L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during Run].
Note:
If the L3-06 value is too low, speed will decrease before the drive outputs torque.

The drive is at the limit of the V/f motor control method. • When the motor cable is longer than 50 m (164 ft), do Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance.
• Set the V/f pattern to “High Starting Torque”. Troubleshooting
• Use a Vector Control method.
Note:
V/f control method does not supply high torque at low speeds.

◆ There Is Too Much Motor Oscillation and the Rotation Is Irregular

7
Causes Possible Solutions

Unsatisfactory balance of motor phases. • Make sure that the drive input power voltage supplies stable power.
• Set L8-05 = 0 [Input Phase Loss Protect Select = Disabled].

The motor is hunting. • Set n1-01 = 1 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled].

• Increase the value of n2-01 [SpdFeedbackDetectCtr (AFR) Gain] or n2-02
[SpdFeedbackDetCtr(AFR)TimeConst1].

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 199

7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

◆ Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected When Dynamic Braking Is Enabled

Causes Possible Solutions

The stall prevention during deceleration setting is incorrect. • Examine the setting for L3-04 [Decel Stall Prevention Selection].
• When the drive has a dynamic braking option installed, set L3-04 = 0 [Disabled].

The deceleration time setting is too long. Set C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08 [Deceleration Times] to applicable values.

The motor torque is not sufficient. Use a larger motor.

Note:
If these items are correct, the demand on the motor is more than the motor capacity:
• Parameter settings are correct.
• The drive does not detect ov [Overvoltage].

The drive and motor system reached the torque limit. Examine the values set in L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] and increase them if necessary.
Note:
If the torque limit is enabled, deceleration time can increase because the drive cannot output
more torque than the limit.

The load is more than the internal torque limit as specified by the drive rated Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
current.

◆ There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables when You Energize the
Drive
Causes Possible Solutions

The relay switching in the drive is making too much noise. • Use C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] to decrease the carrier frequency.
• Connect a noise filter to the input side of the drive power supply.
• Connect a noise filter to the output side of the drive.
• Isolate the control circuit wiring from the main circuit wiring.
• Use a metal cable gland to wire the drive.
• Shield the periphery of the drive with metal.
• Make sure that the drive and motor are grounded correctly.
• Make sure that ground faults have not occurred in the wiring or motor.

◆ Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) Trips During Run

Causes Possible Solutions

There is too much leakage current from the drive. • Increase the RCM/RCD sensitivity or use RCM/RCD with a higher threshold.
• Use C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] to decrease the carrier frequency.
• Decrease the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor.
• Install a noise filter or AC reactor on the output side of the drive. Set C6-02 = 1 [2.0 kHz]
when connecting an AC reactor.
• Disable the internal EMC filter.

◆ Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from Connected Machinery

Causes Possible Solutions

The carrier frequency and the resonant frequency of the connected • Adjust C6-02 to C6-05 [Carrier Frequency].
machinery are the same. • Set C6-02 = 1 to 6 [Carrier Frequency Selection = Frequency other than Swing PWM].
Note:
If C6-02 = 7 to A [Carrier Frequency Selection = Swing PWM], the drive will not know if
the noise comes from the drive or the machine.

◆ Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting

Causes Possible Solutions

The frequency reference is assigned to an external source, and there is Make sure that electrical interference does not have an effect on the signal lines.
electrical interference in the signal. • Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring.
• Use twisted-pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit.

The cable between the drive and motor is too long. • Do Auto-Tuning.
• Make the wiring as short as possible.

200 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

◆ The Starting Torque Is Not Sufficient

Causes Possible Solutions

Auto-Tuning has not been done in vector control method. Do Auto-Tuning.

The control method was changed after doing Auto-Tuning. Do Auto-Tuning again.

Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance was done. Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.

◆ The Output Frequency Is Lower Than the Frequency Reference

Causes Possible Solutions

A large load triggered Stall Prevention function during acceleration. • Decrease the load.
• Adjust L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel].

L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevent Select duringAccel = ILim Mode] has been set. 1. Check whether the V/f pattern and motor parameter settings are appropriate, and set them
correctly.
2. If this does not solve the problem, and it is not necessary to limit the current level of stall
during acceleration, adjust L3-02.
3. If this does not solve the problem, set L3-01 = 1 [Enabled].

The motor is rotating at this speed: Set E1-09 < S1-02.

S1-02 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] ≤ Motor Speed < E1-09
[Minimum Output Frequency]

◆ The Motor Will Not Restart after a Loss of Power

Causes Possible Solutions

The drive did not receive a Run command after applying power. • Examine the sequence and wiring that enters the Run command.
• Set up a relay to make sure that the Run command stays enabled during a loss of power.

For applications that use 3-wire sequence, the momentary power loss Examine the wiring and circuitry for the relay that keeps the Run command enabled during the
continued for a long time, and the relay that keeps the Run command has momentary power loss ride-thru time.
been switched off.

Troubleshooting

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 201

7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

202 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8
Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
This chapter gives information about how to examine and maintain drives in use, how to replace
cooling fans and other parts, and how to store drives.

8.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................204

8.2 Inspection.................................................................................................................206
8.3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................208
8.4 Replace Cooling Fans ...........................................................................................210
8.5 Replace the Drive ...................................................................................................215
8.6 Storage Guidelines ................................................................................................217

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 203

8.1 Section Safety

8.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.
Disconnect all power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before you
remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous voltages before servicing or repair work.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized and there is no cover over the electronic circuits, it will cause
serious injury or death from electrical shock. The drive has internal capacitors that stay charged after you de-
energize the drive.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
The motor will run after you de-energize the drive. PM motors can generate induced voltage to
the terminal of the motor after you de-energize the drive.
If you touch a motor that is moving or energized, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not operate the drive when covers are missing. Replace covers and shields before you
operate the drive. Use the drive only as specified by the instructions.
Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the
drive. If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
If you do not ground the equipment correctly, it can cause serious injury or death if you touch the motor case.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing
and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings.
Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect
connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.
Damage to Equipment
Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified
range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate.
Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.
Fire Hazard
Do not put flammable or combustible materials on top of the drive and do not install the drive
near flammable or combustible materials. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible
material.
Flammable and combustible materials can start a fire and cause serious injury or death.

204 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Sudden Movement Hazard
Make sure that you align the phase order for the drive and motor when you connect the motor to
drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
If the phase order is incorrect, it can cause the motor to run in reverse. If the motor accidentally runs in reverse, it
can cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION
Burn Hazard
Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then
make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans.
If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.

NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans. When you do maintenance on
the fans, replace all the fans to increase product life.
If you install the fans incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral
devices.
Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive.
Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes.
If you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.
Do not operate a drive or connected equipment that has damaged or missing parts.
You can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.

Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

Note:
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the
drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 205

8.2 Inspection

8.2 Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and can show changes in performance and deterioration of performance after
years of use in usual conditions. To help prevent these problems, it is important to do preventive maintenance and
regular inspection, and replace parts on the drive.
Drives contain different types of power electronics, for example power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors,
resistors, fans, and relays. The electronics in the drive are necessary for correct motor control.
Follow the inspection lists in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note:
Examine the drive one time each year at a minimum.
The operating conditions, environmental conditions, and use conditions will have an effect on the examination frequency for connected
equipment.
Examine the drive more frequently if you use the drive in bad conditions or in these conditions:
• High ambient temperatures
• Frequent starting and stopping
• Changes in the AC power supply or load
• Too much vibration or shock loading
• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, or chlorine atmospheres
• Unsatisfactory storage conditions.

◆ Recommended Daily Inspection

Examine the items in Table 8.1 each day to make sure that the components do not wear out or fail. Make a copy of
this checklist and put a check mark in the “Checked” column after each inspection.
Table 8.1 Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

• Check the load coupling.

Motor Examine for unusual oscillation or noise coming • Measure motor vibration.
from the motor.
• Tighten all loose components.

• Check for a load that is too heavy.

Examine for unusual heat from the drive or motor • Tighten loose screws.
and visible discoloration. • Check for a dirty heatsink or motor.
Cooling System • Measure the ambient temperature.

• Check for a clogged or dirty fan.

Examine the cooling fans.
• Use the performance life monitor to check for correct fan operation.

Surrounding Make sure that the installation environment is Remove the source of contamination or correct unsatisfactory environment.
Environment applicable.

Make sure that the drive output current is not more • Check for a load that is too heavy.
Load than the motor or drive rating for an extended period
of time. • Check the correct motor parameter settings.

Power Supply • Correct the voltage or power supply to agree with nameplate specifications.
Examine main power supply and control voltages.
Voltage • Verify all main circuit phases.

◆ Recommended Periodic Inspection

Examine the items in Table 8.2 to Table 8.6 one time each year at a minimum. The operating conditions,
environmental conditions, and use conditions will have an effect on the examination frequency for connected
equipment. You must use your experience with the application to select the correct inspection frequency for each
drive installation. Periodic inspections will help to prevent performance deterioration and product failure. Make a
copy of this checklist and put a check mark in the “Checked” column after each inspection.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

206 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.2 Inspection

Table 8.2 Main Circuit Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

• Examine equipment for discoloration from too • Replace damaged components as necessary.
much heat or deterioration. • The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to
• Examine for damaged parts. replace the drive.

General • Examine enclosure door seal.

• Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without
Examine for dirt, unwanted particles, or dust on touching the components.
components.
• If you cannot remove unwanted particles and dust with a vacuum cleaner,
replace the components.

• Examine wiring and connections for discoloration

or damage. Examine wiring and connections for
Conductors and discoloration from too much heat. Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Wiring
• Examine wire insulation and shielding for
discoloration and wear.

Examine terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose • Tighten loose screws.

Terminal Block connections. • Replace damaged screws.

• Examine contactors and relays for too much noise

Electromagnetic during operation. • Check coil voltage for overvoltage or undervoltage conditions.
Contactors and
Relays • Examine coils for signs of too much heat, such as • Replace broken relays, contactors, or circuit boards that you can remove.
melted or broken insulation.

Dynamic Braking Examine the insulation for discoloration from too If there is discoloration in the option, check to make sure that there is not damage
Option much heat. to the wiring. A small quantity of discoloration is not a problem.

• Examine for leaks, discoloration, or cracks.

Electrolytic The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to
Capacitor • Examine if the cap has come off, if there is replace the drive.
swelling, or if there are leaks from broken sides.

Diodes, IGBT Examine for dust or other unwanted material Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without touching
(Power Transistor) collected on the surface. the components.

Table 8.3 Motor Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

Operation Check Check for increased vibration or unusual noise. Stop the motor and contact approved maintenance personnel as necessary.

Table 8.4 Control Circuit Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

• Examine terminals for stripped, damaged, or • Tighten loose screws.

loose connections. • Replace damaged screws or terminals.
General
• Make sure that all terminals have been correctly • If terminals are integral to a circuit board, it could be necessary to replace the
tightened. control board or the drive.

• Tighten loose connections.

• Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without
• Check for odor, discoloration, or rust. touching the components.
• Make sure that all connections are correctly
Circuit Boards fastened. • If you cannot remove unwanted particles and dust with a vacuum cleaner,
replace the components.
• Make sure that the surface of the circuit board
does not have dust or oil mist. • Do not use solvents to clean the board.
• The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to
replace the drive.

Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

Table 8.5 Cooling System Periodic Inspection Checklist
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

• Check for unusual oscillation or unusual noise.

Cooling Fan Clean or replace the fans as necessary.
• Check for damaged or missing fan blades.

• Examine for dust or other unwanted material

collected on the surface. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without touching
Heatsink
the components.
• Examine for dirt.

Air Duct Examine air intake, exhaust openings and make sure Clear blockages and clean air duct as necessary.
that there are no unwanted materials on the surface.

Table 8.6 Keypad Periodic Inspection Checklist

8
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

• Make sure that the keypad shows the data

• If you have problems with the display or the keys, contact Yaskawa or your
correctly.
General nearest sales representative.
• Examine for dust or other unwanted material that
• Clean the keypad.
collected on components in the area.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 207

8.3 Maintenance

8.3 Maintenance
The drive Maintenance Monitors keep track of component wear and tell the user when the end of the estimated
performance life is approaching. The Maintenance Monitors prevent the need to shut down the full system for
unexpected problems. Users can set alarm notifications for the maintenance periods for these drive components:
• Cooling fan
• Electrolytic capacitor
• Soft charge bypass relay
• IGBT
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information about part replacement.

◆ Replaceable Parts
You can replace these parts of the drive:
• Cooling fan
If there is a failure in the main circuit, replace the drive.
If the drive is in the warranty period, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before you replace
parts. Yaskawa reserves the right to replace or repair the drive as specified by the Yaskawa warranty policy.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

◆ Part Replacement Guidelines

Table 8.7 shows the standard replacement period for replacement parts. When you replace these parts, make sure
that you use Yaskawa replacement parts for the applicable model and design revision number of your drive.
Table 8.7 Standard Replacement Period
Parts Standard Replacement Period

Cooling fan 10 years

Electrolytic capacitor *1 10 years

*1 If there is damage to parts that you cannot repair or replace, replace the drive.
Note:
Performance life estimate is based on these use conditions. These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing parts to maintain
performance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments or rigorous use. Operating conditions for
performance life estimate: Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 40 °C (IP20/UL Open Type), Load factor: 80%, Operating rate: 24
hours a day

◆ Monitors that Display the Lifespan of Drive Components

The drive keypad shows percentage values for the replacement parts to help you know when you must replace
those components. Use the monitors in Table 8.8 to check replacement periods. When the monitor value is 100%,
the component is at the end of its useful life and there is an increased risk of drive malfunction. Yaskawa
recommends that you check the maintenance period regularly to make sure that you get the maximum
performance life.
Table 8.8 Performance Life Monitors
Monitor No. Parts Description

Shows the total operation time of fans as 0 to 99999 hours. After this value is 99999, the drive automatically
U4-03
resets it to 0.
Cooling fan
U4-04 Shows the total fan operation time as a percentage of the specified maintenance period.

U4-05 Electrolytic capacitor Shows the total capacitor usage time as a percentage of the specified maintenance period.

U4-06 Soft charge bypass relay Shows the number of times the drive is energized as a percentage of the performance life of the inrush circuit.

U4-07 IGBT Shows the percentage of the maintenance period for the IGBTs.

208 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.3 Maintenance

◆ Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors

You can use H2-xx [MFDO Function Selection] to send a message that tells you when a specified component is
near the end of its performance life estimate. Set the applicable value to H2-xx as shown in Table 8.9 for your
component.
When the specified component is near the end of its performance life estimate, the MFDO terminals set for H2-xx
= 2F [Maintenance Notification] will turn ON, and the keypad will show an alarm that identifies the component
to replace.
Table 8.9 Maintenance Period Alarms
MFDO
Display Alarm Name Cause Possible Solutions (Setting Value in
H2-xx)

LT-1 Cooling Fan The cooling fan is at 90% of its expected Replace the cooling fan, then set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation
Maintenance Time performance life. Time Setting = 0 h] to reset the cooling fan operation time.

Replace the board or the drive.

Capacitor The capacitors for the main circuit and control
LT-2 Maintenance Time circuit are at 90% of expected performance life. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
replace the board.
2F
Replace the board or the drive.
LT-3 SoftChargeBypassRe The soft charge bypass relay is at 90% of its
lay MainteTime performance life estimate. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
replace the board.

IGBT Maintenance The IGBT is at 50% of its expected performance Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency.
LT-4 Time (50%) life.

IGBT Maintenance The IGBT is at 90% of its expected performance Replace the IGBT or the drive.
TrPC 10
Time (90%) life.

◆ Related Parameters
Replace the component, then set o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 [Maintenance Setting] = 0 to reset the
Maintenance Monitor. If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the
Maintenance Monitor function will continue to count down the performance life from the value that was reached
with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset, the drive will not have the correct value of the
performance life for the new component.
Note:
The maintenance period changes for different operating environments.
Table 8.10 Maintenance Setting Parameters
No. Name Function

o4-03 Fan Operation Time Setting Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10-hour units.
Note:
When o4-03 = 30 has been set, the drive will count the operation time for the cooling fan from 300 hours
and U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] will show 300 h.
o4-05

Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

Capacitor Maintenance Setting Sets the value from which to start the count for the main circuit capacitor maintenance period as a percentage.

o4-07 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set Sets as a percentage the value from which to start the count for the soft charge bypass relay maintenance
time.

o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting Sets the value from which to start the count for the IGBT maintenance period as a percentage.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 209

8.4 Replace Cooling Fans

8.4 Replace Cooling Fans

To replace a cooling fan, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.

◆ Replace the Cooling Fan, Drive Models 2018, 2033 - 2075, 4009, 4024 - 4045
■ Safety Precautions
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then make
sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans. If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.
NOTICE: Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans. When you do maintenance on the fans, replace all the
fans to increase product life. If you install the fans incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.

■ Number of Cooling Fans

Model Cooling Fans

2018 1

2033 - 2075 2

4009 1

4024 - 4045 2

■ Remove a Fan
1. To remove the fan finger guard from the drive, push the hooks on the left and right sides of it and pull up.

A - Fan finger guard

Figure 8.1 Remove the Fan Finger Guard

2. Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive. Disconnect the power supply connector and remove the fan
from the drive.

A - Cooling fan

Figure 8.2 Remove the Cooling Fan

■ Install a Fan
Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan.

210 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.4 Replace Cooling Fans

1. Connect the power supply connector between the drive and cooling fan.

Figure 8.3 Connect the Power Supply Connector

2. Align the notches on the fan with the pins on the drive and install the cooling fans in the drive.

A - Alignment pins on drive C - Notch on fan

B - Front of drive
Figure 8.4 Install the Cooling Fan
Note:
When you install the cooling fan, make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the drive.

3. Put the cable and connector in the recess of the drive.

Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

A - Front of drive
Figure 8.5 Put the Cable and Connector in the Drive Recess

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 211

8.4 Replace Cooling Fans

Note:
The connector installation position is different for different models.

Figure 8.6 Put the Connector in the Recess

Figure 8.7 Put the Connector in Between the Fans

Figure 8.8 Put the Connector in Between the Drive and Fan
4. Insert the fan cover straight until the hook clicks into place.

Figure 8.9 Reattach the Fan Finger Guard

5. Energize the drive and set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h] to reset the cooling fan operation
time.

◆ Replace the Cooling Fan, Drive Models 2025, 4015, 4018

■ Safety Precautions
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then make
sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans. If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.
NOTICE: Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans. When you do maintenance on the fans, replace all the
fans to increase product life. If you install the fans incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.

212 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.4 Replace Cooling Fans

■ Number of Cooling Fans

Model Cooling Fans

2025 1

4015, 4018 1

■ Remove a Fan
1. Push the tabs toward the back of the drive and pull up to remove the fan finger guard from the drive.

A - Fan finger guard

Figure 8.10 Remove the Fan Finger Guard
2. Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive. Disconnect the power supply connector and remove the fan
from the drive.

A - Cooling fan
Figure 8.11 Remove the Cooling Fan

■ Install the Cooling Fans

Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan.

Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

1. Connect the power supply connector between the drive and cooling fan.

Figure 8.12 Connecting the power supply connector

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 213

8.4 Replace Cooling Fans

2. Install the cooling fans so that they align with the pins on the drive.

A - Alignment pins on drive C - Notches

B - Front of drive
Figure 8.13 Installing the cooling fans
Note:
When you install the cooling fan, make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the drive.

3. Put the cable and connector in the recess of the drive.

A - Front of drive

Figure 8.14 Putting the cable and connector in the recess

4. Insert the tabs of the fan cover into the holes in the drive and press in the fan cover until the hook clicks
into place.

Figure 8.15 Reattach the Fan Finger Guard

5. Energize the drive and set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h] to reset the cooling fan operation
time.

214 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.5 Replace the Drive

8.5 Replace the Drive

◆ About the Control Circuit Board
You can remove the control circuit board of the drive and install a new board. If there is a failure in the drive, you
can use this feature to easily replace the control circuit board.

A - Control circuit board

Figure 8.16 Control Circuit Terminal Block

◆ Safety Precautions
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect all power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before
you remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous voltages before servicing or repair work. If you do work on the drive when it
is energized and there is no cover over the electronic circuits, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock. The
drive has internal capacitors that stay charged after you de-energize the drive.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, measure for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work
on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the
drive. If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures. If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Before you wire the main circuit terminal block, also refer to Wire to the Main Circuit Terminal Block on page 52.

◆ Remove the Control Circuit Board

Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

Remove the front cover and keypad from the drive.
1. Push the tabs to the left that hold the control board to the drive.

Figure 8.17 Unhook the Tabs

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 215

8.5 Replace the Drive

2. Pull the left side of the control circuit board out first.

Figure 8.18 Remove the Control Circuit Board

◆ Put the Control Circuit Board in a New Drive

Remove the keypad, front cover, and control circuit board of the new drive.
Wire the main circuit terminals of the new drive, then attach the wired control circuit board.
1. Wire the main circuit terminals.
Note:
To wire terminals +1 and +2, remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2.

Figure 8.19 Wire the Main Circuit Terminals

2. Attach the wired control circuit board to the drive.
Push the control circuit board until the hooks click into place on the drive.

Figure 8.20 Attach the Control Circuit Board

3. Attach the keypad and front cover to the new drive.
4. Energize the drive and set these parameters:
• o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]: Set this parameter to the model number of the new drive.
• o4-01 to o4-13 [Maintenance Period]: Reset the performance life monitors for the components.

216 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 8.6 Storage Guidelines

8.6 Storage Guidelines

The chemicals in the electrolytic capacitors and other electronic parts of the drive change over time. When you
store the drive for long periods of time, use the information in this section to help keep the performance life
estimates.

◆ Storage Location
• Temperature and Humidity
When you store the drive for approximately one month, for example during shipping, you can put the drive in a
location where the temperature is -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F). Correctly package and store the drive
during shipping to prevent vibration and impact damage.
Do not put the drive in direct sunlight or where there will be condensation or ice. Put the drive in a location
where the relative humidity is 95% or less.
• Dust and Oil Mist
Do not keep the drive locations with dust or oil mist. For example, cement factories and cotton mills.
• Corrosive Gas
Do not keep the drive in locations with corrosive gas. For example, chemical plants, refineries, and sewage
plants.
• Salt Damage
Do not keep the drive in salty locations. For example, locations near the ocean, and salt damage-designated
locations.
Do not keep the drive in unsatisfactory locations. Keep all drives in storage rooms that are safe from
unsatisfactory elements.

◆ Regular Application of Power

To prevent deterioration of the capacitors, Yaskawa recommends that you apply power to the drive a minimum of
one time each year for a minimum of 30 minutes.
If you store the drive for longer than two years and do not apply power, Yaskawa recommends that you use a
variable power source and gradually increase the power from 0 V to the rated drive voltage over a period of 2 to 3
minutes. Apply power for a minimum of 1 hour with no load to reform the main circuit electrolytic capacitor.
When you operate the drive after you apply power, wire the drive correctly and check for drive faults,
overcurrents, motor vibration, motor speed differences, and other defects during operation.

A - AC power supply C - Drive Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

B - Variable power source

Figure 8.21 Power Distribution Method

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 217

8.6 Storage Guidelines

218 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 9
Disposal
9.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................220
9.2 Disposal Instructions ............................................................................................221
9.3 WEEE Directive .......................................................................................................222

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 219

9.1 Section Safety

9.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
De-energize the drive and wait 5 minutes minimum until the Charge LED turns off. Remove the
front cover and terminal cover to do work on wiring, circuit boards, and other parts. Use
terminals for their correct function only.
Incorrect wiring, incorrect ground connections, and incorrect repair of protective covers can cause death or
serious injury.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing
and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings.
Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.
Crush Hazard
Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive.
If you do not use correct safety equipment, it can cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive.
If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

220 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 9.2 Disposal Instructions

9.2 Disposal Instructions

Correctly dispose of the product and packing material as specified by applicable regional, local, and municipal
laws and regulations.

Disposal

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 221

9.3 WEEE Directive

9.3 WEEE Directive

The wheelie bin symbol on this product, its manual, or its packaging identifies that you must recycle it at the end
of its product life.
You must discard the product at an applicable collection point for electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Do
not discard the product with usual waste.

222 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 10
Specifications
10.1 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class) ..........................................224
10.2 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class) ..........................................225
10.3 Drive Specifications...............................................................................................226
10.4 Drive Derating .........................................................................................................228
10.5 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions........................................................230
10.6 Peripheral Devices and Options.........................................................................233

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 223

10.1 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class)

10.1 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class)

Table 10.1 Ratings (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Model 2018 2025 2033 2047 2060 2075

Maximum Applicable Motor Output

HD *1 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
(kW)

Maximum Applicable Motor Output

HD *1 5 7.5 10 15 20 25
(HP)

Input Rated Input HD 18.9 24 37 52 68 96

Current (A)

Rated Output
Capacity (kVA) HD 6.7 9.5 12.6 17.9 22.9 28.6
*3

Rated Output HD 17.6 25.0 33.0 47.0 60.0 75.0

Current (A)

• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds, or 165% for 30 seconds. The permitted frequency of
Overload Tolerance overload is one time each 10 minutes.
Output
HD: 8 kHz without derating the drive capacity.
Carrier Frequency
Derate the drive capacity to use values to 15 kHz maximum.

Three-phase 200 V to 240 V

Maximum Output Voltage Note:
The maximum output voltage is proportional to the input voltage.
Maximum Output Frequency • V/f, OLV: 120 Hz

Measures for
DC reactor External options
Harmonics

Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics

EMC Filter Factory option

EMC Filter
IEC61800-3 Models 2xxxE: Category C3 (Conducted emission)

• Three-phase AC power supply 200 V to 240 V at 50/60 Hz

Rated Voltage/Rated Frequency
• DC power supply 270 V to 340 V

Permitted Voltage Fluctuation -15% to +10%

Power Supply
Permitted Frequency Fluctuation ±5%

Input Power
(kVA) HD 8.7 11.0 17.0 24.0 31.0 44.0

*1 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 208 V motor ratings as specified in NEC Table 430.250. The rated output
current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current.
*2 The maximum applicable motor output is based on 4-pole, general-purpose 220 V motor ratings. The rated output current of the drive
output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current.
*3 The rated output capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.

224 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 10.2 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class)

10.2 Model Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class)

Table 10.2 Ratings (Three-Phase 400 V Class)
Model Duty Rating 4009 4015 4018 4024 4031 4039 4045

Maximum Applicable Motor

HD 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0
Output *1 (kW)

Maximum Applicable Motor

HD 5 10 10 15 20 25 30
Output *1 (HP)

Input Rated Input HD 10.4 15 20 29 39 50.5 59.7

Current (A)

Rated Output
Capacity *2 HD 7 11.3 13.7 18.3 23.6 29.7 34.3
(kVA)

Rated Output HD 9.2 14.8 18.0 24.0 31.0 39.0 45.0

Current (A)

• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds, or 165% for 30 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is
Overload Tolerance one time each 10 minutes.
Output
HD: 8 kHz without derating the drive capacity.
Carrier Frequency
Derate the drive capacity to use values to 15 kHz maximum.

Three-phase 380 V to 480 V

Maximum Output Voltage Note:
The maximum output voltage is proportional to the input voltage.
Maximum Output Frequency • V/f, OLV: 120 Hz

Measures for
DC reactor External options
Harmonics

Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics

EMC Filter Factory option

EMC Filter
IEC61800-3 Models 4xxxE: Category C2 (Conducted emission)

Rated Voltage/Rated Frequency Three-phase AC power supply 380 V to 480 V at 50/60 Hz

Permitted Voltage Fluctuation -15% to +10%

Power supply
Permitted Frequency Fluctuation ±5%

Input Power
HD 9.5 14 18 27 36 47 55
(kVA)

*1 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 380 V motor ratings as specified in Annex G of IEC 60947-4-1. The rated
output current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current.
*2 The rated output capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 440 V.

Specifications

10

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 225

10.3 Drive Specifications

10.3 Drive Specifications

Note:
• To get the OLV specifications, do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• To get the longest product life, install the drive in an environment that meets the necessary specifications.
Table 10.3 Control Characteristics
Item Specification

• V/f Control
Control Methods
• Open Loop Vector

Frequency Control • V/f, OLV: 0.01 Hz to 120 Hz

Range

Frequency Accuracy Digital inputs: ±0.01% of the maximum output frequency (-10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F))
(Temperature Analog inputs: In ±0.1% of the maximum output frequency (25 °C ±10 °C (77 °F ±18 °F))
Fluctuation)

Frequency Setting Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz

Resolution Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output frequency (11-bit)

Output Frequency 0.001 Hz

Resolution

Frequency Setting Main speed frequency reference: 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 4 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Signal Main speed reference: Pulse train input (maximum 32 kHz)

• V/f: 150%/3 Hz
• OLV: 150%/1 Hz
Starting Torque Note:
Correctly select the drive and motor capacity for this starting torque in these control methods:
• OLV

• V/f: 1:40
Speed Control Range
• OLV: 1:100

You can use parameter settings for different limits in four quadrants in these control methods:
Torque Limits
• OLV

Acceleration and 0.0 s to 6000.0 s

Deceleration Times The drive can set four pairs of different acceleration and deceleration times.

Approximately 20% without a resistor

Approximately 125% with a dynamic braking option
• Short-time average deceleration torque
Motor output 0.1/0.2 kW: over 150%
Motor output 0.4/0.75 kW: over 100%
Motor output 1.5 kW: over 50%
Motor output 2.2 kW and larger: over 20%, Overexcitation Braking/High Slip Braking allow for approximately 40%
WARNING!
Set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Disabled] when you operate the drive with:
Braking Torque
• a regenerative converter
• regenerative unit
• braking resistor
• braking resistor unit.
If you set the parameter incorrectly, the drive can decelerate for too long and cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• Short-time average deceleration torque refers to the torque needed to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from the load) from the rated speed to zero.
Motor characteristics can change the actual specifications.
• Motor characteristics change the continuous regenerative torque and short-time average deceleration torque for motors 2.2 kW and larger.

Table 10.4 Protection Functions

Item Specification

Motor Protection Electronic thermal overload protection

Momentary Drive stops when the output current is more than 200% of the HD output current.
Overcurrent
Protection

Drive stops when the output current is more than these overload tolerances:
• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds, or 165% for 30 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10 minutes.
Overload Protection
Note:
If output frequency < 6 Hz, the drive can trigger the overload protection function when the output current is in the overload tolerance range.
Overvoltage 400 V class: Stops when the DC bus voltage is more than approximately 820 V
Protection

Undervoltage Three-phase 400 V class: Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 380 V
Protection

226 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 10.3 Drive Specifications

Item Specification

Stops when power loss is longer than 15 ms and continues operation if power loss is shorter than 2 s (depending on parameter settings).
Note:
Momentary Power
• Load size and motor speed can cause the stop time to be shorter.
Loss Ride-thru
• Drive capacity will change the continuous operation time. A Momentary Power Loss Recovery Unit is necessary to continue operation through a 2 s
power loss on models 4009 to 4018.
Heatsink Overheat Thermistor
Protection

Stall Prevention Stall prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and during run.

Electronic circuit protection

Note:
Ground Fault
Protection This protection detects ground faults during run. The drive will not provide protection when:
• There is a low-resistance ground fault for the motor cable or terminal block
• Energizing the drive when there is a ground fault.
DC Bus Charge LED Charge LED illuminates when DC bus voltage is more than 50 V.

Table 10.5 Environment

Item Specification

Area of Use Indoors

Power Supply Overvoltage Category III

IP20/UL Open Type: -10°C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)

Ambient IP20/UL Type 1: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
Temperature Setting • When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range.
• Do not let the drive freeze.

95% RH or less
Humidity
Do not let condensation form on the drive.

Storage Temperature -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) (short-term temperature during transportation)

Pollution degree 2 or less

Install the drive in an area without:
• Oil mist, corrosive or flammable gas, or dust
• Metal powder, oil, water, or other unwanted materials
Surrounding Area
• Radioactive materials or flammable materials, including wood
• Harmful gas or fluids
• Salt
• Direct sunlight

1000 m (3281 ft) Maximum

Note:
Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 4000 m (3281 ft to 13123 ft).
Altitude It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:
• Installing the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
• Installing the drive between 2000 m to 4000 m (6562 ft to 13123 ft) and grounding the neutral point on the power supply.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative when not grounding the neutral point.

Vibration • 10 Hz to 20 Hz: 1 G (9.8 m/s2, 32.15 ft/s2)

• 20 Hz to 55 Hz: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2)

Installation Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.
Orientation

Table 10.6 Standard

Item Specification

• UL 61800-5-1
• EN 61800-3
Harmonized Standard
• EN 61800-5-1
• Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to EN ISO 13849-1 (Cat.3, PL e), EN 61800-5-2 SIL3

IP20/UL Open Type

Enclosure protection IP20/UL Type 1
Specifications

design Note:
Install a UL Type 1 kit (optional) on an IP20/UL Open Type drive to change the drive to an IP20/UL Type 1 enclosure.

10

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 227

10.4 Drive Derating

10.4 Drive Derating

You must derate the drive capacity to operate the drive above the rated temperature, altitude, and default carrier
frequency.

◆ Carrier Frequency Settings and Rated Current Values

The tables in this section show how the drive rated output current changes when the C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
Selection] value changes. The output current value changes linearly as the carrier frequency changes. You can use
the values from the tables to calculate a frequency that is not shown.

■ Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating - Three-Phase 200 V Class Models
Rated Current (A)
Model
2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 15 kHz

2018 17.6 17.6 17.6 16.6 15.3 14.1

2025 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.8 20

2033 33.0 33.0 33.0 31.1 28.8 26

2047 47.0 47.0 47.0 44.3 41.0 38

2060 60.0 60.0 60.0 56.6 52.3 48

2075 75.0 75.0 75.0 70.7 65.4 60

■ Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating - Three-Phase 400 V Class Models
Rated Current (A)
Model
2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 15 kHz

4009 9.2 9.2 9.2 8.1 6.8 5.5

4015 14.8 14.8 14.8 13.1 11.0 8.9

4018 18.0 18.0 18.0 13.1 11.0 11

4024 24.0 24.0 24.0 21.3 17.8 14

4031 31.0 31.0 31.0 27.5 23.0 19

4039 39.0 39.0 39.0 34.5 29.0 23

4045 45.0 45.0 45.0 39.9 33.4 27

◆ Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature

When you install drives in a place where ambient temperatures are higher than the rated conditions or install
drives side-by-side in the enclosure panel, set L8-12 [Ambient Temperature Setting] and L8-35 [Installation
Method Selection]. Derate the output current as specified in Figure 10.1.

A - L8-35 = 0 [IP20/UL Open Type] C - L8-35 = 2 [IP20/UL Type 1]

B - L8-35 = 1 [Side-by-Side Mounting] D - L8-35 = 3 [Finless Installation]

Figure 10.1 Derating Depending on Drive Installation Method

Refer to L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting on page 341 and L8-35: Installation Method Selection on page 342
for details.

228 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 10.4 Drive Derating

◆ Altitude Derating
Install the drive in a location that has an altitude of 1000 m (3281 ft) or lower.
Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 to 4000 m
(3281 to 13123 ft).
It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:
• Installing the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
• Installing the drive between 2000 to 4000 m (6562 to 13123 ft) and grounding the neutral point on the power
supply.
If you do not ground the drive with a neutral network, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.

Specifications

10

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 229

10.5 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

10.5 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

◆ IP20/UL Open Type
■ 2018, 4009

Figure 10.2 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Three-Phase 200 V Class
Table 10.7 IP20/UL Open Type, without Built-in EMC Filter
Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 128 143 128 6 118 5 65 5 2.0

2018A M5
(5.51) (5.04) (5.63) (5.04) (0.24) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (4.4)

Table 10.8 IP20/UL Open Type, with Built-in EMC Filter

Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 128 193 128 6 118 5 65 5 2.4

2018E M5
(5.51) (5.04) (7.60) (5.04) (0.24) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.3)

Three-Phase 400 V Class

Table 10.9 IP20/UL Open Type, without Built-in EMC Filter
Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 128 143 128 6 118 5 65 5 2.0

4009A M5
(5.51) (5.04) (5.63) (5.04) (0.24) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (4.4)

Table 10.10 IP20/UL Open Type, with Built-in EMC Filter

Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 128 193 128.0 6 118 5 65 5 2.6

4009E M5
(5.51) (5.04) (7.60) (5.04) (0.24) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.7)

230 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 10.5 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

■ 2018 to 2075, 4015 to 4045

Figure 10.3 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Three-Phase 200 V Class
Table 10.11 IP20/UL Open Type, without Built-in EMC Filter
Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 260 140 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.4

2025A M5
(5.51) (10.24) (5.51) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (7.5)

140 260 140 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.6

2033A M5
(5.51) (10.24) (5.51) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (7.9)

180 300 143 160 10 284 8 55 5 5.5

2047A M5
(7.09) (11.81) (5.63) (6.30) (0.39) (11.18) (0.31) (2.17) (0.20) (12.1)

220 350 187 192 14 336 7 78 5 7.5

2060A M6
(8.66) (13.78) (7.36) (7.56) (0.55) (13.23) (0.28) (3.07) (0.20) (16.5)

220 350 187 192 14 336 7 78 5 8.0

2075A M6
(8.66) (13.78) (7.36) (7.56) (0.55) (13.23) (0.28) (3.07) (0.20) (17.6)

Table 10.12 IP20/UL Open Type, with Built-in EMC Filter

Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 260 196 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.9

2025E M5
(5.51) (10.24) (7.72) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (8.6)

140 260 196 122 9 248 6 55 5 4.1

2033E M5
(5.51) (10.24) (7.72) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (9.0)

180 300 196 160 10 284 8 55 5 6.0

2047E M5
(7.09) (11.81) (7.72) (6.30) (0.39) (11.18) (0.31) (2.17) (0.20) (13.2)

220 350 216 192 14 336 7 78 5 8.5

2060E M6
(8.66) (13.78) (8.50) (7.56) (0.55) (13.23) (0.28) (3.07) (0.20) (18.7)
Specifications

220 350 216 192 14 336 7 78 5 9.0

2075E M6
(8.66) (13.78) (8.50) (7.56) (0.55) (13.23) (0.28) (3.07) (0.20) (19.9)

10

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 231

10.5 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Three-Phase 400 V Class

Table 10.13 IP20/UL Open Type, without Built-in EMC Filter
Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 260 140 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.0

4015A M5
(5.51) (10.24) (5.51) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (6.6)

140 260 140 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.2

4018A M5
(5.51) (10.24) (5.51) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (7.1)

180 300 143 160 10 284 8 55 5 4.6

4024A M5
(7.09) (11.81) (5.63) (6.30) (0.39) (11.18) (0.31) (2.17) (0.20) (10.2)

180 300 143 160 10 284 8 55 5 4.8

4031A M5
(7.09) (11.81) (5.63) (6.30) (0.39) (11.18) (0.31) (2.17) (0.20) (10.6)

190 350 204 160 15 336 7 94 5 6.5

4039A M6
(7.48) (13.78) (8.03) (6.30) (0.59) (13.23) (0.28) (3.70) (0.20) (14.3)

190 350 204 160 15 336 7 94 5 6.5

4045A M6
(7.48) (13.78) (8.03) (6.30) (0.59) (13.23) (0.28) (3.70) (0.20) (14.3)

Table 10.14 IP20/UL Open Type, with Built-in EMC Filter

Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 d kg (lb)

140 260 196 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.9

4015E M5
(5.51) (10.24) (7.72) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (8.6)

140 260 196 122 9 248 6 55 5 3.9

4018E M5
(5.51) (10.24) (7.72) (4.80) (0.35) (9.76) (0.24) (2.17) (0.20) (8.6)

180 300 196 160 10 284 8 55 5 5.5

4024E M5
(7.09) (11.81) (7.72) (6.30) (0.39) (11.18) (0.31) (2.17) (0.20) (12.1)

180 300 196 160 10 284 8 55 5 5.5

4031E M5
(7.09) (11.81) (7.72) (6.30) (0.39) (11.18) (0.31) (2.17) (0.20) (12.1)

190 350 251 160 15 336 7 94 5 8.0

4039E M6
(7.48) (13.78) (9.88) (6.30) (0.59) (13.23) (0.28) (3.70) (0.20) (17.6)

190 350 251 160 15 336 7 94 5 8.5

4045E M6
(7.48) (13.78) (9.88) (6.30) (0.59) (13.23) (0.28) (3.70) (0.20) (18.7)

232 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 10.6 Peripheral Devices and Options

10.6 Peripheral Devices and Options

These tables show the available peripheral devices and options for the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest
sales representative to make an order.
• Selection: Refer to the drive catalog for information about available products.
• Installation and wiring: Refer to the instruction manual for each option.
Table 10.15 Main Circuit Options
Name Model Intended Use

To improve the drive input power factor.

• To prevent damage to the drive when the power supply capacity is large. You must only use this option
AC reactor LR3 series and B series when the power supply capacity is more than 600 kVA.
• To decrease harmonic current.
• To improve the power supply total power factor.

To decrease the regenerative energy of the motor and decrease the deceleration time (duty cycle of 3%
Braking Resistor RH Series
ED). You must also use the installation attachment.

Table 10.16 Engineering Tools

Name Model Intended Use

DriveWizard - To use a PC to program drives and manage parameters.

Specifications

10

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 233

10.6 Peripheral Devices and Options

234 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11
Parameter List
11.1 How to Read the Parameter List .........................................................................236
11.2 Parameter Groups ..................................................................................................237
11.3 A: Initialization Parameters..................................................................................238
11.4 b: Application ..........................................................................................................241
11.5 C: Tuning ..................................................................................................................242
11.6 d: Reference Settings............................................................................................244
11.7 E: Motor Parameters..............................................................................................246
11.8 H: Terminal Functions ...........................................................................................248
11.9 L: Protection Functions ........................................................................................256
11.10 n: Special Adjustment ...........................................................................................261
11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings .................................................................................262
11.12 S: Elevator Parameters .........................................................................................267
11.13 T: Motor Tuning .......................................................................................................269
11.14 U: Monitors...............................................................................................................270
11.15 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control
Method Selection] ..................................................................................................277
11.16 Defaults by Drive Model........................................................................................278

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 235

11.1 How to Read the Parameter List

11.1 How to Read the Parameter List

◆ Icons and Terms that Identify Parameters and Control Modes
Icon Description
V/f The parameter is available when operating the drive with V/f Control.
OLV The parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector Control.

RUN The parameter can be changed settings during run.

Expert The parameter that is available in Expert Mode only. *1

*1 Set A1-01 = 3 [Access Level Selection = Expert Level] to display and set Expert Mode parameters on the keypad.
Note:
An icon like V/f identifies parameters that are available in the specified control method.
An icon like V/f identifies parameters that are not available in the specified control method.

236 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.2 Parameter Groups

11.2 Parameter Groups

Represents the type of product parameters.

Parame Parame
ter Name Ref. ter Name Ref.

A Initialization Parameters 238 L4 Speed Detection 257

A1 Initialization 238 L5 Fault Restart 257

A2 User Parameters 238 L6 Torque Detection 257

B Application 241 L7 Torque Limit 258

b1 Operation Mode Selection 241 L8 Drive Protection 258

b4 Timer Function 241 n Special Adjustment 261

b6 Dwell Function 241 n2 Auto Freq Regulator (AFR) 261

C Tuning 242 n6 Online Tuning 261

C1 Accel & Decel Time 242 o Keypad-Related Settings 262

C2 Jerk Characteristics 242 o1 Keypad Display 262

C3 Slip Compensation 243 o2 Keypad Operation 262

C4 Torque Compensation 243 o3 Copy Keypad Function 263

C6 Carrier Frequency 243 o4 Maintenance Monitor Settings 264

D Reference Settings 244 S Elevator Parameters 267

d1 Speed Reference 244 S1 Brake Sequence 267

E Motor Parameters 246 S2 Slip Compensation for Elevators 267

E1 V/f Pattern for Motor 1 246 S4 Rescue Operation 268

E2 Motor Parameters 246 S6 Error Detection 268

H Terminal Functions 248 T Motor Tuning 269

H1 Digital Inputs 248 T1 Induction Motor Auto-Tuning 269

H2 Digital Outputs 250 U Monitors 270

H4 Analog Outputs 253 U1 Operation Status Monitors 270

H6 Pulse Train Input/Output 255 U2 Fault Trace 271

L Protection Functions 256 U3 Fault History 273

L1 Motor Protection 256 U4 Maintenance Monitors 274

L2 Power Loss Ride Through 256 U6 Operation Status Monitors 276

L3 Stall Prevention 256

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 237

11.3 A: Initialization Parameters

11.3 A: Initialization Parameters

◆ A1: Initialization
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-00 Language Selection V/f OLV 0 280

(0100) Sets the language for the LCD keypad. (0 - 12)
RUN Note:
• When you use A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, the drive will
not reset this parameter.
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Italian
5 : Spanish
6 : Portuguese
7 : Chinese
8 : Czech
9 : Russian
10 : Turkish
11 : Polish
12 : Greek

A1-01 Access Level Selection V/f OLV 2 280

(0101) Sets user access to parameters. The access level controls which parameters the keypad (0 - 3)
RUN will display, and which parameters the user can set.
0 : Operation Only
1 : User Parameters
2 : Advanced Level
3 : Expert Level

A1-02 Control Method V/f OLV 0 281

(0102) Selection Sets the control method for the drive application and the motor. (0, 2)
0 : V/f Control
2 : Open Loop Vector

A1-03 Initialize Parameters V/f OLV 0 281

(0103) Sets parameters to default values. (0 - 2220)
0 : No Initialization
1110 : User Initialization
2220 : 2-Wire Initialization

A1-04 Password V/f OLV 0000 282

(0104) Entry point for the password set in A1-05 [Password Setting]. The user can view the (0000 - 9999)
settings of parameters that are locked without entering the password. Enter the correct
password in this parameter to change parameter settings.

A1-05 Password Setting V/f OLV 0000 282

(0105) Set the password to lock parameters and prevent changes to parameter settings. Enter (0000 - 9999)
the correct password in A1-04 [Password] to unlock parameters and accept changes.

◆ A2: User Parameters

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

A2-01 User Parameter 1 V/f OLV A1-00 283

(0106) Sets the parameter number to show on the first line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-02 User Parameter 2 V/f OLV A1-02 283

(0107) Sets the parameter number to show on the second line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-03 User Parameter 3 V/f OLV d1-18 283

(0108) Sets the parameter number to show on the third line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-04 User Parameter 4 V/f OLV d1-19 283

(0109) Sets the parameter number to show on the fourth line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-05 User Parameter 5 V/f OLV d1-23 283

(010A) Sets the parameter number to show on the fifth line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

238 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.3 A: Initialization Parameters

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

A2-06 User Parameter 6 V/f OLV d1-24 283

(010B) Sets the parameter number to show on the sixth line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-07 User Parameter 7 V/f OLV d1-25 283

(010C) Sets the parameter number to show on the seventh line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-08 User Parameter 8 V/f OLV d1-26 283

(010D) Sets the parameter number to show on the eighth line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-09 User Parameter 9 V/f OLV d1-01 283

(010E) Sets the parameter number to show on the ninth line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-10 User Parameter 10 V/f OLV d1-02 283

(010F) Sets the parameter number to show on the 10th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-11 User Parameter 11 V/f OLV d1-03 283

(0110) Sets the parameter number to show on the 11th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-12 User Parameter 12 V/f OLV d1-04 283

(0111) Sets the parameter number to show on the 12th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-13 User Parameter 13 V/f OLV d1-05 283

(0112) Sets the parameter number to show on the 13th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-14 User Parameter 14 V/f OLV d1-06 283

(0113) Sets the parameter number to show on the 14th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-15 User Parameter 15 V/f OLV d1-07 283

(0114) Sets the parameter number to show on the 15th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-16 User Parameter 16 V/f OLV d1-08 283

(0115) Sets the parameter number to show on the 16th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-17 User Parameter 17 V/f OLV d1-28 283

(0116) Sets the parameter number to show on the 17th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-18 User Parameter 18 V/f OLV d1-29 283

(0117) Sets the parameter number to show on the 18th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-19 User Parameter 19 V/f OLV C1-01 283

(0118) Sets the parameter number to show on the 19th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-20 User Parameter 20 V/f OLV C1-02 283

(0119) Sets the parameter number to show on the 20th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-21 User Parameter 21 V/f OLV C2-01 283

(011A) Sets the parameter number to show on the 21st line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-22 User Parameter 22 V/f OLV C2-02 283

(011B) Sets the parameter number to show on the 22nd line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-23 User Parameter 23 V/f OLV C2-03 283

(011C) Sets the parameter number to show on the 23rd line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-24 User Parameter 24 V/f OLV C2-04 283

(011D) Sets the parameter number to show on the 24th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-25 User Parameter 25 V/f OLV C2-05 283

Parameter List

(011E) Sets the parameter number to show on the 25th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-26 User Parameter 26 V/f OLV E2-03 283

(011F) Sets the parameter number to show on the 26th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-27 User Parameter 27 V/f OLV S1-02 283

(0120) Sets the parameter number to show on the 27th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.
11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 239

11.3 A: Initialization Parameters

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

A2-28 User Parameter 28 V/f OLV S1-03 283

(0121) Sets the parameter number to show on the 28th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-29 User Parameter 29 V/f OLV S1-06 283

(0122) Sets the parameter number to show on the 29th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-30 User Parameter 30 V/f OLV S1-07 283

(0123) Sets the parameter number to show on the 30th line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-31 User Parameter 31 V/f OLV - 283

(0124) Sets the parameter number to show on the 31st line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-32 User Parameter 32 V/f OLV - 283

(0125) Sets the parameter number to show on the 32nd line in Setup Mode. You can select a
maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.

A2-33 User Parameter Auto V/f OLV 1 283

(0126) Selection Sets the automatic save feature for changes to parameters A2-17 to A2-32 [User (0, 1)
Parameters 17 to 32].
0 : Disabled: Manual Entry Required
1 : Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms

240 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.4 b: Application

11.4 b: Application
◆ b1: Operation Mode Selection
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

b1-02 Run Command Selection V/f OLV 1 284

(0181) 1 Sets the Up/Down command source in Remote mode. Wire the motor so the elevator (0 - 1)
goes up when an Up command is issued.
0 : Keypad
1 : Control Circuit Terminal

b1-03 Stopping Method V/f OLV 0 284

(0182) Selection Sets the method to stop the motor after removing a Run command or entering a Stop (0 - 1)
command.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop

b1-08 Run Command Select in V/f OLV 1 284

(0187) PRG Mode Sets the conditions for the drive to accept an Up/Down command entered from an (0 - 1)
external source when using the keypad to set parameters.
0 : Disregard RUN while Programming
1 : Accept RUN while Programming

b1-14 Phase Order Selection V/f OLV 0 285

(01C3) Sets the phase order for output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This parameter can (0, 1)
align the Forward Run command from the drive and the forward direction of the motor
without changing wiring.
0 : Standard
1 : Switch Phase Order

◆ b4: Timer Function

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

b4-01 Timer Function ON- V/f OLV 0.0 s 286

(01A3) Delay Time Sets the ON-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)

b4-02 Timer Function OFF- V/f OLV 0.0 s 286

(01A4) Delay Time Sets the OFF-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)

◆ b6: Dwell Function

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start V/f OLV 0.0 286

(01B6) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when the motor starts. (Determined by A1-02)
Expert

b6-02 Dwell Time at Start V/f OLV 0.0 s 286

(01B7) Sets the length of time that the drive will hold the output frequency when the motor (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert starts.

b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop V/f OLV 0.0 287

(01B8) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when ramping to stop the (Determined by A1-02)
Expert motor.

b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop V/f OLV 0.0 s 287

(01B9) Sets the length of time for the drive to hold the output frequency when ramping to stop (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert the motor.
Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 241

11.5 C: Tuning

11.5 C: Tuning
◆ C1: Accel & Decel Time
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-01 Acceleration Ramp 1 V/f OLV 1.50 s 289

(0200) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-02 Deceleration Ramp 1 V/f OLV 1.50 s 289

(0201) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-03 Acceleration Ramp 2 V/f OLV 1.50 s 289

(0202) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-04 Deceleration Ramp 2 V/f OLV 1.50 s 289

(0203) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-05 Acceleration Ramp 3 V/f OLV 1.50 s 289

(0204) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-06 Deceleration Ramp 3 V/f OLV 1.50 s 289

(0205) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-07 Acceleration Ramp 4 V/f OLV 1.50 s 290

(0206) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-08 Deceleration Ramp 4 V/f OLV 1.50 s 290

(0207) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

C1-09 Fast Stop Ramp V/f OLV 1.50 s 290

(0208) Sets the ramp that the drive will decelerate to zero for Emergency Stop. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN Note:
• Decelerating too quickly can cause an ov [Overvoltage] fault that shuts off the
drive while the motor to coasts to a stop. Set a Fast Stop time in C1-09 that
prevents motor coasting and makes sure that the motor stops quickly and safely.
• When L2-29 = 0 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru
1] and you do KEB Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically set C1-09. If you
must not change the Fast Stop time, do not do KEB Tuning.

C1-10 Accel/Decel Time V/f OLV 0 290

(0209) Setting Units Sets the setting units for C1-01 to C1-08 [Accel/Decel Times 1 to 4], C1-09 [Fast Stop (0, 1)
Time], L2-06 [Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time], and L2-07 [Kinetic Energy Backup
Accel Time].
0 : 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)
1 : 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)

C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching V/f OLV 0.0% 290

(020A) Speed Sets the speed at which the drive will automatically change acceleration and (0.0 - 100.0%)
deceleration times.

C1-15 Inspect Dec Ramp V/f OLV 0.00 s 291

(0260) Sets the deceleration ramp used for inspection run. (0.00 - 2.00 s)

◆ C2: Jerk Characteristics

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start V/f OLV 0.50 s 291

(020B) Sets the jerks acceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

C2-02 Jerk at Accel End V/f OLV 0.50 s 291

(020C) Sets the jerk acceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start V/f OLV 0.50 s 291

(020D) Sets the jerk deceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

C2-04 Jerk at Decel End V/f OLV 0.50 s 291

(020E) Sets the jerk deceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

C2-05 Jerk below Leveling V/f OLV 0.50 s 292

(020F) Speed Sets the jerk deceleration time below leveling speed. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

242 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.5 C: Tuning

◆ C3: Slip Compensation

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain V/f OLV 1.0 292

(020F) Sets the gain for the slip compensation function. Usually it is not necessary to change (0.0 - 2.5)
RUN this setting.
Expert Note:
Correctly set these parameters before changing the slip compensation gain:
• E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
• E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip]
• E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]

C3-02 Slip Compensation V/f OLV 2000 ms 292

(0210) Delay Time Sets the slip compensation delay time when speed is unstable or when the slip (0 - 10000 ms)
RUN compensation response is too slow. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Expert

C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit V/f OLV 200% 292

(0211) Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor (0 - 250%)
Expert rated slip.

C3-04 Slip Compensation at V/f OLV 0 293

(0212) Regen Sets the slip compensation function during regeneration. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled Above 6Hz
2 : Enabled Above Defined Range

C3-05 Output Voltage Limit V/f OLV 0 293

(0213) Selection Sets the automatic reduction of motor magnetic flux when the output voltage is (0, 1)
Expert saturated.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

◆ C4: Torque Compensation

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

C4-01 Torque Compensation V/f OLV 1.00 294

(0215) Gain Sets the gain for the torque compensation function. (0.00 - 2.50)
RUN

C4-02 Torque Compensation V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 294

(0216) Delay Time Sets the torque compensation delay time. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0 - 60000 ms)
RUN setting.

C4-03 Torque Compensation @ V/f OLV 0.0% 294

(0217) FWD Start Set the amount of torque reference for forward start as a percentage of the motor rated (0.0 - 200.0%)
Expert torque.

C4-04 Torque Compensation @ V/f OLV 0.0% 294

(0218) REV Start Sets the amount of torque reference for reverse start as a percentage of the motor rated (-200.0 - 0.0%)
Expert torque.

C4-05 Torque Compensation V/f OLV 10 ms 295

(0219) Time Sets the starting torque constant to use with C4-03 and C4-04 [Torque Compensation @ (0 - 200 ms)
Expert FWD/REV Start].

◆ C6: Duty & Carrier Frequency

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

C6-02 Carrier Frequency V/f OLV 3 295

(0224) Selection Sets the carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive. (1 - 6)
1 : 2.0 kHz
Parameter List

2 : 5.0 kHz
3 : 8.0 kHz
4 : 10.0 kHz
5 : 12.5 kHz
6 : 15.0 kHz

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 243

11.6 d: Reference Settings

11.6 d: Reference Settings

◆ d1: Speed Reference
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-01 Speed Reference 1 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 296

(0280) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-02 Speed Reference 2 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 296

(0281) Sets the speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-03 Speed Reference 3 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 296

(0282) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-04 Speed Reference 4 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 296

(0283) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-05 Speed Reference 5 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 296

(0284) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-06 Speed Reference 6 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 296

(0285) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-07 Speed Reference 7 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 297

(0286) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-08 Speed Reference 8 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 297

(0287) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-18 Spd Ref Sel Mode V/f OLV 1 297

(02C0) Sets the priority of the speed reference digital inputs. (0 - 2)
If d1-18 = 0, multi-speed references d1-01 to d1-08 are used.
If d1-18 = 1, values from parameters d1-19 to d1-23 have priority.
0 : Use Multi-Speed references d1-01 to d1-08
1 : High speed reference has priority
2 : Leveling speed reference has priority

d1-19 Nominal Speed V/f OLV 50.00 Hz 297

(02C1) Sets the speed reference when multi-function input “Nominal Speed” is on. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-20 Intermed Speed 1 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 297

(02C2) Sets the speed reference when intermediate speed 1 is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-21 Intermed Speed 2 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 297

(02C3) Sets the speed reference when intermediate speed 2 is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-22 Intermed Speed 3 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 298

(02C4) Sets the speed reference when intermediate speed 3 is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-23 Releveling Speed V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 298

(02C5) Sets the speed reference when releveling speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-24 Inspect Oper Spd V/f OLV 30.00 Hz 298

(02C6) Sets the speed reference when inspection speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-25 Rescue Oper Spd V/f OLV 5.00 Hz 298

(02C7) Sets the speed reference when rescue speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 15.00 Hz)
RUN

d1-26 Leveling Speed V/f OLV 4.00 Hz 298

(02C8) Sets the speed reference when leveling speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

244 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.6 d: Reference Settings

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-28 Nom/Lev Spd Det V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 298

(02CA) Sets the speed reference level to detect that leveling speed has been selected when multi (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
speed input commands are used.

d1-29 Inspect Spd Det V/f OLV 0.00 Hz 298

(02CB) Sets the speed reference level to detect that inspection speed has been selected when (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
multi speed input commands are used.

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 245

11.7 E: Motor Parameters

11.7 E: Motor Parameters

◆ E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-01 Input AC Supply Voltage V/f OLV 400 V: 400 V 299

(0300) Sets the drive input voltage. (400 V Class: 310 - 510
V)
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Set E1-01 [Input AC Supply
Voltage] to align with the drive input voltage (not motor
voltage). If this parameter is incorrect, the protective functions
of the drive will not operate correctly and it can cause damage
to the drive.
E1-04 Maximum Output V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 299
(0303) Frequency Sets the maximum output frequency for the V/f pattern. (10.0 - 120.0 Hz)

E1-05 Maximum Output V/f OLV 400 V Class: 380.0 V 299

(0304) Voltage Sets the maximum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)

E1-06 Base Frequency V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 299

(0305) Sets the base frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

E1-07 Middle Output V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 299

(0306) Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

E1-08 Middle Output V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 300

(0307) Frequency Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the V/f pattern. and o2-04
(400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)

E1-09 Minimum Output V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 300

(0308) Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

E1-10 Minimum Output V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 300

(0309) Voltage Sets the minimum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)

E1-11 Middle Output V/f OLV 0.0 Hz 300

(030A) Frequency 2 Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Expert

E1-12 Middle Output V/f OLV 0.0 V 300

(030B) Frequency Voltage 2 Sets a middle point voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
Expert V)

E1-13 Base Voltage V/f OLV 0.0 V 300

(030C) Sets the base voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
Expert V)

◆ E2: Motor Parameters

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-01 Motor Rated Current V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 301

(030E) (FLA) Sets the motor rated current in amps. (10% to 200% of the
drive rated current)

E2-02 Motor Rated Slip V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 301

(030F) Sets motor rated slip. (0.00 - 20.00 Hz)

E2-03 Motor No-Load Current V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 301

(0310) Sets the no-load current for the motor in amps when operating at the rated frequency (0 to E2-01)
and the no-load voltage.

E2-04 Motor Pole Count V/f OLV 4 301

(0311) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 - 48)

E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 301

(0312) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor stator windings. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)

E2-06 Motor Leakage V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 302

(0313) Inductance Sets the voltage drop from motor leakage inductance when the motor is operating at the (0.0 - 60.0%)
rated frequency and rated current. This value is a percentage of Motor Rated Voltage.

E2-07 Motor Saturation V/f OLV 0.50 302

(0314) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. (0.00 - 0.50)

E2-08 Motor Saturation V/f OLV 0.75 302

(0315) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. (E2-07 - 0.75)

246 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.7 E: Motor Parameters

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss V/f OLV 0.0% 302

(0316) Sets the mechanical loss of the motor. It is set as a percentage of E2-11 [Motor Rated (0.0 - 10.0%)
Expert Power]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

E2-10 Motor Iron Loss V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 302

(0317) Sets the motor iron loss. (0 - 65535 W)

E2-11 Motor Rated Power V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 303

(0318) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 650.00 kW)

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 247

11.8 H: Terminal Functions

11.8 H: Terminal Functions

◆ H1: Digital Inputs
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

H1-03 Terminal S3 Function V/f OLV 50 304

(0400) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S3. (3 - 79)

H1-04 Terminal S4 Function V/f OLV 54 304

(0401) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S4. (3 - 79)

H1-05 Terminal S5 Function V/f OLV 51 304

(0402) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S5. (3 - 79)

H1-06 Terminal S6 Function V/f OLV 53 305

(0403) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S6. (3 - 79)

H1-07 Terminal S7 Function V/f OLV F 305

(0404) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S7. (3 - 79)

■ H1-xx: MFDI Setting Values

Setting Value Function Description Ref.

3 Multi-Step Speed V/f OLV 305

Reference 1 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-16 to set a multi-step speed reference.

4 Multi-Step Speed V/f OLV 305

Reference 2 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-16 to set a multi-step speed reference.

5 Multi-Step Speed V/f OLV 305

Reference 3 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-16 to set a multi-step speed reference.

7 Accel/Decel Time V/f OLV 305

Selection 1 Sets the drive to use Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 [C1-01, C1-02] or Acceleration/Deceleration Time 2 [C1-
03, C1-04].

8 Baseblock Command (N. V/f OLV 305

O.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input is ON.
ON : Baseblock (drive output stop)
OFF : Normal operation

9 Baseblock Command (N. V/f OLV 306

C.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input terminal is OFF.
ON : Normal operation
OFF : Baseblock (drive output stop)

F Not Used V/f OLV 306

Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode.

14 Fault Reset V/f OLV 306

Sets the command to reset the current fault when the Run command is inactive.
Note:
The drive ignores the fault reset command when the Run command is active. Remove the Run command
before trying to reset a fault.

15 Fast Stop (N.O.) V/f OLV 306

Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is
ON while the drive is operating.

17 Fast Stop (N.C.) V/f OLV 307

Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is
ON while the drive is operating.

18 Timer Function V/f OLV 307

Sets the command to start the timer function. Use this setting with Timer Output [H2-xx = 12].

1A Accel/Decel Time V/f OLV 307

Selection 2 Set this function and H1-xx = 7 [Accel/Decel Time Selection 1] together. Sets the drive to use Acceleration/
Deceleration Time 3 [C1-05, C1-06] or Acceleration/Deceleration Time 4 [C1-07, C1-08].

20 External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

Always-Ramp) When the terminal activates, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal
MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive always detects external faults whether the drive is
stopped or running.

21 External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

Always-Ramp) When the terminal deactivates, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal
MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive always detects external faults whether the drive is
stopped or running.

248 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.8 H: Terminal Functions

Setting Value Function Description Ref.

22 External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

@Run-Ramp) When the terminal activates during run, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay output
terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive does not detect external faults while the
drive is stopped.

23 External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

@Run-Ramp) When the terminal deactivates during run, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay
output terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive does not detect external faults while
the drive is stopped.

24 External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

Always-Coast) When the terminal activates, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal
MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive always detects external faults whether the drive is
stopped or running.

25 External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

Always-Coast) When the terminal deactivates, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output
terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive always detects external faults whether the
drive is stopped or running.

26 External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

@Run-Coast) When the terminal activates during run, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay
output terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive does not detect external faults while
the drive is stopped.

27 External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

@Run-Coast) When the terminal deactivates during run, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay
output terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive does not detect external faults while
the drive is stopped.

28 External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

Always-FStop) When the terminal activates, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. Fault
relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives and running drives will detect
external faults.

29 External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

Always-FStop) When the terminal deactivates, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast Stop Time].
Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives and running drives will
detect external faults.

2A External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

@Run-FStop) When the terminal activates during run, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast Stop
Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives will not detect
external faults.

2B External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

@Run-FStop) When the terminal deactivates during run, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast
Stop Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives will not detect
external faults.

2C External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

Always-Alarm) When the terminal activates, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the output terminal
set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives and running drives
will detect external faults.

2D External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

Always-Alarm) When the terminal deactivates, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the output terminal
set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives and running drives
will detect external faults.

2E External Fault (NO- V/f OLV 307

@Run-Alarm) When the terminal activates during run, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the output
terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives will not
detect external faults.

2F External Fault (NC- V/f OLV 307

@Run-Alarm) When the terminal deactivates during run, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the
output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives will
not detect external faults.

40 Forward RUN (2-Wire) V/f OLV 308

Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 41 [Reverse RUN (2-Wire)]
together.
ON : Forward Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an
EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Forward Run command to terminal S1.
Parameter List

• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2),
FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)].

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 249

11.8 H: Terminal Functions

Setting Value Function Description Ref.

41 Reverse RUN (2-Wire) V/f OLV 309

Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 40 [Forward RUN (2-Wire)]
together.
ON : Reverse Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an
EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Reverse Run command to terminal S2.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2),
FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)].

50 Nominal Speed V/f OLV 309

Sets the speed reference nominal speed.

51 Intermed Speed V/f OLV 309

Sets the speed reference intermediate speed 1. In combination with nominal and releveling speed you can set
intermediate speed 2 and 3.

52 Releveling Speed V/f OLV 309

Sets the speed reference releveling speed.

53 Leveling Speed V/f OLV 309

Sets the speed reference leveling speed.

54 Inspection Speed V/f OLV 309

Sets the speed reference inspection speed.

55 Rescue Operation V/f OLV 309

Activates rescue operation.

56 Motor Contractor V/f OLV 310

Feedback Used for motor contactor supervision and fault detection.

79 Brake Feedback V/f OLV 310

Used for brake supervision and detection of incorrect operation.

◆ H2: Digital Outputs

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

H2-01 Term MA/MB-MC V/f OLV E 311

(040B) Function Selection Sets the function set for MFDO terminal MA-MC or MB-MC. (0 - 158)
Note:
Set this parameter to F when the terminal is not being used or to use the terminal in
through mode.

H2-02 Term P1-C1 Function V/f OLV 6 311

(040C) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal P1-C1. (0 - 158)
Note:
Set this parameter to F when the terminal is not being used or to use the terminal in
through mode.

H2-03 Term P2-C2 Function V/f OLV 50 311

(040D) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal P2-C2. (0 - 158)
Note:
Set this parameter to F when the terminal is not being used or to use the terminal in
through mode.

250 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.8 H: Terminal Functions

■ H2-xx: MFDO Setting Values

Setting Value Function Description Ref.

0 During Run V/f OLV 311

The terminal activates when you input a Run command and when the drive is outputting voltage.
ON : Drive is running
OFF : Drive is stopping

1 Zero Speed V/f OLV 311

The terminal activates when the output frequency is less than E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] or b2-01 [DC
Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold].
Note:
Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the reference.

A1-02 Setting Control Method Selection Parameter Used as the Reference

0 V/f E1-09

2 OLV b2-01

ON : Output frequency < value of E1-09 or b2-01.

OFF : Output frequency ≥ E1-09 or b2-01.

2 Speed Agree 1 V/f OLV 312

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02 [Speed Agree
Detection Width].
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-02”.
OFF : The output frequency does not align with the frequency reference although the drive is running.

3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 V/f OLV 312

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] ± L4-02
[Speed Agree Detection Width] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02.
Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the
forward/reverse detection level.
ON : The output frequency is in the range as defined by the result of “L4-01 ± L4-02” and the range of frequency
reference ± L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” nor the range of frequency reference ± L4-02.

4 Frequency Detection 1 V/f OLV 313

The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection
Level] + L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection Width]. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until
the output frequency = L4-01.
Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the
forward/reverse detection level.
ON : The output frequency is less than L4-01 or is not more than L4-01 + L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is more than L4-01 + L4-02.

5 Frequency Detection 2 V/f OLV 313

The terminal activates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level].
After the terminal activates, the terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of L4-01 - L4-02.
Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the
forward/reverse detection level.
ON : The output frequency is more than L4-01.
OFF : The output frequency is less than “L4-01 - L4-02,” or it is not more than L4-01.

6 Drive Ready V/f OLV 314

The terminal activates when the drive is ready and running.

7 DC Bus Undervoltage V/f OLV 314

The terminal activates when the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply is at the voltage set in L2-05
[Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] or less. The terminal also activates when there is a fault with the DC bus
voltage.
ON : The DC bus voltage ≤ L2-05
OFF : The DC bus voltage > L2-05

8 During Baseblock (N.O.) V/f OLV 314

The terminal activates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching
and does not make DC bus voltage.
ON : During baseblock
OFF : The drive is not in baseblock.
V/f OLV
Parameter List

B Torque Detection 1 (N. 314

O.) The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.
ON : The output current/torque > L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the output current/torque < L6-02 for
longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].

E Fault V/f OLV 315

The terminal activates when the drive detects a fault.
Note: 11
The terminal will not activate for CPF00 and CPF01 [Control Circuit Error] faults.

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 251

11.8 H: Terminal Functions

Setting Value Function Description Ref.

F Not Used V/f OLV 315

Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode.

10 Alarm V/f OLV 315

The terminal activates when the drive detects a minor fault.

11 Fault Reset Command V/f OLV 315

Active The terminal activates when the drive receives the Reset command from the control circuit terminal, serial
communications, or the communication option.

12 Timer Output V/f OLV 315

Sets the terminal as the timer output. Use this setting with the timer input set in H1-xx = 18 [MFDI Function
Selection = Timer Function].

13 Speed Agree 2 V/f OLV 315

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04 [Speed Agree
Detection Width(+/-)].
Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.

14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 V/f OLV 316

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] ±
L4-04 [Speed Agree Detection Width(+/-)] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04.
Note:
The detection level set in L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is in the range as defined by the result of “L4-03 ± L4-04” and the range of frequency
reference ± L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” nor the range of frequency reference ± L4-04.

15 Frequency Detection 3 V/f OLV 316

The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is more than “L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] + L4-
04 [Speed Agree Detection Width(+/-)]”. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the
output frequency is at the value of L4-03.
Note:
The detection level set in L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is less than L4-03 or is not more than L4-03 + L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is higher than L4-03 + L4-04.

16 Frequency Detection 4 V/f OLV 317

The terminal activates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level
(+/-)]. After the terminal activates, the terminal stays activated until the output frequency = L4-03 - L4-04.
Note:
The detection level set in L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is more than L4-03.
OFF : The output frequency is less than “L4-03 - L4-04,” or it is not more than L4-03.

18 Torque Detection 2 (N. V/f OLV 317

O.) The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.
ON : The output current/torque > L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the output current/torque < L6-05 for
longer than the time set in L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2].

1A During Reverse V/f OLV 317

The terminal activates when the motor operates in the reverse direction.
ON : The motor is operating in the reverse direction.
OFF : The motor is operating in the forward direction or the motor stopped.

1B During Baseblock (N.C.) V/f OLV 318

The terminal deactivates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops
switching and does not make DC bus voltage.
ON : The drive is not in baseblock.
OFF : During baseblock

1E Executing Auto-Restart V/f OLV 318

The terminal activates when the Auto Restart function is trying to restart after a fault.

1F Motor Overload Alarm V/f OLV 318

(oL1) The terminal activates when the electronic thermal protection value of the motor overload protective function is a
minimum of 90% of the detection level.

20 Drive Overheat Pre- V/f OLV 318

Alarm (oH) The terminal activates when the drive heatsink temperature is at the level set with L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].

21 Safe Torque OFF V/f OLV 318

The terminal activates (safety stop state) when the safety circuit and safety diagnosis circuit are operating correctly
and when terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF (Open).
ON : Safety stop state
OFF : Safety circuit fault or RUN/READY

252 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.8 H: Terminal Functions

Setting Value Function Description Ref.

2F Maintenance V/f OLV 318

Notification The terminal activates when drive components are at their estimated maintenance period.
Tells you about the maintenance period for these items:
• IGBT
• Cooling Fan
• Capacitor
• Soft charge bypass relay

30 During Torque Limit V/f OLV 319

The terminal activates when the torque reference is the torque limit set with L7 parameters.

37 During Frequency V/f OLV 319

Output The terminal activates when the drive outputs frequency.
ON : The drive is outputting frequency.
OFF : The drive is not outputting frequency.

47 PF Detection V/f OLV 319

Indicates input phase loss.
0 : No error
1 : Input Phase Loss error detected

50 Brake Control V/f OLV 319

This setting can be used in the brake sequence for the elevator application. Closing the output terminal should
cause the brake to release, and opening the terminal should apply the brake.
Close : Release brake.
Open : Apply brake

51 Output Contactor V/f OLV 320

Control Assigning this command to an output terminal can send a signal to the controller to close the output contactor. The
output contactor should open when the terminal is released.
Closed : Close output contactor

54 Light Load Direction V/f OLV 320

Indicates the light load direction detected during emergency operation with light load search. When the terminal is
closed the light load direction is up, when it is open the light load direction is down.
Closed : Light load direction is up
Open : Light load direction is down

58 Safe Disable Status V/f OLV 320

This terminal closes if the Safe Disable inputs H1-HC are closed and opens when terminals H1-HC are open.
Closed : Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are open, drive is in a baseblock state
Open : Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are closed (normal operation)

100 - 158 Inverse output of 0 to 58 V/f OLV 320

Causes inverse output of the function for the selected MFDO. Uses the last two digits of 1xx to select which
function to inversely output.

◆ H4: Analog Outputs

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

H4-01 Terminal AM Analog V/f OLV 102 321

(041D) Output Select Sets the monitoring number to be output from the MFAO terminal AM. (000 - 999)
Expert Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H4-01 = 102 to monitor U1-
02 [Output Frequency].

H4-02 Terminal AM Analog V/f OLV 100.0% 321

(041E) Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN Sets the analog signal output level from the terminal AM at 10 V or 20 mA as 100%
Expert when an output for monitoring items is 100%.

H4-03 Terminal AM Analog V/f OLV 0.0% 322

(041F) Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN When an output for monitoring items is 0%, this parameter sets the analog signal output
Expert level from the AM terminal at 10 V or 20 mA as 0%.
Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 253

11.8 H: Terminal Functions

◆ H5: Modbus Communication

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-01 Drive Node Address V/f OLV 1FH 322

(0425) Sets the communication slave address for drives. (0 - FFH)
Note:
• Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload =
Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
• Setting 0 will not let the drive respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

H5-02 Communication Speed V/f OLV 3 322

(0426) Selection Sets the communications speed for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 8)
Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload =
Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19.2 kbps
5 : 38.4 kbps
6 : 57.6 kbps
7 : 76.8 kbps
8 : 115.2 kbps

H5-03 Communication Parity V/f OLV 0 322

(0427) Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 2)
Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload =
Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
0 : No parity
1 : Even parity
2 : Odd parity

H5-04 Communication Error V/f OLV 3 323

(0428) Stop Method Sets the motor Stopping Method when the drive detects CE [MEMOBUS/Modbus (0 - 3)
Communication Err] issues.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
3 : Alarm Only

H5-05 Comm Fault Detection V/f OLV 1 323

(0429) Selection Sets the function that detects CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues during (0, 1)
MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait V/f OLV 5 ms 323

(042A) Time Sets the time to wait to send a response message after the drive receives a command (0 - 65 ms)
message from the master.
Note:
Restart the drive after changing the parameter setting.

H5-09 CE Detection Time V/f OLV 2.0 s 323

(0435) Sets the detection time for CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues when (0.0 - 25.0 s)
communication stops.

H5-10 Modbus Register 0025H V/f OLV 0 324

(0436) Unit Sel Sets the unit of measure used for the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications monitor (0, 1)
register 0025H (output voltage reference monitor).
0 : 0.1 V units
1 : 1 V units

H5-11 Comm ENTER V/f OLV 0 324

(043C) Command Mode Sets the function to make the Enter command necessary to change parameters through (0, 1)
RUN MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
0 : ENTER Command Required
1 : ENTER Command Not Required

H5-12 Run Command Method V/f OLV 0 324

(043D) Selection Sets the input method for the Run command when b1-02 = 2 [Run Command Selection (0, 1)
1 = Memobus/Modbus Communications] or b1-16 = 2 [Run Command Selection 2 =
Memobus/Modbus Communications].
0 : FWD/Stop, REV/Stop
1 : Run/Stop, FWD/REV

254 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.8 H: Terminal Functions

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-17 ENTER command V/f OLV 0 324

(11A1) response @CPU BUSY Sets operation when the EEPROM write command is sent without EEPROM write (0, 1)
Expert available. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 : Ignore Command(No ROM/RAM Write)
1 : Write to RAM Only

H5-18 Motor Speed Filter over V/f OLV 0 ms 324

(11A2) Comms Sets the filter time constant used when monitoring motor speed during MEMOBUS/ (0 - 100 ms)
Modbus communications or with a communication option.

H5-20 Communication V/f OLV 0 325

(0B57) Parameters Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (0, 1)
parameters.
0 : Reload at Next Power Cycle
1 : Reload Now

H5-22 Speed Search from V/f OLV 0 325

(11CF) MODBUS Enables the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication register Speed Search function (bit0 (0, 1)
of 15DFH).
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

H5-25 Function 5A Register 1 V/f OLV 0044H (U1-05) 325

(1589) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN when responding to the master device.

H5-26 Function 5A Register 2 V/f OLV 0045H (U1-06) 325

(158A) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN when responding to the master device.

H5-27 Function 5A Register 3 V/f OLV 0042H (U1-03) 325

(158B) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN when responding to the master device.

H5-28 Function 5A Register 4 V/f OLV 0049H (U1-10) 326

(158C) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN when responding to the master device.

◆ H6: Pulse Train Input/Output

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

H6-02 Terminal RP Frequency V/f OLV 1440 Hz 326

(042D) Scaling Sets the frequency of the pulse train input signal used when the item selected with H6- (100 - 32000 Hz)
RUN 01 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is input at 100%.

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 255

11.9 L: Protection Functions

11.9 L: Protection Functions

◆ L1: Motor Protection
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L1-01 Motor Overload (oL1) V/f OLV 1 327

(0480) Protection Sets the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors. (0 - 3)
0 : No
1 : Variable Torque
2 : Constant Torque 10:1 Speed Range
3 : Constant Torque 100:1 SpeedRange

L1-02 Motor Overload V/f OLV 1.0 min 329

(0481) Protection Time Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent (0.1 - 5.0 min)
Expert damage to the motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

L1-13 Motor Overload Memory V/f OLV 1 329

(046D) Selection Sets the function that keeps the current electronic thermal protector value when the (0, 1)
Expert drive stops receiving power.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

◆ L2: Power Loss Ride Through (Undervoltage Detection)

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L2-05 Undervoltage Detection V/f OLV Determined by E1-01 329

(0489) Lvl (Uv1) Sets the voltage at which a Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] fault is triggered. Usually it is (400 V Class: 300 - 420
Expert not necessary to change this setting. V)
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you set this parameter
to a value lower than the default, you must install an AC
reactor on the input side of the power supply. If you do not
install an AC reactor, it will cause damage to the drive circuitry.

◆ L3: Stall Prevention

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L3-01 Stall Prevention during V/f OLV 1 330

(048F) Accel Sets the method of the Stall Prevention During Acceleration. (0 - 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

L3-02 Stall Prevent Level V/f OLV Determined by L8-38 331

(0490) during Accel Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention function operates during (0 - 165%)
Expert acceleration where the drive rated output current is 100%.

L3-03 Stall Prevent Limit V/f OLV 50% 331

(0491) during Accel Sets the lower limit for the stall prevention level used in the constant output range as a (0 - 100%)
Expert percentage of the drive rated output current.

L3-05 Stall Prevention during V/f OLV 1 331

(0493) RUN Sets the function to enable and disable Stall Prevention During Run. (0 - 1)
Expert Note:
An output frequency less than 6 Hz disables Stall Prevention during Run. The
setting values of L3-05 and L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during Run] do not have an
effect.
0 : No
1 : Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)

L3-06 Stall Prevent Level V/f OLV Determined by L8-38 332

(0494) during Run Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention function is enabled during run (30 - 165%)
Expert when the drive rated output current is 100%.
Note:
This parameter is applicable when L3-05 = 1 [Stall Prevention during RUN =
Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)].

256 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.9 L: Protection Functions

◆ L4: Speed Detection

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L4-01 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 0.0 Hz 332

(0499) Level Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5
[MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency
Detection 1, Frequency Detection 2].

L4-02 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 2.0 Hz 332

(049A) Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (0.0 - 20.0 Hz)
Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5
[MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency
Detection 1, Frequency Detection 2].

L4-03 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 0.0 Hz 332

(049B) Level(+/-) Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed. (-120.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15,
16 [MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency
Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].

L4-04 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 2.0 Hz 332

(049C) Width(+/-) Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (0.0 - 20.0 Hz)
Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15,
16 [MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency
Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].

◆ L5: Fault Restart

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L5-01 Number of Auto-Restart V/f OLV 2 333

(049E) Attempts Sets the number of times that the drive will try to restart. (0 - 10 times)

L5-02 Fault Contact at Restart V/f OLV 1 333

(049F) Select Sets the function that sends signals to the MFDO terminal set for Fault [H2-xx = E] (0, 1)
while the drive is automatically restarting.
0 : Active Only when Not Restarting
1 : Always Active

L5-04 Interval Method Restart V/f OLV 10.0 s 333

(046C) Time Sets the time interval between each Auto Restart attempt. This function is enabled when (0.5 - 600.0 s)
L5-05 = 1 [Auto Restart Operation Selection = Use L5-04 Time].

L5-06 Undervoltage Fault V/f OLV 0 333

(046E) Restart Selection Determines whether a limit should be placed on the number of reset attempts after a (0, 1)
Uv1 fault.
0 : Restrict auto-reset attempts to L5-01 after Uv1
1 : No Limit on auto-reset attempts to L5-01

◆ L6: Torque Detection

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-01 Torque Detection V/f OLV 0 335

(04A1) Selection 1 Sets torque detection conditions that will trigger an overtorque or undertorque response (0 - 8)
from the drive.
0 : Disabled
1 : oL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
2 : oL @ RUN - Alarm only
3 : oL @ Speed Agree - Fault
4 : oL @ RUN - Fault
5 : UL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
6 : UL @ RUN - Alarm only
7 : UL @ Speed Agree - Fault
8 : UL @ RUN - Fault
Parameter List

L6-02 Torque Detection Level V/f OLV 150% 336

(04A2) 1 Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. In V/f control, drive (0 - 300%)
rated output current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.

L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 V/f OLV 0.1 s 336

(04A3) Sets the detection time for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 257

11.9 L: Protection Functions

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-04 Torque Detection V/f OLV 0 336

(04A4) Selection 2 Sets the speed range that detects overtorque and undertorque and the operation of drives (0 - 8)
(operation status) after detection.
0 : Disabled
1 : oL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
2 : oL @ RUN - Alarm only
3 : oL @ Speed Agree - Fault
4 : oL @ RUN - Fault
5 : UL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
6 : UL @ RUN - Alarm only
7 : UL @ Speed Agree - Fault
8 : UL @ RUN - Fault

L6-05 Torque Detection Level V/f OLV 150% 337

(04A5) 2 Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2. In V/f control, drive (0 - 300%)
rated output current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.

L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 V/f OLV 0.1 s 337

(04A6) Sets the detection time for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2. (0.0 - 10.0 s)

◆ L7: Torque Limit

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L7-01 Forward Torque Limit V/f OLV 200% 338

(04A7) Sets the torque limit value for forward motoring as a percentage, where motor rated (0 - 300%)
RUN torque is the 100% value.
Expert

L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit V/f OLV 200% 338

(04A8) Sets the torque limit value for reversed motoring as a percentage, where motor rated (0 - 300%)
RUN torque is the 100% value.
Expert

L7-03 Forward Regenerative V/f OLV 200% 338

(04A9) Trq Limit Sets the torque limit value for forward regenerative conditions as a percentage of the (0 - 300%)
RUN motor rated torque.
Expert

L7-04 Reverse Regenerative V/f OLV 200% 338

(04AA) Trq Limit Sets the torque limit value for reversed regenerative conditions as a percentage of the (0 - 300%)
RUN motor rated torque.
Expert

L7-06 Torque Limit Integral V/f OLV 200 ms 338

(04AC) Time Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit function. (5 - 10000 ms)
Expert

L7-07 Torque Limit during V/f OLV 0 338

(04C9) Accel/Decel Sets the torque limit function during acceleration and deceleration. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Proportional only
1 : Proportional & Integral control

L7-16 Torque Limit Process at V/f OLV 1 339

(044D) Start Assigns a time filter to allow the torque limit to build at start. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

◆ L8: Drive Protection

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 339

(04AE) Sets the oH detection level in temperature. (50 - 130 °C)
Expert

L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm V/f OLV 3 339

(04AF) Selection Sets operation after the drive detects an oH alarm. (0 - 4)
Expert 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
3 : Alarm Only
4 : Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)

258 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.9 L: Protection Functions

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-05 Input Phase Loss V/f OLV Depends on o2-04 340

(04B1) Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable input phase loss detection. (0 - 2)
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
2 : Standard + dv/dt

L8-06 Input Phase Loss V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 340

(04B2) Detection Level When ripple is observed in the DC bus, expansion of the input bias is calculated and (0.0 - 50.0%)
becomes the input phase if the difference between the max and minimum values of the
ripple are greater than L8-06.

L8-07 Output Phase Loss V/f OLV 1 340

(04B3) Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable output phase loss detection. The drive starts (0 - 2)
Expert output phase loss detection when the output current decreases to less than 5% of the
drive rated current.
Note:
The drive can incorrectly start output phase loss detection in these conditions:
• The motor rated current is very small compared to the drive rating.
• The drive is operating a PM motor with a small load.
0 : Disabled
1 : Fault when one phase is lost
2 : Fault when two phases are lost

L8-09 Output Ground Fault V/f OLV 1 341

(04B5) Detection Sets the function to enable and disable ground fault protection. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

L8-10 Heatsink Fan Operation V/f OLV 0 341

(04B6) Selection Sets operation of the heatsink cooling fan. (0 - 1)
0 : During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-Delay
1 : Always On

L8-11 Heatsink Fan Off-Delay V/f OLV 60 s 341

(04B7) Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before it stops the cooling fan after it (0 - 300 s)
cancels the Run command when L8-10 = 0 [Heatsink Fan Operation Selection =
During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-Delay].

L8-12 Ambient Temperature V/f OLV 40 °C 341

(04B8) Setting Sets the ambient temperature of the drive installation area. (-10 °C - +60 °C)
Note:
The setting range changes when the L8-35 [Installation Method Selection] value
changes:
• 0 [IP20/UL Open Type]: -10 °C to +60 °C
• 1 [Side-by-Side Mounting]: -10 °C to +50 °C
• 2 [IP20/UL Type 1]: -10 °C to +50 °C
• 3 [Finless Installation]: -10 °C to +50 °C

L8-15 Drive oL2 @ Low Speed V/f OLV 1 342

(04BB) Protection Sets the function to decrease the drive overload level at which the drive will trigger oL2 (0, 1)
[Drive Overload] during low speed operation (6 Hz or slower) to prevent damage to the
main circuit transistors.
Note:
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before disabling this function
at low speeds. If you frequently operate drives with high output current in low
speed ranges, it can cause heat stress and decrease the life span of drive IGBTs.
0 : Disabled (No Additional Derate)
1 : Enabled (Reduced oL2 Level)

L8-18 Software Current Limit V/f OLV 0 342

(04BE) Selection Set the software current limit selection function to prevent damage to the main circuit (0, 1)
Expert transistor caused by too much current.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

L8-19 Freq Reduction @ oH V/f OLV 0.8 342

(04BF) Pre-Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference during an oH alarm. (0.1 - 0.9)
Expert

L8-35 Installation Method V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 342

(04EC) Selection Sets the type of drive installation. (0 - 3)
Expert 0 : IP20/UL Open Type
Parameter List

1 : Side-by-Side Mounting
2 : IP20/UL Type 1
3 : Finless Installation

L8-40 Carrier Freq Reduction V/f OLV 0.50 s 343

(04F1) Off-Delay Sets the length of time until the automatically reduced carrier frequency returns to the (0.00 - 2.00 s)
Expert condition before the reduction.
11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 259

11.9 L: Protection Functions

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-41 High Current Alarm V/f OLV 0 343

(04F2) Selection Sets the function to cause an HCA [Current Alarm] when the output current is more (0, 1)
Expert than 150% of the drive rated current.
0 : No
1 : Yes

L8-42 Input Phase Loss V/f OLV 2s 343

(04F3) Detection Time 2 Sets the amount of time that an Input Phase Loss condition has to be present before a
fault is triggered.

L8-43 High Current Alarm V/f OLV 0.5 s 343

(04F4) Selection Sets the amount of time that an Output Phase Loss condition has to be present before a (0.0 - 2.0 s)
fault is triggered.

L8-62 Input Phase Loss V/f OLV 0 343

(04D8) Detection Sets stopping method when an input phase loss fault (PF) occurs. (0 - 3)
0 : Ramp to stop
1 : Coast to stop
2 : Stop (Use C1-09)
3 : Alarm Only

L8-65 PF Detection Minimum V/f OLV 10% 344

(04DB) Current Level Percentage of rated current. Used for standard method and dv/dt method. The parameter (0 - 100%)
is only active during run, and is not evaluated for dv/dt detection method at start.

L8-70 PF dv/dt Level V/f OLV 2100 V/sec 344

(04E0) (0 - 10,000 V/sec)

L8-79 dv/dt Tune Factor V/f OLV 130% 344

(04E9) (99 - 150%)

L8-88 Safe Disable Operation V/f OLV 0 343

(04F2) Mode Determines the operation performed by the drive when the Safe Disable input is (0, 1)
activated.
0 : Mode 0
1 : Mode 1

260 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.10 n: Special Adjustment

11.10 n: Special Adjustment

◆ n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

n2-01 Speed Feedback V/f OLV 1.50 345

(0584) Detection Control (AFR) Sets the gain of the AFR function as a magnification value. Usually it is not necessary (0.00 - 10.00)
Gain to change this setting.

n2-02 Speed Feedback V/f OLV 50 ms 345

(0585) Detection Control (AFR) Sets the time constant that sets the rate of change for the AFR function. Usually it is not (0 - 2000 ms)
Time Constant 1 necessary to change this setting.

n2-03 Speed Feedback V/f OLV 750 ms 345

(0586) Detection Control (AFR) Sets the time constant that sets the speed difference of the AFR function. Use this (0 - 2000 ms)
Time Constant 2 parameter for speed searches or regeneration. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.

◆ n6: Online Tuning

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

n6-01 Online Tuning Selection V/f OLV 1 346

(0570) Sets the type of motor data that Online Tuning uses for OLV control. (0 - 2)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning
2 : Voltage Correction Tuning

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 261

11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings

11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings

◆ o1: Keypad Display
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-01 User Monitor Selection V/f OLV 106 348

(0500) Sets the U monitor for the Drive Mode. This parameter is only available with an LED (104 - 830)
RUN keypad.

o1-02 Monitor Selection at V/f OLV 1 348

(0501) Power-up Sets the monitor item that the keypad screen shows after you energize the drive. Refer (1 - 5)
RUN to “U: Monitors” for information about the monitor items that the keypad screen can
show. This parameter is only available with an LED keypad.
Expert
1 : Frequency Reference (U1-01)
2 : Direction
3 : Output Frequency (U1-02)
4 : Output Current (U1-03)
5 : User Monitor (o1-01)

o1-03 Keypad Display Unit V/f OLV 0 348

(0502) Selection Sets the display units for the frequency reference and output frequency. (0 - 3)
0 : 0.01 Hz units
1 : 0.01% units
2 : Revolutions Per Minute (RPM)
3 : User Units

o1-10 User Units Maximum V/f OLV Determined by o1-03 349

(0520) Value Sets the value that the drive shows as the maximum output frequency. (1 - 60000)
Expert

o1-11 User Units Decimal V/f OLV Determined by o1-03 349

(0521) Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values. (0 - 3)
Expert 0 : No Decimal Places (XXXXX)
1 : One Decimal Places (XXXX.X)
2 : Two Decimal Places (XXX.XX)
3 : Three Decimal Places (XX.XXX)

o1-24 to o1-29: Custom Monitor 1 to 6 V/f OLV o1-24: 101 349

(11AD - 11B2) Sets a maximum of 6 monitors as user monitors. This parameter is only available when o1-25: 102
RUN using an LCD keypad. o1-26: 103
o1-27 to o1-29: 0
(0, 101 - 999)

◆ o2: Keypad Operation

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-01 LO/RE Key Function V/f OLV 0 350

(0505) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function that lets you use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE
Expert Modes.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o2-02 STOP Key Function V/f OLV 0 350

(0506) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function to use on the keypad to stop the drive when the Run command
Expert source for the drive is REMOTE (external) and not assigned to the keypad.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o2-03 User Parameter Default V/f OLV 0 350

(0507) Value Sets the function to keep the settings of changed parameters as user parameter defaults (0 - 2)
Expert to use during initialization.
0 : No change
1 : Set defaults
2 : Clear all

o2-04 Drive Model (KVA) V/f OLV Determined by the drive 351
(0508) Selection Sets the Drive Model code. Set this parameter after replacing the control board. (-)
Expert

262 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-05 Home Mode Freq Ref V/f OLV 0 351

(0509) Entry Mode (0, 1)
Expert Sets the function that makes it necessary to push to use the keypad to change the
frequency reference value while in Drive Mode.
0 : ENTER Key Required
1 : Immediate / MOP-style

o2-06 Keypad Disconnect V/f OLV 0 351

(050A) Detection Sets the function that stops the drive if you disconnect the keypad connection cable (0, 1)
Expert from the drive or if you damage the cable while the keypad is the Run command source.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o2-07 Keypad RUN Direction V/f OLV 0 352

(0527) @ Power-up Sets the direction of motor rotation when the drive is energized and the keypad is the (0, 1)
Expert Run command source.
0 : Forward
1 : Reverse

o2-09 Reserved - - 352

(050D)
Expert

o2-19 Parameter Write during V/f OLV 0 352

(061F) Uv Lets you change parameters during Uv [Undervoltage]. ( 0, 1 )
Expert 0 : Disable
1 : Enabled

o2-23 External 24V Powerloss V/f OLV 0 352

(11F8) Detection Sets the function to give a warning if the backup external 24 V power supply turns off (0, 1)
RUN when the main circuit power supply is in operation.
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o2-26 Alarm Display at Ext. V/f OLV 0 352

(1563) 24V Power When you connect a backup external 24 V power supply, this parameter sets the (0, 1)
Expert function to trigger an alarm when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
Note:
The drive will not run when it is operating from one 24-V external power supply.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o2-27 bCE Detection Selection V/f OLV 3 353

(1565) Sets drive operation if the Bluetooth device is disconnected when you operate the drive (0 - 4)
Expert in Bluetooth Mode.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
3 : Alarm Only
4 : No Alarm Display

◆ o3: Copy Keypad Function

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-01 Copy Keypad Function V/f OLV 0 353

(0515) Selection Sets the function that saves and copies drive parameters to a different drive with the (0 - 3)
keypad.
0 : Copy Select
1 : Backup (drive → keypad)
2 : Restore (keypad → drive)
3 : Verify (check for mismatch)

o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection V/f OLV 0 353

(0516) Sets the copy function when o3-01 = 1 [Copy Keypad Function Selection = Backup (0, 1)
(drive → keypad)].
0 : Disabled
Parameter List

1 : Enabled

o3-04 Select Backup/Restore V/f OLV 0 353

(0B3E) Location Sets the storage location for drive parameters when you back up and restore parameters. (0 - 3)
This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Memory Location 1
1 : Memory Location 2
2 : Memory Location 3 11
3 : Memory Location 4

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 263

11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-05 Select Items to Backup/ V/f OLV 0 354

(0BDA) Restore Sets which parameters are backed up, restored, and referenced. This parameter is only (0, 1)
available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Standard Parameters
1 : Standard + DWEZ Parameters

o3-06 Auto Parameter Backup V/f OLV 1 354

(0BDE) Selection Sets the function that automatically backs up parameters. This parameter is only (0, 1)
available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o3-07 Auto Parameter Backup V/f OLV 1 354

(0BDF) Interval Sets the interval at which the automatic parameter backup function saves parameters (0 - 3)
from the drive to the keypad.
Note:
This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Every 10 minutes
1 : Every 30 minutes
2 : Every 60 minutes
3 : Every 12 hours

◆ o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-01 Elapsed Operating Time V/f OLV 0h 355

(050B) Setting Sets the initial value of the cumulative drive operation time in 10-hour units. (0 - 9999 h)
Expert

o4-02 Elapsed Operating Time V/f OLV 1 355

(050C) Selection Sets the condition that counts the cumulative operation time. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : U4-01 Shows Total Power-up Time
1 : U4-01 Shows Total RUN Time

o4-03 Fan Operation Time V/f OLV 0h 355

(050E) Setting Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10- (0 - 9999 h)
Expert hour units.

o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance V/f OLV 0% 355

(051D) Setting Sets the U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
Expert

o4-07 Softcharge Relay V/f OLV 0% 355

(0523) Maintenance Set Sets the U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
Expert

o4-09 IGBT Maintenance V/f OLV 0% 356

(0525) Setting Sets the U4-07 [IGBT Maintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
Expert

o4-11 Fault Trace/History Init V/f OLV 0 356

(0510) (U2/U3) Resets the records of Monitors U2-xx [Fault Trace] and U3-xx [Fault History]. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

o4-12 kWh Monitor V/f OLV 0 356

(0512) Initialization Resets the monitor values for U4-10 [kWh, Lower 4 Digits] and U4-11 [kWh, Upper 5 (0, 1)
Expert Digits].
0 : No Reset
1 : Reset

o4-13 RUN Command Counter V/f OLV 0 356

(0528) @ Initialize Resets the monitor values for U4-02 [Num of Run Commands], U4-24 [Number of Runs (0, 1)
Expert (Low)], and U4-25 [Number of Runs (High)].
0 : No Reset
1 : Reset

o4-22 Time Format V/f OLV 0 357

(154F) Sets the time display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD (0 - 2)
RUN keypad.
Expert 0 : 24 Hour Clock
1 : 12 Hour Clock
2 : 12 Hour JP Clock

264 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-23 Date Format V/f OLV 0 357

(1550) Sets the date display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD (0 - 2)
RUN keypad.
Expert 0 : YYYY/MM/DD
1 : DD/MM/YYYY
2 : MM/DD/YYYY

o4-24 bAT Detection Selection V/f OLV 0 357

(310F) Sets the operation when the drive detects bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage] and TiM (0 - 2)
RUN [Keypad Time Not Set]. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
Expert 0 : Disable
1 : Enable (Alarm Detected)
2 : Enable (Fault Detected)

◆ o5: Log Function

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-01 Log Start/Stop Selection V/f OLV 0 360

(1551) Sets the data log function. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 1)
RUN 0 : OFF
Expert 1 : ON

o5-02 Log Sampling Interval V/f OLV 1000 ms 360

(1552) Sets the data log sampling cycle. This parameter is only available when using an LCD (100 - 60000 ms)
RUN keypad.
Expert

o5-03 Log Monitor Data 1 V/f OLV 101 360

(1553) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-04 Log Monitor Data 2 V/f OLV 102 360

(1554) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-05 Log Monitor Data 3 V/f OLV 103 361

(1555) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-06 Log Monitor Data 4 V/f OLV 107 361

(1556) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-07 Log Monitor Data 5 V/f OLV 108 361

(1557) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-08 Log Monitor Data 6 V/f OLV 000 361

(1558) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-09 Log Monitor Data 7 V/f OLV 000 361

(1559) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-10 Log Monitor Data 8 V/f OLV 000 362

(155A) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Parameter List

Expert

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 265

11.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-11 Log Monitor Data 9 V/f OLV 000 362

(155B) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

o5-12 Log Monitor Data 10 V/f OLV 000 362

(155C) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

266 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.12 S: Elevator Parameters

11.12 S: Elevator Parameters

◆ S1: Brake Sequence
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 363
(0680) Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection when the drive is ramping to stop (0.000 - 9.999%)
(b1-03 = 0). Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).

S1-02 DC Injection Current at V/f OLV 50% 363

(0681) Start Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage of (0 - 75%)
the drive rated current.

S1-03 DC Injection Current at V/f OLV 50% 363

(0682) Stop Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage of (0 - 75%)
the drive rated current. When using OLV Control, the DC injection current is
determined by multiplying S1-03 by S3-25 or S3-26.

S1-04 DC Injection Time at V/f OLV 0.40 s 363

(0683) Start Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. During this time, (0.00 - 10.00 s)
the drive allows motor flux to develop, which is essential for applying torque quickly
once the brake is released. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-04.

S1-05 DC Injection Time at V/f OLV 0.60 s 363

(0684) Stop Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. A setting of 0.00 (0.00 - 10.00 s)
disables S1-05.

S1-06 Brake Open Delay Time V/f OLV 0.20 s 364

(0685) Determines the time that must pass after an Up/Down command is entered before the (0.00 - 10.00 s)
output terminal set for "Brake control" (H2-xx = 50) is triggered. Adjusting this delay
time can help when there is not enough time to develop the appropriate amount of
motor flux. Be sure to also increase the time S1-04 when setting S1-06 to relatively long
delay time.

S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time V/f OLV 0.10 s 364

(0686) Determines the time that must pass after zero speed is reached before the output (0.00 - 10.00 s)
terminal set for "Brake control" (H2-xx = 50) is released.

S1-10 Run Command Delay V/f OLV 0.10 s 364

(0687) Time Determines the time that must pass after zero speed is reached before the output (0.00 - 10.00 s)
terminal set for "Brake control" (H2-xx = 50) is released.

S1-11 Output Reactor Open V/f OLV 0.10 s 364

(0688) Delay Time Determines the time that must pass for an output terminal set for “Output contactor (0.00 - 10.00 s)
control” (H2-xx = 51) to be released after the drive has stopped and drive output has
been shut off.

◆ S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

S2-01 Motor Rated Speed V/f OLV 1380 rpm 364

(068F) Sets the rated speed of the motor. (300 - 1800 rpm)

S2-02 Slip Compensation Gain V/f OLV 0.7 364

(0690) in Motoring Mode Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and (0.0 - 5.0 rpm)
regenerative states to help improve the accuracy of leveling.

S2-03 Slip Compensation Gain V/f OLV 1.0 364

(0691) in Regenerative Mode Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and (0.0 - 5.0)
regenerative states to help improve the accuracy of leveling.

S2-05 Slip Compensation V/f OLV 1000 ms 365

(0693) Torque Detection Delay Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation. (0 - 10000 ms)
Time
Expert

S2-06 Slip Compensation V/f OLV 500 ms 365

(0694) Torque Detection Filter Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation (0 - 2000 ms)
Time Constant value calculation.
Expert
Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 267

11.12 S: Elevator Parameters

◆ S4: Rescue Operation

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

S4-01 Light Load Direction V/f OLV 0 365

(06A6) Search Selection Enables and disables the Light Load Direction Search. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Advanced

S4-05 Rescue Operation V/f OLV 100% 365

(06AA) Torque Limit Sets a time limit for Light Load Direction Search. (0% - 300%)

S4-20 Light Load Search V/f OLV 0 365

(06B1) Override Defines the source that determines the light load search direction. (0 - 1)
0 : Controller Direction
1 : Inverter Direction

◆ S6: Error Detection

No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-01 Motor Contactor V/f OLV 0 365

(06B3) Response Error (SE1) Determines when the drive should detect a motor contactor response error (SE1). SE1 is (0 - 2)
Detection/Reset triggered if there is no response from the motor contactor within the time set in S6-10
Selection after the contactor control output has been set.
0 : Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset
1 : Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset
2 : No SE1 detection

S6-02 Starting Current Error V/f OLV 200 ms 366

(06B4) (SE2) Detection Delay Sets a delay time for starting current error (SE2). SE2 is detected when the drive output (0.00 - [S1-04 - S1-06]
Time current is below 25% after the Up/Down command has been entered and the brake ms)
release time and the time set to S6-02 have both passed. The brake control command
will not be issued (brake stays applied).

S6-04 Output Current Error V/f OLV 200 ms 366

(06B6) (SE3) Detection Delay Sets a delay time for detecting an output current fault (SE3). SE3 is detected when the (0 - 5000 ms)
Time drive output current drops below 25% after the brake has released.

S6-05 Brake Response Error V/f OLV 500 ms 366

(06B7) (SE4) Detection Time Sets a delay time for detecting a brake response error (SE4). SE4 is detected when an (0 - 10000 ms)
output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2-xx = 50) and an input terminal set for “Brake
feedback” (H1-xx = 79) do match for the time set to S6- 05.

S6-15 Speed Reference Loss V/f OLV 0 366

(06BB) Detection Enables speed reference loss detection when D1-18 = 1 and H1-xx ≠ 53. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

S6-16 Restart after Baseblock V/f OLV 0 366

(06BC) Selection Allows the drive to restart the motor after returning to normal operation from Baseblock (0, 1)
state (H1-xx = 8/9) or from Safe Torque-Off state (Safe Disable inputs H1 and H2
enabled) while the Up/Down command is still active.

268 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.13 T: Motor Tuning

11.13 T: Motor Tuning

◆ T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-01 Tuning Mode Selection V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 367

(0701) Sets the type of Auto-Tuning. (Determined by A1-02)
0 : Rotational Auto-Tuning
1 : Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
2 : Stationary Line-Line Resistance

T1-02 Motor Rated Power V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 367

(0702) Uses the units set in o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection] to set the motor rated output (0.00 - 650.00 kW)
power.

T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage V/f OLV 400 V Class: 400.0 V 367
(0703) Sets the rated voltage (V) of the motor. Enter the base speed voltage for constant output (400 V Class: 0.0 - 511.0
motors. V)

T1-04 Motor Rated Current V/f OLV Determined by o2-04 367

(0704) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. (10% to 200% of the
drive rated current)

T1-05 Motor Base Frequency V/f OLV 50.0 Hz 368

(0705) Sets the base frequency (Hz) of the motor. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

T1-06 Number of Motor Poles V/f OLV 4 368

(0706) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 to 48)

T1-07 Motor Base Speed V/f OLV 1450 min-1 (r/min) 368
(0707) Sets the motor base speed for Auto-Tuning (min-1 (r/min)). (0 - 24000 min-1 (r/min))

T1-08 Motor no-load voltage V/f OLV 40% of motor nominal 368
(0708) Sets the no-lead voltage of the motor. current

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 269

11.14 U: Monitors

11.14 U: Monitors
◆ U1: Operation Status Monitors
No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U1-01 Frequency Reference V/f OLV 10 V = Maximum

(0040) Shows the frequency reference value. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the frequency (0 V to +10 V)
display units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

U1-02 Output frequency V/f OLV 10 V = Maximum

(0041) Shows the output frequency. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the display frequency (0 V to +10 V)
units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

U1-03 Output Current V/f OLV 10 V = Drive rated current

(0042) Shows the actual output current.
The keypad shows the value of U1-03 in amperes (A).
Unit: When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
• 0.01 A units: 2018 - 2033, 4009 - 4018
• 0.1A units: 2045 - 2075, 4024 - 4045

U1-04 Control method selection V/f OLV No signal output available

(0043) Shows the drive control method.
0 : V/f Control
2 : Open Loop Vector
5 : PM Open Loop Vector
6 : PM Advanced Open Loop Vector
8 : EZ Vector Control

U1-05 Motor Speed V/f OLV 10 V = Maximum

(0044) Shows the detected motor speed. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the frequency (0 V to +10 V)
display units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

U1-06 Output Voltage Ref V/f OLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200

(0045) Shows the output voltage reference. Vrms
Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms

U1-07 DC Bus Voltage V/f OLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 400 V

(0046) Shows the DC bus voltage. 400 V Class: 10 V = 800 V
Unit: 1 V

U1-08 Output Power V/f OLV 10 V: Drive capacity (motor

(0047) Shows the internally-calculated output power. rated power) kW
When you change A1-02 [Control Method Selection], it will also change the signal level of the (0 V to +10 V)
analog output.
• A1-02 = 0: Drive capacity (kW)
• A1-02 = 2: Motor Rated Power [E2-11] (kW)
• A1-02 = 5, 6: PM Motor Rated Power [E5-02] (kW)
• A1-02 = 8: Motor Rated Power [E9-07] (kW)
Unit: When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
• 0.01 kW: B001 - B018, 2001 - 2042, 4001 - 4023
• 0.1 kW: 2056 - 2082, 4031 - 4060

U1-09 Torque Reference V/f OLV 10 V = Motor rated torque

(0048) Shows the internal torque reference value. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.1%

U1-10 Input Terminal Status V/f OLV No signal output available

(0049)
Shows the status of the MFDO terminal where = ON and = OFF.

For example, U1-10 shows when terminals S1 and S3 are ON.

bit0 : Terminal S1 (MFDI 1)
bit1 : Terminal S2 (MFDI 2)
bit2 : Terminal S3 (MFDI 3)
bit3 : Terminal S4 (MFDI 4)
bit4 : Terminal S5 (MFDI 5)
bit5 : Terminal S6 (MFDI 6)
bit6 : Terminal S7 (MFDI 7)

bit7 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

270 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.14 U: Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U1-11 Output Terminal Status V/f OLV No signal output available

(004A)
Shows the status of the MFDO terminal where = ON and = OFF.

For example, U1-11 shows when terminals MA and P2 are ON.

Note:
When H2-xx = 100 to 1A7 [U1-11 Inverse U1-11 Output of Function], U1-11 does not show
the status in inverse.
bit0 : Terminal MA/MB-MC
bit1 : Terminal P1-C1
bit2 : Terminal P2-C2

bit3 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit4 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit5 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit6 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit7 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

U1-12 Drive Status V/f OLV No signal output available

(004B)
Shows drive status where = ON and = OFF.

For example, U1-12 shows during run with the Reverse Run command.
bit0 : During Run
bit1 : During zero-speed
bit2 : During reverse
bit3 : During fault reset signal input
bit4 : During speed agreement
bit5 : Drive Ready
bit6 : During minor fault detection
bit7 : During fault detection

U1-16 SFS Output Frequency V/f OLV 10 V = Maximum

(0053) Shows the output frequency after soft start. Shows the frequency with acceleration and frequency (0 V to +10 V)
deceleration times and S-curves. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the
display units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

U1-18 oPE Fault Parameter V/f OLV No signal output available

(0061) Shows the parameter number that caused the oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error] or oPE08
[Parameter Selection Error].

U1-25 Software number V/f OLV No signal output available

(004D) Shows the ID.

U1-26 SoftwareNumber ROM V/f OLV No signal output available

(005B) Shows the ROM ID.

◆ U2: Fault Trace

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U2-01 Current Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0080) Shows the fault that the drive has when viewing the monitor.

U2-02 Previous Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0081) Shows the fault that occurred most recently.

U2-03 Freq Reference@Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0082) Shows the frequency reference at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-01 [Frequency Reference] to monitor the frequency reference value.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

U2-04 Output Freq @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0083) Shows the output frequency at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-02 [Output Frequency] to monitor the actual output frequency.
Parameter List

Unit: 0.01 Hz

U2-06 Motor Speed @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0085) Shows the motor speed at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-05 [Motor Speed] to monitor the motor speed.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 271

11.14 U: Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U2-07 Output Voltage@Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0086) Shows the output voltage reference at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-06 [Output Voltage Ref] to monitor the output voltage reference.
Unit: 0.1 V

U2-08 DC Bus Voltage@Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0087) Shows the DC bus voltage at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage] to monitor the DC bus voltage.
Unit: 1 V

U2-09 Output Power @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0088) Shows the output power at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-08 [Output Power] to monitor the output power.
Unit: 0.1 kW

U2-10 Torque Ref @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0089) Shows the torque reference at the fault that occurred most recently as a percentage of the motor
rated torque.
Use U1-09 [Torque Reference] to monitor the torque reference.
Unit: 0.1%

U2-11 Input Terminal Status @ V/f OLV No signal output available

(008A) Fault
Shows the status of the MFDI terminals at the most recent fault where = ON and = OFF.

For example, U2-11 shows when terminals S1 and S3 are ON.

Use U1-10 [Input Terminal Status] to monitor the actual MFDI terminal status.
bit0 : Terminal S1
bit1 : Terminal S2
bit2 : Terminal S3
bit3 : Terminal S4
bit4 : Terminal S5
bit5 : Terminal S6
bit6 : Terminal S7

bit7 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

U2-12 Output Terminal Status @ V/f OLV No signal output available

(008B) Fault
Shows the status of the MFDO terminals at the most recent fault where = ON and = OFF.

For example, U2-12 shows when terminals MA and P2 are ON.

Use U1-11 [Output Terminal Status] to monitor the actual MFDO terminal status.
bit0 : Terminal MA/MB-MC
bit1 : Terminal P1-C1
bit2 : Terminal P2-C2

bit3 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit4 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit5 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit6 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

bit7 : Not used (normal value of [ ]).

U2-13 Operation Status @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(008C)
Shows the status of the MFDO terminals at the most recent fault where = ON and = OFF.

For example, U2-13 shows during run.

Use U1-12 [Drive Status] to monitor the actual MFDO terminal status.
bit0 : During Run
bit1 : During zero-speed
bit2 : During reverse
bit3 : During fault reset signal input
bit4 : During speed agreement
bit5 : Drive Ready
bit6 : During minor fault detection
bit7 : During fault detection

U2-14 Elapsed Time @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(008D) Shows the cumulative operation time of the drive at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time] to monitor the cumulative operation time.
Unit: 1 h

U2-15 SFS Output @ Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(07E0) Shows the output frequency after soft start at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-16 [SFS Output Frequency] to monitor the output frequency after soft start.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

272 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.14 U: Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U2-16 q-Axis Current@Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(07E1) Shows the q-Axis current of the motor at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U6-01 [Iq Secondary Current] to monitor the q-Axis current of the motor.
Unit: 0.1 %

U2-17 d-Axis Current@Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(07E2) Shows the d-Axis current of the motor at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U6-02 [Id ExcitationCurrent] to monitor the d-Axis current of the motor.
Unit: 0.1%

◆ U3: Fault History

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U3-01 1st MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0090) Shows the fault history of the most recent fault.

U3-02 2nd MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0091) Shows the fault history of the second most recent fault.

U3-03 3rd MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0092) Shows the fault history of the third most recent fault.

U3-04 4th MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0093) Shows the fault history of the fourth most recent fault.

U3-05 5th MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0804) Shows the fault history of the fifth most recent fault.

U3-06 6th MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0805) Shows the fault history of the sixth most recent fault.

U3-07 7th MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0806) Shows the fault history of the seventh most recent fault.

U3-08 8th MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0807) Shows the fault history of the eighth most recent fault.

U3-09 9th MostRecent Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0808) Shows the fault history of the ninth most recent fault.

U3-10 10th MostRecentFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0809) Shows the fault history of the tenth most recent fault.

U3-11 ElapsedTime@1stFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0094) Shows the cumulative operation time when the most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-12 ElapsedTime@2ndFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0095) Shows the cumulative operation time when the second most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-13 ElapsedTime@3rdFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0096) Shows the cumulative operation time when the third most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-14 ElapsedTime@4thFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0097) Shows the cumulative operation time when the fourth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-15 ElapsedTime@5thFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(080E) Shows the cumulative operation time when the fifth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-16 ElapsedTime@6thFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(080F) Shows the cumulative operation time when the sixth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-17 ElapsedTime@7thFault V/f OLV No signal output available

Parameter List

(0810) Shows the cumulative operation time when the seventh most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-18 ElapsedTime@8thFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0811) Shows the cumulative operation time when the eighth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 273

11.14 U: Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U3-19 ElapsedTime@9thFault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0812) Shows the cumulative operation time when the ninth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

U3-20 ElapsedTime@10 Fault V/f OLV No signal output available

(0813) Shows the cumulative operation time when the tenth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h

◆ U4: Maintenance Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U4-02 Num of Run Commands V/f OLV 10 V: 65535 times

(0075) Shows how many times that the drive has received a Run command.
Use parameter o4-13 [RUN Command Counter @ Initialize] to reset this monitor. The maximum
value that the monitor will show is 65535. After this value is more than 65535, the drive
automatically resets it and starts to count from 0 again.
Unit: 1

U4-04 Cool Fan Maintenance V/f OLV 10 V: 100%

(007E) Shows the cumulative operation time of the cooling fans as a percentage of the estimated
performance life of the cooling fans.
The default value is 0. The value counts up from 0.
Use o4-03 [Fan Operation Time Setting] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the cooling fans when this monitor is at 90%.

U4-05 CapacitorMaintenance V/f OLV 10 V: 100%

(007C) Shows the operation time of the electrolytic capacitors for the main circuit and control circuit as a
percentage of the estimated performance life of the electrolytic capacitors.
The default value is 0. The value counts up from 0.
Use o4-05 [Capacitor Maintenance Setting] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the electrolytic capacitor when this monitor is at 90%.

U4-06 PreChargeRelayMainte V/f OLV 10 V: 100%

(07D6) Shows the operation time of the soft charge bypass relay as a percentage of the estimated
performance life of the soft charge bypass relay.
The default value is 0. The value counts up from 0.
Use o4-07 [Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the drive when this monitor is at 90%.

U4-07 IGBT Maintenance V/f OLV 10 V: 100%

(07D7) Shows the operation time of the IGBTs as a percentage of the estimated performance life of the
IGBTs.
The default value is 0. The value counts up from 0.
Use o4-09 [IGBT Maintenance Setting] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the drive when this monitor is at 90%.

U4-08 Heatsink Temperature V/f OLV 10 V: 100 °C

(0068) Shows the heatsink temperature of the drive.
Unit: 1 °C

U4-09 LED Check V/f OLV No signal output available

(005E) Turns on all of the keypad LEDs to make sure that the LEDs operate correctly.

1. With U4-09 displayed, press .

All LEDs on the keypad will turn on.
Note:
When Safety input 2 CH is open (STo), READY will flash.

U4-10 kWh, Lower 4 Digits V/f OLV No signal output available

(005C) Shows the lower 4 digits of the watt hour value for the drive.
Unit: 1 kWh
Note:
The watt hour is displayed in 9 digits. Monitor U4-11 [kWh, Upper 5 Digits] shows the upper
5 digits and U4-10 shows the lower 4 digits.
Example for 12345678.9 kWh:
U4-10: 678.9 kWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh

274 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.14 U: Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits V/f OLV No signal output available

(005D) Shows the upper 5 digits of the watt hour value for the drive.
Unit: 1 MWh
Note:
Monitor U4-11 shows the upper 5 digits and U4-10 [kWh, Lower 4 Digits] shows the lower 4
digits.
Example for 12345678.9 kWh:
U4-10: 678.9 kWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh

U4-14 PeakHold Output Freq V/f OLV No signal output available

(07D0) Shows the output frequency at which the peak value (rms) of the drive output current is held.
The peak hold current can be monitored by U4-13 [Peak Hold Current].
The peak hold output frequency will be cleared at the next startup and restart of the power supply.
The drive keeps the value that was under hold during baseblock (during stop).
Unit: 0.01 Hz

U4-15 CASE SW Number V/f OLV No signal output available

(07E4) Shows the CASE Software number.

U4-16 Motor oL1 Level V/f OLV 10 V: 100%

(07D8) Shows the integrated value of oL1 [Motor Overload] as a percentage of oL1 detection level.
Unit: 0.1%

U4-17 Drive Overload V/f OLV 10 V: 100%

(07D9) Calculations (OL2) Shows the level of the drive overload detection (oL2). A value of 100% equals the oL2 detection
level.
Unit: 0.1%

U4-18 Reference Source V/f OLV No signal output available

(07DA) Shows the selected frequency reference source.
The keypad shows the frequency reference source as “XY-nn” as specified by these rules:
X: External Reference 1/2 Selection [H1-xx = 2] selection status
• 1: b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1]
• 2: b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2]
Y-nn: Frequency reference source
• 0-01: Keypad (d1-01 [Reference 1])
• 2-02 to 2-08: Multi-step speed reference (d1-02 to d1-08 [Reference 2 to 8, Jog Reference])
• 4-01: Communication option card

U4-21 Run Command Source V/f OLV No signal output The

(07DD) Shows the selected Run command source. keypad shows the Run
command source as "XY-
The keypad shows the Run command source as “XY-nn” as specified by these rules: nn" as specified by these
X: External Reference 1/2 Selection [H1-xx = 2] selection status rules: available
• 1: b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1]
Y: Run command source
• 0: Keypad
• 1: Control circuit terminal
• 4: Communication option card
nn: Run command limit status data
• 00: No limit status.
• 01: The Run command was left ON when the drive stopped in the Programming Mode.
• 02: The Run command was left ON when switching from LOCAL Mode to REMOTE Mode.
• 03: The Run command is in standby after the drive was energized until the soft charge bypass
contactor turns ON.
Note:
The drive will detect Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] or Uv [Undervoltage] if the soft charge
bypass contactor does not turn ON after 10 s.
• 04: Restart after run stop is prohibited.
• 05: Fast stop has been executed using the MFDI terminal. Or, the motor has ramped to stop by
pressing the STOP key on the keypad.
• 07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer.
• 08: Frequency reference is below E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] during baseblock.
• 09: Waiting for the Enter command from PLC.
Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 275

11.14 U: Monitors

◆ U6: Operation Status Monitors

No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)

U6-01 Iq Secondary Current V/f OLV 10 V: Motor secondary

(0051) Shows the value calculated for the motor secondary current (q-Axis) as a percentage of the motor rated current (0 V to +10 V)
rated secondary current.
Unit: 0.1%

U6-02 Id ExcitationCurrent V/f OLV 10 V: Motor secondary

(0052) Shows the value calculated for the motor excitation current (d-Axis) as a percentage of the motor rated current (0 V to +10 V)
rated secondary current.
Unit: 0.1%

U6-03 ASR Input V/f OLV 10 V: Maximum frequency

(0054) Shows the ASR input value as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%

U6-04 ASR Output V/f OLV 10 V: Motor secondary

(0055) Shows the ASR output value as a percentage of the motor rated secondary current. rated current (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%

U6-05 OutputVoltageRef: Vq V/f OLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200

(0059) Shows the drive internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control (q-Axis). Vrms
Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)

U6-06 OutputVoltageRef: Vd V/f OLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200

(005A) Shows the drive internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control (d-Axis). Vrms
Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)

U6-07 q-Axis ACR Output V/f OLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200

(005F) Shows the output value for current control related to motor secondary current (q axis). Vrms
Expert Unit: 0.1 % 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)

U6-08 d-Axis ACR Output V/f OLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200

(0060) Shows the output value for current control related to motor excitation current (d axis). Vrms
Expert Unit: 0.1 % 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)

276 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 11.15 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control Method Selection]

11.15 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with

A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
The values for the parameters in these tables depend on the values for parameter A1-02. When you change the
setting for A1-02, the default settings will change.
Table 11.1 A1-02 = 0, 2 [V/f, OLV]
Control Method
No. Name Range Unit V/f OLV
[A1-02 = 0] [A1-02 = 2]

C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 - 2.5 0.1 0.0 1.0

C3-02 Slip Compensation Delay Time 0 - 10000 1 ms 2000 200

C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection 0, 1 - - 0

C4-02 Torque Compensation Delay Time 0 - 10000 1 ms 200 20

E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage 0.0 - 510.0 0.1 V 15.0 *1 25.0

E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 1.5 *1 0.3

E1-10 Minimum Output Voltage 0.0 - 510.0 0.1 V 9.0 *1 5.0

S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop 0.0000 to 9.9999 0.001% 1.000 2.400

*1 The default setting changes when the drive model and E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] change.

Parameter List

11

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 277

11.16 Defaults by Drive Model

11.16 Defaults by Drive Model

The values for the parameters in these tables depend on the values for parameter o2-04. Changing the settings for
o2-04 will change the default settings.

◆ Three-Phase 200 V Class

Parameter Name Unit Default

- Drive Model - 2018 2025 2033 2047 2060 2075

o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 68 6A 6B 6D 6E 6F

E2-11 Motor Rated Power kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5

C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection - 3 3 3 3 3 3

E2-01 Motor Rated Current (FLA) A 14 19.6 26.6 39.7 53 65.8

E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.73 1.5 1.3 1.7 1.6 1.67

E2-03 Motor No-Load Current A 4.5 5.1 8 11.2 15.2 15.7

E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.23 0.138 0.101

E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance % 19.6 18.2 15.5 19.5 17.2 20.1

E2-10 Motor Iron Loss W 112 172 262 245 272 505

L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl - 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)

L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 115 105 115 125 120 135

Output Ground Fault

L8-09 - 0 1 1 1 1 1
Detection

L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction - 1 2 2 2 2 2

T1-02 Motor Rated Power kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5

T1-04 Motor Rated Current A 14 19.6 26.6 39.7 53 65.8

◆ Three-Phase 400 V Class

Parameter Name Unit Default

- Drive Model - 4009 4015 4018 4024 4031 4039 4060

o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

E2-11 Motor Rated Power kW 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22

C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

E2-01 Motor Rated Current (FLA) A 7 9.8 13.3 19.9 26.5 32.9 38.6

E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.7 1.5 1.3 1.7 1.6 1.67 1.7

E2-03 Motor No-Load Current A 2.3 2.6 4 5.6 7.6 7.8 9.2

E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.55 0.403 0.316

E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance % 19.3 18.2 15.5 19.6 17.2 20.1 23.5

E2-10 Motor Iron Loss W 130 193 263 385 440 508 586

Undervoltage Detection Lvl

L2-05 - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)

L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 110 120 120 120 120 125 115

Output Ground Fault

L8-09 - 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Detection

L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction - 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

T1-02 Motor Rated Power kW 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22

T1-04 Motor Rated Current A 7 9.8 13.3 19.9 26.5 32.9 38.6

278 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12
Parameter Details
12.1 A: Initialization Parameters..................................................................................280
12.2 b: Application ..........................................................................................................284
12.3 C: Tuning ..................................................................................................................288
12.4 d: References ..........................................................................................................296
12.5 E: Motor Parameters..............................................................................................299
12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection ..........................................................................304
12.7 L: Protection Functions ........................................................................................327
12.8 n: Special Adjustment ...........................................................................................345
12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings .................................................................................347
12.10 S: Elevator Parameters .........................................................................................363
12.11 T: Auto-Tuning.........................................................................................................367

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 279

12.1 A: Initialization Parameters

12.1 A: Initialization Parameters

A parameters [Initialization Parameters] set the operating environment and operating conditions for the drive.

◆ A1: Initialization
A1 parameters set the operating environment and operating conditions for the drive. For example, these
parameters set the keypad language, the control method, and the parameter access level for the drive.

■ A1-00: Language Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-00 Language Selection V/f OLV 0

(0100) Sets the language for the LCD keypad. (0 - 12)
RUN

Note:
• This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad or a Bluetooth LCD Keypad.
• When you use A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, the drive will not reset this parameter.
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Italian
5 : Spanish
6 : Portuguese
7 : Chinese
8 : Czech
9 : Russian
10 : Turkish
11 : Polish
12 : Greek

■ A1-01: Access Level Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-01 Access Level Selection V/f OLV 2

(0101) Sets user access to parameters. The access level controls which parameters the keypad will (0 - 3)
RUN display, and which parameters the user can set.

0 : Operation Only
Access to A1-00, A1-01, A1-04 [Password], and the U Monitors.
1 : User Parameters
Access to A1-00, A1-01, A1-04, and A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameters 1 to 32].
2 : Advanced Level
Access to all parameters, but not Expert Mode parameters.
3 : Expert Level
Access to all parameters including Expert Mode parameters.
Table 12.1 shows which keypad screens are available for each A1-01 settings.

280 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.1 A: Initialization Parameters

Table 12.1 Access Level and Available Keypad Screens

A1-01 [Access Level Selection] Setting
Mode Keypad Screen
0 1 2 3

Drive Mode Monitors Yes Yes Yes Yes

Parameters Yes Yes Yes Yes

User Custom Parameters No Yes Yes Yes

Parameter Backup/Restore No No Yes Yes

Modified Parameters/Fault
Programming Mode Log No No Yes Yes

Auto-Tuning No No Yes Yes

Initial Setup Screen No No Yes Yes

Diagnostic Tools No No Yes Yes

Note:
• When you use A1-04 and A1-05 [Password Setting] to set a password, you cannot change the values set in A1-01 to A1-03, A1-07,or
A2-01 to A2-32.
• When H1-xx = 1B [MFDI Function Select = Program Lockout], you must activate the terminal to change parameter settings.
• When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, you must send the Enter command from the controller to the drive and complete
the serial communication write process before you can use the keypad to change parameter settings.

■ A1-02: Control Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-02 Control Method Selection V/f OLV 0

(0102) Sets the control method for the drive application and the motor. (0, 2)

Note:
When you change the control methods, the parameter values specified by A1-02 are changed to their default values.
Sets the control method for the drive application and the motor.
0 : V/f Control
Use this control method in these applications and conditions:
• For general variable-speed control applications in which a high level of responsiveness or high-precision speed
control is not necessary.
• Applications in which more than one motor are connected to one drive
• When there is not sufficient data to set the motor parameters
• When it is not possible to do Auto-Tuning. The speed control range is 1:40.
2 : Open Loop Vector
Use this control method for general variable-speed control applications in which high-precision speed control is
necessary. In this control method, a feedback signal from the motor is not necessary to have high torque response
and high torque when operating at low speeds. The speed control range is 1:120.

■ A1-03: Initialize Parameters

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-03 Initialize Parameters V/f OLV 0

(0103) Sets parameters to default values. (0 - 2220)

Note:
• After you initialize the drive, the drive automatically sets A1-03 = 0.
• User Parameters can save the parameter values for your application and use these values as default values for drive initialization.
0 : No Initialization
Parameter Details

1110 : User Initialization

Sets parameters to the values set by the user as user settings. Set o2-03 = 1 [User Parameter Default Value = Set
defaults] to save the user settings.
You can save the parameter settings that were adjusted for the test run as user-set default values to the drive.
When you make changes to the parameter values after you save the settings as User Parameter Settings, the drive
will set the parameters to the User Parameter Setting value when you initialize with A1-03 = 1110. 12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 281

12.1 A: Initialization Parameters

Follow this procedure to save User Parameter setting values, and to do a User Initialization.
1. Set parameters correctly for the application.
2. Set o2-03 = 1 [User Parameter Default Value = Set defaults].
This saves parameter settings for a User Initialization.
The drive will then automatically set o2-03 = 0.
3. Set A1-03 = 1110 to reset to the saved parameter settings.
When you initialize the drive, the drive sets the parameter values to the User Parameter setting values.
2220 : 2-Wire Initialization
Sets MFDI terminal S1 to Forward Run and terminal S2 to Reverse Run, and resets all parameters to default
settings.

■ A1-04: Password
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-04 Password V/f OLV 0000

(0104) Entry point for the password set in A1-05 [Password Setting]. The user can view the settings of (0000 - 9999)
parameters that are locked without entering the password. Enter the correct password in this
parameter to change parameter settings.

If the password entered in A1-04 does not agree with the password setting in A1-05, you cannot change these
parameters:
• A1-01 [Access Level Selection]
• A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
• A1-03 [Initialize Parameters]
• A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to 32]
To lock parameter settings after making changes without changing the password, enter the incorrect password in
A1-04 and push .
Enter the Password to Unlock Parameters
Use this procedure to unlock parameter settings.
Set the password in A1-05 [Password Setting], and show the Parameter Setting Mode screen on the keypad.
This procedure verifies the password, and makes sure that the parameter settings are unlocked.
1. Push or to select “A: Initialization Parameters”, then push .
2. Push or to select [A1-04], then push .
You can now change parameter settings.
3. Push or to move the digit and enter the password.
4. Push to confirm the password.
The drive unlocks the parameters and automatically shows the Parameters Screen.
5. Push or to show [A1-02], then push .
The keypad shows the setting value for [A1-02].
6. Push or to make sure that you can change the setting value.

Push (Back) until the keypad shows the Parameter Setup Mode screen.

■ A1-05: Password Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A1-05 Password Setting V/f OLV 0000

(0105) Set the password to lock parameters and prevent changes to parameter settings. Enter the correct (0000 - 9999)
password in A1-04 [Password] to unlock parameters and accept changes.

This parameter can lock these parameter settings:

• A1-01 [Access Level Selection]
• A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
• A1-03 [Initialize Parameters]
• A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to 32]

282 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.1 A: Initialization Parameters

Note:
• Usually, the keypad will not show A1-05. To show and set A1-05, show A1-04 [Password] and then push and on the keypad
at the same time.
• After you set A1-05, the keypad will not show it again until you enter the correct password in A1-04. Make sure that you remember the
A1-05 setting value. If you do not know the A1-05 setting value, contact the manufacturer or your nearest sales representative.
• When A1-03 = 2220 [2-Wire Initialization], the drive is initialized to A1-05 = 0000. Be sure to set the password again when a
password is necessary for the application.
• Change the setting value in A1-05 to change the password. The new setting value becomes the new password.
• When you use the password to unlock and change a parameter, enter a value other than the password in A1-04 to lock the parameter
again with the same password.

◆ A2: User Parameters

You can register frequently used parameters and recently changed parameters here to access them quickly. Use
Setup Mode to show the saved parameters.

■ A2-01 to A2-32: User Parameters 1 to 32

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A2-01 to A2-32 User Parameters 1 to 32 V/f OLV Parameters in General-

(0106 - 0125) You can select a maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and save the values to parameters A2-01 Purpose Setup Mode
to A2-32. Use Setup Mode to show the saved parameters. You can immediately access these saved
parameters.

Note:
• You must set A1-01 = 1 [Access Level Selection = User Parameters] to access parameters A2-01 to A2-32.
The drive saves these parameters to A2-01 to A2-32.
• The drive saves a maximum of 32 parameters.
Note:
Set A1-01 = 2 [Advanced Level] or A1-01 = 3 [Expert Level] to save the necessary parameters.
• The drive automatically saves changed parameters to A2-17 to A2-32.
Note:
Set A2-33 = 1 [User Parameter Auto Selection = Enabled].

■ A2-33: User Parameter Auto Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

A2-33 User Parameter Auto V/f OLV Determined by A1-06

(0126) Selection Sets the automatic save feature for changes to parameters A2-17 to A2-32 [User Parameters 17 to (0, 1)
32].

0 : Disabled: Manual Entry Required

Set User Parameters manually.
1 : Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms
The drive automatically registers changed parameter A2-17 to A2-32. The drive automatically saves the most
recently changed parameter to A2-17, and saves a maximum of 16 parameters. After the drive registers 16
parameters, when you save a new parameter, the drive will remove a parameter from the User Parameter list to
make space for the new parameter. The drive removes parameters with First In, First Out.
Use Setup Mode to show the saved parameters.
Note:
In General-Purpose Setup Mode, the drive saves parameters starting with A2-27 because the drive saves parameters A2-26 and lower by
default.
Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 283

12.2 b: Application

12.2 b: Application
b parameters set these functions:
• Frequency reference source/Run command source
• Stopping method settings
• Timer Function
• Dwell function
• Energy-Saving Control

◆ b1: Operation Mode Selection

b1 parameters set the operation mode for the drive.

■ b1-02: Up/Down Command Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 V/f OLV 1

(0181) Sets the Up/Down command source in Remote mode. Wire the motor so the elevator goes up (0 - 1)
when an Up command is issued.

0 : Keypad
Use the keypad to enter the Up/Down command. Use this setting only when performing a test tun.
Note:
The on the keypad is on while keypad is the Up/Down command source.
1 : Control Circuit Terminal
Use the control circuit terminals to enter Up/Down commands.

■ b1-03: Stopping Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b1-03 Stopping Method Selection V/f OLV 0

(0182) Sets the method to stop the motor after removing a Run command or entering a Stop command. (0 - 1)

Select the applicable stopping method for the application from these options:
0 : Ramp to Stop
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive ramps the motor to stop.
The drive ramps the motor to stop as specified by the deceleration time. The default setting for the deceleration
time is C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1]. The actual deceleration time changes as the load conditions change (for
example, mechanical loss and inertia).
1 : Coast to Stop
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive turns OFF the output and coasts the
motor to stop.
Load conditions will have an effect on the deceleration rate as the motor coasts to stop (for example, mechanical
loss and inertia).

■ b1-08: Up/Down Command Select in PRG Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b1-08 Run Command Select in V/f OLV 1

(0187) PRG Mode Sets the conditions for the drive to accept an Up/Down command entered from an external source (0 - 1)
when using the keypad to set parameters.

As a safety precaution, when the drive is in Programming Mode, it will not respond to a Up/Down command.
This parameter helps prevent accidents that can occur if the motor starts to rotate because the drive received a Up/
Down command from an external source while the user is programming the drive. You can also set the drive to
not show the Programming Mode when a Up/Down command is active.

284 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.2 b: Application

Note:
Refer to this table for Drive Mode and Programming Mode functions.

Mode Keypad Screen Function

Drive Mode Monitors Sets monitor display.

Parameters Changes parameter settings.

User Custom Parameters Shows the User Parameters.

Parameter Backup/Restore Saves parameters to the keypad as backup.

Programming Mode Modified Parameters/Fault Log Shows modified parameters and fault history.

Auto-Tuning Auto-Tunes the drive.

Initial Setup Changes initial settings.

Diagnostic Tools Sets data logs and backlight.

0 : Disregard RUN while Programming

The drive does not accept the Up/Down command when setting the parameters in the Programming Mode.
1 : Accept RUN while Programming
The drive accepts a Up/Down command entered from an external source when setting the parameters in
Programming Mode.

■ b1-14: Phase Order Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b1-14 Phase Order Selection V/f OLV 0

(01C3) Sets the phase order for output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This parameter can align the (0, 1)
Forward Run command from the drive and the forward direction of the motor without changing
wiring.

0 : Standard
1 : Switch Phase Order

◆ b4: Timer Function

The drive uses timers to delay activating and deactivating MFDO terminals.
Timers prevent sensors and switches from making chattering noise.
There are two types of timers:
• Timers that set a delay for timer inputs and timer outputs.
These timers delay activating and deactivating of the MFDIs and MFDOs.
To enable this function, set H1-xx = 18 [MFDI Function Selection = Timer Function], and set H2-01 to H2-03
= 12 [MFDO Function Selection = Timer Output].
• Timers that set a delay to activate and deactivate MFDO terminals.
These timers delay activating and deactivating MFDO terminals.
To enable this function, set delay times in parameters b4-03 to b4-08.

■ Timer Function Operation

• Timers that Set a Delay for Timer Inputs and Timer Outputs
Triggers timer output if the timer input is active for longer than the time set in b4-01 [Timer Function ON-Delay
Time]. Triggers timer output late for the time set in b4-02 [Timer Function OFF-Delay Time]. Figure 12.1
shows an example of how the timer function works.
Parameter Details

Figure 12.1 Example of Timer Function Operation

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 285

12.2 b: Application

■ b4-01: Timer Function ON-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b4-01 Timer Function ON-Delay V/f OLV 0.0 s

(01A3) Time Sets the ON-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)

■ b4-02: Timer Function OFF-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b4-02 Timer Function OFF-Delay V/f OLV 0.0 s

(01A4) Time Sets the OFF-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)

◆ b6: Dwell Function

The Dwell function momentarily holds the output frequency at start and stop.
This prevents motor speed loss when you start and stop heavy loads. The Dwell function is also enabled when
backlash on the machine side causes sudden movement at the start of acceleration and deceleration.
At the start of acceleration, the drive uses the output frequency and acceleration time set for the Dwell function to
automatically operate at low speed to minimize the effects of backlash. Then, the drive can accelerate again. The
Dwell function operates the same for deceleration.
For conveyor applications, the Dwell function also lets the drive interlock the output frequency and a delay time
for the holding brake on the load side.
The Dwell function momentarily stops during acceleration to prevent a PM motor from stepping out. Figure 12.2
shows how the Dwell function works.
Note:
When you use the Dwell function at stop, set b1-03 = 0 [Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to Stop].

Figure 12.2 Time Chart for the Dwell Function at Start/Stop

■ b6-01: Dwell Reference at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start V/f OLV 0.0

(01B6) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when the motor starts. (Determined by A1-02)
Expert

When the drive accelerates to the output frequency set in b6-01, it holds that frequency for the time set in b6-02
[Dwell Time at Start], and starts to accelerate again.

■ b6-02: Dwell Time at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b6-02 Dwell Time at Start V/f OLV 0.0 s

(01B7) Sets the length of time that the drive will hold the output frequency when the motor starts. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert

286 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.2 b: Application

■ b6-03: Dwell Reference at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop V/f OLV 0.0

(01B8) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when ramping to stop the motor. (Determined by A1-02)
Expert

When the drive decelerates to the output frequency set in b6-03, it holds that frequency for the time set in b6-04
[Dwell Time at Stop] and starts to decelerate again.

■ b6-04: Dwell Time at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop V/f OLV 0.0 s

(01B9) Sets the length of time for the drive to hold the output frequency when ramping to stop the motor. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert

Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 287

12.3 C: Tuning

12.3 C: Tuning
C parameters adjust drive operation, including:
• Acceleration Time
• Deceleration Time
• Slip Compensation
• Torque Compensation
• Carrier Frequency

◆ C1: Accel & Decel Speed

You can set four different acceleration and deceleration time pairs in the drive. When you activate and deactivate
H1-xx = 7, 1A [MFDI Function Select = Accel/Decel Ramp Selection 1, Accel/Decel Time Selection 2], you can
switch acceleration and deceleration times during run.
Acceleration time parameters always set the time to accelerate from 0 Hz to E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency].
Deceleration time parameters always set the time to decelerate from E1-04 to 0 Hz.
C1-01 [Acceleration Ramp 1] and C1-02 [Deceleration Ramp 1] are the default active accel/decel settings.

■ Use MFDIs to Switch Acceleration Ramps

Table 12.2 shows the different acceleration and deceleration times.
Table 12.2 Accel/Decel Ramps and Active Parameters
H1-xx = 7 H1-xx = 1A Active Parameter
[Accel/Decel Ramp Selection [Accel/Decel Ramp Selection
1] 2] Acceleration Time Deceleration Time

OFF OFF C1-01 [Acceleration Ramp 1] C1-02 [Deceleration Ramp 1]

ON OFF C1-03 [Acceleration Ramp 2] C1-04 [Deceleration Ramp 2]

OFF ON C1-05 [Acceleration Ramp 3] C1-06 [Deceleration Ramp 3]

ON ON C1-07 [Acceleration Ramp 4] C1-08 [Deceleration Ramp 4]

Figure 12.3 shows an operation example to change acceleration and deceleration times. It is necessary to set b1-03
= 0 [Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to Stop] for this example.

Figure 12.3 Timing Diagram of Acceleration and Deceleration Times

■ Use Output Speed Level to Switch Acceleration and Deceleration Times

The drive can use output Speed to automatically switch between different acceleration and deceleration times.
When the output Speed = C1-11 [Accel/Decel Time Switching Speed], the drive automatically switches the
acceleration and deceleration times. Set C1-11 = 0.0% to disable this function.
Note:
• Acceleration and deceleration times set to MFDIs are more important than the automatic switch using the speed level set in C1-11. For
example, if you set the switchover speed to C1-11, the drive will not automatically switch acceleration and deceleration times when the
MFDI terminal set for Accel/Decel Speed Selection 1 [H1-xx = 7] is activated.

288 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.3 C: Tuning

Figure 12.4 Accel/Decel Time Switching Speed

■ C1-01: Acceleration Ramp 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-01 Acceleration Ramp 1 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0200) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-02: Deceleration Ramp 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-02 Deceleration Ramp 1 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0201) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-03: Acceleration Ramp 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-03 Acceleration Ramp 2 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0202) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-04: Deceleration Ramp 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-04 Deceleration Ramp 2 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0203) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-05: Acceleration Ramp 3

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-05 Acceleration Ramp 3 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0204) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-06: Deceleration Ramp 3

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-06 Deceleration Ramp 3 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0205) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN
Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 289

12.3 C: Tuning

■ C1-07: Acceleration Ramp 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-07 Acceleration Ramp 4 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0206) Sets the ramp to accelerate from zero to maximum output speed. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-08: Deceleration Ramp 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-08 Deceleration Ramp 4 V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0207) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum output speed to zero. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

■ C1-09: Fast Stop Ramp

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-09 Fast Stop Ramp V/f OLV 1.50 s

(0208) Sets the ramp that the drive will decelerate to zero for Emergency Stop. (0.00 - 600.00 s)
RUN

The Emergency Stop function will be triggered in the following circumstances.

• The Emergency Stop operation will be triggered by the input of the Emergency Stop command via the multi-
function digital input terminal.
• The Emergency Stop operation is will be triggered when by the input of the Fast Stop command is input via the
multi-function digital input terminal.
Set H1-xx = 15, 17 [MFDI Function Select = Fast Stop (N.O.), Fast Stop (N.C.)].
When the Emergency Stop command is input, the Emergency Stop operation will be triggered at the deceleration
time set to C1-09. The drive cannot be restarted after initiating a Emergency Stop operation until deceleration is
complete. Complete deceleration and cycle the Run command to clear the Emergency Stop input.
The terminal set for H2-xx = 4C [MFDO Function Select = During Fast Stop] will be ON during Emergency
Stop.
Note:
Decelerating too quickly can cause an ov [Overvoltage] fault that shuts off the drive while the motor to coasts to a stop. Set a
Emergency Stop time in C1-09 that prevents motor coasting and makes sure that the motor stops quickly and safely.

■ C1-10: Accel/Decel Time Setting Units

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting V/f OLV 0

(0209) Units Sets the setting units for C1-01 to C1-08 [Accel/Decel Times 1 to 4], C1-09 [Fast Stop Time], L2- (0, 1)
06 [Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time], and L2-07 [Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Time].

0 : 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)

Sets acceleration and deceleration times in 0.01 s units. The setting range is 0.0 to 6000.0 s.
If one of these parameters is set to 1000.0 s or longer, you cannot set C1-10 = 0:
• C1-01 to C1-09, and C1-15
When one of those parameters is set to a value between 600.1 s and 1000.0 s, you can set C1-10 = 0, but the time
will change to 600.00 s.
1 : 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)
Sets acceleration and deceleration times in 0.1 s units. The setting range is 0.0 to 6000.0 s.

■ C1-11: Accel/Decel Switching Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching V/f OLV 0.0%

(020A) Speed Sets the speed at which the drive will automatically change acceleration and deceleration times. (0.0 - 100.0%)

290 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.3 C: Tuning

When the output speed is at the C1-11 value, the drive automatically switches the acceleration and deceleration
times. Set this parameter to 0.0% to disable this function.

■ C1-15: Inspect Dec Ramp

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C1-15 Inspect Dec Ramp V/f OLV 0.00 s

(0260) Sets the deceleration ramp used for inspection run. (0.00 - 2.00 s)

◆ C2: Jerk Characteristics

Use Jerk characteristics to smooth acceleration and deceleration and to minimize abrupt shock to the load.
Set Jerk characteristic time during acceleration/deceleration at start and acceleration/deceleration at stop.
The following figure explains how Jerk are applied.

Figure 12.5 Jerk Timing Diagram - Forward/Reverse Operation

When o1-03 is set to between 0 and 4, the jerk settings are expressed in seconds. Then the actual accel/decel time
including jerk settings can be calculated as follows:
• Actual accel ramp = accel ramp setting + (C2-01 + C2-02) / 2
• Actual decel ramp = decel ramp setting + (C2-03 + C2-04) / 2

■ C2-01: Jerk at Accel Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start V/f OLV 0.50 s

(020B) Sets the jerks acceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

■ C2-02: Jerk at Accel End

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C2-02 Jerk at Accel End V/f OLV 0.50 s

(020C) Sets the jerk acceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

■ C2-03: Jerk at Decel Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start V/f OLV 0.50 s

(020D) Sets the jerk deceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

■ C2-04: Jerk at Decel End

Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C2-04 Jerk at Decel End V/f OLV 0.50 s

(020E) Sets the jerk deceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 291

12.3 C: Tuning

■ C2-05: Jerk below Leveling Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C2-05 Jerk below Leveling Speed V/f OLV 0.50 s

(020F) Sets the jerk deceleration time below leveling speed. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

◆ C3: Slip Compensation

The Slip Compensation function improves the speed accuracy of an induction motor. As loads on induction
motors increase, motor slip increases and motor speed decreases. By adjusting the output frequency in accordance
with the motor load, it compensates the slip and makes the motor speed equal to the frequency reference.

■ C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain V/f OLV 1.0

(020F) Sets the gain for the slip compensation function. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.0 - 2.5)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Correctly set these parameters before changing the slip compensation gain:
• E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
• E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip]
• E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]
Adjust this parameter as follows if necessary:
• If the motor speed is slower than the speed reference, increase this parameter in 0.1-unit increments.
• If the motor speed is slower than the speed reference value, decrease this parameter value in 0.1-unit
increments.

■ C3-02: Slip Compensation Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C3-02 Slip Compensation Delay V/f OLV 2000 ms

(0210) Time Sets the slip compensation delay time when speed is unstable or when the slip compensation (0 - 10000 ms)
RUN response is too slow. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Expert

Use these settings to adjust this parameter as necessary:

• When the speed is not stable, increase the setting.
• When the slip compensation response is too slow, decrease the setting.

■ C3-03: Slip Compensation Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit V/f OLV 200%

(0211) Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor rated slip. (0 - 250%)
Expert

If you increase the value of C3-01 [Slip Compensation Gain] and the motor speed is slow, use this parameter. The
drive uses this parameter when the slip is at the upper limit of slip compensation. Make sure that you measure the
motor speed when you increase this parameter value. Set this parameter to make the frequency reference and the
slip compensation limit less than the permitted range of the machine.
The slip compensation limit is constant in the constant torque range (frequency reference ≤ E1-06 [Base
Frequency]). In the constant output range where the frequency reference > E1-06, the slip compensation limit
increases with the C3-03 value and the output frequency as shown in Figure 12.6.

292 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.3 C: Tuning

Figure 12.6 Slip Compensation Limit

■ C3-04: Slip Compensation at Regen

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C3-04 Slip Compensation at V/f OLV 0

(0212) Regen Sets the slip compensation function during regenerative operation. (0 - 1)
Expert

If you apply a regenerative load when slip compensation function during regeneration is active, the quantity of
regeneration can increase immediately. In this condition, it is necessary to use a dynamic braking option (braking
resistor or braking resistor unit).
0 : Disabled
The drive does not provide slip compensation during regeneration.
The load and operation status (regenerative operation) can cause the motor speed to be higher or lower than the
frequency reference.
1 : Enabled Above 6Hz
Slip compensation function is enabled during regeneration. Slip compensation is disabled at output frequencies of
6 Hz or less.

■ C3-05: Output Voltage Limit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C3-05 Output Voltage Limit V/f OLV 0

(0213) Selection Sets the automatic reduction of motor magnetic flux when the output voltage is saturated. (0, 1)
Expert

The drive will decrease flux and increase current to compensate torque when voltage is saturated. Make sure that
the drive has sufficient output current capacity before you enable this parameter. When this parameter = 1
[Enabled], the output current will increase by 10% at a maximum (at rated load) before it is enabled.
Enable this parameter to increase speed precision when you move heavy loads at high speeds in these conditions:
• Power supply voltage is low
• Motor rated voltage is high
Do not enable this parameter in these conditions:
• Operating a motor in the middle speed range or low speed range
• Power supply voltage is a minimum of 10% more than the motor rated voltage
When you enable this parameter, if the power supply voltage is much less than the motor rated voltage, torque
control will not be accurate.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

◆ C4: Torque Compensation

Parameter Details

Torque compensation is a function that increases voltage to increase output torque as compensation for
insufficient torque production at start-up or low-speed operation.
Voltage drops due to motor winding resistance cause torque generating voltage to decrease, which causes
insufficient torque. If the main circuit cable connecting the drive and motor is long, this can also cause insufficient
torque due to voltage drops. 12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 293

12.3 C: Tuning

Note:
Set the motor parameters and V/f pattern properly before setting C4 parameters.

■ C4-01: Torque Compensation Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain V/f OLV 1.00

(0215) Sets the gain for the torque compensation function. (0.00 - 2.50)
RUN

For these control methods and states, adjust the setting value.
A1-02 [Control Method Selection] Status Adjustment

Torque is not sufficient during low-speed operation of 10 Hz or less. Increase the setting in 0.05-unit increments.
0 [V/f Control] There is vibration in the motor or the motor hunts when operating the
Decrease the setting in 0.05-unit decrements.
2 [Open Loop Vector] drive with a light load.

The cable length between the drive and motor is too long. Increase the setting in 0.05-unit increments.

Note:
• Adjust C4-01 to make sure that output current is not more than the drive rated current while the drive operates at low speed.
• When A1-02 = 2 [Open Loop Vector], do not change this parameter under normal conditions. Torque accuracy will decrease.

■ C4-02: Torque Compensation Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C4-02 Torque Compensation V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0216) Delay Time Sets the torque compensation delay time. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 60000 ms)
RUN

Set this parameter in these conditions:

• If there is vibration in the motor, increase the setting.
• If the motor speed or motor torque response is too slow, decrease the setting.

■ C4-03: Torque Compensation @ FWD Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C4-03 Torque Compensation @ V/f OLV 0.0%

(0217) FWD Start Set the amount of torque reference for forward start as a percentage of the motor rated torque. (0.0 - 200.0%)
Expert

The torque compensation function is performed using the time constant set in C4-05 [Torque Compensation
Time].
This is available only when you start the motor with the forward Up/Down command. Set this parameter to 0.0 to
disable this function.

■ C4-04: Torque Compensation @ REV Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C4-04 Torque Compensation @ V/f OLV 0.0%

(0218) REV Start Sets the amount of torque reference for reverse start as a percentage of the motor rated torque. (-200.0 - 0.0%)
Expert

The torque compensation function is performed using the time constant set in C4-05 [Torque Compensation
Time].
This is available only when you start the motor with the reverse Up/Down command. Set this parameter to 0.0 to
disable this function.

294 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.3 C: Tuning

■ C4-05: Torque Compensation Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C4-05 Torque Compensation Time V/f OLV 10 ms

(0219) Sets the starting torque constant to use with C4-03 and C4-04 [Torque Compensation @ FWD/ (0 - 200 ms)
Expert REV Start].

◆ C6: Carrier Frequency

C6 parameters are used to set the selection of carrier frequency.

■ C6-02: Carrier Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection V/f OLV 3

(0224) Sets the carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive. (1 - 6)

Changes to the switching frequency will decrease audible noise and decrease leakage current.
Note:
Increasing the carrier frequency to more than the default setting will automatically decrease the drive current rating.
1 : 2.0 kHz
2 : 5.0 kHz
3 : 8.0 kHz
4 : 10.0 kHz
5 : 12.5 kHz
6 : 15.0 kHz

Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 295

12.4 d: References

12.4 d: References
d parameters [References] set the frequency reference input method and dead band range. They also set torque
control, field weakening, and field forcing functions.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Use fast stop circuits to safely and quickly stop the drive. After you wire the fast stop
circuits, you must check their operation. Test the operation of the fast stop function before you use the drive. If you do not test
the fast stop circuit before you operate the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. You must install external safety circuitry. The drive does not have protection against
accidental load drops. Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms that are isolated from the drive circuitry. If
you do not use external safety circuitry, the drive could drop the load and cause serious injury or death.

◆ d1: Speed Reference

■ d1-01: Speed Reference 1
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-01 Speed Reference 1 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0280) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-02: Speed Reference 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-02 Speed Reference 2 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0281) Sets the speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-03: Speed Reference 3

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-03 Speed Reference 3 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0282) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-04: Speed Reference 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-04 Speed Reference 4 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0283) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-05: Speed Reference 5

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-05 Speed Reference 5 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0284) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-06: Speed Reference 6

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-06 Speed Reference 6 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0285) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

296 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.4 d: References

■ d1-07: Speed Reference 7

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-07 Speed Reference 7 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0286) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-08: Speed Reference 8

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-08 Speed Reference 8 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(0287) Sets the Speed reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-18: Spd Ref Sel Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-18 Spd Ref Sel Mode V/f OLV 1

(02C0) Sets the priority of the speed reference digital inputs. (0 - 2)

0 : Use Multi-Speed references d1-01 to d1-08

Up to eight separate preset speed references can be programmed to the drive using parameters d1-01 through d1-
08 and can be selected using binary coded digital inputs. When d1-18 = 0, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 are
not displayed.
1 : High speed reference has priority
Six different speeds (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) can be programmed to the drive and can be selected using dedicated
digital inputs. Each of the speed references set to d1-19 through d1-23 takes priority over the leveling speed set to
d1-26. When d1-18 = 1, parameter d1-01 to d1-08 are not displayed.
2 : Leveling speed reference has priority
Six different speeds (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) can be programmed to the drive and can be selected using dedicated
digital inputs. The leveling speed reference in d1-26, however, takes priority over all other speed references when
enabled via one of the multi-function input terminals [H1-xx = 53]. When d1-18 = 2, parameters d1-01 to d1-08
are not displayed.

■ d1-19: Nominal Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-19 Nominal Speed V/f OLV 50.00 Hz

(02C1) Sets the speed reference when multi-function input “Nominal Speed” is on. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-20: Intermed Speed 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-20 Intermed Speed 1 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(02C2) Sets the speed reference when intermediate speed 1 is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-21: Intermed Speed 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details

d1-21 Intermed Speed 2 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(02C3) Sets the speed reference when intermediate speed 2 is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 297

12.4 d: References

■ d1-22: Intermed Speed 3

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-22 Intermed Speed 3 V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(02C4) Sets the speed reference when intermediate speed 3 is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-23: Releveling Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-23 Releveling Speed V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(02C5) Sets the speed reference when releveling speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-24: Inspect Oper Spd

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-24 Inspect Oper Spd V/f OLV 30.00 Hz

(02C6) Sets the speed reference when inspection speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-25: Rescue Oper Spd

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-25 Rescue Oper Spd V/f OLV 5.00 Hz

(02C7) Sets the speed reference when rescue speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 15.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-26: Leveling Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-26 Leveling Speed V/f OLV 4.00 Hz

(02C8) Sets the speed reference when leveling speed is selected by digital inputs. (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
RUN

■ d1-28: Nom/Lev Spd Det

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-28 Nom/Lev Spd Det V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(02CA) Sets the speed reference level to detect that leveling speed has been selected when multi speed (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
input commands are used.

■ d1-29: Inspect Spd Det

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

d1-29 Inspect Spd Det V/f OLV 0.00 Hz

(02CB) Sets the speed reference level to detect that inspection speed has been selected when multi speed (0.00 - 120.00 Hz)
input commands are used.

298 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.5 E: Motor Parameters

12.5 E: Motor Parameters

E parameters cover drive input voltage, V/f pattern, and motor parameters.

◆ E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1

E1 parameters set the drive input voltage and motor V/f characteristics. To switch drive operation from one motor
to another motor, set the V/f characteristics for motor 1.

■ E1-01: Input AC Supply Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-01 Input AC Supply Voltage V/f OLV 400 V: 400 V

(0300) Sets the drive input voltage. (400 V Class: 310 - 510 V)

NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Set E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] to align with the drive input voltage (not motor voltage). If
this parameter is incorrect, the protective functions of the drive will not operate correctly and it can cause damage to the drive.
Values Related to the Drive Input Voltage
The value set in E1-01 is the base value that the drive uses for the motor protective functions in Table 12.3. With a
400 V class drive, the detection level changes for some motor protective functions.
Table 12.3 Values Related to the Drive Input Voltage
Approximate Values

Voltage E1-01 Setting L2-05

BTR Operation Level
ov Detection Level [Undervoltage Detection Lvl
(rr Detection Level) *1
(Uv1)]

Setting value ≥ 400 V 820 V 788 V 380 V

400 V class
Setting value < 400 V 820 V 788 V 350 V

*1 This is the protection function enabled in drives with built-in braking transistors. These values show the level that will trigger the
built-in braking transistor. Refer to “YASKAWA AC Drive 72060001 Series Option Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
Installation Manual (TOBPC72060001)” for more information.

■ E1-04: Maximum Output Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-04 Maximum Output V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0303) Frequency Sets the maximum output frequency for the V/f pattern. (10.0 - 120.0 Hz)

■ E1-05: Maximum Output Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage V/f OLV 400 V Class: 380.0 V

(0304) Sets the maximum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)

■ E1-06: Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-06 Base Frequency V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0305) Sets the base frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

■ E1-07: Middle Output Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
Parameter Details

(Hex.) (Range)

E1-07 Middle Output Frequency V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0306) Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 299

12.5 E: Motor Parameters

■ E1-08: Middle Output Frequency Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-08 Middle Output Frequency V/f OLV Determined by A1-02 and

(0307) Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the V/f pattern. o2-04
(400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)

Note:
Default setting is determined by A1-02 [Control Method Selection], and o2-04 [Drive Model Selection].

■ E1-09: Minimum Output Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-09 Minimum Output V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0308) Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

■ E1-10: Minimum Output Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-10 Minimum Output Voltage V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0309) Sets the minimum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)

■ E1-11: Middle Output Frequency 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 V/f OLV 0.0 Hz

(030A) Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Expert

Note:
Set this parameter to 0.0 Hz to disable the function.

■ E1-12: Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-12 Middle Output Frequency V/f OLV 0.0 V

(030B) Voltage 2 Sets a middle point voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
Expert V)

Note:
Set this parameter to 0.0 V to disable the function.

■ E1-13: Base Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E1-13 Base Voltage V/f OLV 0.0 V

(030C) Sets the base voltage for the V/f pattern. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
Expert V)

Note:
• After Auto-Tuning, the value of E1-13 = E1-05 [Maximum Output Voltage].
• When E1-13 = 0.0, use the value of E1-05 to control the voltage.

◆ E2: Motor Parameters

E2 parameters [Motor Parameters] are used to set induction motor data. To switch drive operation from one
motor to another motor, configure the first motor (motor 1).
If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed, set the E2 parameters manually. Performing Auto-Tuning automatically sets
the E2 parameters to the optimal values.

300 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.5 E: Motor Parameters

■ E2-01: Motor Rated Current (FLA)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-01 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(030E) Sets the motor rated current in amps. (10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)

Note:
• If E2-01 < E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current], the drive will detect oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error].
• When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
–0.01 A: 4009
–0.1 A: 4015 to 4045
The value set for E2-01 becomes the reference value for motor protection and the torque limit. Enter the motor
rated current written on the motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning the drive will automatically set E2-01 to the value
input for T1-04 [Motor Rated Current].

■ E2-02: Motor Rated Slip

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-02 Motor Rated Slip V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(030F) Sets motor rated slip. (0.00 - 20.00 Hz)

This parameter value becomes the base slip compensation value. The drive automatically sets this parameter
during Auto-Tuning. When you cannot do Auto-Tuning, calculate the motor rated slip with the information on the
motor nameplate and this formula:
E2-02 = f - (n × p) / 120
• f: Motor rated frequency (Hz)
• n: Rated motor speed (min-1 (r/min))
• p: Number of motor poles

■ E2-03: Motor No-Load Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-03 Motor No-Load Current V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0310) Sets the no-load current for the motor in amps when operating at the rated frequency and the no- (0 to E2-01)
load voltage.

Note:
When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
• 0.01 A: 4009
• 0.1 A: 4015 - 4045
The drive automatically sets this parameter during Auto-Tuning. When you cannot do Auto-Tuning, you can also
use the motor no-load current on the motor test report to enter this value manually. Get the test report from the
motor manufacturer.
Note:
The default setting of the no-load current is for a 4-pole motor recommended by Yaskawa.

■ E2-04: Motor Pole Count

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-04 Motor Pole Count V/f OLV 4

(0311) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 - 48)

Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Number of Motor Poles].
Parameter Details

■ E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0312) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor stator windings. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 301

12.5 E: Motor Parameters

Note:
This value is the motor line-to-line resistance. Do not set this parameter with the per-phase resistance.
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter. If you cannot do Auto-Tuning, use the test report from the motor
manufacturer to configure the settings. You can calculate the motor line-to-line resistance with one of these
formulas:
• E-type insulation: [the resistance value (Ω) shown on the test report at 75 °C] × 0.92
• B-type insulation: [the resistance value (Ω) shown on the test report at 75 °C] × 0.92
• F-type insulation: [the resistance value (Ω) shown on the test report at 115 °C] × 0.87

■ E2-06: Motor Leakage Inductance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0313) Sets the voltage drop from motor leakage inductance when the motor is operating at the rated (0.0 - 60.0%)
frequency and rated current. This value is a percentage of Motor Rated Voltage.

The drive automatically sets this parameter during Auto-Tuning.

Note:
The motor nameplate does not usually show the quantity of voltage drop. If you do not know the value of the motor leakage inductance,
contact the motor manufacturer to receive a copy of the motor test report.

■ E2-07: Motor Saturation Coefficient 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-07 Motor Saturation V/f OLV 0.50

(0314) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. (0.00 - 0.50)

The drive uses this coefficient when it operates with constant output. The drive uses this coefficient when it
operates the motor in the constant output range.

■ E2-08: Motor Saturation Coefficient 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-08 Motor Saturation V/f OLV 0.75

(0315) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. (E2-07 - 0.75)

The drive uses this coefficient when it operates with constant output. The drive uses this coefficient when it
operates the motor in the constant output range.

■ E2-09: Motor Mechanical Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss V/f OLV 0.0%

(0316) Sets the mechanical loss of the motor. It is set as a percentage of E2-11 [Motor Rated Power]. (0.0 - 10.0%)
Expert Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

Adjust this parameter in these conditions. The drive adds the configured mechanical loss to the torque reference
value as a torque compensation value:
• There is a large quantity of torque loss from motor bearing friction.
• There is a large quantity of torque loss in fans and pumps.

■ E2-10: Motor Iron Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-10 Motor Iron Loss V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0317) Sets the motor iron loss. (0 - 65535 W)

302 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.5 E: Motor Parameters

■ E2-11: Motor Rated Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

E2-11 Motor Rated Power V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0318) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 650.00 kW)

The drive automatically sets this parameter to the value input for “Motor Rated Power” during Auto-Tuning.

Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 303

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

H parameters set functions for external input and output terminals.

◆ H1: Digital Inputs

H1 Parameters set the MFDI terminal functions.

■ H1-03 to H1-07 Terminal S3 to S7 Function Selection

The drive has 7 MFDI terminals. Refer to Table 12.4 for drive default settings and functions.
Table 12.4 MFDI Default Settings and Functions
No. Name Default Function

H1-03 Term S3 Function Selection 50 Nominal Speed

H1-04 Term S4 Function Selection 54 Inspection Operation

H1-05 Term S5 Function Selection 51 Intermediate Speed

H1-06 Term S6 Function Selection 53 Leveling Speed

H1-07 Term S7 Function Selection F Not Used (Through Mode)

Refer to the Table 12.5 and use H1-xx [MFDI Function Select] to set the function.
Table 12.5 MFDI Setting Values
Setting Value Function Reference Setting Value Function Reference

3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 305 20 to 2F External fault 307

4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 305 40 Forward RUN (2-Wire) 308

5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 305 41 Reverse RUN (2-Wire) 309

7 Accel/Decel Time Selection 1 305 50 Nominal Speed 309

8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) 305 51 Intermediate Speed 309

9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) 306 52 Releveling Speed 309

F Through Mode 306 53 Leveling Speed 309

14 Fault Reset 306 54 Inspection Operation 309

15 Fast Stop (N.O.) 306 55 Rescue Operation 309

17 Fast Stop (N.C.) 307 56 Motor Connector Feedback 310

18 Timer Function 307 79 Brake Feedback 310

1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 307 103 - 179 Inverse Inputs of 1 to 79 -

■ H1-03: Terminal S3 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H1-03 Terminal S3 Function V/f OLV 50

(0400) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S3. (3 - 79)

■ H1-04: Terminal S4 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H1-04 Terminal S4 Function V/f OLV 54

(0401) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S4. (3 - 79)

■ H1-05: Terminal S5 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H1-05 Terminal S5 Function V/f OLV 51

(0402) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S5. (3 - 79)

304 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ H1-06: Terminal S6 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H1-06 Terminal S6 Function V/f OLV 53

(0403) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S6. (3 - 79)

■ H1-07: Terminal S7 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H1-07 Terminal S7 Function V/f OLV F

(0404) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S7. (3 - 79)

◆ MFDI Setting Values

Selects a function for MFDI.

■ 3: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1

Setting Value Function Description

3 Multi-Step Speed Reference V/f OLV

1 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-08 to set a multi-step speed reference.

■ 4: Multi-Step Speed Reference 2

Setting Value Function Description

4 Multi-Step Speed Reference V/f OLV

2 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-08 to set a multi-step speed reference.

■ 5: Multi-Step Speed Reference 3

Setting Value Function Description

5 Multi-Step Speed Reference V/f OLV

3 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-08 to set a multi-step speed reference.

■ 7: Accel/Decel Time Selection 1

Setting Value Function Description

7 Accel/Decel Time Selection V/f OLV

1 Sets the drive to use Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 [C1-01, C1-02] or Acceleration/Deceleration Time 2 [C1-03, C1-04].

Note:
Refer to C1: Accel & Decel Speed on page 288 for more information.

■ 8: Baseblock Command (N.O.)

Setting Value Function Description

8 Baseblock Command (N. V/f OLV

O.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input is ON.

The keypad flashes bb [Baseblock]. If you cancel the baseblock command when the Run command is active, the
drive will restart the motor and use the speed search function.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use a mechanical holding brake with the drive, you must close the brake if
an input terminal triggers the Baseblock command to stop drive output. If you enter the baseblock command, the motor will
suddenly coast and the load will slip, which can cause serious injury or death.
Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 305

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Figure 12.7 Baseblock Command Time Chart

ON : Baseblock (drive output stop)
OFF : Normal operation

■ 9: Baseblock Command (N.C.)

Setting Value Function Description

9 Baseblock Command (N. V/f OLV

C.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input terminal is OFF.

The keypad flashes bb [Baseblock]. If you cancel the baseblock command when the Run command is active, the
drive will restart the motor and use the speed search function.
ON : Normal operation
OFF : Baseblock (drive output stop)
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use a mechanical holding brake with the drive, you must close the brake if
an input terminal triggers the Baseblock command to stop drive output. If you enter the baseblock command, the motor will
suddenly coast and the load will slip, which can cause serious injury or death.

■ F: Not Used
Setting Value Function Description

F Not Used V/f OLV

Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode.

■ 14: Fault Reset

Setting Value Function Description

14 Fault Reset V/f OLV

Sets the command to reset the current fault when the Run command is inactive.

If the drive detects a fault, the drive will activate the fault relay output, turn off the output, and the motor will
coast to stop.
If the drive detects a fault for which you can set the stopping method, apply the appropriate Stopping Method.
Then push (RESET) on the keypad to turn the Run command OFF, or activate the fault reset terminal to reset
the fault.
Note:
The drive ignores the fault reset command when the Run command is active. Remove the Run command before trying to reset a fault.

■ 15: Fast Stop (N.O.)

Setting Value Function Description

15 Fast Stop (N.O.) V/f OLV

Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is ON while
the drive is operating.

If you cancel the fast stop input, the drive will not restart the motor until you meet these conditions:
• Fully stop the motor
• Cancel the Run command
• Cancel the fast stop command

306 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Note:
• To use the N.C. switch to input the fast stop command, set 17 (Fast Stop (N.C.)).
• Refer to C1-09: Fast Stop Ramp on page 290 for more information.
• Set C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] to a correct deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, it can cause an overvoltage fault and
failure to stop the motor from coasting.

■ 17: Fast Stop (N.C.)

Setting Value Function Description

17 Fast Stop (N.C.) V/f OLV

Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is ON while
the drive is operating.

If you cancel the fast stop input, the drive will not restart the motor until you meet these conditions:
• Fully stop the motor
• Cancel the Run command
• Cancel the fast stop command
Note:
• To use the N.O. switch to input the fast stop command, set 15 (Fast Stop (N.O.)).
• Refer to C1-09: Fast Stop Ramp on page 290 for more information.
• Set C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] to a correct deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, it can cause an overvoltage fault and
failure to stop the motor from coasting.
Figure 12.8 shows an example of how fast stop operates.

Figure 12.8 Fast Stop Time Chart

■ 18: Timer Function Input

Setting Value Function Description

18 Timer Function Input V/f OLV

Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Mist be set in conjunction with the timer function output [H2-xx = 2].

■ 1A: Accel/Decel Time Selection 2

Setting Value Function Description

1A Accel/Decel Time Selection V/f OLV

2 Set this function and H1-xx = 7 [Accel/Decel Time Selection 1] together. Sets the drive to use Acceleration/Deceleration Time 3
[C1-05, C1-06] or Acceleration/Deceleration Time 4 [C1-07, C1-08].

Note:
Refer to C1: Accel & Decel Speed on page 288 for more information.

■ 20 to 2F: External Fault

Setting Value Function Description

20 to 2F External Fault V/f OLV

Parameter Details

Sets a command to stop the drive when a failure or fault occurs on an external device.

WARNING! Incorrect Operation. Yaskawa recommends that you use H1-xx = 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 2B, 2D, 2F [External Fault (N.
C.)]. If a circuit error occurs in the MFDI, the drive cannot stop the output when the terminal set to H1-xx = 20, 22, 24, 26, 28,
2A, 2C, 2E [External Fault (N.O.)] turns ON.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 307

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

If an external fault is input to the drive, the keypad will show EFx [External Fault (Terminal Sx)], where x is the
number of the terminal (terminal Sx) to which the external fault signal is assigned. For example, when an external
fault signal is input to terminal S3, the keypad will show EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)].
Use these conditions to select the value to set in H1-xx:
• Signal input method from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Motor stopping method (operation after external fault detection)
Table 12.6 shows the relation between the conditions and the value set to H1-xx.
Table 12.6 Stopping Methods for External Fault
Signal Input Method from External Fault Detection Method Stopping Method
Peripheral Devices *1 *2
Setting
Detected Continuous
Always Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop
N.O. N.C. during RUN Operation
Detected Only (Fault) (Fault) (Fault) (Alarm Only)

20 x - x - x - - -

21 - x x - x - - -

22 x - - x x - - -

23 - x - x x - - -

24 x - x - - x - -

25 - x x - - x - -

26 x - - x - x - -

27 - x - x - x - -

28 x - x - - - x -

29 - x x - - - x -

2A x - - x - - x -

2B - x - x - - x -

2C x - x - - - - x

2D - x x - - - - x

2E x - - x - - - x

2F - x - x - - - x

*1 Set the terminal to N.O. (detects external fault when switched ON) or N.C. (detects external fault when switched OFF).
*2 Set the drive to always detect each fault or to detect only during run.

■ 40: Forward RUN (2-Wire)

Setting Value Function Description

40 Forward RUN (2-Wire) V/f OLV

Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 41 [Reverse RUN (2-Wire)] together.

ON : Forward Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an EF [FWD/REV Run
Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Forward Run command to terminal S1.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2), FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence
2)].

308 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Figure 12.9 2-Wire Sequence Wiring Example

■ 41: Reverse RUN (2-Wire)

Setting Value Function Description

41 Reverse RUN (2-Wire) V/f OLV

Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 40 [Forward RUN (2-Wire)] together.

ON : Reverse Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an EF [FWD/REV Run
Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Reverse Run command to terminal S2.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2), FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence
2)].

■ 50: Nominal Speed

Setting Value Function Description

50 Nominal Speed V/f OLV

Sets the speed reference nominal speed.

■ 51: Intermed Speed

Setting Value Function Description

51 Intermed Speed V/f OLV

Sets the speed reference intermediate speed 1. In combination with nominal and releveling speed you can set intermediate speed
2 and 3.

■ 52: Releveling Speed

Setting Value Function Description

52 Releveling Speed V/f OLV

Sets the speed reference releveling speed.

■ 53: Leveling Speed

Setting Value Function Description

53 Leveling Speed V/f OLV

Sets the speed reference leveling speed.

■ 54: Inspection Speed

Setting Value Function Description

54 Inspection Speed V/f OLV

Parameter Details

Sets the speed reference inspection speed.

■ 55: Rescue Operation

Setting Value Function Description

55 Rescue Operation V/f OLV

Activates rescue operation. 12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 309

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ 56: Motor Contractor Feedback

Setting Value Function Description

56 Motor Contractor Feedback V/f OLV

Used for motor contactor supervision and fault detection.

■ 79: Brake Feedback

Setting Value Function Description

79 Brake Feedback V/f OLV

Used for brake supervision and detection of incorrect operation.

◆ H2: Digital Outputs

H2 parameters set the MFDO terminal functions.

■ H2-01 to H2-03 Terminal MA/MB-MC, P1-C1, P2-C2 Function Selection

The drive has three MFDO terminals. Table 12.7 shows the default function settings for the terminals.
Table 12.7 MFDO Terminals Default Function Settings
No. Name Default Function

Term MA/MB-MC Function Selection

H2-01 (Contact) E Fault

H2-02 Term P1-C1 Function Selection 6 Drive Ready

H2-03 Term P2-C2 Function Selection 50 Brake Control

Refer to Table 12.8 to set H2-xx [MFDO Function Select].

Table 12.8 MFDO Setting Values
Setting Value Function Reference Setting Value Function Reference

0 During Run 311 18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) 317

1 Zero Speed 311 1A During Reverse 317

2 Speed Agree 1 312 1B During Baseblock (N.C.) 318

3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 312 1E Executing Auto-Restart 318

4 Frequency Detection 1 313 1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) 318

5 Frequency Detection 2 313 20 Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH) 318

6 Drive Ready 314 21 Safety Monitor Output Status 318

7 DC Bus Undervoltage 314 2F Maintenance Notification 318

8 During Baseblock (N.O.) 314 30 During Torque Limit 319

B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) 314 37 During Frequency Output 319

E Fault 315 47 PF Detection 319

F *1 Not Used 315 50 Brake Control 319

10 Alarm 315 51 Output Contactor Control 320

11 Fault Reset Command Active 315 54 Light Load Direction 320

12 Timer Output 315 58 Safe Disable Status 320

13 Speed Agree 2 315 Inverse output of 0 to 58

Sets an inverse output of the function for
14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 316 100 to 158 the MFDO. Put a 1 at the front of the 320
function setting to set inverse output. For
15 Frequency Detection 3 316 example, set H2-xx = 10E for the inverse
output of E [Fault].
16 Frequency Detection 4 317

*1 Inverse output is not available.

310 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ H2-01: Term MA/MB-MC Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H2-01 Term MA/MB-MC V/f OLV E

(040B) Function Selection Sets the function set for MFDO terminal MA-MC or MB-MC. (0 - 158)

Note:
Set this parameter to F when the terminal is not being used or to use the terminal in through mode.

■ H2-02: Term P1-C1 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H2-02 Term P1-C1 Function V/f OLV 6

(040C) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal P1-C1. (0 - 158)

Note:
Set this parameter to F when the terminal is not being used or to use the terminal in through mode.

■ H2-03: Term P2-C2 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H2-03 Term P2-C2 Function V/f OLV 50

(040D) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal P2-C2. (0 - 158)

Note:
Set this parameter to F when the terminal is not being used or to use the terminal in through mode.

◆ MFDO Setting Values

Selects the function configured to MFDO.

■ 0: During Run
Setting Value Function Description

0 During Run V/f OLV

The terminal activates when you input a Run command and when the drive is outputting voltage.

Figure 12.10 Drive Running Time Chart

ON : Drive is running
The drive is receiving a Run command or outputting voltage.
OFF : Drive is stopping

■ 1: Zero Speed
Setting Value Function Description

1 Zero Speed V/f OLV

Parameter Details

The terminal activates when the output frequency is less than E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] or b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero
SpeedThreshold].

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 311

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Note:
Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the reference.

A1-02 Setting Control Method Selection Parameter Used as the Reference

0 V/f E1-09

2 OLV b2-01

Figure 12.11 Zero Speed Time Chart

ON : Output frequency < value of E1-09 or b2-01.
OFF : Output frequency ≥ value of E1-09 or b2-01.

■ 2: Speed Agree 1
Setting Value Function Description

2 Speed Agree 1 V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection
Width].

Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions.

Figure 12.12 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart

ON : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-02”.
OFF : The output frequency does not align with the frequency reference although the drive is
running.

■ 3: User-Set Speed Agree 1

Setting Value Function Description

3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] ± L4-02 [Speed Agree
Detection Width] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02.

Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the forward/reverse detection
level.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” and the range of frequency
reference ± L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” nor the range of frequency
reference ± L4-02.

312 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Figure 12.13 User-Defined Speed Agree 1 Time Chart

■ 4: Frequency Detection 1
Setting Value Function Description

4 Frequency Detection 1 V/f OLV

The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] + L4-02
[Speed Agree Detection Width]. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output frequency = L4-
01.

Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the forward/reverse detection
level.
ON : The output frequency is less than the value of L4-01 or does not exceed the value of L4-01 +
L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01 + L4-02.

Figure 12.14 Frequency Detection 1 Time Chart

Note:
Figure 12.14 shows the result of the configuration when L4-07 = 1 [Speed Agree Detection Selection = Detection Always Enabled]. The
default setting of L4-07 is 0 [No detection during baseblock]. When the speed agreement detection selection is “No Detection during
Baseblock”, the terminal is deactivated when the drive output stops.

■ 5: Frequency Detection 2
Setting Value Function Description

5 Frequency Detection 2 V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level]. After the
terminal activates, the terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of L4-01 - L4-02.

Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the forward/reverse detection
Parameter Details

level.
ON : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01.
OFF : The output frequency is less than the value of “L4-01 - L4-02,” or it is not more than the
value of L4-01.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 313

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Figure 12.15 Frequency Detection 2 Time Chart

■ 6: Drive Ready
Setting Value Function Description

6 Drive Ready V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the drive is ready and running.

The terminal deactivates in these conditions:

• When the power supply is OFF
• During a fault
• When there is problem with the control power supply
• When there is a parameter setting error and the drive cannot operate although there is a Run command
• When you enter a Run command and it immediately triggers an overvoltage or undervoltage fault because the
drive has an overvoltage or undervoltage fault during stop
• When the drive is in Programming Mode and will not accept a Run command
• When the Safe Disable function is active

■ 7: DC Bus Undervoltage
Setting Value Function Description

7 DC Bus Undervoltage V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply is at the voltage set in L2-05 [Undervoltage
Detection Lvl (Uv1)] or less. The terminal also activates when there is a fault with the DC bus voltage.

ON : The DC bus voltage ≤ L2-05

OFF : The DC bus voltage > L2-05

■ 8: During Baseblock (N.O.)

Setting Value Function Description

8 During Baseblock (N.O.) V/f OLV

The terminal activates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching and does not
make DC bus voltage.

ON : During baseblock
OFF : The drive is not in baseblock.

■ B: Torque Detection 1 (N.O.)

Setting Value Function Description

B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.

ON : The output current/torque > L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the output current/torque <
L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].
Note:
• When L6-01 ≥ 5, the drive will detect when the output current/torque is less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• Refer to L6: Torque Detection on page 334 for more information.

314 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ E: Fault
Setting Value Function Description

E Fault V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the drive detects a fault.

Note:
The terminal will not activate for CPF00 and CPF01 [Control Circuit Error] faults.

■ F: Not Used
Setting Value Function Description

F Not Used V/f OLV

Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode.

■ 10: Alarm
Setting Value Function Description

10 Alarm V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the drive detects a minor fault.

■ 11: Fault Reset Command Active

Setting Value Function Description

11 Fault Reset Command V/f OLV

Active The terminal activates when the drive receives the Reset command from the control circuit terminal, serial communications, or
the communication option.

■ 12: Timer Output

Setting Value Function Description

12 Timer Output V/f OLV

Sets the terminal as the timer output. Use this setting with the timer input set in H1-xx = 18 [MFDI Function Selection = Timer
Function].

Note:
Refer to b4: Timer Function on page 285 for more information.

■ 13: Speed Agree 2

Setting Value Function Description

13 Speed Agree 2 V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04 [Speed Agree Detection
Width(+/-)].

Note:
The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.
Parameter Details

Figure 12.16 Speed Agree 2 Time Chart

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 315

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ 14: User-Set Speed Agree 2

Setting Value Function Description

14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] ± L4-04 [Speed
Agree Detection Width(+/-)] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04.

Note:
The detection level set with L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” and the range of frequency
reference ± L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” nor the range of frequency
reference ± L4-04.

Figure 12.17 Example of User-set Speed Agree 2 (L4-03 Is Positive)

■ 15: Frequency Detection 3

Setting Value Function Description

15 Frequency Detection 3 V/f OLV

The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is more than “L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] + L4-04 [Speed
Agree Detection Width(+/-)]”. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output frequency is at the
value of L4-03.

Note:
The detection level set with L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is less than the value of L4-03 or it is not more than the value of L4-03
+ L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-03 + L4-04.

Figure 12.18 Example of Frequency Detection 3 (value of L4-03 Is Positive)

Note:
Figure 12.18 shows the result of the configuration when L4-07 = 1 [Speed Agree Detection Selection = Detection Always Enabled]. The
default setting of L4-07 is 0 [No detection during baseblock]. When the speed agreement detection selection is “No Detection during
Baseblock”, the terminal is deactivated when the drive output stops.

316 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ 16: Frequency Detection 4

Setting Value Function Description

16 Frequency Detection 4 V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)]. After
the terminal activates, the terminal stays activated until the output frequency = L4-03 - L4-04.

Note:
The detection level set with L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-03.
OFF : The output frequency is less than the value of “L4-03 - L4-04,” or it is not more than the
value of L4-03.

Figure 12.19 Example of Frequency Detection 4 (value of L4-03 Is Positive)

■ 18: Torque Detection 2 (N.O.)

Setting Value Function Description

18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.

Use the L6 [Torque Detection] parameters to set torque detection.

ON : The output current/torque > L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the output current/torque <
L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2].
Note:
• When L6-04 ≥ 5, the drive will detect when the output current/torque is less than L6-05 for longer than L6-06.
• Refer to L6: Torque Detection on page 334 for more information.

■ 1A: During Reverse

Setting Value Function Description

1A During Reverse V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the motor operates in the reverse direction.

ON : The motor is operating in the reverse direction.

OFF : The motor is operating in the forward direction or the motor stopped. Parameter Details

Figure 12.20 Reverse Operation Output Time Chart

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 317

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ 1B: During Baseblock (N.C.)

Setting Value Function Description

1B During Baseblock (N.C.) V/f OLV

The terminal deactivates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching and does
not make DC bus voltage.

ON : The drive is not in baseblock.

OFF : During baseblock

■ 1E: Executing Auto-Restart

Setting Value Function Description

1E Executing Auto-Restart V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the Auto Restart function is trying to restart after a fault.

The terminal deactivates when the Auto Restart function automatically resets a fault. The terminal deactivates
when the Auto Restart function detects the fault again because there were too many restart attempts as specified
by L5-01 [Number of Auto Restart Attempts].
Note:
Refer to L5: Fault Restart on page 332 for more information.

■ 1F: Motor Overload Alarm (oL1)

Setting Value Function Description

1F Motor Overload Alarm V/f OLV

(oL1) The terminal activates when the electronic thermal protection value of the motor overload protective function is a minimum of
90% of the detection level.

Note:
Refer to L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection on page 327 for more information.

■ 20: Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH)

Setting Value Function Description

20 Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm V/f OLV

(oH) The terminal activates when the drive heatsink temperature is at the level set with L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].

Note:
Refer to L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level on page 339 for more information.

■ 21: Safe Torque OFF

Setting Value Function Description

21 Safe Torque OFF V/f OLV

The terminal activates (safety stop state) when the safety circuit and safety diagnosis circuit are operating correctly and when
terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF (Open).

Note:
EDM = External Device Monitor
ON : Safety stop state
Terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF (Open) (safety stop state).
OFF : Safety circuit fault or RUN/READY
Terminal H1-HC or terminal H2-HC is OFF (Open) (safety circuit fault), or the two terminals are ON or have
short circuited (RUN/READY).

■ 2F: Maintenance Notification

Setting Value Function Description

2F Maintenance Notification V/f OLV

The terminal activates when drive components are at their estimated maintenance period.

Tells you about the maintenance period for these items:

• IGBT
• Cooling Fan

318 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

• Capacitor
• Soft charge bypass relay
Note:
Refer to Maintenance on page 208 for more information.

■ 30: During Torque Limit

Setting Value Function Description

30 During Torque Limit V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the torque reference is the torque limit set with L7 parameters.

Note:
Refer to L7: Torque Limit on page 337 for more information.

■ 37: During Frequency Output

Setting Value Function Description

37 During Frequency Output V/f OLV

The terminal activates when the drive outputs frequency.

ON : The drive is outputting frequency.

OFF : The drive is not outputting frequency.
Note:
The terminal deactivates in these conditions:
• During Stop
• During Baseblock
• During DC Injection Braking (initial excitation)
• During Short Circuit Braking
• Pole Position Detection Complete

Figure 12.21 Active Frequency Output Time Chart

■ 47: PF Detection
Setting Value Function Description

47 PF Detection V/f OLV

Indicates input phase loss.

0 : No error
1 : Input Phase Loss error detected

■ 50: Brake Control

Setting Value Function Description

50 Brake Control V/f OLV

This setting can be used in the brake sequence for the elevator application. Closing the output terminal should cause the brake to
release, and opening the terminal should apply the brake.
Parameter Details

Close : Release brake.

Open : Apply brake

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 319

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ 51: Output Contactor Control

Setting Value Function Description

51 Output Contactor Control V/f OLV

Assigning this command to an output terminal can send a signal to the controller to close the output contactor. The output
contactor should open when the terminal is released.

Closed : Close output contactor

■ 54: Light Load Direction

Setting Value Function Description

54 Light Load Direction V/f OLV

Indicates the light load direction detected during emergency operation with light load search. When the terminal is closed the
light load direction is up, when it is open the light load direction is down.

Closed : Light load direction is up

Open : Light load direction is down

■ 58: Safe Disable Status

Setting Value Function Description

58 Safe Disable Status V/f OLV

This terminal closes if the Safe Disable inputs H1-HC are closed and opens when terminals H1-HC are open.

Closed : Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are open, drive is in a baseblock state
Open : Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are closed (normal operation)

■ 100 to 158: Inverse output of 0 to 58

Setting Value Function Description

100 - 158 Inverse output of 0 to 58 V/f OLV

Causes inverse output of the function for the selected MFDO. Uses the last two digits of 1xx to select which function to
inversely output.

For example, set H2-xx = 10E for the inverse output of E [Fault].

◆ H4: Analog Outputs

H4 parameters set the drive analog monitors. These parameters select monitor parameters, adjust gain and bias,
and select output signal levels.

■ Calibrate Meters Connected to MFAO Terminal AM

Use these parameters to calibrate meters connected to terminal AM:
• H4-02 [Terminal AM Analog Output Gain]
• H4-03 [Terminal AM Analog Output Bias]
Set these parameters where the output voltage of 10 V are 100% of the signal level.
No. Name Range Default

H4-02 Terminal AM Analog Output Gain -999.9 - +999.9% 100.0%

H4-03 Terminal AM Analog Output Bias -999.9 - +999.9% 0.0%

Figure 12.22 and Figure 12.23 show the gain and bias.

320 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Figure 12.22 Analog Output Gain/Bias Configuration Example 1

For example, when the parameter value set to analog output is 0, and a 3 V signal is to be output to terminal AM,
set H4-03 [AM Analog Output Bias] = 30%.

Figure 12.23 Analog Output Gain/Bias Configuration Example 2

■ Calibrate Terminal AM
Stop the drive to calibrate meters. Use this procedure to calibrate:
1. Show H4-02 [Terminal AM Analog Output Gain] on the keypad.
Terminal AM outputs the analog signal when the monitor item that you set in H4-01 [Terminal AM Analog
Output Select] is 100%.
2. Adjust H4-02 while referencing the meter scale connected to terminal AM.
3. Show H4-03 [Terminal AM Analog Output Bias] on the keypad.
The analog signal at the time when the monitor item selected with H4-01 is 0% is output from terminal AM.
4. Adjust H4-03 while referencing the meter scale connected to terminal AM.

■ H4-01: Terminal AM Analog Output Select

Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H4-01 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
Note:
• You cannot use all of the monitors in all of the control methods.

■ H4-02: Terminal AM Analog Output Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H4-02 Terminal AM Analog V/f OLV 100.0%

(041E) Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
Expert
Parameter Details

The analog signal output from the AM terminal is a maximum of 10 V (or 20 mA). Use H4-07 [Terminal AM
Signal Level Select] to set the signal level.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 321

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ H4-03: Terminal AM Analog Output Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H4-03 Terminal AM Analog V/f OLV 0.0%

(041F) Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
Expert

The analog signal output from the AM terminal is a maximum of 10 V (or 20 mA). Use H4-07 [Terminal AM
Signal Level Select] to set the signal level.

◆ H5: Memobus/Modbus Communication

H5 parametersconfigure the drive to use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
You can use the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol over the RS-485 port (terminals D+ and D-) in the drive to use
serial communication with programmable controllers (PLC).

■ H5-01: Drive Node Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-01 Drive Node Address V/f OLV 1FH

(0425) Sets the communication slave address for drives. (0 - FFH)

Note:
• Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload = Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
• Setting 0 will not let the drive respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
To enable the drive to communicate with the controller (master) over MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, you
must set the drive with a slave address. Set H5-01 ≠ 0.
Set a node address that is different from the master and other slave devices.

■ H5-02: Communication Speed Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-02 Communication Speed V/f OLV 3

(0426) Selection Sets the communications speed for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 8)

Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload = Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19.2 kbps
5 : 38.4 kbps
6 : 57.6 kbps
7 : 76.8 kbps
8 : 115.2 kbps

■ H5-03: Communication Parity Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-03 Communication Parity V/f OLV 0

(0427) Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 2)

Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload = Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
0 : No parity
1 : Even parity

322 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

2 : Odd parity

■ H5-04: Communication Error Stop Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-04 Communication Error Stop V/f OLV 3

(0428) Method Sets the motor Stopping Method when the drive detects CE [MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication (0 - 3)
Err] issues.

0 : Ramp to Stop
The drive ramps the motor to stop in the deceleration time. The output terminal set for Fault [H2-01 to H2-03 =
E] activates.
1 : Coast to Stop
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop. The output terminal set for Fault [H2-01 to H2-03 = E]
activates.
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. The output terminal set for Fault
[H2-01 to H2-03 = E] activates.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows CE and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.

■ H5-05: Comm Fault Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-05 Comm Fault Detection V/f OLV 1

(0429) Selection Sets the function that detects CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues during MEMOBUS/ (0, 1)
Modbus communications.

If the drive does not receive data from the master during the time set in H5-09 [CE Detection Time], it will detect
a CE error.
0 : Disabled
Does not detect CE. The drive continues operation.
1 : Enabled
Detects CE. If the drive detects CE, it will operate as specified by the setting of H5-04 [Communication Error
Stop Method].

■ H5-06: Drive Transmit Wait Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time V/f OLV 5 ms

(042A) Sets the time to wait to send a response message after the drive receives a command message (0 - 65 ms)
from the master.

Figure 12.24 Drive Transmit Wait Time

■ H5-09: CE Detection Time

Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-09 CE Detection Time V/f OLV 2.0 s

(0435) Sets the detection time for CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues when communication (0.0 - 25.0 s)
stops.
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 323

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

■ H5-10: Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-10 Modbus Register 0025H V/f OLV 0

(0436) Unit Sel Sets the unit of measure used for the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications monitor register (0, 1)
0025H (output voltage reference monitor).

0 : 0.1 V units
1 : 1 V units

■ H5-11: Comm ENTER Command Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-11 Comm ENTER Command V/f OLV 0

(043C) Mode Sets the function to make the Enter command necessary to change parameters through (0, 1)
RUN MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

0 : ENTER Command Required

Make all parameter changes then input the Enter command. You must use the Enter command to enable changes
to parameters.
1 : ENTER Command Not Required
It is not necessary to input the Enter command to change parameters.

■ H5-12: Run Command Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-12 Run Command Method V/f OLV 0

(043D) Selection Sets the input method for the Run command when b1-02 = 2 [Run Command Selection 1 = (0, 1)
Memobus/Modbus Communications] or b1-16 = 2 [Run Command Selection 2 = Memobus/
Modbus Communications].

0 : FWD/Stop, REV/Stop
The drive uses bit 0 in command data 0001H of the MEMOBUS register in the motor forward Run command (bit
0 = 1) and the stop command (bit 0 = 0). The drive uses bit 1 in the motor reverse Run command (bit 1 = 1) and
the stop command (bit 1 = 0).
1 : Run/Stop, FWD/REV
The drive uses bit 0 in command data 0001H of the MEMOBUS register in the motor Run command (bit 0 = 1)
and the stop command (bit 0 = 0). The drive uses bit 1 in the direction of motor rotation command (Forward run
(bit1 = 0) or Reverse run (bit 1 = 1)).

■ H5-17: ENTER command response @CPU BUSY

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-17 ENTER command response V/f OLV 0

(11A1) @CPU BUSY Sets operation when the EEPROM write command is sent without EEPROM write available. (0, 1)
Expert Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

0 : Ignore Command(No ROM/RAM Write)

1 : Write to RAM Only

■ H5-18: Motor Speed Filter over Comms

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-18 Motor Speed Filter over V/f OLV 0 ms

(11A2) Comms Sets the filter time constant used when monitoring motor speed during MEMOBUS/Modbus (0 - 100 ms)
communications or with a communication option.

Sets the filter time constant when you monitor the output frequency or motor speed during MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications or use of the communication option.
These are the MEMOBUS registers:
• 003EH (Output Frequency)

324 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

• 003FH (Output Frequency)

• 0044H (U1-05: Motor Speed)
• 00ACH (U1-05: Motor Speed)
• 00ADH (U1-05: Motor Speed)

■ H5-20: Communication Parameters Reload

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-20 Communication Parameters V/f OLV 0

(0B57) Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (0, 1)
parameters.

0 : Reload at Next Power Cycle

1 : Reload Now
Note:
• The setting value automatically returns to H5-20 = 0 after you enable MEMOBUS/Modbus communications parameter changes.
• The setting values of these parameters are enabled:
–H5-01 [Drive Node Address]
–H5-02 [Communication Speed Selection]
–H5-03 [Communication Parity Selection]
–H5-06 [Drive Transmit Wait Time]

■ H5-22: Speed Search from MODBUS

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-22 Speed Search from V/f OLV 0

(11CF) MODBUS Enables the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication register Speed Search function (bit0 of (0, 1)
15DFH).

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
If you set H5-22 = 1 and H1-xx = 62 [Speed Search from Fref] at the same time, the drive will detect oPE03
[Multi-Function Input Setting Err].

■ H5-25: Function 5A Register 1 Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-25 Function 5A Register 1 V/f OLV 0044H (U1-05)

(1589) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN responding to the master device.

Note:
Refer to Writing to More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register on page 143 for more information.

■ H5-26: Function 5A Register 2 Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-26 Function 5A Register 2 V/f OLV 0045H (U1-06)

(158A) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN responding to the master device.

Note:
Refer to Writing to More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register on page 143 for more information.

■ H5-27: Function 5A Register 3 Selection

Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-27 Function 5A Register 3 V/f OLV 0042H (U1-03)

(158B) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN responding to the master device.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 325

12.6 H: Terminal Function Selection

Note:
Refer to Writing to More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register on page 143 for more information.

■ H5-28: Function 5A Register 4 Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H5-28 Function 5A Register 4 V/f OLV 0049H (U1-10)

(158C) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN responding to the master device.

Note:
Refer to Writing to More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register on page 143 for more information.

◆ H6: Pulse Train Input/Output

H6 parameters set the drive pulse train input and pulse train monitor. These parameters select input and monitor
parameters and adjust the pulse train frequency.
A pulse train signal with a maximum single pulse of 32 kHz can be input to the drive input terminal RP. You can
use the pulse train signal as the frequency reference, PID feedback value, PID setpoint value, and speed feedback
for V/f Control mode.
A pulse train signal with a maximum frequency of 32 kHz can be output from the drive output terminal MP as the
monitor value. Sinking mode and sourcing mode are supported.

Figure 12.25 Pulse Train Input Block Diagram

■ H6-02: Terminal RP Frequency Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

H6-02 Terminal RP Frequency V/f OLV 1440 Hz

(042D) Scaling Sets the frequency of the pulse train input signal used when the item selected with H6-01 (100 - 32000 Hz)
RUN [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is input at 100%.

326 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

12.7 L: Protection Functions

L parameters set the following functions.
• Motor Overload Protection
• Operation During Momentary Power Loss
• Stall Prevention
• Speed Detection
• Auto Restart
• Detection of Overtorque/Undertorque
• Torque Limit
• Hardware Protection

◆ L1: Motor Protection

L1 parameters set the motor overload protection function.

■ L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L1-01 Motor Overload (oL1) V/f OLV 1

(0480) Protection Sets the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors. (0 - 3)

This parameter enables and disables the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors.
The cooling capability of the motor changes when the speed control range of the motor changes. Use an electronic
thermal protector that aligns with the permitted load characteristics of the motor to select motor protection.
The electronic thermal protector of the drive uses these items to calculate motor overload tolerance and supply
overload protection for the motor:
• Output Current
• Output Frequency
• Motor thermal characteristics
• Time characteristics
If the drive detects motor overload, the drive will trigger an oL1 [Motor Overload] and stop the drive output.
Set H2-01 = 1F [Term MA/MB-MC Function Selection = Motor Overload Alarm (oL1)] to set a motor overload
alarm. If the motor overload level is more than 90% of the oL1 detection level, the output terminal activates and
triggers an overload alarm.
0 : Disabled
Disable motor protection when motor overload protection is not necessary or when the drive is operating more
than one motor.
Refer to Figure 12.26 for an example of the circuit configuration to connect more than one motor to one drive.
Parameter Details

Figure 12.26 Protection Circuit Configuration to Connect More than One Motor to One Drive
NOTICE: When you connect more than one motor to one drive or when the motor amp rating is higher than the drive amp
rating, set L1-01 =0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled] and install thermal overload relays for each motor. The
electronic thermal protection of the drive will not function and it can cause damage to the motor.
1 : Variable Torque
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 327

12.7 L: Protection Functions

Use this setting for general-purpose motors with a 60 Hz base frequency.

The overload tolerance decreases as motor speed decreases because the cooling fan speed decreases and the ability
of the motor to cool decreases in the low speed range.
The overload tolerance characteristics of the motor change the trigger point for the electronic thermal protector.
This provides motor overheat protection from low speed to high speed across the full speed range.
Overload Characteristics
Load Tolerance Cooling Capability
(at 100% motor load)

This motor is designed to operate with commercial line If the motor operates at frequencies less than 60 Hz, the
power. Operate at a 60 Hz base frequency to maximize drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay
the motor cooling ability. output and the motor coasts to stop.

2 : Constant Torque 10:1 Speed Range

Use this setting for drive-dedicated motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1:10.
The speed control for this motor is 10% to 100% when at 100% load. Operating slower than 10% speed at 100%
load will cause motor overload.
Overload Characteristics
Load Tolerance Cooling Capability
(at 100% motor load)

This motor is designed to withstand increased The motor operates continuously at 10% to 100% base
temperatures during continuous operation in the low frequency. Operating slower than 10% speed at 100%
speed range (10% base frequency). load will cause motor overload.

3 : Constant Torque 100:1 SpeedRange

Use this setting for vector motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1:100.
The speed control for this motor is 1% to 100% when at 100% load. Operating slower than 1% speed at 100%
load will cause motor overload.
Overload Characteristics
Load Tolerance Cooling Capability
(at 100% motor load)

This motor is designed to withstand increased The motor operates continuously at 1% to 100% base
temperatures during continuous operation in the low frequency. Operating slower than 1% speed at 100% load
speed range (1% base frequency). will cause motor overload.

328 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

■ L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L1-02 Motor Overload Protection V/f OLV 1.0 min

(0481) Time Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent damage to the (0.1 - 5.0 min)
Expert motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

Set the overload tolerance time to the length of time that the motor can operate at 150% load from continuous
operation at 100% load.
When the motor operates at 150% load continuously for 1 minute after continuous operation at 100% load (hot
start), the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector.
Figure 12.27 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time. Motor overload protection
operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start.
This example shows a general-purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1-02 set to 1.0 min.
• Cold start
Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when the overload occurs immediately after starting
operation from a complete stop.
• Hot start
Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when overload occurs from continuous operation
below the motor rated current.

Figure 12.27 Protection Operation Time for a General-purpose Motor at Rated Output Frequency

■ L1-13: Motor Overload Memory Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L1-13 Motor Overload Memory V/f OLV 1

(046D) Selection Sets the function that keeps the current electronic thermal protector value when the drive stops (0, 1)
Expert receiving power.

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Sets if the drive will calculate the motor again when the drive is energized again.

◆ L2: Power Loss Ride Through (Undervoltage Detection)

■ L2-05: Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details

L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl V/f OLV Determined by E1-01

(0489) (Uv1) Sets the voltage at which a Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] fault is triggered. Usually it is not (400 V Class: 300 - 420 V)
Expert necessary to change this setting.

NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you set this parameter to a value lower than the default, you must install an AC reactor
on the input side of the power supply. If you do not install an AC reactor, it will cause damage to the drive circuitry.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 329

12.7 L: Protection Functions

◆ L3: Stall Prevention

L3 parameters set the Stall Prevention function and overvoltage suppression function.

■ Stall Prevention
If the load is too heavy or the acceleration and deceleration times are too short, the motor can slip too much
because it cannot work at the same rate as the frequency reference. If the motor stalls during acceleration, current
increases as the slip increases to cause an oC [Overcurrent], oL2 [Drive Overload], or oL1 [Motor Overload] and
the drive will stop. If the motor stalls during deceleration, too much regenerative power will flow back into the
DC bus capacitors, and cause the drive to fault out from ov [Overvoltage] and the drive will stop.
The stall prevention function will let the motor get to the set speed without stalling and it is not necessary for you
to change the acceleration or deceleration time settings. You can set a separate stall prevention functions for
acceleration, operating at constant speeds, and deceleration.

■ L3-01: Stall Prevention during Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L3-01 Stall Prevention during V/f OLV 1

(048F) Accel Sets the method of the Stall Prevention During Acceleration. (0 - 1)
Expert

Stall prevention during acceleration prevents the stalling and stopping of motors when the drive detects oC
[Overcurrent], oL2 [Drive Overloaded], or oL1 [Motor Overload] when you apply a large load during
acceleration or when you set sudden acceleration times related to load inertia.
0 : Disable
The Stall Prevention function does not operate during acceleration, and acceleration occurs for the set acceleration
time. If the acceleration time is too short, the motor does not fully accelerate during the set time, which causes the
drive to detect oL1 or oL2 and the motor to stop.
1 : Enabled
Enables the Stall Prevention During Acceleration function. Operation is different for different control methods.
• V/f Control, Open Loop Vector Control, or EZ Open Loop Vector Control
When the output current is more than the value set in L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel], the drive stops
acceleration. The drive stops deceleration when the output current is less than L3-02 - 15%. The Stall
Prevention function level automatically decreases for constant output ranges.

Figure 12.28 Stall Prevention During Acceleration when Using Induction Motors
• Open Loop Vector Control for PM
When the output current is more than L3-02, the drive stops acceleration. When the time set in L3-27 [Stall
Prevention Detection Time] is expired and the output current = L3-02, the drive will start deceleration as
specified by the value set in L3-22 [PM Stall Prevention Decel Time]. The drive starts acceleration again when

330 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

the output current is less than L3-02 - 15%. When the time set in L3-27 is expired, the drive starts acceleration
again.

Figure 12.29 Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function in OLV/PM

■ L3-02: Stall Prevent Level during Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L3-02 Stall Prevent Level during V/f OLV Determined by L8-38

(0490) Accel Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention function operates during acceleration (0 - 165%)
Expert where the drive rated output current is 100%.

Note:
• If you use a motor that is small compared to the drive and the motor stalls, decrease the setting value.
• When you operate the motor in the constant power range, set L3-03 [Stall Prevent Limit during Accel].

■ L3-03: Stall Prevent Limit during Accel

The stall prevention level set in L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel] is automatically reduced when the motor
is running within the constant output range. Parameter L3-03 is the limit value used to prevent the stall prevention
level during constant output ranges to fall below the minimum required level.

Figure 12.30 Stall Prevent Level during Accel/Limit

■ L3-05: Stall Prevention during RUN

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L3-05 Stall Prevention during V/f OLV 1

(0493) RUN Sets the function to enable and disable Stall Prevention During Run. (0 - 1)
Expert

Stall Prevention function during run prevents the motor from stalling by automatically reducing the speed when
Parameter Details

an oL1 [Motor Overload] occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
Note:
An output frequency less than 6 Hz disables Stall Prevention during Run. The setting values of L3-05 and L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level
during Run] do not have an effect.
0 : No
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 331

12.7 L: Protection Functions

The drive runs at the set frequency reference. A heavy load can cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with oC
[Overcurrent] or oL1.
1 : Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)
The drive will decelerate for the time set in C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] when the current is more than the Stall
Prevention level set in L3-06. When the current level is less than the “L3-06 setting value - 2%” for 100 ms, the
drive accelerates again for the acceleration time applicable at that time until it is at the set frequency.

■ L3-06: Stall Prevent Level during Run

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L3-06 Stall Prevent Level during V/f OLV Determined by L8-38

(0494) Run Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention function is enabled during run when the (30 - 165%)
Expert drive rated output current is 100%.

Note:
This parameter is applicable when L3-05 = 1 [Stall Prevention during RUN = Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)].

◆ L4: Speed Detection

L4 parameters set the output of signals to the MFDO terminals, for example frequency agree and speed detection.

■ L4-01: Speed Agree Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L4-01 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 0.0 Hz

(0499) Level Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5 [MFDO Function Selection
= Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency Detection 1, Frequency Detection 2].

■ L4-02: Speed Agree Detection Width

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L4-02 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 2.0 Hz

(049A) Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (0.0 - 20.0 Hz)

Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5 [MFDO Function Selection
= Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency Detection 1, Frequency Detection 2].

■ L4-03: Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L4-03 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 0.0 Hz

(049B) Level(+/-) Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed. (-120.0 - 120.0 Hz)

Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15, 16 [MFDO Function
Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].

■ L4-04: Speed Agree Detection Width(+/-)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L4-04 Speed Agree Detection V/f OLV 2.0 Hz

(049C) Width(+/-) Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (0.0 - 20.0 Hz)

Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15, 16 [MFDO Function
Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].

◆ L5: Fault Restart

The Auto Restart function tries to keep machines operating when the drive detects a transient fault.

332 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

The drive can do a self-diagnostic check and continue the operation after a fault. If the cause of the fault goes
away, the drive does speed search and restarts. It will not stop and the drive will not record a fault history. Use L5-
02 [Fault Contact at Restart Select] to select the operation of fault relay signals during Auto Restart operation.
Sets if the drive will do Auto Restart and the number of times the drive will try to do Auto Restart in a set time. If
the number of Auto Restart tries is more than the set value during the set time, drive output shuts off and operation
stops. If this happens, remove the cause of the fault and manually restart the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Check the application condition in advance before you use the fault restart function.
Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury.
The drive can do Auto Restart when these faults occur:
Table 12.9 List of Faults during which Auto Restart is Available
Parameters to Disable Parameters to Disable
Fault Name Fault Name
Auto Restart Auto Restart

GF Ground Fault L5-08 ov Overvoltage L5-08

LF Output Phase Loss - rr Dynamic Braking -

Transistor Fault
oC Overcurrent -
SE1 Sequence Error 1 -
oH1 Heatsink Overheat L5-08
SE2 Sequence Error 2 -
oL1 Motor Overload L5-07
SE3 Sequence Error -
oL2 Drive Overload L5-07
UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 -
oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 L5-07
UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 -
oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 L5-07

■ L5-01: Number of Auto-Restart Attempts

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L5-01 Number of Auto-Restart V/f OLV 2

(049E) Attempts Sets the number of times that the drive will try to restart. (0 - 10 times)

The drive resets the number of Auto Restart attempts to 0 in these conditions:
• The drive operates correctly for 10 minutes after a fault restart.
• When you manually clear a fault after the drive triggers protective functions.
• When you re-energize the drive.

■ L5-02: Fault Contact at Restart Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L5-02 Fault Contact at Restart V/f OLV 1

(049F) Select Sets the function that sends signals to the MFDO terminal set for Fault [H2-xx = E] while the (0, 1)
drive is automatically restarting.

0 : Active Only when Not Restarting

1 : Always Active

■ L5-04: Interval Method Restart Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L5-04 Interval Method Restart V/f OLV 10.0 s

(046C) Time Sets the time interval between each Auto Restart attempt. This function is enabled when L5-05 = (0.5 - 600.0 s)
1 [Auto Restart Operation Selection = Use L5-04 Time].

■ L5-06: Undervoltage Fault Restart Selection

Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L5-06 Undervoltage Fault Restart V/f OLV 0

(046E) Selection Determines whether a limit should be placed on the number of reset attempts after a Uv1 fault. (0, 1)

0 : Restrict auto-reset attempts to L5-01 after Uv1

1 : No Limit on auto-reset attempts to L5-01 12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 333

12.7 L: Protection Functions

◆ L6: Torque Detection

■ Overview
The overtorque/undertorque detection function prevents damage to machinery and loads.
Overtorque is when there is too much load on the machine. If the motor current or output torque is at the
overtorque detection level for the overtorque detection time, the drive will output an alarm and turn off the output.
Undertorque is when a load suddenly decreases. When the motor current or output torque is at the undertorque
detection level for the undertorque detection time, the drive will output an alarm and turn off the output.
You can use the undertorque detection function to detect these conditions, for example:
• Machine belt cuts
• Unusual operation of the electromagnetic contactor on the drive output side
• Clogged output side air filters in fans and blowers
• Damage to blade tips and broken string
Note:
If there is oC [Overcurrent] or oL1 [Motor Overload], the drive can stop during overtorque conditions. Use torque detection to identify
overload conditions before the drive detects oC or oL1 and stops. Use this function to detect issues that occur in the application.

■ Parameter Settings
You can individually set the two overtorque/undertorque detection functions with the drive. Use the information in
Table 12.10 to set the parameters.
Table 12.10 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Parameters
Configuration Parameter Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2

MFDO Function Select H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = B H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 18
• Terminal MA-MC N.O.: Activated when detected N.O.: Activated when detected
• Terminal P1-C1
H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 17 H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 19
• Terminal P2-C2
N.C.: Disactivated when detected N.C.: Disactivated when detected

Detection conditions and selection of operation after L6-01 L6-04

detection

Detection Level L6-02 L6-05

Detection Time L6-03 L6-06

■ Overtorque Detection Time Chart

When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1, the drive detects overtorque if the motor current or motor
torque is at the detection level set in L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] for the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection
Time 1]. Parameter L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1] sets the operation after detection.
When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2, set L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2], L6-05 [Torque
Detection Level 2], and L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2].
Set the terminal that outputs the alarm in H2-01 to H2-03 [MFDO Function Select].

Figure 12.31 Overtorque Detection Time Chart

Note:
The drive applies a hysteresis of approximately 10% of the drive rated output current or the motor rated torque to the overtorque/
undertorque detection function.

334 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

■ Undertorque Detection Time Chart

When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1, the drive detects undertorque if the motor current or motor
torque is less than or equal to the detection level set in L6-02 for the time set in L6-03. Parameter L6-01 sets the
operation after detection.
When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2, set the operation in L6-04, L6-05, and L6-06.
Set the terminal that outputs an alarm in H2-01 to H2-03.

Figure 12.32 Undertorque Detection Time Chart

Note:
The drive applies a hysteresis of approximately 10% of the drive rated output current or the motor rated torque to the overtorque/
undertorque detection function.

■ L6-01: Torque Detection Selection 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-01 Torque Detection Selection V/f OLV 0

(04A1) 1 Sets torque detection conditions that will trigger an overtorque or undertorque response from the (0 - 8)
drive.

The drive detects overtorque if the motor current or output torque is more than the level set in L6-02 [Torque
Detection Level 1] for the length of time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1]. The drive detects undertorque if
the motor current or output torque is less than the level set in L6-02 for the length the time set in L6-03.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect overtorque or undertorque.
1 : oL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL3 [Overtorque Detection 1] and operation
continues.
2 : oL @ RUN - Alarm only
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects overtorque. The drive outputs an oL3 and
operation continues.
3 : oL @ Speed Agree - Fault
The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL3 and operation stops.
4 : oL @ RUN - Fault
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects overtorque. The drive outputs an oL3 and
operation stops.
5 : UL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
The drive detects undertorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1] and operation
continues.
6 : UL @ RUN - Alarm only
Parameter Details

When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects undertorque. The drive outputs a UL3 and
operation continues.
7 : UL @ Speed Agree - Fault
The drive detects undertorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL3 and operation stops.
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 335

12.7 L: Protection Functions

8 : UL @ RUN - Fault
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects undertorque. The drive outputs a UL3 and
operation stops.

■ L6-02: Torque Detection Level 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 V/f OLV 150%

(04A2) Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. In V/f control, drive rated output (0 - 300%)
current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.

Note:
• Set the torque detection level as a percentage of the drive rated output current in all control methods to set the mechanical weakening
detection level.

■ L6-03: Torque Detection Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 V/f OLV 0.1 s

(04A3) Sets the detection time for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. (0.0 - 10.0 s)

■ L6-04: Torque Detection Selection 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-04 Torque Detection Selection V/f OLV 0

(04A4) 2 Sets the speed range that detects overtorque and undertorque and the operation of drives (0 - 8)
(operation status) after detection.

The drive detects overtorque if the motor current or output torque is more than the level set in L6-05 [Torque
Detection Level 2] for the length of time set in L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2]. The drive detects undertorque if
the motor current or output torque is less than the level set in L6-05 for the length the time set in L6-06.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect overtorque or undertorque.
1 : oL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2] and operation
continues.
2 : oL @ RUN - Alarm only
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects overtorque. The drive outputs an oL4 and
operation continues.
3 : oL @ Speed Agree - Fault
The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2] and operation stops.
4 : oL @ RUN - Fault
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects overtorque. The drive outputs an oL4 and
operation stops.
5 : UL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
The drive detects undertorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2] and operation
continues.
6 : UL @ RUN - Alarm only
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects undertorque. The drive outputs a UL4 and
operation continues.
7 : UL @ Speed Agree - Fault
The drive detects undertorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL4 and operation stops.
8 : UL @ RUN - Fault

336 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects undertorque. The drive outputs a UL4 and
operation stops

■ L6-05: Torque Detection Level 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 V/f OLV 150%

(04A5) Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2. In V/f control, drive rated output (0 - 300%)
current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.

Note:
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2 cannot set the detection level for the analog input terminal.

■ L6-06: Torque Detection Time 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 V/f OLV 0.1 s

(04A6) Sets the detection time for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2. (0.0 - 10.0 s)

◆ L7: Torque Limit

■ Overview
The torque limit function limits the internal torque reference for the drive to and keeps the torque from the motor
constant. This function limits the torque applied to loads and regenerative torque to a value less than a set
quantity. This function also prevents damage to machinery and increases the reliability of continuous operation.
You can set torque limits individually for the four quadrants, which include torque direction (motoring/
regeneration) and direction of motor rotation (forward/reverse). When the torque reference value is at the set
torque limit, the MFDO terminal set for During Torque Limit [H2-xx = 30] activates.
Note:
• The drive output current limits maximum output torque. The drive limits torque to 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds, or
165% of the rated output current for 30 seconds. The actual output torque is not more than the limits of the drive rated output current
when you set the torque limit to a high value.
• When you use torque limits, do not lower the torque limit value too much. When the torque limit function is triggered, falls and
rollbacks can occur because of sudden acceleration stops and stalls of the motor.

■ Configuring Settings
Use one of these methods to set torque limits:
• Individually set the four torque limit quadrants using L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit].
• Use a communication option to set all four torque limit quadrants together.
Figure 12.33 shows the configuration method for each quadrant.

Parameter Details

Figure 12.33 Torque Limits and Analog Input Setting Parameters

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 337

12.7 L: Protection Functions

Note:
• When L7-01 to L7-04 and analog inputs or communication option torque limits set torque limits for the same quadrant, the drive
enables the lowest value.
In this example of parameter settings, the torque limit for quadrant 1 is 130% and the torque limit for quadrants 2, 3, and 4 is 150%.
Settings: L7-01 = 130%, L7-02 to L7-04 = 200%
• The drive output current limits maximum output torque. The torque limit is 150% of the rated output current for HD and to 120% of
the rated output current for ND. The actual output torque is not more than the limits of the drive rated output current when you set the
torque limit to a high value.

■ L7-01: Forward Torque Limit

Note:
• You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary. If you set the value too high, the drive can detect oC
[Overcurrent].
• If you set the value too low with large loads, the motor can stall.

■ L7-02: Reverse Torque Limit

Note:
• You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary. If you set the value too high, the drive can detect oC
[Overcurrent].
• If you set the value too low with large loads, the motor can stall.

■ L7-03: Forward Regenerative Trq Limit

Note:
• You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary. If you set the value too high, the drive can detect oC
[Overcurrent].
• If you set the value too low with large loads, the motor can stall.

■ L7-04: Reverse Regenerative Trq Limit

Note:
• You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary. If you set the value too high, the drive can detect oC
[Overcurrent].
• If you set the value too low with large loads, the motor can stall.

■ L7-06: Torque Limit Integral Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L7-06 Torque Limit Integral Time V/f OLV 200 ms

(04AC) Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit function. (5 - 10000 ms)
Expert

Decrease the setting value to increase torque limit responsiveness when you use torque limits and L7-07 = 1
[Torque Limit during Accel/Decel = Proportional & Integral control].
If there is hunting when torque limits are active, increase the setting value.

■ L7-07: Torque Limit during Accel/Decel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L7-07 Torque Limit during Accel/ V/f OLV 0

(04C9) Decel Sets the torque limit function during acceleration and deceleration. (0, 1)
Expert

0 : Proportional only
The torque limit function works with proportional control during acceleration and deceleration, and switches to
integral control at constant speed. Use this setting when quickly reaching the target speed is more important than
the torque limit during speed changes.
1 : Proportional & Integral control
The torque limit function always uses integral control. Use this setting when a very accurate torque limit is
necessary during speed changes, for example in winding machine applications.
If you make the torque limit the most important, it can:
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
• Not let the motor speed reach the frequency reference value during run at constant speed.

338 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

■ L7-16: Torque Limit Process at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L7-16 Torque Limit Process at V/f OLV 1

(044D) Start Assigns a time filter to allow the torque limit to build at start. (0, 1)
Expert

0 : Disabled
There is torque limit at start without a delay time.
Use this setting to maximize the response time when sudden acceleration or deceleration at start is necessary.
1 : Enabled
There is a delay time of 64 ms at start to build the torque limit.

◆ L8: Drive Protection

L8 parameters set protective functions that prevent faults such as overheating, phase loss, and ground faults.

■ L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(04AE) Sets the oH detection level in temperature. (50 - 130 °C)
Expert

If the heatsink temperature is more than the temperature set in this parameter, the drive detects an overheat pre-
alarm. To enable this function, set one of H2-01 to H2-03 [MFDO Function Select] to 20 [Drive Overheat Pre-
Alarm (oH)].
If the temperature increases to the overheat fault level, the drive will trigger an oH1 [Heatsink Overheat] fault and
stop operation.

■ L8-03: Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm V/f OLV 3

(04AF) Selection Sets operation after the drive detects an oH alarm. (0 - 4)
Expert

0 : Ramp to Stop
The drive ramps the motor to stop in the deceleration time. The output terminal set for Fault [H2-01 to H2-03 =
E] activates.
1 : Coast to Stop
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop. The output terminal set for Fault [H2-01 to H2-03 = E]
activates.
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. The output terminal set for Fault
[H2-01 to H2-03 = E] activates.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows oH and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.
4 : Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)
The drive decelerates to the level set in L8-19 [Freq Reduction @ oH Pre-Alarm] and continues operation. oH
flashes on the keypad.
Parameter Details

If the overheat pre-alarm is still ON after 10 s, the drive decelerates again. When the alarm is output, the drive
decelerates each 10 seconds. If the drive decelerates 10 times and the alarm continues to be output, the output
terminal set for oH Pre-Alarm Reduction Limit [H2-01 to H2-03 = 4D] activates. When the alarm is not output
during deceleration, the drive accelerates until it is at the frequency reference that was applicable before the alarm

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 339

12.7 L: Protection Functions

was turned off. Figure 12.34 shows the output of the alarm and the drive operation at a decreased output
frequency.

Figure 12.34 Drive Operation at a Decreased Output Frequency when the Overheat Alarm is Output

■ L8-05: Input Phase Loss Protection Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection V/f OLV Depends on o2-04

(04B1) Sel Sets the function to enable and disable input phase loss detection. (0 - 2)

0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
2 : Standard + dv/dt

■ L8-06: Input Phase Loss Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(04B2) Level When ripple is observed in the DC bus, expansion of the input bias is calculated and becomes the (0.0 - 50.0%)
input phase if the difference between the max and minimum values of the ripple are greater than
L8-06.

100% detection level = voltage (200V or 400 V) × √2

■ L8-07: Output Phase Loss Protection Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-07 Output Phase Loss V/f OLV 1

(04B3) Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable output phase loss detection. The drive starts output phase (0 - 2)
Expert loss detection when the output current decreases to less than 5% of the drive rated current.

Note:
The drive can incorrectly start output phase loss detection in these conditions:
• The motor rated current is very small compared to the drive rating.
• The drive is operating a PM motor with a small load.
0 : Disabled
1 : Fault when one phase is lost
If the drive loses one output phase, it will trigger LF [Output Phase Loss].
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop.
2 : Fault when two phases are lost
If the drive loses more than one output phase, it will trigger LF [Output Phase Loss].

340 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop.

■ L8-09: Output Ground Fault Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-09 Output Ground Fault V/f OLV 1

(04B5) Detection Sets the function to enable and disable ground fault protection. (0, 1)

0 : Disable
The drive will not detect ground faults.
1 : Enabled
If there is high leakage current or a ground short circuit in one or two output phases, the drive will detect GF
[Ground Fault].
Note:
If the ground path impedance is low, the drive can detect oC [Overcurrent], SC [Out Short Circuit or IGBT Fault], or ov [DC Bus
Overvoltage] instead of GF.

■ L8-10: Heatsink Fan Operation Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-10 Heatsink Fan Operation V/f OLV 0

(04B6) Selection Sets operation of the heatsink cooling fan. (0 - 1)

0 : During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-Delay

The drive turns on the fan when a Run command is active.
1 : Always On
The fan turns on when you supply power to the drive. When you release the Run command and the delay time set
in L8-11 [HeatsinkCoolingFan Off DelayTime] is expired, the fan stops. his setting extends the fan lifetime.

■ L8-11: Heatsink Fan Off-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-11 Heatsink Fan Off-Delay V/f OLV 60 s

(04B7) Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before it stops the cooling fan after it cancels the (0 - 300 s)
Run command when L8-10 = 0 [Heatsink Fan Operation Selection = During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-
Delay].

■ L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-12 Ambient Temperature V/f OLV 40 °C

(04B8) Setting Sets the ambient temperature of the drive installation area. (-10 °C - +60 °C)

Note:
The setting range changes when the L8-35 [Installation Method Selection] value changes:
• 0 [IP20/UL Open Type]: -10 °C to +60 °C
• 1 [Side-by-Side Mounting]: -10 °C to +50 °C
• 2 [IP20/UL Type 1]: -10 °C to +50 °C
• 3 [Finless Installation]: -10 °C to +50 °C
The drive automatically adjusts the drive rated current to the best value as specified by the set temperature. Set the
ambient temperature of the area where you install the drive to a value that is more than the drive rating.
Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 228 for information about derating as specified by
ambient temperature.
Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 341

12.7 L: Protection Functions

■ L8-15: Drive oL2 @ Low Speed Protection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-15 Drive oL2 @ Low Speed V/f OLV 1

(04BB) Protection Sets the function to decrease the drive overload level at which the drive will trigger oL2 [Drive (0, 1)
Overload] during low speed operation (6 Hz or slower) to prevent damage to the main circuit
transistors.

Note:
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before disabling this function at low speeds. If you frequently operate drives with
high output current in low speed ranges, it can cause heat stress and decrease the life span of drive IGBTs.
0 : Disabled (No Additional Derate)
The drive does not decrease the overload protection level.
1 : Enabled (Reduced oL2 Level)
When the drive detects oL2 during low speed operation, it automatically decreases the overload detection level.
At zero speed, the drive derates the overload by 50%.

■ L8-18: Software Current Limit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-18 Software Current Limit V/f OLV 0

(04BE) Selection Set the software current limit selection function to prevent damage to the main circuit transistor (0, 1)
Expert caused by too much current.

0 : Disabled
When the output current is at the software current limit value, the drive does not restrict the output voltage.
Note:
The drive may detect an oC [Overcurrent] when loads are particularly heavy or the acceleration time is particularly short.
1 : Enabled
When the output current is at the software current limit value, the drive decreases output voltage to decrease
output current.
When the output current decreases to the software current limit level, the drive starts usual operation.

■ L8-19: Freq Reduction @ oH Pre-Alarm

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-19 Freq Reduction @ oH Pre- V/f OLV 0.8

(04BF) Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference during an oH alarm. (0.1 - 0.9)
Expert

When these two conditions are correct, this function is enabled:

• L8-03 = 4 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Ope Selection = Run@L8-19 Rate]
• oH alarm is output

■ L8-35: Installation Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-35 Installation Method V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(04EC) Selection Sets the type of drive installation. (0 - 3)
Expert

Note:
• Parameter A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] does not initialize this parameter.
• This parameter is set to the correct value when the drive is shipped. Change the value only in these conditions:
–Side-by-Side installation
–When you install a UL Type 1 kit on an IP20/UL Open Type drive to convert the drive to an IP20/UL Type 1 drive.
–Mounting a standard drive with the heatsink outside the enclosure panel.

342 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.7 L: Protection Functions

The overload protection detection level for the drive is automatically adjusted to the optimal value in accordance
with the setting value. Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 228 for information about
derating as specified by ambient temperature.
0 : IP20/UL Open Type
Use this setting to install IP20/UL Open Type drives.
Make sure that there is 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum of space between drives or between the drive and side of the
enclosure panel.
1 : Side-by-Side Mounting
Use this setting to install more than one drive side-by-side.
2 : IP20/UL Type 1
Use this setting to install IP20/UL Type 1 or IP55 drives.
3 : Finless Installation
Use this setting to install Finless Type drives.

■ L8-40: Carrier Freq Reduction Off-Delay

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-40 Carrier Freq Reduction Off- V/f OLV 0.50 s

(04F1) Delay Sets the length of time until the automatically reduced carrier frequency returns to the condition (0.00 - 2.00 s)
Expert before the reduction.

Set L8-40 ≠ 0.00 to enable the carrier frequency reduction function during start-up. When operation starts, the
drive automatically decreases the carrier frequency. When the time set in L8-40 is expired, the carrier frequency
returns to the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection].

■ L8-41: High Current Alarm Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-41 High Current Alarm V/f OLV 0

(04F2) Selection Sets the function to cause an HCA [Current Alarm] when the output current is more than 150% of (0, 1)
Expert the drive rated current.

0 : No
The drive will not detect HCA.
1 : Yes
If the output current is more than 150% of the drive rated current, the drive will detect HCA.
The MFDO terminal set for an Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates.

■ L8-42: Input Phase Loss Detection Time 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-42 Input Phase Loss Detection V/f OLV 2s

(04F3) Time 2 Sets the amount of time that an Input Phase Loss condition has to be present before a fault is
triggered.

■ L8-43: Output Phase Loss Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-43 High Current Alarm V/f OLV 0.5 s

(04F4) Selection Sets the amount of time that an Output Phase Loss condition has to be present before a fault is (0.0 - 2.0 s)
triggered.
Parameter Details

■ L8-62: Input Phase Loss Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-62 Input Phase Loss Detection V/f OLV 0

(04D8) Sets stopping method when an input phase loss fault (PF) occurs. (0 - 3)

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 343

12.7 L: Protection Functions

0 : Ramp to stop
Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1 : Coast to stop
2 : Stop (Use C1-09)
Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3 : Alarm Only
Drive continues operation.

■ L8-65: PF Min Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-65 PF Detection Minimum V/f OLV 10%

(04DB) Current Level Percentage of rated current. Used for standard method and dv/dt method. The parameter is only (0 - 100%)
active during run, and is not evaluated for dv/dt detection method at start.

■ L8-70: PF dv/dt Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-70 PF dv/dt Level V/f OLV 2100 V/sec

(04E0) (0 - 10,000 V/sec)

■ L8-79: dv/dt Tune Factor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-79 dv/dt Tune Factor V/f OLV 130%

(04E9) (99 - 150%)

■ L8-88: Safe Disable Operation Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

L8-88 Safe Disable Operation V/f OLV 0

(04F2) Mode Determines the operation performed by the drive when the Safe Disable input is activated. (0, 1)

When the Safe Disabled Input is triggered, the operator displays and alarm, and the corresponding output terminal
will react as follows:
L8-88 Setting Safe Disable Operation Alarm Display during Safety Alarm Output Drive Ready
Selection Disable [H2-xx = 10] [H2-xx = 6]

0 [Mode 0] Hbb ALM flashes ON OFF

1 [Mode 1] Hbb ALM flashes OFF ON

0 : Mode 0
1 : Mode 1
L7 compatible

344 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.8 n: Special Adjustment

12.8 n: Special Adjustment

n parameters set these functions:
• Function to prevent hunting
• High-slip braking
• Motor line-to-line resistance online tuning
• Fine-tune the parameters that adjust motor control

◆ n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning

The speed feedback detection reduction function (or AFR: Automatic Frequency Regulator) helps the speed
become stable when you suddenly apply or remove a load.
Note:
Before you change n2-xx parameters, do one of these procedures:
• Set the motor parameters and V/f pattern correctly.
• Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.

■ n2-01: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

n2-01 Speed Feedback Detection V/f OLV 1.50

(0584) Control (AFR) Gain Sets the gain of the AFR function as a magnification value. Usually it is not necessary to change (0.00 - 10.00)
this setting.

Adjust this parameter in these conditions:

• If hunting or oscillation occurs with light loads, increase the setting value in 0.05-unit increments and examine
the response.
• When torque is not sufficient with heavy loads or to make the torque or speed response better, decrease the
setting value in 0.05-unit increments and examine the response.

■ n2-02: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

n2-02 Speed Feedback Detection V/f OLV 50 ms

(0585) Control (AFR) Time Sets the time constant that sets the rate of change for the AFR function. Usually it is not necessary (0 - 2000 ms)
Constant 1 to change this setting.

Adjust this parameter in these conditions:

• If there is hunting or oscillation with a light load, increase the setting value in 50 ms increments and examine
the response. If the load inertia is large, increase the setting value in 50 ms increments and examine the
response.
• If torque is not sufficient with a heavy load or if you must increase torque or speed responsiveness, decrease the
setting value in 10 ms increments and examine the response.
Note:
• Set n2-02 ≤ n2-03. If n2-02 > n2-03, the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
• When you change the value in n2-02, also change the value in C4-02 [Torque Compensation Delay Time] by the same ratio.

■ n2-03: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

n2-03 Speed Feedback Detection V/f OLV 750 ms

(0586) Control (AFR) Time Sets the time constant that sets the speed difference of the AFR function. Use this parameter for (0 - 2000 ms)
Constant 2 speed searches or regeneration. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Parameter Details

Adjust this parameter in these conditions:

• If the drive detects ov [Overvoltage] when acceleration stops under high-inertia loads, increase the setting value
in 50 ms increments.
If the drive detects ov when the load changes suddenly, increase the setting value in 50 ms increments.
• To increase the responsiveness of torque and speed, decrease the setting value in 10 ms increments and examine
the response.
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 345

12.8 n: Special Adjustment

Note:
• Set n2-02 ≤ n2-03. If n2-02 > n2-03, the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].

◆ n6: Online Tuning

n6 parameters are used to set the online tuning function for motor line-to-line resistance.
The Online Tuning for motor line-to-line resistance is used to prevent degradation of speed control accuracy due
to motor temperature fluctuation and motor stalls due to insufficient torque.

■ n6-01: Online Tuning Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

n6-01 Online Tuning Selection V/f OLV 1

(0570) Sets the type of motor data that Online Tuning uses for OLV control. (0 - 2)
Expert

0 : Disabled
1 : Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning
The drive adjusts the motor line-to-line resistance during run. This procedure is applicable for speed values 6 Hz
and less. It also adjusts the motor resistance value to increase the overload capacity in the low speed range.
2 : Voltage Correction Tuning
The drive adjusts the output voltage during run to increase overload tolerance and minimize the effects of high
temperatures on speed precision.
Note:
Setting 2 is enabled only when b8-01 = 0 [Energy Saving Control Selection = Disabled].

346 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

o parameters set keypad functions.
Note:
You cannot use the optional LED keypad to set these parameters.

Table 12.11 Parameters You Cannot Set with the LED Keypad
No. Name No. Name

o1-24 to o1-29 Custom Monitor 1 to 12 o4-22 Time Format

o1-39 Show Initial Setup Screen o4-23 Date Format

o2-27 bCE Detection Selection o4-24 bAT Detection Selection

o3-04 Select Backup/Restore Location o5-01 Log Start/Stop Selection

o3-05 Select Items to Backup/Restore o5-02 Log Sampling Interval

o3-06 Auto Parameter Backup Selection o5-03 to o5-12 Log Monitor Data 1 to 10

o3-07 Auto Parameter Backup Interval

◆ o1: Keypad Display Selection

o1 parameters select the parameters shown on the initial keypad screen and to configure the parameter setting
units and display units. These parameters also adjust the backlight and contrast of the LCD display.

■ Home Screen Display Format

o1-40 [Home Screen Display Selection] changes the display of the monitor shown on the Home screen. You can
show numerical values or one of these three displays on the Home screen monitor:

A - Set Ux-xx [Monitors] to o1-24, o1-25, and o1-26. B - Set display ranges to o1-42, o1-44, and o1-46.

Figure 12.35 Bar Graph Display

A - Set Ux-xx [Monitors] to o1-24. B - Set display ranges to o1-55.

Figure 12.36 Analog Gauge Display

Parameter Details

A - Set Ux-xx [Monitors] (Monitor 1) to o1-24. B - Set Ux-xx [Monitors] (Monitor 2) to o1-25.

Figure 12.37 Trend Plot Display

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 347

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

■ o1-01: User Monitor Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-01 User Monitor Selection V/f OLV 106

(0500) Sets the U monitor for the Drive Mode. This parameter is only available with an LED keypad. (104 - 830)
RUN

When the drive is in Drive Mode, push on the keypad to cycle through this data: frequency reference →
rotational direction → output frequency → output current → o1-01 selection.
Set the x-xx part of Ux-xx that is shown in the fifth position in Drive Mode. For example, to show U1-05 [Motor
Speed], set o1-01 = 105.
Note:
The monitors that you can select are different for different control methods.

■ o1-02: Monitor Selection at Power-up

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-02 Monitor Selection at Power- V/f OLV 1

(0501) up Sets the monitor item that the keypad screen shows after you energize the drive. Refer to “U: (1 - 5)
RUN Monitors” for information about the monitor items that the keypad screen can show. This
parameter is only available with an LED keypad.
Expert

1 : Frequency Reference (U1-01)

2 : Direction
3 : Output Frequency (U1-02)
4 : Output Current (U1-03)
5 : User Monitor (o1-01)
Shows the monitor item selected in o1-01 [User Monitor Selection].

■ o1-03: Keypad Display Unit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-03 Keypad Display Unit V/f OLV 0

(0502) Selection Sets the display units for the frequency reference and output frequency. (0 - 3)

Note:
• Select the setting unit of these parameters:
–d1-01 to d1-08 [Reference 1 to 8]
–U1-01 [Frequency Reference]
–U1-02 [Output Frequency]
–U1-05 [Motor Speed]
–U1-16 [SFS Output Frequency]
–U4-14 [PeakHold Output Freq]
• For monitor 2, the setting value is always 0 [Hz Unit].
0 : 0.01 Hz units
1 : 0.01% units
The maximum output frequency is 100%.
2 : Revolutions Per Minute (RPM)
The drive uses the maximum output frequency and number of motor poles calculate this value automatically.
Note:
When you set o1-03 = 2 [r/min], make sure that you set the number of motor poles in E2-04 [Motor Pole Count].
3 : User Units
Uses o1-10 and o1-11 to set the unit of measure. The value of parameter o1-10 is the value when you remove the
decimal point from the maximum output frequency. Parameter o1-11 is to the number of digits after the decimal
point in the maximum output frequency.
To display a maximum output frequency of 100.00, set parameters to these values:

348 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

• o1-10 = 10000
• o1-11 = 2 [User Units Decimal Position = 2 Dec (XXX.XX)]

■ o1-10: User Units Maximum Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-10 User Units Maximum Value V/f OLV Determined by o1-03

(0520) Sets the value that the drive shows as the maximum output frequency. (1 - 60000)
Expert

To display a maximum output frequency of 100.00, set parameters to these values:

• o1-10 = 10000
• o1-11 = 2 [User Units Decimal Position = Two Decimal Places (XXX.XX)]
Note:
Set o1-03 = 3 [Frequency Display Unit Selection = User Units (o1-10 & o1-11)] before you set o1-10 and o1-11.

■ o1-11: User Units Decimal Position

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-11 User Units Decimal V/f OLV Determined by o1-03

(0521) Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values. (0 - 3)
Expert

0 : No Decimal Places (XXXXX)

1 : One Decimal Places (XXXX.X)
2 : Two Decimal Places (XXX.XX)
3 : Three Decimal Places (XX.XXX)
Note:
Set o1-03 = 3 [Frequency Display Unit Selection = User Units (o1-10 & o1-11)] before you set o1-10 [User Units Maximum Value] and
o1-11.

■ o1-24 to o1-29: Custom Monitor 1 to 6

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o1-24 to o1-29: Custom Monitor 1 to 6 V/f OLV o1-24: 101

(11AD - 11B2) Sets a maximum of 6 monitors as user monitors. This parameter is only available when using an o1-25: 102
RUN LCD keypad. o1-26: 103
o1-27 to o1-29: 0
(0, 101 - 999)

These parameters save the monitor items selected by the LCD keypad [Custom Monitor].
Note:
• You can show a maximum of three selected monitors on one LCD keypad screen.
–When you select only one monitor, the text size of this monitor increases. For example, when o1-25 to o1-29 = 0, the text size of the
monitor saved in o1-24 increases.
–When you select two monitors, the text size of these monitors increase.
–When you select four or more monitors, the fourth monitor and all additional monitors are shown on the next screens.
• Monitors selected with o1-24 to o1-26 can be displayed as a bar graph, analog gauge, or trend plot.
–Bar graph display: 3 monitors maximum
Select with o1-24, o1-25, and o1-26.
–Analog gauge display: 1 monitor
Select with o1-24.
–Trend plot display: 2 monitors
Select with o1-24 and o1-25.
• You can only set parameters o1-24 to o1-26 with analog output monitors.
Parameter Details

• You can set all monitors to parameters o1-27 to o1-29.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 349

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

◆ o2: Keypad Operation

■ o2-01: LO/RE Key Function Selection
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-01 LO/RE Key Function V/f OLV 0

(0505) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function that lets you use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes.
Expert

0 : Disabled
You cannot use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes.
1 : Enabled
You can use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes when the drive is stopped. When LOCAL
Mode is selected, on the keypad will come on.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Fully examine all mechanical and electrical connections before you change o2-01 [LO/
RE Key Function Selection]. Sudden starts can cause serious injury or death. If there is an active Run command when you
switch from LOCAL to REMOTE Mode, the drive can start suddenly.
Table 12.12 Function Settings with o2-01 and b1-07

Function Selection Switching from LOCAL Mode to REMOTE Mode Switching from REMOTE Mode to LOCAL Mode

o2-01 = 0 [Disabled] The drive will not switch modes. The drive will not switch modes.

o2-01 = 1 [Enabled] The drive will not start operating although the Run command is active. The drive cannot operate because the Run command is
When you set Run command to active again, the drive will start to run. not enabled.

■ o2-02: STOP Key Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

o2-02 STOP Key Function V/f OLV 0

(0506) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function to use on the keypad to stop the drive when the Run command source for
Expert the drive is REMOTE (external) and not assigned to the keypad.

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
stays enabled when the Run command source has not been assigned to the keypad.
To start the drive again after you push to stop operation, turn the external Run command OFF and ON again.

■ o2-03: User Parameter Default Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-03 User Parameter Default V/f OLV 0

(0507) Value Sets the function to keep the settings of changed parameters as user parameter defaults to use (0 - 2)
Expert during initialization.

When you set o2-03 = 1 [Set defaults], the drive saves changed parameter settings as user parameter setting
values in a part of the memory that is isolated from drive parameters.
When you set A1-03 = 1110 [Initialize Parameters = User Initialization] to initialize the drive, the drive resets the
internal parameter setting values to those user parameter setting values.
0 : No change
1 : Set defaults
Saves changed parameter setting values as user default settings.
Set o2-03 = 1 then push to save the user parameter setting values. After the drive saves the setting value, o2-
03 automatically resets to 0.
2 : Clear all
Deletes all of the saved user parameter setting values.

350 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

Set o2-03 = 2 then push to clear the user parameter setting values. The drive will automatically reset o2-03 to
0. If you delete the user parameter setting values, you cannot set A1-03 = 1110 to initialize parameters.

■ o2-04: Drive Model (KVA) Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

o2-04 Drive Model (KVA) V/f OLV Determined by the drive

(0508) Selection Sets the Drive Model code. Set this parameter after replacing the control board. (-)
Expert

NOTICE: Set o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] correctly. If you set this parameter incorrectly, it will decrease drive
performance, cause the protection function to operate incorrectly, and cause damage to the drive.
Note:
When the setting value of o2-04 changes, related parameter setting values also change.
Table 12.13 lists the relation between o2-04 setting values and drive models.
Table 12.13 Drive Models and o2-04 Settings
Drive Model o2-04 Setting Drive Model o2-04 Setting

4009 6E 4031 9D

4015 6F 4039 9E

4018 9A 4045 9F

4024 9C

■ o2-05: Home Mode Freq Ref Entry Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

o2-05 Home Mode Freq Ref Entry V/f OLV 0

(0509) Mode (0, 1)
Expert Sets the function that makes it necessary to push to use the keypad to change the frequency
reference value while in Drive Mode.

0 : ENTER Key Required

You must push to use the keypad to change the frequency reference value.
1 : Immediate / MOP-style
The frequency reference changes when you enter it with the keypad. This then changes the output frequency. It is
not necessary to push . The drive keeps the frequency reference for 5 seconds after you use and on
the keypad to change the frequency reference value.

■ o2-06: Keypad Disconnect Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-06 Keypad Disconnect V/f OLV 0

(050A) Detection Sets the function that stops the drive if you disconnect the keypad connection cable from the drive (0, 1)
Expert or if you damage the cable while the keypad is the Run command source.

This parameter continues to operate if the keypad installed to the drive becomes disconnected.
This parameter is enabled in these conditions:
• When b1-02 = 0 [Run Command Selection 1 = Keypad] or b1-16 = 0 [Run Command Selection 2 = Keypad]
• In LOCAL Mode
0 : Disabled
The drive continues operation when it detects a keypad disconnection.
Parameter Details

1 : Enabled
The drive stops operation, detects oPr [Keypad Connection Fault], and the motor coasts to stop when the drive
detects a keypad disconnection.

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 351

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

■ o2-07: Keypad RUN Direction @ Power-up

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-07 Keypad RUN Direction @ V/f OLV 0

(0527) Power-up Sets the direction of motor rotation when the drive is energized and the keypad is the Run (0, 1)
Expert command source.

This parameter is enabled in these conditions:

• When b1-02 = 0 [Run Command Selection 1 = Keypad] or b1-16 = 0 [Run Command Selection 2 = Keypad]
• In LOCAL Mode
0 : Forward
1 : Reverse

■ o2-09: Reserved
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-09 Reserved - -
(050D)
Expert

■ o2-19: Parameter Write during Uv

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-19 Parameter Write during Uv V/f OLV 0

(061F) Lets you change parameters during Uv [Undervoltage]. ( 0, 1 )
Expert

0 : Disable
1 : Enabled

■ o2-23: External 24V Powerloss Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

o2-23 External 24V Powerloss V/f OLV 0

(11F8) Detection Sets the function to give a warning if the backup external 24 V power supply turns off when the (0, 1)
RUN main circuit power supply is in operation.
Expert

Note:
The drive will not run when it is operating from one 24-V external power supply.
0 : Disabled
The drive does not detect the loss of the 24-V external power supply.
1 : Enabled
The keypad shows the L24v [Loss of External Power 24 Supply] indicator if the drive detects the loss of the 24-V
external power supply.
Note:
A minor fault signal is not output from H2-xx = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm].

■ o2-26: Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-26 Alarm Display at Ext. 24V V/f OLV 0

(1563) Power When you connect a backup external 24 V power supply, this parameter sets the function to (0, 1)
Expert trigger an alarm when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.

0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect EP24v [External Power 24V Supply] if the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
The [Ready] light on the LED Status Ring flashes quickly to identify that drive operation is not possible.

352 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

1 : Enabled
The drive detects EP24v when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
Note:
A minor fault signal is not output from H2-xx = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm].

■ o2-27: bCE Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o2-27 bCE Detection Selection V/f OLV 3

(1565) Sets drive operation if the Bluetooth device is disconnected when you operate the drive in (0 - 4)
Expert Bluetooth Mode.

0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
3 : Alarm Only
4 : No Alarm Display

◆ o3: Copy Function

o3 parameters set the operation of the parameter backup function.

■ o3-01: Copy Keypad Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-01 Copy Keypad Function V/f OLV 0

(0515) Selection Sets the function that saves and copies drive parameters to a different drive with the keypad. (0 - 3)

0 : Copy Select
1 : Backup (drive → keypad)
The parameter setting values are read from the drive and saved in the keypad.
2 : Restore (keypad → drive)
Copies the parameter setting values saved in the keypad to a different drive.
3 : Verify (check for mismatch)
Makes sure that the parameter setting values in the drive agree with the parameters saved in the keypad.

■ o3-02: Copy Allowed Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection V/f OLV 0

(0516) Sets the copy function when o3-01 = 1 [Copy Keypad Function Selection = Backup (drive → (0, 1)
keypad)].

Note:
When you select [Parameter Backup] on the keypad menu screen to do the backup function, the drive automatically sets o3-02 = 1.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

■ o3-04: Select Backup/Restore Location

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details

o3-04 Select Backup/Restore V/f OLV 0

(0B3E) Location Sets the storage location for drive parameters when you back up and restore parameters. This (0 - 3)
parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad.

You can use the LCD keypad to make a maximum of 4 parameter backup sets.
0 : Memory Location 1
1 : Memory Location 2
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 353

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

2 : Memory Location 3
3 : Memory Location 4

■ o3-05: Select Items to Backup/Restore

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-05 Select Items to Backup/ V/f OLV 0

(0BDA) Restore Sets which parameters are backed up, restored, and referenced. This parameter is only available (0, 1)
when using an LCD keypad.

0 : Standard Parameters
1 : Standard + DWEZ Parameters
Note:
• Parameters qx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Parameters] and rx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Connections] show when A1-07 = 1 or 2 [DriveWorksEZ
Function Selection = DWEZ Enabled or Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input].
• The password for DriveWorksEZ PC software is necessary to back up qx-xx and rx-xx. If you enter an incorrect password, the drive
detects PWEr [DWEZ Password Mismatch].

■ o3-06: Auto Parameter Backup Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-06 Auto Parameter Backup V/f OLV 1

(0BDE) Selection Sets the function that automatically backs up parameters. This parameter is only available when (0, 1)
using an LCD keypad.

When you connect the drive and keypad, parameters set to the drive are automatically backed up to the keypad as
specified by the setting of parameters o3-06 and o3-07.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Note:
When you replace the LCD keypad then energize the drive, the keypad shows the restore operation screen automatically to restore the
drive configuration with the parameters backed up to the LCD keypad. If you connect an LCD keypad that does not have parameter
backup data, the keypad will not show the restore operation screen.

■ o3-07: Auto Parameter Backup Interval

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o3-07 Auto Parameter Backup V/f OLV 1

(0BDF) Interval Sets the interval at which the automatic parameter backup function saves parameters from the (0 - 3)
drive to the keypad.

The drive saves parameter settings to the keypad at these times:

1. After you energize the drive and the auto backup period passes.
2. When you use ROM enter or the keypad to change parameters, the drive saves those changes in the drive,
waits for the auto backup period to pass, then saves those parameters in the keypad.
Note:
The drive can write data to the keypad a maximum of 100,000 times. If you write data to the keypad more than 100,000 times, you must
replace the keypad.
0 : Every 10 minutes
1 : Every 30 minutes
2 : Every 60 minutes
3 : Every 12 hours

◆ o4: Maintenance Mon Settings

o4 parameters set the expected service life to help you know when to replace parts. The drive will show an alarm
to tell you when the replacement part interval is near.

354 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

■ o4-01: Elapsed Operating Time Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-01 Elapsed Operating Time V/f OLV 0h

(050B) Setting Sets the initial value of the cumulative drive operation time in 10-hour units. (0 - 9999 h)
Expert

When you select o4-01 on the keypad, it will show the current value of U4-01 in units of 10 hours (h). When you
change the setting of o4-01 through the monitor, the U4-01 count starts again as specified by the setting of o4-01.
Note:
Set this parameter in 10-hour (h) units. When o4-01 = 30, U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time] = 300 h.

■ o4-02: Elapsed Operating Time Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-02 Elapsed Operating Time V/f OLV 1

(050C) Selection Sets the condition that counts the cumulative operation time. (0, 1)
Expert

0 : U4-01 Shows Total Power-up Time

Counts the time from when the drive is energized to when it is de-energized.
1 : U4-01 Shows Total RUN Time
Counts the time that the drive outputs voltage.

■ o4-03: Fan Operation Time Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-03 Fan Operation Time Setting V/f OLV 0h

(050E) Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10-hour (0 - 9999 h)
Expert units.

Use monitor U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] to view the total operation time of the cooling fan. When you
replace a cooling fan, set o4-03 = 0 to reset U4-03. Select o4-03 on the keypad to show the current value of U4-03
in 10-hour (h) units. If you use the monitor to change o4-03, the recount of U4-03 starts with the o4-03 setting.
Note:
The drive sets o4-03 in 10-hour (h) units. When o4-03 = 30, U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] will show “300 h”.

■ o4-05: Capacitor Maintenance Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance V/f OLV 0%

(051D) Setting Sets the U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
Expert

When you replace a drive, set o4-05 = 0 to reset U4-05. When the o4-05 setting changes, the count of U4-05
starts again as specified by the setting of o4-05. After you complete the configuration, o4-05 automatically resets
to 0.
Note:
The maintenance period changes for different operating environments.

■ o4-07: Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details

o4-07 Softcharge Relay V/f OLV 0%

(0523) Maintenance Set Sets the U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
Expert

When you replace a drive, set o4-07 = 0 to reset U4-06. When the o4-07 setting changes, the count of U4-06
starts again as specified by the setting of o4-07. After you complete the configuration, o4-07 automatically resets
to 0.
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 355

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

Note:
The maintenance period changes for different operating environments.

■ o4-09: IGBT Maintenance Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting V/f OLV 0%

(0525) Sets the U4-07 [IGBT Maintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
Expert

When you replace a drive, set o4-09 = 0 to reset U4-07. When the o4-09 setting changes, the count of U4-07
starts again as specified by the setting of o4-09. After you complete the configuration, o4-09 automatically resets
to 0.
Note:
The maintenance period changes for different operating environments.

■ o4-11: Fault Trace/History Init (U2/U3)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-11 Fault Trace/History Init V/f OLV 0

(0510) (U2/U3) Resets the records of Monitors U2-xx [Fault Trace] and U3-xx [Fault History]. (0, 1)
Expert

Note:
When you initialize the drive with A1-03 [Initialize Parameters], the drive will not reset the records for U2-xx and U3-xx.
0 : Disabled
Keeps the records of Monitors U2-xx and U3-xx.
1 : Enabled
Resets the records for Monitors U2-xx and U3-xx. After the reset, the drive automatically resets o4-11 to 0.

■ o4-12: kWh Monitor Initialization

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization V/f OLV 0

(0512) Resets the monitor values for U4-10 [kWh, Lower 4 Digits] and U4-11 [kWh, Upper 5 Digits]. (0, 1)
Expert

Note:
When you initialize the drive with A1-03 [Initialize Parameters], the drive will not reset U4-10 and U4-11.
0 : No Reset
Keeps the monitor values for U4-10 and U4-11.
1 : Reset
Resets the values of U4-10 and U4-11. After the reset, the drive automatically resets o4-12 to 0.

■ o4-13: RUN Command Counter @ Initialize

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-13 RUN Command Counter @ V/f OLV 0

(0528) Initialize Resets the monitor values for U4-02 [Num of Run Commands], U4-24 [Number of Runs (Low)], (0, 1)
Expert and U4-25 [Number of Runs (High)].

0 : No Reset
Keeps the monitor values for U4-02, U4-24, and U4-25.
1 : Reset
Resets the values of U4-02, U4-24, and U4-25. After the reset, the drive automatically resets o4-13 to 0.

356 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

■ o4-22: Time Format

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-22 Time Format V/f OLV 0

(154F) Sets the time display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 2)
RUN
Expert

Sets the display of the time shown in the upper-left of the LCD keypad screen.
0 : 24 Hour Clock
1 : 12 Hour Clock
2 : 12 Hour JP Clock

■ o4-23: Date Format

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-23 Date Format V/f OLV 0

(1550) Sets the date display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 2)
RUN
Expert

Sets the date format that the drive uses for the fault history and other records.
0 : YYYY/MM/DD
1 : DD/MM/YYYY
2 : MM/DD/YYYY

■ o4-24: bAT Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o4-24 bAT Detection Selection V/f OLV 0

(310F) Sets the operation when the drive detects bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage] and TiM [Keypad (0 - 2)
RUN Time Not Set]. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
Expert

0 : Disable
The drive will not detect bAT or TiM.
1 : Enable (Alarm Detected)
The keypad shows bAT or TiM and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set to Alarm [H2-01 to H2-
03 = 10] activates.
2 : Enable (Fault Detected)
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop. The output terminal set for Fault [H2-01 to H2-03 = E]
activates.

◆ o5: Log Function

The data log function saves drive status information as a CSV file in the microSD memory card in the keypad.
Monitors Ux-xx are the source of data log information. You can record a maximum of 10 monitors.
Change the LCD keypad screen from the main menu to the Diagnostic Tools screen and select the data log
function. Set the number of the monitor to record and the sampling time, then start to record the data log.
Table 12.14 Setting Parameters for Data Log Items
No. Name Default Data Log Monitors
Parameter Details

o5-03 Log Monitor Data 1 101 U1-01 [Frequency Reference]

o5-04 Log Monitor Data 2 102 U1-02 [Output Frequency]

o5-05 Log Monitor Data 3 103 U1-03 [Output Current]

o5-06 Log Monitor Data 4 107 U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage]

o5-07 Log Monitor Data 5 108 U1-08 [Output Power]

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 357

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

No. Name Default Data Log Monitors

o5-08 Log Monitor Data 6 000 Not selected

o5-09 Log Monitor Data 7 000 Not selected

o5-10 Log Monitor Data 8 000 Not selected

o5-11 Log Monitor Data 9 000 Not selected

o5-12 Log Monitor Data 10 000 Not selected

Note:
• Do not de-energize the drive or disconnect the keypad from the drive during log transfer communication. A loss of connection can
cause the log function to fail after you restore power or connect the keypad.
• You can use a microSDHC card that has a maximum of 32 GB capacity.

■ Log File Specifications

Item Specification

File storage location A folder called [Log_File] is created in the root directory of the microSD card.

Filename GLOG0xxx.csv
Note:
[xxx] identifies a 3-digit decimal number
Maximum number of files 999 (GLOG0001.csv to GLOG0999.csv)

Character code ASCII code

Line break code <CR><LF>

Separating character [ , ] (Commas)

Header rows First Row: Drive information including the drive model, software version, control method, and sampling time
Second Row: Log data information including the monitor number, number decimal points, and unit code

■ Log File Configuration

The [Log_Files] folder is created in the root directory of the micro SD card. This is where the log data is stored as
CSV files. Log data files are created in this configuration. The number of rows changes when the number of
selected monitors change.
First Row Drive information

Second Row Log data information

Third Row Log data 1

: Log data 2

: Log data 3

: :

Last Row Log data n

First Row: Drive Information

This example shows the data text strings and data generated for the first row of log data.
Example of generated data: 00,0012,160107111230,LA500,VSLA24011,2,62,1000,000001
Number
No. Item of Example Description
Charac
ters

1 Attribute 2 00 [00] shows that the record is a drive information record.

2 File number 4 0012 Generates the [xxx] part (a 3-digit decimal number) of the [GLOG0xxx.csv] filename of the log data
in hexadecimal format.
Example filename of [GLOG0018.csv]: 018 (Dec.) = 0012 (Hex.)

3 Time stamp *1 12 160107111230 Date file was generated

• Date: 20YY/MM/DD
• Time in 24-hour format: HH:MM:SS
Example data of [160107111230]: 11:12:30 on January 7, 2016

4 Model 5 LA500 Drive model information

5 Software number 9 VSLA24011 Drive software number

6 Control Method Selection 1 2 Setting value (Hex.) of A1-02 [Control Method Selection]

358 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

Number
of
No. Item Example Description
Charac
ters

7 Drive capacity 2 62 Setting value (Hex.) of o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]

8 Sampling time 5 1000 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-02 [Log Sampling Interval]
(Maximum) Unit: ms

9 Row number 6 000001 Row number (Hex.) in the data log file

*1 If you do not set the time in the keypad, the text string of [000000000000] is generated to show the time.
Second Row: Log Data Information
This example shows the data text strings and data generated for the second row of log data.
Example of generated data:
01,0012,160107111230,0101,0201,0102,0201,0103,0206,0107,0005,0108,0209,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0
000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,000002

No. Item Number of Description

Characters

1 Attribute 2 [01] shows that the record is a log data information record.

2 File number 4 Generates the [xxx] part (a 3-digit decimal number) of the [GLOG0xxx.csv] filename of the log data in hexadecimal
format.

3 Time stamp 12 Date file was generated

4 Monitor Number 1 *1 4 Monitor number selected by o5-03 [Log Monitor Data 1]

Ex.: 0101 (Dec.) for U1-01

5 Monitor Unit 1 *2 4 Unit code and number of decimal places used for the monitor selected with o5-03
Example when U1-01 = 30.00 Hz:
Number of decimal places = 2, Hz unit code = 01, monitor unit 1 = 0201 (Hex.)

6 Monitor number 2 4 Monitor number (Dec.) selected by o5-04 [Log Monitor Data 2]

7 Monitor Unit 2 4 Unit code and number of decimal places used for the monitor selected with o5-04

: : : :

22 Monitor number 10 4 Monitor number (Dec.) selected by o5-12 [Log Monitor Data10]

23 Monitor Unit 10 4 Unit code and number of decimal places used for the monitor selected with o5-12

24 to 27 Reserved 4 -

28 Row number 6 Row number (Hex.) in the data log file

*1 If there is no data log monitor selected, the text string of [0000] is generated.
*2 Refer to Table 12.15 for information about unit codes.
Table 12.15 Unit Codes
Unit Code (Hex.) Unit Unit Code (Hex.) Unit Unit Code (Hex.) Unit Unit Code (Hex.) Unit

00 – 08 PPR 10 H 18 0H

01 Hz 09 kW 11 V 19 –

02 RPM 0A Ω 12 us 1A –

03 % 0B ms 13 min 1B –

04 VAC 0C kHz 14 °C 1C –

05 VDC 0D PSI 15 W 1D –

06 A 0E MPM 16 kWH 1E –

07 sec 0F FPM 17 MWH 1F –

Third and Subsequent Rows: Log Data

This example shows the data text strings and data generated for the third row of log data.
Example of generated data:
Parameter Details

02,0012,160107111239,1770,1770,00BE,0118,0028,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,00000C
Number of
No. Item Description
Characters

1 Attribute 2 [02] shows that the record is a monitor data record.

2 File number 4 Generates the [xxx] part (a 3-digit decimal number) of the [GLOG0xxx.csv] filename of the log data in hexadecimal
format.
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 359

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

No. Item Number of Description

Characters

3 Time stamp 12 Data log data was retrieved (YYMMDDHHMMSS)

4 Log Monitor Data 1 4 Log monitor data (Hex.) of the monitor selected with o5-03 [Log Monitor Data 1]

5 Log Monitor Data 2 4 Log monitor data (Hex.) of the monitor selected with o5-04 [Log Monitor Data 2]

: : : :

13 Log Monitor Data 10 4 Log monitor data (Hex.) of the monitor selected with o5-12 [Log Monitor Data 10]

14 Reserved 4 -

15 Encoding data 4 Log Monitor Data 1 to 10 Code Data (Hex.)

Bits 0 through 9 show the encoding of log monitor data 1 1 through 10. A bit value of 1 shows that the data represents
a negative value. (Log monitor data 1 through 10 is absolute value data without encoding)
Example when log monitor data 2, 5, and 8 show negative values: Bits 1, 4, and 7 have values of 1, and the encoding
data = 0010010010 (Bin.) = 0092 (Hex.)

16 Row number 6 Row number (Hex.) in the data log file

■ o5-01: Log Start/Stop Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-01 Log Start/Stop Selection V/f OLV 0

(1551) Sets the data log function. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 1)
RUN
Expert

0 : OFF
Stops the data log.
1 : ON
Starts the data log as specified by the sampling cycle set in o5-02 [Log Sampling Interval].

■ o5-02: Log Sampling Interval

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-02 Log Sampling Interval V/f OLV 1000 ms

(1552) Sets the data log sampling cycle. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (100 - 60000 ms)
RUN
Expert

■ o5-03: Log Monitor Data 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-03 Log Monitor Data 1 V/f OLV 101

(1553) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Set the number of the U monitor to record the data log.
For example, to show U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set o5-03 = 101. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this
parameter to 000. You cannot set U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

■ o5-04: Log Monitor Data 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-04 Log Monitor Data 2 V/f OLV 102

(1554) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Set the U monitor number you will log.
For example, to show U1-02 [Output Frequency], set o5-04 = 102. When it is not necessary to set data log monitor, set this parameter to
000.

360 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

■ o5-05: Log Monitor Data 3

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-05 Log Monitor Data 3 V/f OLV 103

(1555) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Sets the number of the U monitor you will log.
For example, to show U1-03 [Output Current], set o5-05 = 103. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this parameter to
000. You cannot select U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

■ o5-06: Log Monitor Data 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-06 Log Monitor Data 4 V/f OLV 107

(1556) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Sets the number of the U monitor you will log.
For example, to show U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage], set o5-06 = 107. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this parameter to
000. You cannot select U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

■ o5-07: Log Monitor Data 5

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-07 Log Monitor Data 5 V/f OLV 108

(1557) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Sets the number of the U monitor you will log.
For example, to show U1-08 [Output Power], set o5-07 = 108. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this parameter to
000. You cannot select U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

■ o5-08: Log Monitor Data 6

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Setting Range)

o5-08 Log Monitor Data 6 V/f OLV 000

(1558) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Set the U monitor number you want to log.
For example, to display U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set o5-08 = 101. When it is not necessary to set a data log monitor, set this
parameter to 000. You cannot set U2 Monitors [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitors [Fault History].

■ o5-09: Log Monitor Data 7

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-09 Log Monitor Data 7 V/f OLV 000

(1559) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
Parameter Details

RUN
Expert

Note:
Set the U monitor number you will log.
For example, to show U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set o5-09 = 101. When it is not necessary to set data log monitor, set this
parameter to 000. 12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 361

12.9 o: Keypad-Related Settings

■ o5-10: Log Monitor Data 8

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-10 Log Monitor Data 8 V/f OLV 000

(155A) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Sets the number of the U monitor you will log.
For example, to show U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set o5-10 = 101. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this
parameter to 000. You cannot select U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

■ o5-11: Log Monitor Data 9

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-11 Log Monitor Data 9 V/f OLV 000

(155B) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Sets the number of the U monitor you will log.
For example, to show U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set o5-11 = 101. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this
parameter to 000. You cannot select U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

■ o5-12: Log Monitor Data 10

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

o5-12 Log Monitor Data 10 V/f OLV 000

(155C) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
Expert

Note:
Sets the number of the U monitor you will log.
For example, to show U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set o5-12 = 101. When it is not necessary to set data log monitors, set this
parameter to 000. You cannot select U2 monitor [Fault Trace] or U3 Monitor [Fault History].

362 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.10 S: Elevator Parameters

12.10 S: Elevator Parameters

S parameters describe various functions and faults needed to operate an elevator application:
• Braking Sequence
• Slip Compensation
• Optimal Adjustments at Start and Stop
• Rescue Operation
• Elevator-related Faults

◆ S1: Brake Sequence

The drive supports braking sequences using an analog input terminal to control torque compensation at start (H3-
xx = 14), and braking sequences that do not require an analog input to set the torque compensation level.

■ S1-01: Zero Speed Level at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0680) Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection when the drive is ramping to stop (b1-03 = (0.000 - 9.999%)
0). Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).

Parameter S1-01 sets the starting speed for DC Injection Braking at stop. Once the output speed falls below the
setting of S1-01, the amount of DC Injection Braking current set in S1-03 is injected into the motor for the time
set in parameter S1-05.

■ S1-02: DC Injection Current at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-02 DC Injection Current at V/f OLV 50%

(0681) Start Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage of the drive (0 - 75%)
rated current.

■ S1-03: DC Injection Current at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-03 DC Injection Current at V/f OLV 50%

(0682) Stop Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage of the drive (0 - 75%)
rated current. When using OLV Control, the DC injection current is determined by multiplying
S1-03 by S3-25 or S3-26.

■ S1-04: DC Injection Time at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-04 DC Injection Time at Start V/f OLV 0.40 s

(0683) Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. During this time, the drive (0.00 - 10.00 s)
allows motor flux to develop, which is essential for applying torque quickly once the brake is
released. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-04.

■ S1-05: DC Injection Time at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-05 DC Injection Time at Stop V/f OLV 0.60 s

(0684) Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. A setting of 0.00 disables (0.00 - 10.00 s)
S1-05.
Parameter Details

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 363

12.10 S: Elevator Parameters

■ S1-06: Brake Open Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-06 Brake Open Delay Time V/f OLV 0.20 s

(0685) Determines the time that must pass after an Up/Down command is entered before the output (0.00 - 10.00 s)
terminal set for "Brake control" (H2-xx = 50) is triggered. Adjusting this delay time can help
when there is not enough time to develop the appropriate amount of motor flux. Be sure to also
increase the time S1-04 when setting S1-06 to relatively long delay time.

■ S1-07: Brake Close Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time V/f OLV 0.10 s

(0686) Determines the time that must pass after zero speed is reached before the output terminal set for (0.00 - 10.00 s)
"Brake control" (H2-xx = 50) is released.

■ S1-10: Run Command Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-10 Run Command Delay Time V/f OLV 0.10 s

(0687) Determines the time that must pass after zero speed is reached before the output terminal set for (0.00 - 10.00 s)
"Brake control" (H2-xx = 50) is released.

■ S1-11: Output Reactor Open Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S1-11 Output Reactor Open Delay V/f OLV 0.10 s

(0688) Time Determines the time that must pass for an output terminal set for “Output contactor control” (H2- (0.00 - 10.00 s)
xx = 51) to be released after the drive has stopped and drive output has been shut off.

◆ S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators

The slip compensation function automatically adjusts the speed reference for leveling operation depending on the
load measured at constant speed. S2 parameters tune the slip compensation function to improve the landing
accuracy. Slip Compensation requires that the drive be set for V/f Control or Open Loop Vector Control.

■ S2-01: Motor Rated Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S2-01 Motor Rated Speed V/f OLV 1380 rpm

(068F) Sets the rated speed of the motor. (300 - 1800 rpm)

■ S2-02: Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S2-02 Slip Compensation Gain in V/f OLV 0.7

(0690) Motoring Mode Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and regenerative states to (0.0 - 5.0 rpm)
help improve the accuracy of leveling.

■ S2-03: Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S2-03 Slip Compensation Gain in V/f OLV 1.0

(0691) Regenerative Mode Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and regenerative states to (0.0 - 5.0)
help improve the accuracy of leveling.

364 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.10 S: Elevator Parameters

■ S2-05: Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S2-05 Slip Compensation Torque V/f OLV 1000 ms

(0693) Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation. (0 - 10000 ms)
Expert

■ S2-06: Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S2-06 Slip Compensation Torque V/f OLV 500 ms

(0694) Detection Filter Time Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation value (0 - 2000 ms)
Constant calculation.
Expert

◆ S4: Rescue Operation

Rescue Operation switches to a backup battery or some other UPS during a power outage.

■ S4-01: Light Load Direction Search Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S4-01 Light Load Direction V/f OLV 0

(06A6) Search Selection Enables and disables the Light Load Direction Search. (0, 1)

0 : Disabled
1 : Advanced

■ S4-05: Rescue Operation Torque Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S4-05 Rescue Operation Torque V/f OLV 100%

(06AA) Limit Sets a time limit for Light Load Direction Search. (0% - 300%)

■ S4-20: Light Load Search Override

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S4-20 Light Load Search Override V/f OLV 0

(06B1) Defines the source that determines the light load search direction. (0 - 1)

0 : Controller Direction
1 : Inverter Direction

◆ S6: Faults for Elevator Applications

■ S6-01: Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-01 Motor Contactor Response V/f OLV 0

(06B3) Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Determines when the drive should detect a motor contactor response error (SE1). SE1 is triggered (0 - 2)
Selection if there is no response from the motor contactor within the time set in S6-10 after the contactor
control output has been set.

0 : Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset

Parameter Details

1 : Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset

2 : No SE1 detection

12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 365

12.10 S: Elevator Parameters

■ S6-02: Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-02 Starting Current Error V/f OLV 200 ms

(06B4) (SE2) Detection Delay Sets a delay time for starting current error (SE2). SE2 is detected when the drive output current is (0.00 - [S1-04 - S1-06] ms)
Time below 25% after the Up/Down command has been entered and the brake release time and the time
set to S6-02 have both passed. The brake control command will not be issued (brake stays
applied).

■ S6-04: Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-04 Output Current Error (SE3) V/f OLV 200 ms

(06B6) Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time for detecting an output current fault (SE3). SE3 is detected when the drive (0 - 5000 ms)
output current drops below 25% after the brake has released.

■ S6-05: Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-05 Brake Response Error V/f OLV 500 ms

(06B7) (SE4) Detection Time Sets a delay time for detecting a brake response error (SE4). SE4 is detected when an output (0 - 10000 ms)
terminal set for “Brake release” (H2-xx = 50) and an input terminal set for “Brake feedback” (H1-
xx = 79) do match for the time set to S6- 05.

■ S6-15: Speed Reference Loss Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-15 Speed Reference Loss V/f OLV 0

(06BB) Detection Enables speed reference loss detection when D1-18 = 1 and H1-xx ≠ 53. (0, 1)

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

■ S6-16: Restart after Baseblock Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

S6-16 Restart after Baseblock V/f OLV 0

(06BC) Selection Allows the drive to restart the motor after returning to normal operation from Baseblock state (0, 1)
(H1-xx = 8/9) or from Safe Torque-Off state (Safe Disable inputs H1 and H2 enabled) while the
Up/Down command is still active.

366 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 12.11 T: Auto-Tuning

12.11 T: Auto-Tuning
Numbers identifying the T parameters are displayed when an LED keypad is used. The names of the parameters
are displayed on the LCD screen of the LCD keypad. Set the following.
• Induction Motor Auto-Tuning
• PM Motor Auto-Tuning
• ASR and Inertia Tuning

◆ T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning

T1 parameters set the Auto-Tuning input data for induction motor tuning.
Note:
• The base frequency of drive dedicated motors and special motors for use with vector control may be lower than the base frequency of
general-purpose motors, which is 50 Hz or 60 Hz. In such cases, this lower frequency is used as the value for E1-06 [Base Frequency]
and E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] after Auto-Tuning completes. If the maximum output frequency is too low and causes
problems, change the setting of E1-04 after Auto-Tuning completes.
• The following induction motor parameters are set automatically.
–E1-xx [V/f Pattern for Motor 1]
–E2-xx [Motor Parameters]

■ T1-01: Auto-Tuning Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-01 Tuning Mode Selection V/f OLV Determined by A1-02

(0701) Sets the type of Auto-Tuning. (Determined by A1-02)

0 : Rotational Auto-Tuning
Default setting if A1-02 = 2 [Open Loop Vector].
1 : Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
2 : Stationary Line-Line Resistance
Default setting if A1-02 = 0 [V/f Control].

■ T1-02: Motor Rated Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-02 Motor Rated Power V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0702) Uses the units set in o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection] to set the motor rated output power. (0.00 - 650.00 kW)

■ T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage V/f OLV 400 V Class: 400.0 V

(0703) Sets the rated voltage (V) of the motor. Enter the base speed voltage for constant output motors. (400 V Class: 0.0 - 511.0 V)

If you do Auto-Tuning on a drive-dedicated motor or a specialized motor for vector control, the voltage or
frequency can be lower than that of a general-purpose motor. Always compare the data from the nameplate or test
report with the Auto-Tuning results and check for differences. Enter the voltage necessary to operate the motor in
no-load conditions at rated speed for better control precision around rated speed. If the motor test report or the
motor nameplate is not available, enter approximately 90% of the motor rated voltage.
If the drive input power supply voltage is low, enter approximately 90% of the input voltage. When the input
power supply voltage is low, the current will increase. Make sure that the main power supply capacity is correct
and use a molded-case circuit breaker for the drive.
Parameter Details

■ T1-04: Motor Rated Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-04 Motor Rated Current V/f OLV Determined by o2-04

(0704) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. (10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)
12

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 367

12.11 T: Auto-Tuning

Set the motor rated current between 50% and 100% of the drive rated current for the best performance. Enter the
current at the motor base speed.

■ T1-05: Motor Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-05 Motor Base Frequency V/f OLV 50.0 Hz

(0705) Sets the base frequency (Hz) of the motor. (0.0 - 120.0 Hz)

When Auto-Tuning is carried out, the value of T1-05 is set to E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. If T1-05 < 40
Hz, E1-04 = 40 Hz. If you operate the drive at a speed that is higher than the base frequency, or if you operate in
the field weakening range, set E1-04 to the maximum output frequency after you complete Auto-Tuning.

■ T1-06: Number of Motor Poles

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-06 Number of Motor Poles V/f OLV 4

(0706) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 to 48)

■ T1-07: Motor Base Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-07 Motor Base Speed V/f OLV 1450 min-1 (r/min)

(0707) Sets the motor base speed for Auto-Tuning (min-1 (r/min)). (0 - 24000 min-1 (r/min))

■ T1-08: Motor no-load voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

T1-08 Motor no-load voltage V/f OLV 40% of motor nominal

(0708) Sets the no-lead voltage of the motor. current

368 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 bUS
Index C
Fault ............................................................... 172

Symbols Capacitor Maintenance Setting ..................................... 355

Carrier frequency ..................................................... 295
Numerics Derating ........................................................... 228
24 V power supply
Parameter ......................................................... 295
Power supply input terminals ................................... 58
CE
A Detection Selection .............................................. 323
AC reactor Detection time.................................................... 323
Wiring .............................................................. 70 Fault ............................................................... 172
Acceleration and deceleration times Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 323
Switching by external input .................................... 288 CF ...................................................................... 173
Switching by Motor 2 Selection commands ................. 288 Circulation Fan
Switching by output frequency ................................ 288 Replacement...................................................... 210
Acceleration time CoF ..................................................................... 173
Parameter ......................................................... 288 Connection Diagram .................................................. 42
Unit of measurement setting ................................... 290 Control circuit terminal block
Adjustment of control functionality................................ 107 Replacement...................................................... 215
AFR Control circuit terminals
Parameter ......................................................... 345 Configuration of terminal block ................................ 59
Alarm ............................................................ 168, 184 Terminal functions................................................ 57
Altitude Wire gauge......................................................... 59
Derating ........................................................... 229 Wiring .............................................................. 56
Environment....................................................... 27 Wiring procedure for terminal block ........................... 60
Ambient humidity ..................................................... 27 Control method
Ambient Temperature Setting ....................................... 27 Selection .......................................................... 281
Derating ........................................................... 228 Cooling Fan
Parameter ......................................................... 341 Activation Conditions Setting.................................. 341
Analog Output Estimated Lifespan .............................................. 208
Gain/Bias Adjustment........................................... 320 Off Delay Timer ................................................. 341
Monitor Parameter Selection................................... 320 Replacement...................................................... 210
Signal Level Selection .......................................... 320 Copy Function Error ........................................... 168, 195
Terminal AM Monitor Selection............................... 321 CPEr.................................................................... 195
Auto-Tuning...................................................... 89, 105 CPF00.................................................................. 173
Induction Motor Parameters.................................... 367 CPF01.................................................................. 173
Input Data.......................................................... 91 CPF02.................................................................. 173
Interruption ........................................................ 90 CPF03.................................................................. 174
Precautions .................................................. 89, 105 CPF06............................................................ 174–175
Types ............................................................... 89 CPF08.................................................................. 174
Auto-Tuning Error ............................................. 168, 192 CPF11 .................................................................. 174
B CPF14.................................................................. 174
Backup CPF16.................................................................. 174
Parameters (drive to keypad)................................... 102 CPF24.................................................................. 174
Backup function ...................................................... 353 CPF25.................................................................. 175
Base frequency CPF38.................................................................. 175
Parameter ......................................................... 299 CPyE ................................................................... 195
Base voltage Crimp ferrule........................................................... 59
Parameter ......................................................... 300 CrST.................................................................... 184
Basic operation CSEr.................................................................... 195
Get started ......................................................... 86 Cumulative Operation TimeSetting ................................ 355
bAT D
Fault ......................................................... 172, 176 DC reactor
Minor Fault ....................................................... 184 Wiring .............................................................. 70
bb ....................................................................... 184 dCE1 ................................................................... 175
bCE dCE2 ................................................................... 175
Fault ............................................................... 172 Deceleration time
Minor Fault ....................................................... 184 Parameter ......................................................... 288
boL Unit of measurement setting ................................... 290
Fault ............................................................... 172 Delete
Minor Fault ....................................................... 184 Delete Backed-up Parameters.................................. 104
Brake Sequence........................................................ 95 Derating
Braking resistor Altitude............................................................ 229
Wiring .............................................................. 65 Ambient Temperature Setting............................ 228, 341
Braking Resistor Carrier frequency ................................................ 228
Wiring .............................................................. 65 Enclosure Type................................................... 342

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 369

 External Cooling Fin ............................................ 342 Er-03 ................................................................... 193
Side-by-side ...................................................... 342 Er-04 ................................................................... 193
dFPS.................................................................... 195 Er-05 ................................................................... 193
Diagnosing and Resetting Faults ................................... 196 Er-08 ................................................................... 193
Disposal Er-09 ................................................................... 194
Drive......................................................... 221–222 Er-11 ................................................................... 194
Packing material ........................................... 221–222 Er-12 ................................................................... 194
Drive Er-13 ................................................................... 194
Control Circuit Terminal Block Replacement ............... 215 Er-15 ................................................................... 194
Disposal ..................................................... 221–222 Err ...................................................................... 176
Exterior Dimension Diagram (IP20) .......................... 230 Error Code List ....................................................... 169
Exterior Dimensions Diagram (IP20) ......................... 231 Exterior Dimension Diagram (IP20)
Initialization ...................................................... 281 Drive............................................................... 230
Initialize Parameters............................................. 281 Exterior Dimensions Diagram (IP20)
Inspection ......................................................... 206 Drive............................................................... 231
Long-Term Storage .............................................. 217 External 24 V power supply
Rating (Three-phase 200 V).................................... 224 Power supply input terminals ................................... 58
Rating (Three-phase 400 V).................................... 225 External Cooling Fin
Drive mode ............................................................. 82 Derating ........................................................... 342
Drive Mode Unit Monitor Select ................................... 348 F
Drive Model Selection ............................................... 351 Fan Operation Time Setting......................................... 355
Drive watt loss Fast Stop Time
with Built-in EMC Filter ........................................ 33 Parameter ......................................................... 290
without Built-in EMC Filter..................................... 32 Fault .............................................................. 168, 172
dv/dt Tune Factor..................................................... 344 Fault code
dv7...................................................................... 175 MEMOBUS/Modbus............................................ 160
Dwell function Fault Code List ....................................................... 169
Parameter ......................................................... 286 Fault Reset............................................................. 196
E Fault Restart
EF....................................................................... 184 Parameter ......................................................... 332
EF1 Fine tuning ............................................................ 107
Fault ............................................................... 175 Freq Ref Setting Method Select .................................... 351
Minor Fault ....................................................... 184 Frequency Agreement
EF2 Parameter ......................................................... 332
Fault ............................................................... 175 Front Cover
Minor Fault ....................................................... 184 Installation ......................................................... 34
EF3 Remove ............................................................ 34
Fault ............................................................... 176 G
Minor Fault ....................................................... 185 Getting set up .......................................................... 86
EF4 GF ...................................................................... 176
Fault ............................................................... 176 Protection Functions ............................................ 341
Minor Fault ....................................................... 185 Ground
EF5 Drive................................................................ 49
Fault ............................................................... 176 Ground Fault Detection
Minor Fault ....................................................... 185 Protection Functions ............................................ 341
EF6
Fault ............................................................... 176 H
Minor Fault ....................................................... 185 HCA.................................................................... 185
EF7 Alarm Settings ............................................. 343–344
Fault ............................................................... 176 Humidity
Minor Fault ....................................................... 185 Environment....................................................... 27
Elapsed Operating Time Selection ................................. 355 I
Electrolytic Capacitor iFEr..................................................................... 195
Estimated Lifespan .............................................. 208 IGBT Maintenance Setting.......................................... 356
Enclosure Type Induction Motor
Derating ........................................................... 342 Motor parameters ................................................ 300
End1.................................................................... 192 Input Phase Detection
End2.................................................................... 192 Protection Functions ............................................ 340
End3.................................................................... 192 Input Phase Loss Detection ......................................... 343
End4.................................................................... 192 Input Phase Loss Detection Time ............................ 340, 343
End5.................................................................... 192 Input Terminals ........................................................ 57
End6.................................................................... 192 Input voltage
End7.................................................................... 192 Parameter ......................................................... 299
Enter command ....................................................... 145 Inspection
EP24v .................................................................. 185 Drive............................................................... 206
Er-01 ................................................................... 192 Inspection Operation .................................................. 95
Er-02 ................................................................... 193 Installation

370 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

 Front cover ........................................................ 34 Middle Output Frequency Voltage
Front Cover ........................................................ 34 Parameter ......................................................... 300
Keypad ............................................................. 36 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2
Installation environment.............................................. 27 Parameter ......................................................... 300
J Minimum output frequency
Jerk characteristics Parameter ......................................................... 300
Parameter ......................................................... 291 Minimum Output Voltage
Parameter ......................................................... 300
K Minor Fault...................................................... 168, 184
Keypad Minor fault code
Installation ......................................................... 36 MEMOBUS/Modbus............................................ 162
Language selection .............................................. 280 Minor Fault Code List ............................................... 169
LED status ......................................................... 77 Modbus
Method of operation.............................................. 77 Broadcast Messages ............................................. 160
Remote Location.................................................. 37 Command data ................................................... 147
Remove ............................................................ 36 Communication error code ..................................... 162
Keypad Display....................................................... 347 Communication specifications ................................. 136
Keypad Display Selection........................................... 348 Enter command .................................................. 145
Keypad Operation .................................................... 350 Fault code ......................................................... 160
Keypad-related settings.............................................. 347 Loopback test .................................................... 142
kWh Monitor Initialization.......................................... 356 Minor fault code ................................................. 162
L Monitor data ...................................................... 149
L24v.................................................................... 186 Register reading.................................................. 141
Language selection ................................................... 280 Register writing .................................................. 142
LF....................................................................... 177 Self-diagnosis .................................................... 146
Protective function .............................................. 340 Wiring ............................................................. 136
LF2 ..................................................................... 177 Molded-case circuit breaker ......................................... 67
LoG..................................................................... 186 Monitors
LO/RE Key Function Selection .................................... 350 Display procedure ............................................... 101
LOCAL/REMOTE indicator......................................... 77 Motor
LT-1 .................................................................... 186 Wiring .............................................................. 45
LT-2 .................................................................... 186 Wiring distance ................................................... 49
LT-3 .................................................................... 186 Motor Overload
LT-4 .................................................................... 186 Electric Thermal Protection Operation Time ................ 329
Protection Functions ............................................ 327
M
Motor parameters..................................................... 300
Main circuit terminals
Motor Parameters..................................................... 299
Configuration of terminal block ................................ 46
Motor parameters (induction motors).............................. 300
Line voltage drop ................................................. 49
Leakage Inductance ............................................. 302
Wire gauge......................................................... 49
Line-to-Line Resistance ........................................ 301
Wiring .............................................................. 45
Motor Iron Loss.................................................. 302
Wiring procedure for terminal block ........................... 52
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1.................... 302
Maintenance Period .................................................. 354
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2.................... 302
Maximum Output Frequency
Motor rated power (kW) ........................................ 303
Parameter ......................................................... 299
No-load Current.................................................. 301
Maximum Output Voltage
Number of motor poles ......................................... 301
Parameter ......................................................... 299
Rated current ..................................................... 301
MCCB .................................................................. 67
Rated Slip ......................................................... 301
MEMOBUS
MotorDirect@PowUpWhenUsingKeypad........................ 352
Broadcast Messages ............................................. 160
Command data ................................................... 147 N
Communication error code ..................................... 162 Nameplate .............................................................. 20
Communication specifications ................................. 136 ndAT ................................................................... 195
Enter command .................................................. 145 Noise filter
Fault code ......................................................... 160 Wiring .............................................................. 72
Loopback test .................................................... 142 NumOfRunCommands Counter Initial ............................ 356
Minor fault code ................................................. 162 O
Monitor data ...................................................... 149 oC....................................................................... 177
Register reading.................................................. 141 Off-Delay Timer ...................................................... 285
Register writing .................................................. 142 oH
Self-diagnosis .................................................... 146 Alarm Settings ................................................... 339
Wiring ............................................................. 136 Fault ............................................................... 178
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Minor Fault ....................................................... 186
Parameter ......................................................... 322 oH1 ..................................................................... 178
Middle Output Frequency oH2 ..................................................................... 187
Parameter ......................................................... 299 Alarm Settings ................................................... 339
Middle Output Frequency 2 oL1 ..................................................................... 178
Parameter ......................................................... 300

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 371

oL2 ..................................................................... 179 oL2................................................................. 342
Protection Functions ............................................ 342 Output Current Overload ................................. 343–344
oL3 Output Phase Loss Detection Time ........................... 343
Fault ............................................................... 179 Overload .......................................................... 342
Minor Fault ....................................................... 187 PF .................................................................. 340
oL4 Software Current Limit Selection ............................. 342
Fault ............................................................... 180 Uv1 ................................................................ 329
Minor Fault ....................................................... 187 Protective function
On-Delay Timer ...................................................... 285 LF .................................................................. 340
Ope Select @Keypad is Disconnect ............................... 351 Output Phase Loss Detection .................................. 340
oPE01 .................................................................. 190 Pulse Train Input/Output
oPE02 .................................................................. 190 Parameter ......................................................... 326
oPE03 .................................................................. 190 R
oPE08 .................................................................. 190 Rating (Three-phase 200 V)
oPE10 .................................................................. 191 Drive............................................................... 224
oPr ...................................................................... 180 Rating (Three-phase 400 V)
Options................................................................. 233 Drive............................................................... 225
Output Phase Loss Detection rdEr ..................................................................... 195
Protective function .............................................. 340 Remove
Output Phase Loss Detection Time Front cover ........................................................ 34
Alarm Settings ................................................... 343 Front Cover ........................................................ 34
Output Terminals ...................................................... 58 Keypad ............................................................. 36
ov Rescue Operation...................................................... 96
Fault ............................................................... 180 RESET key ............................................................. 77
Minor Fault ....................................................... 187 Residual Current Monitor/Residual Current Device
ovEr .................................................................... 187 RCM/RCD......................................................... 67
Overtorque detection Wiring .............................................................. 67
Parameter ......................................................... 334 Restore
P Parameters (keypad to drive)................................... 103
Parameter rF ....................................................................... 181
Access Level Selection ......................................... 280 rH ....................................................................... 181
Automatic selection ............................................. 283 RJ-45 connector ....................................................... 77
Backup (drive to keypad) ....................................... 102 rr ........................................................................ 181
Changing setting values......................................... 102 RUN indicator ......................................................... 77
Checking modified parameters ................................ 101 RUN key................................................................ 77
Delete Backed-up Parameters.................................. 104 S
Restore (keypad to drive) ....................................... 103 SC ...................................................................... 181
Setup mode ....................................................... 101 SCF..................................................................... 181
User-set ........................................................... 283 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications ........................ 92
Verify (keypad and drive) ...................................... 103 Accel Ramp and Jerk Settings .................................. 94
Parameter Change .................................................... 352 Brake Sequence ................................................... 95
Parameter Setting Errors ...................................... 168, 190 Decel Ramp and Jerk Settings .................................. 94
Password Down Commands................................................. 92
Setting ............................................................. 282 Inspection Operation ............................................. 95
Verification ....................................................... 282 Multi-Function Terminal Setup ................................. 94
PC Rescue Operation ................................................. 96
Connection procedure ............................................ 64 Speed Reference Selection ...................................... 92
Peripheral Devices ................................................... 233 Speed Selection ................................................... 92
PF................................................................. 180, 187 Terminal Setup .................................................... 94
Protection Functions ............................................ 340 Up Commands .................................................... 92
PF dv/dt Level ........................................................ 344 Side-by-side
PF Min Current ....................................................... 344 Derating ........................................................... 342
Phase Order Selection ............................................... 285 Slip compensation
Power loss Parameter ......................................................... 292
with Built-in EMC Filter ........................................ 33 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set................................. 355
without Built-in EMC Filter..................................... 32 Software Current Limit Selection
Programming mode ................................................... 82 Protection Functions ............................................ 342
Protection Functions Speed Agreement
DC bus undervoltage ............................................ 329 Parameter ......................................................... 332
Drive Overheating ............................................... 339 Speed Detection
GF.................................................................. 341 Parameter ......................................................... 332
Ground Fault Detection ......................................... 341 Speed reference
HCA ......................................................... 343–344 LOCAL/REMOTE Run selection ............................. 296
Input Phase Detection ........................................... 340 Switching between LOCAL/REMOTE....................... 296
Motor Overload .................................................. 327 Stall Prevention function
oH.................................................................. 339 Parameter ......................................................... 330
oH2 ................................................................ 339

372 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

SToF.................................................................... 188 Minor Fault ....................................................... 188
STOP key............................................................... 77 UL4
STOP Key Function Selection...................................... 350 Fault ............................................................... 182
Stopping Method Selection ......................................... 284 Minor Fault ....................................................... 188
Surge protective device Undertorque detection
Connection......................................................... 71 Parameter ......................................................... 334
T Unit of measurement setting
Temperature Acceleration and deceleration times .......................... 290
Environment....................................................... 27 Up/Down command.................................................. 284
Terminal block USB port................................................................ 77
Configuration of control circuit terminal block .............. 59 Connecting a PC .................................................. 64
Configuration of main circuit terminal block ................. 46 User Monitor Select afterPowerUp ................................ 348
Control circuit terminal block functions....................... 57 User Parameter Default Value ...................................... 350
Terminal function selection User-Set Display Units Max Value ................................ 349
Terminal AM ...................................................... 62 User-SetDisplayUnits Dec Display ................................ 349
Test run Uv ................................................................ 188, 352
Fine tuning........................................................ 107 Uv1 ..................................................................... 182
Procedure .......................................................... 86 Detection level settings ......................................... 329
Thermal overload relay Uv2 ..................................................................... 182
Connection......................................................... 68 Uv3 ..................................................................... 183
Tightening torque V
Control circuit terminals ......................................... 59 vAEr.................................................................... 195
Main circuit terminals............................................ 49 Verify
TiM Parameters (keypad and drive)................................. 103
Fault ............................................................... 182 vFyE.................................................................... 195
Minor Fault ....................................................... 188 Vibration-resistant..................................................... 27
Timer function W
Parameter ......................................................... 285 WEEE.................................................................. 222
Torque Compensation Wire gauge
Parameter ......................................................... 293 Control circuit terminals ......................................... 59
Torque limit function Main circuit terminals............................................ 49
Parameter ......................................................... 337 Voltage drop ....................................................... 49
Troubleshooting Wiring................................................................... 67
Code Displayed .................................................. 169 AC reactor ......................................................... 70
No Code Displayed.............................................. 197 Braking Resistor .................................................. 65
Troubleshooting Without Fault Display ........................... 197 Checklist ........................................................... 73
Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected When Dynamic Control circuit terminal block................................... 60
Braking Is Enabled........................................ 200
Control circuit terminals ......................................... 56
Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting .............. 200
DC reactor ......................................................... 70
Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from
Main circuit terminal block ..................................... 52
Connected Machinery .................................... 200
Main circuit terminals............................................ 45
Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) Trips
During Run................................................. 200 MEMOBUS/Modbus............................................ 136
The Correct Auto-Tuning Mode Is Not Available........... 199 Motor ............................................................... 45
The Motor Does Not Rotate after You Enter a Run Noise filter ......................................................... 72
Command .................................................. 197 Thermal overload relay .......................................... 68
The Motor Is Too Hot ........................................... 198 Wiring distance
The Motor Rotates in Only One Direction ................... 198 Drive and motor................................................... 49
The Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/
Down Command .......................................... 198
The Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel/Decel Time Is
Too Long ................................................... 199
The Motor Will Not Restart after a Loss of Power.......... 201
The Output Frequency Is Lower Than the Frequency
Reference................................................... 201
The Parameter Settings Will Not Change .................... 197
The Starting Torque Is Not Sufficient......................... 201
There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables when
You Energize the Drive................................... 200
There Is Too Much Motor Oscillation and the Rotation Is
Irregular .................................................... 199
TrPC.................................................................... 188
Tuning.................................................................. 288
U
U2, U3 Initialization ................................................. 356
UL3
Fault ............................................................... 182

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 373

Revision History
Date of Publication Revision Number Section Revised Content

June 2020 - - First Edition

3 Revised connection diagrams

November 2022 1 5 Added “Safe Disable Input”

All Corrected entire documentation

6, 10, 11 Added “Network Communications” and related parameter information

August 2023 2 10, 11 Changed access level of some parameters

All Corrected entire documentation

374 YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual

YASKAWA SIEPYEULA5001C LA500 Technical Manual 375
LA500
Technical Manual

YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH YASKAWA Electric UK Ltd. YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.

Philipp-Reis-Str. 6, 65795 Hattersheim 1 Hunt Hill, Cumbernauld, Glasgow G68 2121, Norman Drive South, Waukegan,
am Main, Germany 9LF, United Kingdom IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: +49-6196-569-300 E-mail: [email protected] +1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292)
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected] www.yaskawa.com
www.yaskawa.eu.com www.yaskawa.co.uk

DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)

2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi,
Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: +81-930-25-2548
www.yaskawa.co.jp

In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the
manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules,
regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
Original Instructions
© 2023 YASKAWA Electric Corporation

SIEPYEULA5001
Revision: C <2>-0
March 2023
Published in Germany
*SIEPYEULA5001*